US20240035071A1 - Catalytic de-crosslinking of samples for in situ analysis - Google Patents
Catalytic de-crosslinking of samples for in situ analysis Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- US20240035071A1 US20240035071A1 US18/336,866 US202318336866A US2024035071A1 US 20240035071 A1 US20240035071 A1 US 20240035071A1 US 202318336866 A US202318336866 A US 202318336866A US 2024035071 A1 US2024035071 A1 US 2024035071A1
- Authority
- US
- United States
- Prior art keywords
- biological sample
- probe
- sample
- nucleic acid
- catalyst
- Prior art date
- Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
- Pending
Links
- 238000004132 cross linking Methods 0.000 title claims abstract description 99
- 230000003197 catalytic effect Effects 0.000 title abstract description 36
- 238000010249 in-situ analysis Methods 0.000 title abstract description 12
- 239000012472 biological sample Substances 0.000 claims abstract description 428
- 238000000034 method Methods 0.000 claims abstract description 207
- 239000000523 sample Substances 0.000 claims description 759
- 239000003054 catalyst Substances 0.000 claims description 199
- 239000012491 analyte Substances 0.000 claims description 175
- 239000003795 chemical substances by application Substances 0.000 claims description 160
- 238000002372 labelling Methods 0.000 claims description 128
- 108091034117 Oligonucleotide Proteins 0.000 claims description 102
- 102000004169 proteins and genes Human genes 0.000 claims description 87
- 108090000623 proteins and genes Proteins 0.000 claims description 84
- 230000027455 binding Effects 0.000 claims description 76
- 150000001875 compounds Chemical class 0.000 claims description 74
- 239000000758 substrate Substances 0.000 claims description 69
- 239000000872 buffer Substances 0.000 claims description 68
- WSFSSNUMVMOOMR-UHFFFAOYSA-N Formaldehyde Chemical compound O=C WSFSSNUMVMOOMR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 claims description 64
- 239000000725 suspension Substances 0.000 claims description 63
- 150000003839 salts Chemical class 0.000 claims description 59
- 239000012453 solvate Substances 0.000 claims description 54
- 238000011065 in-situ storage Methods 0.000 claims description 50
- 238000004458 analytical method Methods 0.000 claims description 48
- 102000035195 Peptidases Human genes 0.000 claims description 37
- 108091005804 Peptidases Proteins 0.000 claims description 37
- 238000003384 imaging method Methods 0.000 claims description 37
- DBMJMQXJHONAFJ-UHFFFAOYSA-M Sodium laurylsulphate Chemical compound [Na+].CCCCCCCCCCCCOS([O-])(=O)=O DBMJMQXJHONAFJ-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 claims description 31
- XSQUKJJJFZCRTK-UHFFFAOYSA-N Urea Chemical compound NC(N)=O XSQUKJJJFZCRTK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 claims description 31
- 230000003287 optical effect Effects 0.000 claims description 28
- 239000003431 cross linking reagent Substances 0.000 claims description 25
- 235000019833 protease Nutrition 0.000 claims description 25
- 239000012634 fragment Substances 0.000 claims description 20
- 238000000386 microscopy Methods 0.000 claims description 20
- 125000004169 (C1-C6) alkyl group Chemical group 0.000 claims description 16
- 239000004202 carbamide Substances 0.000 claims description 16
- 125000003178 carboxy group Chemical group [H]OC(*)=O 0.000 claims description 11
- 125000000171 (C1-C6) haloalkyl group Chemical group 0.000 claims description 8
- 230000003834 intracellular effect Effects 0.000 claims description 7
- 125000004191 (C1-C6) alkoxy group Chemical group 0.000 claims description 4
- 229910052739 hydrogen Inorganic materials 0.000 claims description 4
- 239000012528 membrane Substances 0.000 claims description 4
- 125000000449 nitro group Chemical group [O-][N+](*)=O 0.000 claims description 4
- 108050001049 Extracellular proteins Proteins 0.000 claims description 2
- 125000002485 formyl group Chemical class [H]C(*)=O 0.000 claims 1
- 239000000203 mixture Substances 0.000 abstract description 26
- 150000007523 nucleic acids Chemical class 0.000 description 214
- 102000039446 nucleic acids Human genes 0.000 description 190
- 108020004707 nucleic acids Proteins 0.000 description 190
- 210000001519 tissue Anatomy 0.000 description 132
- 238000009396 hybridization Methods 0.000 description 124
- 238000003199 nucleic acid amplification method Methods 0.000 description 112
- 230000003321 amplification Effects 0.000 description 111
- 210000004027 cell Anatomy 0.000 description 89
- 239000000243 solution Substances 0.000 description 86
- 238000001514 detection method Methods 0.000 description 82
- 229920002477 rna polymer Polymers 0.000 description 80
- 108020004414 DNA Proteins 0.000 description 78
- 102000053602 DNA Human genes 0.000 description 77
- LFQSCWFLJHTTHZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N Ethanol Chemical compound CCO LFQSCWFLJHTTHZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 76
- 108020004711 Nucleic Acid Probes Proteins 0.000 description 69
- 239000002853 nucleic acid probe Substances 0.000 description 69
- 238000006243 chemical reaction Methods 0.000 description 64
- 125000003729 nucleotide group Chemical group 0.000 description 64
- 239000003153 chemical reaction reagent Substances 0.000 description 62
- 239000000017 hydrogel Substances 0.000 description 56
- 239000002773 nucleotide Substances 0.000 description 54
- -1 —N(C1-3 alkyl)2 Chemical group 0.000 description 54
- 238000012163 sequencing technique Methods 0.000 description 53
- 239000000178 monomer Substances 0.000 description 48
- 239000013615 primer Substances 0.000 description 44
- JLCPHMBAVCMARE-UHFFFAOYSA-N [3-[[3-[[3-[[3-[[3-[[3-[[3-[[3-[[3-[[3-[[3-[[5-(2-amino-6-oxo-1H-purin-9-yl)-3-[[3-[[3-[[3-[[3-[[3-[[5-(2-amino-6-oxo-1H-purin-9-yl)-3-[[5-(2-amino-6-oxo-1H-purin-9-yl)-3-hydroxyoxolan-2-yl]methoxy-hydroxyphosphoryl]oxyoxolan-2-yl]methoxy-hydroxyphosphoryl]oxy-5-(5-methyl-2,4-dioxopyrimidin-1-yl)oxolan-2-yl]methoxy-hydroxyphosphoryl]oxy-5-(6-aminopurin-9-yl)oxolan-2-yl]methoxy-hydroxyphosphoryl]oxy-5-(6-aminopurin-9-yl)oxolan-2-yl]methoxy-hydroxyphosphoryl]oxy-5-(6-aminopurin-9-yl)oxolan-2-yl]methoxy-hydroxyphosphoryl]oxy-5-(6-aminopurin-9-yl)oxolan-2-yl]methoxy-hydroxyphosphoryl]oxyoxolan-2-yl]methoxy-hydroxyphosphoryl]oxy-5-(5-methyl-2,4-dioxopyrimidin-1-yl)oxolan-2-yl]methoxy-hydroxyphosphoryl]oxy-5-(4-amino-2-oxopyrimidin-1-yl)oxolan-2-yl]methoxy-hydroxyphosphoryl]oxy-5-(5-methyl-2,4-dioxopyrimidin-1-yl)oxolan-2-yl]methoxy-hydroxyphosphoryl]oxy-5-(5-methyl-2,4-dioxopyrimidin-1-yl)oxolan-2-yl]methoxy-hydroxyphosphoryl]oxy-5-(6-aminopurin-9-yl)oxolan-2-yl]methoxy-hydroxyphosphoryl]oxy-5-(6-aminopurin-9-yl)oxolan-2-yl]methoxy-hydroxyphosphoryl]oxy-5-(4-amino-2-oxopyrimidin-1-yl)oxolan-2-yl]methoxy-hydroxyphosphoryl]oxy-5-(4-amino-2-oxopyrimidin-1-yl)oxolan-2-yl]methoxy-hydroxyphosphoryl]oxy-5-(4-amino-2-oxopyrimidin-1-yl)oxolan-2-yl]methoxy-hydroxyphosphoryl]oxy-5-(6-aminopurin-9-yl)oxolan-2-yl]methoxy-hydroxyphosphoryl]oxy-5-(4-amino-2-oxopyrimidin-1-yl)oxolan-2-yl]methyl [5-(6-aminopurin-9-yl)-2-(hydroxymethyl)oxolan-3-yl] hydrogen phosphate Polymers Cc1cn(C2CC(OP(O)(=O)OCC3OC(CC3OP(O)(=O)OCC3OC(CC3O)n3cnc4c3nc(N)[nH]c4=O)n3cnc4c3nc(N)[nH]c4=O)C(COP(O)(=O)OC3CC(OC3COP(O)(=O)OC3CC(OC3COP(O)(=O)OC3CC(OC3COP(O)(=O)OC3CC(OC3COP(O)(=O)OC3CC(OC3COP(O)(=O)OC3CC(OC3COP(O)(=O)OC3CC(OC3COP(O)(=O)OC3CC(OC3COP(O)(=O)OC3CC(OC3COP(O)(=O)OC3CC(OC3COP(O)(=O)OC3CC(OC3COP(O)(=O)OC3CC(OC3COP(O)(=O)OC3CC(OC3COP(O)(=O)OC3CC(OC3COP(O)(=O)OC3CC(OC3COP(O)(=O)OC3CC(OC3COP(O)(=O)OC3CC(OC3CO)n3cnc4c(N)ncnc34)n3ccc(N)nc3=O)n3cnc4c(N)ncnc34)n3ccc(N)nc3=O)n3ccc(N)nc3=O)n3ccc(N)nc3=O)n3cnc4c(N)ncnc34)n3cnc4c(N)ncnc34)n3cc(C)c(=O)[nH]c3=O)n3cc(C)c(=O)[nH]c3=O)n3ccc(N)nc3=O)n3cc(C)c(=O)[nH]c3=O)n3cnc4c3nc(N)[nH]c4=O)n3cnc4c(N)ncnc34)n3cnc4c(N)ncnc34)n3cnc4c(N)ncnc34)n3cnc4c(N)ncnc34)O2)c(=O)[nH]c1=O JLCPHMBAVCMARE-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 39
- 102000040430 polynucleotide Human genes 0.000 description 39
- 108091033319 polynucleotide Proteins 0.000 description 39
- 239000002157 polynucleotide Substances 0.000 description 39
- 230000000295 complement effect Effects 0.000 description 38
- 230000008823 permeabilization Effects 0.000 description 37
- 102000004190 Enzymes Human genes 0.000 description 35
- 108090000790 Enzymes Proteins 0.000 description 35
- 229940088598 enzyme Drugs 0.000 description 35
- 229920000642 polymer Polymers 0.000 description 32
- 239000011159 matrix material Substances 0.000 description 29
- 238000005096 rolling process Methods 0.000 description 27
- 102000003960 Ligases Human genes 0.000 description 26
- 108090000364 Ligases Proteins 0.000 description 26
- 239000002953 phosphate buffered saline Substances 0.000 description 25
- 238000003556 assay Methods 0.000 description 24
- LOKCTEFSRHRXRJ-UHFFFAOYSA-I dipotassium trisodium dihydrogen phosphate hydrogen phosphate dichloride Chemical compound P(=O)(O)(O)[O-].[K+].P(=O)(O)([O-])[O-].[Na+].[Na+].[Cl-].[K+].[Cl-].[Na+] LOKCTEFSRHRXRJ-UHFFFAOYSA-I 0.000 description 24
- 108010067770 Endopeptidase K Proteins 0.000 description 23
- 239000003599 detergent Substances 0.000 description 23
- 108020004999 messenger RNA Proteins 0.000 description 23
- 241000894007 species Species 0.000 description 23
- 238000010186 staining Methods 0.000 description 23
- IAZDPXIOMUYVGZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N Dimethylsulphoxide Chemical compound CS(C)=O IAZDPXIOMUYVGZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 22
- 239000000427 antigen Substances 0.000 description 20
- 108091007433 antigens Proteins 0.000 description 20
- 102000036639 antigens Human genes 0.000 description 20
- 230000001413 cellular effect Effects 0.000 description 20
- 239000000975 dye Substances 0.000 description 20
- YBJHBAHKTGYVGT-ZKWXMUAHSA-N (+)-Biotin Chemical compound N1C(=O)N[C@@H]2[C@H](CCCCC(=O)O)SC[C@@H]21 YBJHBAHKTGYVGT-ZKWXMUAHSA-N 0.000 description 18
- CSCPPACGZOOCGX-UHFFFAOYSA-N Acetone Chemical compound CC(C)=O CSCPPACGZOOCGX-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 18
- 150000007854 aminals Chemical class 0.000 description 18
- 230000015572 biosynthetic process Effects 0.000 description 17
- 239000000126 substance Substances 0.000 description 17
- 230000000694 effects Effects 0.000 description 16
- 108090000765 processed proteins & peptides Proteins 0.000 description 16
- 150000001299 aldehydes Chemical class 0.000 description 15
- 239000003999 initiator Substances 0.000 description 15
- 239000012099 Alexa Fluor family Substances 0.000 description 14
- 108010061982 DNA Ligases Proteins 0.000 description 14
- 102000012410 DNA Ligases Human genes 0.000 description 14
- 239000002299 complementary DNA Substances 0.000 description 14
- 238000005406 washing Methods 0.000 description 14
- DYZIMJAPIPLAJG-UHFFFAOYSA-N NC1=C(C=NC=C1)P(O)(O)=O Chemical compound NC1=C(C=NC=C1)P(O)(O)=O DYZIMJAPIPLAJG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 13
- 102000004196 processed proteins & peptides Human genes 0.000 description 13
- 102000016928 DNA-directed DNA polymerase Human genes 0.000 description 12
- 101710163270 Nuclease Proteins 0.000 description 12
- 229930040373 Paraformaldehyde Natural products 0.000 description 12
- 239000004365 Protease Substances 0.000 description 12
- 208000037065 Subacute sclerosing leukoencephalitis Diseases 0.000 description 12
- 206010042297 Subacute sclerosing panencephalitis Diseases 0.000 description 12
- 150000001412 amines Chemical class 0.000 description 12
- 238000003776 cleavage reaction Methods 0.000 description 12
- 239000000543 intermediate Substances 0.000 description 12
- 239000000463 material Substances 0.000 description 12
- 229920002866 paraformaldehyde Polymers 0.000 description 12
- PYWVYCXTNDRMGF-UHFFFAOYSA-N rhodamine B Chemical compound [Cl-].C=12C=CC(=[N+](CC)CC)C=C2OC2=CC(N(CC)CC)=CC=C2C=1C1=CC=CC=C1C(O)=O PYWVYCXTNDRMGF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 12
- 230000007017 scission Effects 0.000 description 12
- LENZDBCJOHFCAS-UHFFFAOYSA-N tris Chemical compound OCC(N)(CO)CO LENZDBCJOHFCAS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 12
- 125000006273 (C1-C3) alkyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 11
- JKMHFZQWWAIEOD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-[4-(2-hydroxyethyl)piperazin-1-yl]ethanesulfonic acid Chemical compound OCC[NH+]1CCN(CCS([O-])(=O)=O)CC1 JKMHFZQWWAIEOD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 11
- 108091093088 Amplicon Proteins 0.000 description 11
- 108010014303 DNA-directed DNA polymerase Proteins 0.000 description 11
- 239000007983 Tris buffer Substances 0.000 description 11
- 239000011616 biotin Substances 0.000 description 11
- 229960002685 biotin Drugs 0.000 description 11
- 230000009089 cytolysis Effects 0.000 description 11
- 238000002509 fluorescent in situ hybridization Methods 0.000 description 11
- 238000007901 in situ hybridization Methods 0.000 description 11
- 230000004048 modification Effects 0.000 description 11
- 238000012986 modification Methods 0.000 description 11
- 238000012545 processing Methods 0.000 description 11
- 108020004418 ribosomal RNA Proteins 0.000 description 11
- 108091005957 yellow fluorescent proteins Proteins 0.000 description 11
- ZHNUHDYFZUAESO-UHFFFAOYSA-N Formamide Chemical compound NC=O ZHNUHDYFZUAESO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 10
- 108091028043 Nucleic acid sequence Proteins 0.000 description 10
- 230000002255 enzymatic effect Effects 0.000 description 10
- 125000001072 heteroaryl group Chemical group 0.000 description 10
- 229910052757 nitrogen Inorganic materials 0.000 description 10
- 229920001184 polypeptide Polymers 0.000 description 10
- 230000008569 process Effects 0.000 description 10
- 125000006413 ring segment Chemical group 0.000 description 10
- XLYOFNOQVPJJNP-UHFFFAOYSA-N water Substances O XLYOFNOQVPJJNP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 10
- VLEIUWBSEKKKFX-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-amino-2-(hydroxymethyl)propane-1,3-diol;2-[2-[bis(carboxymethyl)amino]ethyl-(carboxymethyl)amino]acetic acid Chemical group OCC(N)(CO)CO.OC(=O)CN(CC(O)=O)CCN(CC(O)=O)CC(O)=O VLEIUWBSEKKKFX-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 9
- 108010052285 Membrane Proteins Proteins 0.000 description 9
- OKKJLVBELUTLKV-UHFFFAOYSA-N Methanol Chemical compound OC OKKJLVBELUTLKV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 9
- 206010028980 Neoplasm Diseases 0.000 description 9
- 238000001574 biopsy Methods 0.000 description 9
- 235000020958 biotin Nutrition 0.000 description 9
- 230000001419 dependent effect Effects 0.000 description 9
- 238000005516 engineering process Methods 0.000 description 9
- 230000006870 function Effects 0.000 description 9
- 239000000499 gel Substances 0.000 description 9
- KRKNYBCHXYNGOX-UHFFFAOYSA-K Citrate Chemical compound [O-]C(=O)CC(O)(CC([O-])=O)C([O-])=O KRKNYBCHXYNGOX-UHFFFAOYSA-K 0.000 description 8
- 108010043121 Green Fluorescent Proteins Proteins 0.000 description 8
- 102000004144 Green Fluorescent Proteins Human genes 0.000 description 8
- CTQNGGLPUBDAKN-UHFFFAOYSA-N O-Xylene Chemical compound CC1=CC=CC=C1C CTQNGGLPUBDAKN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 8
- FAPWRFPIFSIZLT-UHFFFAOYSA-M Sodium chloride Chemical compound [Na+].[Cl-] FAPWRFPIFSIZLT-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 8
- ROOXNKNUYICQNP-UHFFFAOYSA-N ammonium persulfate Chemical compound [NH4+].[NH4+].[O-]S(=O)(=O)OOS([O-])(=O)=O ROOXNKNUYICQNP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 8
- 108091005948 blue fluorescent proteins Proteins 0.000 description 8
- 230000000875 corresponding effect Effects 0.000 description 8
- GNBHRKFJIUUOQI-UHFFFAOYSA-N fluorescein Chemical compound O1C(=O)C2=CC=CC=C2C21C1=CC=C(O)C=C1OC1=CC(O)=CC=C21 GNBHRKFJIUUOQI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 8
- 238000002866 fluorescence resonance energy transfer Methods 0.000 description 8
- 239000005090 green fluorescent protein Substances 0.000 description 8
- 238000010438 heat treatment Methods 0.000 description 8
- 125000005647 linker group Chemical group 0.000 description 8
- 150000002632 lipids Chemical class 0.000 description 8
- 238000013508 migration Methods 0.000 description 8
- 230000005012 migration Effects 0.000 description 8
- 238000006116 polymerization reaction Methods 0.000 description 8
- 235000019419 proteases Nutrition 0.000 description 8
- 238000007841 sequencing by ligation Methods 0.000 description 8
- 239000008096 xylene Substances 0.000 description 8
- 206010006187 Breast cancer Diseases 0.000 description 7
- 208000026310 Breast neoplasm Diseases 0.000 description 7
- OYPRJOBELJOOCE-UHFFFAOYSA-N Calcium Chemical compound [Ca] OYPRJOBELJOOCE-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 7
- 102100031780 Endonuclease Human genes 0.000 description 7
- 108091005461 Nucleic proteins Proteins 0.000 description 7
- 239000011575 calcium Substances 0.000 description 7
- 229910052791 calcium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 7
- 150000001720 carbohydrates Chemical class 0.000 description 7
- 235000014633 carbohydrates Nutrition 0.000 description 7
- 238000001035 drying Methods 0.000 description 7
- 238000010348 incorporation Methods 0.000 description 7
- 238000011160 research Methods 0.000 description 7
- 102000040650 (ribonucleotides)n+m Human genes 0.000 description 6
- 108091032973 (ribonucleotides)n+m Proteins 0.000 description 6
- 125000003349 3-pyridyl group Chemical group N1=C([H])C([*])=C([H])C([H])=C1[H] 0.000 description 6
- 125000000339 4-pyridyl group Chemical group N1=C([H])C([H])=C([*])C([H])=C1[H] 0.000 description 6
- 239000007995 HEPES buffer Substances 0.000 description 6
- WZUVPPKBWHMQCE-UHFFFAOYSA-N Haematoxylin Chemical compound C12=CC(O)=C(O)C=C2CC2(O)C1C1=CC=C(O)C(O)=C1OC2 WZUVPPKBWHMQCE-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 6
- 102000018697 Membrane Proteins Human genes 0.000 description 6
- 108020004682 Single-Stranded DNA Proteins 0.000 description 6
- 239000002738 chelating agent Substances 0.000 description 6
- 239000007979 citrate buffer Substances 0.000 description 6
- 201000010099 disease Diseases 0.000 description 6
- 208000037265 diseases, disorders, signs and symptoms Diseases 0.000 description 6
- 238000011049 filling Methods 0.000 description 6
- 230000014509 gene expression Effects 0.000 description 6
- 238000005286 illumination Methods 0.000 description 6
- 229920002521 macromolecule Polymers 0.000 description 6
- 125000002496 methyl group Chemical group [H]C([H])([H])* 0.000 description 6
- 238000007899 nucleic acid hybridization Methods 0.000 description 6
- 210000003463 organelle Anatomy 0.000 description 6
- 238000002360 preparation method Methods 0.000 description 6
- 108010054624 red fluorescent protein Proteins 0.000 description 6
- 230000010076 replication Effects 0.000 description 6
- 239000004055 small Interfering RNA Substances 0.000 description 6
- 238000003786 synthesis reaction Methods 0.000 description 6
- 230000008685 targeting Effects 0.000 description 6
- MPLHNVLQVRSVEE-UHFFFAOYSA-N texas red Chemical compound [O-]S(=O)(=O)C1=CC(S(Cl)(=O)=O)=CC=C1C(C1=CC=2CCCN3CCCC(C=23)=C1O1)=C2C1=C(CCC1)C3=[N+]1CCCC3=C2 MPLHNVLQVRSVEE-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 6
- BMYBKYQDGKGCSU-UHFFFAOYSA-N (2-aminophenyl)phosphonic acid Chemical compound NC1=CC=CC=C1P(O)(O)=O BMYBKYQDGKGCSU-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 5
- UFBJCMHMOXMLKC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2,4-dinitrophenol Chemical compound OC1=CC=C([N+]([O-])=O)C=C1[N+]([O-])=O UFBJCMHMOXMLKC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 5
- SXGZJKUKBWWHRA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-(N-morpholiniumyl)ethanesulfonate Chemical compound [O-]S(=O)(=O)CC[NH+]1CCOCC1 SXGZJKUKBWWHRA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 5
- NBUUUJWWOARGNW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-amino-5-methylbenzoic acid Chemical compound CC1=CC=C(N)C(C(O)=O)=C1 NBUUUJWWOARGNW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 5
- 108091028732 Concatemer Proteins 0.000 description 5
- 102000004163 DNA-directed RNA polymerases Human genes 0.000 description 5
- 108090000626 DNA-directed RNA polymerases Proteins 0.000 description 5
- 108010042407 Endonucleases Proteins 0.000 description 5
- 102000057297 Pepsin A Human genes 0.000 description 5
- 108090000284 Pepsin A Proteins 0.000 description 5
- ABLZXFCXXLZCGV-UHFFFAOYSA-N Phosphorous acid Chemical compound OP(O)=O ABLZXFCXXLZCGV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 5
- 108091008874 T cell receptors Proteins 0.000 description 5
- 102000016266 T-Cell Antigen Receptors Human genes 0.000 description 5
- 239000007984 Tris EDTA buffer Substances 0.000 description 5
- 125000000217 alkyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 5
- 238000004873 anchoring Methods 0.000 description 5
- 239000011324 bead Substances 0.000 description 5
- 239000007853 buffer solution Substances 0.000 description 5
- 229940125904 compound 1 Drugs 0.000 description 5
- 125000001295 dansyl group Chemical group [H]C1=C([H])C(N(C([H])([H])[H])C([H])([H])[H])=C2C([H])=C([H])C([H])=C(C2=C1[H])S(*)(=O)=O 0.000 description 5
- 229960001484 edetic acid Drugs 0.000 description 5
- 108010048367 enhanced green fluorescent protein Proteins 0.000 description 5
- YQGOJNYOYNNSMM-UHFFFAOYSA-N eosin Chemical compound [Na+].OC(=O)C1=CC=CC=C1C1=C2C=C(Br)C(=O)C(Br)=C2OC2=C(Br)C(O)=C(Br)C=C21 YQGOJNYOYNNSMM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 5
- 239000007850 fluorescent dye Substances 0.000 description 5
- 238000006703 hydration reaction Methods 0.000 description 5
- 230000001900 immune effect Effects 0.000 description 5
- 230000000670 limiting effect Effects 0.000 description 5
- 229910052751 metal Inorganic materials 0.000 description 5
- 239000002184 metal Substances 0.000 description 5
- 239000011807 nanoball Substances 0.000 description 5
- 238000004651 near-field scanning optical microscopy Methods 0.000 description 5
- 108091027963 non-coding RNA Proteins 0.000 description 5
- 102000042567 non-coding RNA Human genes 0.000 description 5
- 210000004940 nucleus Anatomy 0.000 description 5
- 229940111202 pepsin Drugs 0.000 description 5
- 238000004321 preservation Methods 0.000 description 5
- XJMOSONTPMZWPB-UHFFFAOYSA-M propidium iodide Chemical compound [I-].[I-].C12=CC(N)=CC=C2C2=CC=C(N)C=C2[N+](CCC[N+](C)(CC)CC)=C1C1=CC=CC=C1 XJMOSONTPMZWPB-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 5
- 238000010384 proximity ligation assay Methods 0.000 description 5
- 238000010839 reverse transcription Methods 0.000 description 5
- CZWUESRDTYLNDE-UHFFFAOYSA-N (2z)-2-[(2e,4e,6e)-7-[1-(5-carboxypentyl)-3,3-dimethyl-5-sulfoindol-1-ium-2-yl]hepta-2,4,6-trienylidene]-1-ethyl-3,3-dimethylindole-5-sulfonate Chemical compound CC1(C)C2=CC(S([O-])(=O)=O)=CC=C2N(CC)\C1=C/C=C/C=C/C=C/C1=[N+](CCCCCC(O)=O)C2=CC=C(S(O)(=O)=O)C=C2C1(C)C CZWUESRDTYLNDE-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- VGIRNWJSIRVFRT-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2',7'-difluorofluorescein Chemical compound OC(=O)C1=CC=CC=C1C1=C2C=C(F)C(=O)C=C2OC2=CC(O)=C(F)C=C21 VGIRNWJSIRVFRT-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- HSHNITRMYYLLCV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 4-methylumbelliferone Chemical compound C1=C(O)C=CC2=C1OC(=O)C=C2C HSHNITRMYYLLCV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- NJYVEMPWNAYQQN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 5-carboxyfluorescein Chemical compound C12=CC=C(O)C=C2OC2=CC(O)=CC=C2C21OC(=O)C1=CC(C(=O)O)=CC=C21 NJYVEMPWNAYQQN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- YMZMTOFQCVHHFB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 5-carboxytetramethylrhodamine Chemical compound C=12C=CC(N(C)C)=CC2=[O+]C2=CC(N(C)C)=CC=C2C=1C1=CC=C(C(O)=O)C=C1C([O-])=O YMZMTOFQCVHHFB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- YXHLJMWYDTXDHS-IRFLANFNSA-N 7-aminoactinomycin D Chemical compound C[C@H]1OC(=O)[C@H](C(C)C)N(C)C(=O)CN(C)C(=O)[C@@H]2CCCN2C(=O)[C@@H](C(C)C)NC(=O)[C@H]1NC(=O)C1=C(N)C(=O)C(C)=C2OC(C(C)=C(N)C=C3C(=O)N[C@@H]4C(=O)N[C@@H](C(N5CCC[C@H]5C(=O)N(C)CC(=O)N(C)[C@@H](C(C)C)C(=O)O[C@@H]4C)=O)C(C)C)=C3N=C21 YXHLJMWYDTXDHS-IRFLANFNSA-N 0.000 description 4
- 108700012813 7-aminoactinomycin D Proteins 0.000 description 4
- 241000894006 Bacteria Species 0.000 description 4
- 108091003079 Bovine Serum Albumin Proteins 0.000 description 4
- 229940126062 Compound A Drugs 0.000 description 4
- SHIBSTMRCDJXLN-UHFFFAOYSA-N Digoxigenin Natural products C1CC(C2C(C3(C)CCC(O)CC3CC2)CC2O)(O)C2(C)C1C1=CC(=O)OC1 SHIBSTMRCDJXLN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- 108090000652 Flap endonucleases Proteins 0.000 description 4
- 102000004150 Flap endonucleases Human genes 0.000 description 4
- 239000012981 Hank's balanced salt solution Substances 0.000 description 4
- 108010001336 Horseradish Peroxidase Proteins 0.000 description 4
- 108700011259 MicroRNAs Proteins 0.000 description 4
- KWYHDKDOAIKMQN-UHFFFAOYSA-N N,N,N',N'-tetramethylethylenediamine Chemical compound CN(C)CCN(C)C KWYHDKDOAIKMQN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- 108010004729 Phycoerythrin Proteins 0.000 description 4
- 101710086015 RNA ligase Proteins 0.000 description 4
- 108020004566 Transfer RNA Proteins 0.000 description 4
- 238000007171 acid catalysis Methods 0.000 description 4
- 125000003545 alkoxy group Chemical group 0.000 description 4
- 125000004414 alkyl thio group Chemical group 0.000 description 4
- 108010004469 allophycocyanin Proteins 0.000 description 4
- 229910001870 ammonium persulfate Inorganic materials 0.000 description 4
- 230000001580 bacterial effect Effects 0.000 description 4
- DZBUGLKDJFMEHC-UHFFFAOYSA-N benzoquinolinylidene Natural products C1=CC=CC2=CC3=CC=CC=C3N=C21 DZBUGLKDJFMEHC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- 229940098773 bovine serum albumin Drugs 0.000 description 4
- 238000009833 condensation Methods 0.000 description 4
- 230000005494 condensation Effects 0.000 description 4
- 210000004748 cultured cell Anatomy 0.000 description 4
- 108010082025 cyan fluorescent protein Proteins 0.000 description 4
- 238000013461 design Methods 0.000 description 4
- QONQRTHLHBTMGP-UHFFFAOYSA-N digitoxigenin Natural products CC12CCC(C3(CCC(O)CC3CC3)C)C3C11OC1CC2C1=CC(=O)OC1 QONQRTHLHBTMGP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- SHIBSTMRCDJXLN-KCZCNTNESA-N digoxigenin Chemical compound C1([C@@H]2[C@@]3([C@@](CC2)(O)[C@H]2[C@@H]([C@@]4(C)CC[C@H](O)C[C@H]4CC2)C[C@H]3O)C)=CC(=O)OC1 SHIBSTMRCDJXLN-KCZCNTNESA-N 0.000 description 4
- 150000002148 esters Chemical class 0.000 description 4
- 230000005284 excitation Effects 0.000 description 4
- 239000000834 fixative Substances 0.000 description 4
- 238000000799 fluorescence microscopy Methods 0.000 description 4
- 125000000524 functional group Chemical group 0.000 description 4
- 125000005842 heteroatom Chemical group 0.000 description 4
- 238000003364 immunohistochemistry Methods 0.000 description 4
- 239000002679 microRNA Substances 0.000 description 4
- 239000003068 molecular probe Substances 0.000 description 4
- 125000004433 nitrogen atom Chemical group N* 0.000 description 4
- 210000000633 nuclear envelope Anatomy 0.000 description 4
- 239000003960 organic solvent Substances 0.000 description 4
- 229910052760 oxygen Inorganic materials 0.000 description 4
- 229920001223 polyethylene glycol Polymers 0.000 description 4
- 239000002861 polymer material Substances 0.000 description 4
- 229920000136 polysorbate Polymers 0.000 description 4
- 239000002243 precursor Substances 0.000 description 4
- 238000011002 quantification Methods 0.000 description 4
- 230000002285 radioactive effect Effects 0.000 description 4
- 230000002441 reversible effect Effects 0.000 description 4
- 108700004121 sarkosyl Proteins 0.000 description 4
- 239000011780 sodium chloride Substances 0.000 description 4
- 239000001488 sodium phosphate Substances 0.000 description 4
- 229910000162 sodium phosphate Inorganic materials 0.000 description 4
- 230000009870 specific binding Effects 0.000 description 4
- 229910052717 sulfur Inorganic materials 0.000 description 4
- ABZLKHKQJHEPAX-UHFFFAOYSA-N tetramethylrhodamine Chemical compound C=12C=CC(N(C)C)=CC2=[O+]C2=CC(N(C)C)=CC=C2C=1C1=CC=CC=C1C([O-])=O ABZLKHKQJHEPAX-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- 238000013518 transcription Methods 0.000 description 4
- 230000035897 transcription Effects 0.000 description 4
- 238000012546 transfer Methods 0.000 description 4
- RYFMWSXOAZQYPI-UHFFFAOYSA-K trisodium phosphate Chemical compound [Na+].[Na+].[Na+].[O-]P([O-])([O-])=O RYFMWSXOAZQYPI-UHFFFAOYSA-K 0.000 description 4
- BZTDTCNHAFUJOG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 6-carboxyfluorescein Chemical compound C12=CC=C(O)C=C2OC2=CC(O)=CC=C2C11OC(=O)C2=CC=C(C(=O)O)C=C21 BZTDTCNHAFUJOG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- CJIJXIFQYOPWTF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 7-hydroxycoumarin Natural products O1C(=O)C=CC2=CC(O)=CC=C21 CJIJXIFQYOPWTF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 101150104383 ALOX5AP gene Proteins 0.000 description 3
- HRPVXLWXLXDGHG-UHFFFAOYSA-N Acrylamide Chemical group NC(=O)C=C HRPVXLWXLXDGHG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 102000002260 Alkaline Phosphatase Human genes 0.000 description 3
- 108020004774 Alkaline Phosphatase Proteins 0.000 description 3
- 108091008875 B cell receptors Proteins 0.000 description 3
- 125000006519 CCH3 Chemical group 0.000 description 3
- 102000029816 Collagenase Human genes 0.000 description 3
- 108060005980 Collagenase Proteins 0.000 description 3
- KCXVZYZYPLLWCC-UHFFFAOYSA-N EDTA Chemical group OC(=O)CN(CC(O)=O)CCN(CC(O)=O)CC(O)=O KCXVZYZYPLLWCC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 241000196324 Embryophyta Species 0.000 description 3
- 108010037362 Extracellular Matrix Proteins Proteins 0.000 description 3
- 102000010834 Extracellular Matrix Proteins Human genes 0.000 description 3
- 102000003886 Glycoproteins Human genes 0.000 description 3
- 108090000288 Glycoproteins Proteins 0.000 description 3
- NLDMNSXOCDLTTB-UHFFFAOYSA-N Heterophylliin A Natural products O1C2COC(=O)C3=CC(O)=C(O)C(O)=C3C3=C(O)C(O)=C(O)C=C3C(=O)OC2C(OC(=O)C=2C=C(O)C(O)=C(O)C=2)C(O)C1OC(=O)C1=CC(O)=C(O)C(O)=C1 NLDMNSXOCDLTTB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 101100236114 Mus musculus Lrrfip1 gene Proteins 0.000 description 3
- 102000007999 Nuclear Proteins Human genes 0.000 description 3
- 102000003992 Peroxidases Human genes 0.000 description 3
- 108091007412 Piwi-interacting RNA Proteins 0.000 description 3
- 108010092799 RNA-directed DNA polymerase Proteins 0.000 description 3
- 108091028664 Ribonucleotide Proteins 0.000 description 3
- 102000039471 Small Nuclear RNA Human genes 0.000 description 3
- 108020003224 Small Nucleolar RNA Proteins 0.000 description 3
- 102000042773 Small Nucleolar RNA Human genes 0.000 description 3
- 108020004459 Small interfering RNA Proteins 0.000 description 3
- 108010090804 Streptavidin Proteins 0.000 description 3
- 108020005202 Viral DNA Proteins 0.000 description 3
- 241000700605 Viruses Species 0.000 description 3
- 230000002378 acidificating effect Effects 0.000 description 3
- DPKHZNPWBDQZCN-UHFFFAOYSA-N acridine orange free base Chemical compound C1=CC(N(C)C)=CC2=NC3=CC(N(C)C)=CC=C3C=C21 DPKHZNPWBDQZCN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 150000001408 amides Chemical class 0.000 description 3
- 125000003277 amino group Chemical group 0.000 description 3
- 239000011230 binding agent Substances 0.000 description 3
- 238000005842 biochemical reaction Methods 0.000 description 3
- 239000000090 biomarker Substances 0.000 description 3
- 230000006287 biotinylation Effects 0.000 description 3
- 238000007413 biotinylation Methods 0.000 description 3
- 210000004369 blood Anatomy 0.000 description 3
- 239000008280 blood Substances 0.000 description 3
- 201000011510 cancer Diseases 0.000 description 3
- 230000015556 catabolic process Effects 0.000 description 3
- 239000006285 cell suspension Substances 0.000 description 3
- 239000011248 coating agent Substances 0.000 description 3
- 238000000576 coating method Methods 0.000 description 3
- 229960002424 collagenase Drugs 0.000 description 3
- 238000004624 confocal microscopy Methods 0.000 description 3
- 230000008878 coupling Effects 0.000 description 3
- 238000010168 coupling process Methods 0.000 description 3
- 238000005859 coupling reaction Methods 0.000 description 3
- 230000000593 degrading effect Effects 0.000 description 3
- GFZPJHFJZGRWMQ-UHFFFAOYSA-M diOC18(3) dye Chemical compound [O-]Cl(=O)(=O)=O.O1C2=CC=CC=C2[N+](CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC)=C1C=CC=C1N(CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC)C2=CC=CC=C2O1 GFZPJHFJZGRWMQ-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 3
- 230000029087 digestion Effects 0.000 description 3
- 238000009826 distribution Methods 0.000 description 3
- 238000001493 electron microscopy Methods 0.000 description 3
- 108010021843 fluorescent protein 583 Proteins 0.000 description 3
- 238000007306 functionalization reaction Methods 0.000 description 3
- 150000002374 hemiaminals Chemical class 0.000 description 3
- 238000011534 incubation Methods 0.000 description 3
- 150000002500 ions Chemical class 0.000 description 3
- 239000003446 ligand Substances 0.000 description 3
- HWYHZTIRURJOHG-UHFFFAOYSA-N luminol Chemical compound O=C1NNC(=O)C2=C1C(N)=CC=C2 HWYHZTIRURJOHG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 210000004072 lung Anatomy 0.000 description 3
- 238000002844 melting Methods 0.000 description 3
- 230000008018 melting Effects 0.000 description 3
- 229910021645 metal ion Inorganic materials 0.000 description 3
- 125000000956 methoxy group Chemical group [H]C([H])([H])O* 0.000 description 3
- 210000003470 mitochondria Anatomy 0.000 description 3
- 239000012188 paraffin wax Substances 0.000 description 3
- 239000002245 particle Substances 0.000 description 3
- 239000008191 permeabilizing agent Substances 0.000 description 3
- 150000003904 phospholipids Chemical class 0.000 description 3
- 230000026731 phosphorylation Effects 0.000 description 3
- 238000006366 phosphorylation reaction Methods 0.000 description 3
- 238000004647 photon scanning tunneling microscopy Methods 0.000 description 3
- 230000000704 physical effect Effects 0.000 description 3
- 229920002635 polyurethane Polymers 0.000 description 3
- 239000004814 polyurethane Substances 0.000 description 3
- 230000004481 post-translational protein modification Effects 0.000 description 3
- 238000002331 protein detection Methods 0.000 description 3
- 102000005962 receptors Human genes 0.000 description 3
- 108020003175 receptors Proteins 0.000 description 3
- 239000011347 resin Substances 0.000 description 3
- 229920005989 resin Polymers 0.000 description 3
- 239000002336 ribonucleotide Substances 0.000 description 3
- 125000002652 ribonucleotide group Chemical group 0.000 description 3
- 238000004583 scanning Hall probe microscopy Methods 0.000 description 3
- 238000004645 scanning capacitance microscopy Methods 0.000 description 3
- 238000001115 scanning electrochemical microscopy Methods 0.000 description 3
- 238000004658 scanning gate microscopy Methods 0.000 description 3
- 238000004582 scanning ion conductance microscopy Methods 0.000 description 3
- 238000004570 scanning spreading resistance microscopy Methods 0.000 description 3
- 238000000542 scanning thermal microscopy Methods 0.000 description 3
- 238000004578 scanning tunneling potentiometry Methods 0.000 description 3
- 238000004579 scanning voltage microscopy Methods 0.000 description 3
- 230000035945 sensitivity Effects 0.000 description 3
- 150000003384 small molecules Chemical class 0.000 description 3
- 108091029842 small nuclear ribonucleic acid Proteins 0.000 description 3
- 125000006850 spacer group Chemical group 0.000 description 3
- 238000004569 spin polarized scanning tunneling microscopy Methods 0.000 description 3
- 238000002560 therapeutic procedure Methods 0.000 description 3
- ORHBXUUXSCNDEV-UHFFFAOYSA-N umbelliferone Chemical compound C1=CC(=O)OC2=CC(O)=CC=C21 ORHBXUUXSCNDEV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- HFTAFOQKODTIJY-UHFFFAOYSA-N umbelliferone Natural products Cc1cc2C=CC(=O)Oc2cc1OCC=CC(C)(C)O HFTAFOQKODTIJY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- WZUVPPKBWHMQCE-XJKSGUPXSA-N (+)-haematoxylin Chemical compound C12=CC(O)=C(O)C=C2C[C@]2(O)[C@H]1C1=CC=C(O)C(O)=C1OC2 WZUVPPKBWHMQCE-XJKSGUPXSA-N 0.000 description 2
- KIUKXJAPPMFGSW-DNGZLQJQSA-N (2S,3S,4S,5R,6R)-6-[(2S,3R,4R,5S,6R)-3-Acetamido-2-[(2S,3S,4R,5R,6R)-6-[(2R,3R,4R,5S,6R)-3-acetamido-2,5-dihydroxy-6-(hydroxymethyl)oxan-4-yl]oxy-2-carboxy-4,5-dihydroxyoxan-3-yl]oxy-5-hydroxy-6-(hydroxymethyl)oxan-4-yl]oxy-3,4,5-trihydroxyoxane-2-carboxylic acid Chemical compound CC(=O)N[C@H]1[C@H](O)O[C@H](CO)[C@@H](O)[C@@H]1O[C@H]1[C@H](O)[C@@H](O)[C@H](O[C@H]2[C@@H]([C@@H](O[C@H]3[C@@H]([C@@H](O)[C@H](O)[C@H](O3)C(O)=O)O)[C@H](O)[C@@H](CO)O2)NC(C)=O)[C@@H](C(O)=O)O1 KIUKXJAPPMFGSW-DNGZLQJQSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 125000004767 (C1-C4) haloalkoxy group Chemical group 0.000 description 2
- 125000000229 (C1-C4)alkoxy group Chemical group 0.000 description 2
- ATXASKQIXAJYLM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1-hydroxypyrrolidine-2,5-dione;prop-2-enoic acid Chemical group OC(=O)C=C.ON1C(=O)CCC1=O ATXASKQIXAJYLM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- DVLFYONBTKHTER-UHFFFAOYSA-N 3-(N-morpholino)propanesulfonic acid Chemical compound OS(=O)(=O)CCCN1CCOCC1 DVLFYONBTKHTER-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- UMCMPZBLKLEWAF-BCTGSCMUSA-N 3-[(3-cholamidopropyl)dimethylammonio]propane-1-sulfonate Chemical compound C([C@H]1C[C@H]2O)[C@H](O)CC[C@]1(C)[C@@H]1[C@@H]2[C@@H]2CC[C@H]([C@@H](CCC(=O)NCCC[N+](C)(C)CCCS([O-])(=O)=O)C)[C@@]2(C)[C@@H](O)C1 UMCMPZBLKLEWAF-BCTGSCMUSA-N 0.000 description 2
- HVCOBJNICQPDBP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 3-[3-[3,5-dihydroxy-6-methyl-4-(3,4,5-trihydroxy-6-methyloxan-2-yl)oxyoxan-2-yl]oxydecanoyloxy]decanoic acid;hydrate Chemical compound O.OC1C(OC(CC(=O)OC(CCCCCCC)CC(O)=O)CCCCCCC)OC(C)C(O)C1OC1C(O)C(O)C(O)C(C)O1 HVCOBJNICQPDBP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- FWBHETKCLVMNFS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 4',6-Diamino-2-phenylindol Chemical compound C1=CC(C(=N)N)=CC=C1C1=CC2=CC=C(C(N)=N)C=C2N1 FWBHETKCLVMNFS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- YPGZWUVVEWKKDQ-UHFFFAOYSA-M 4-(4-dihexadecylaminostyryl)-N-methylpyridium iodide Chemical compound [I-].C1=CC(N(CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC)CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC)=CC=C1C=CC1=CC=[N+](C)C=C1 YPGZWUVVEWKKDQ-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 2
- BGWLYQZDNFIFRX-UHFFFAOYSA-N 5-[3-[2-[3-(3,8-diamino-6-phenylphenanthridin-5-ium-5-yl)propylamino]ethylamino]propyl]-6-phenylphenanthridin-5-ium-3,8-diamine;dichloride Chemical compound [Cl-].[Cl-].C=1C(N)=CC=C(C2=CC=C(N)C=C2[N+]=2CCCNCCNCCC[N+]=3C4=CC(N)=CC=C4C4=CC=C(N)C=C4C=3C=3C=CC=CC=3)C=1C=2C1=CC=CC=C1 BGWLYQZDNFIFRX-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- BUJRUSRXHJKUQE-UHFFFAOYSA-N 5-carboxy-X-rhodamine triethylammonium salt Chemical compound CC[NH+](CC)CC.[O-]C(=O)C1=CC(C(=O)[O-])=CC=C1C1=C(C=C2C3=C4CCCN3CCC2)C4=[O+]C2=C1C=C1CCCN3CCCC2=C13 BUJRUSRXHJKUQE-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- VWOLRKMFAJUZGM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 6-carboxyrhodamine 6G Chemical compound [Cl-].C=12C=C(C)C(NCC)=CC2=[O+]C=2C=C(NCC)C(C)=CC=2C=1C1=CC(C(O)=O)=CC=C1C(=O)OCC VWOLRKMFAJUZGM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- FHVDTGUDJYJELY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 6-{[2-carboxy-4,5-dihydroxy-6-(phosphanyloxy)oxan-3-yl]oxy}-4,5-dihydroxy-3-phosphanyloxane-2-carboxylic acid Chemical compound O1C(C(O)=O)C(P)C(O)C(O)C1OC1C(C(O)=O)OC(OP)C(O)C1O FHVDTGUDJYJELY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- KDCGOANMDULRCW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 7H-purine Chemical compound N1=CNC2=NC=NC2=C1 KDCGOANMDULRCW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- LRFVTYWOQMYALW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 9H-xanthine Chemical compound O=C1NC(=O)NC2=C1NC=N2 LRFVTYWOQMYALW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 108700028369 Alleles Proteins 0.000 description 2
- PAYRUJLWNCNPSJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N Aniline Chemical compound NC1=CC=CC=C1 PAYRUJLWNCNPSJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 108090001008 Avidin Proteins 0.000 description 2
- 108091032955 Bacterial small RNA Proteins 0.000 description 2
- 208000003174 Brain Neoplasms Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 125000001313 C5-C10 heteroaryl group Chemical group 0.000 description 2
- 125000000041 C6-C10 aryl group Chemical group 0.000 description 2
- OKTJSMMVPCPJKN-UHFFFAOYSA-N Carbon Chemical compound [C] OKTJSMMVPCPJKN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 102000014914 Carrier Proteins Human genes 0.000 description 2
- 108010078791 Carrier Proteins Proteins 0.000 description 2
- 108010019670 Chimeric Antigen Receptors Proteins 0.000 description 2
- 102000010970 Connexin Human genes 0.000 description 2
- 108050001175 Connexin Proteins 0.000 description 2
- 108091005943 CyPet Proteins 0.000 description 2
- 108010017826 DNA Polymerase I Proteins 0.000 description 2
- 102000004594 DNA Polymerase I Human genes 0.000 description 2
- 108020001019 DNA Primers Proteins 0.000 description 2
- 230000004544 DNA amplification Effects 0.000 description 2
- 239000003155 DNA primer Substances 0.000 description 2
- 230000006820 DNA synthesis Effects 0.000 description 2
- XPDXVDYUQZHFPV-UHFFFAOYSA-N Dansyl Chloride Chemical compound C1=CC=C2C(N(C)C)=CC=CC2=C1S(Cl)(=O)=O XPDXVDYUQZHFPV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 102000005593 Endopeptidases Human genes 0.000 description 2
- 108010059378 Endopeptidases Proteins 0.000 description 2
- LYCAIKOWRPUZTN-UHFFFAOYSA-N Ethylene glycol Chemical compound OCCO LYCAIKOWRPUZTN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 108060002716 Exonuclease Proteins 0.000 description 2
- 108091007413 Extracellular RNA Proteins 0.000 description 2
- 108090000331 Firefly luciferases Proteins 0.000 description 2
- OZLGRUXZXMRXGP-UHFFFAOYSA-N Fluo-3 Chemical compound CC1=CC=C(N(CC(O)=O)CC(O)=O)C(OCCOC=2C(=CC=C(C=2)C2=C3C=C(Cl)C(=O)C=C3OC3=CC(O)=C(Cl)C=C32)N(CC(O)=O)CC(O)=O)=C1 OZLGRUXZXMRXGP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 241000233866 Fungi Species 0.000 description 2
- 239000004366 Glucose oxidase Substances 0.000 description 2
- 108010015776 Glucose oxidase Proteins 0.000 description 2
- DHMQDGOQFOQNFH-UHFFFAOYSA-N Glycine Chemical compound NCC(O)=O DHMQDGOQFOQNFH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 229930186217 Glycolipid Natural products 0.000 description 2
- VEXZGXHMUGYJMC-UHFFFAOYSA-N Hydrochloric acid Chemical compound Cl VEXZGXHMUGYJMC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- MHAJPDPJQMAIIY-UHFFFAOYSA-N Hydrogen peroxide Chemical compound OO MHAJPDPJQMAIIY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- FGBAVQUHSKYMTC-UHFFFAOYSA-M LDS 751 dye Chemical compound [O-]Cl(=O)(=O)=O.C1=CC2=CC(N(C)C)=CC=C2[N+](CC)=C1C=CC=CC1=CC=C(N(C)C)C=C1 FGBAVQUHSKYMTC-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 2
- 108060001084 Luciferase Proteins 0.000 description 2
- 239000005089 Luciferase Substances 0.000 description 2
- 206010058467 Lung neoplasm malignant Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 108700018351 Major Histocompatibility Complex Proteins 0.000 description 2
- 108020005196 Mitochondrial DNA Proteins 0.000 description 2
- OKIZCWYLBDKLSU-UHFFFAOYSA-M N,N,N-Trimethylmethanaminium chloride Chemical compound [Cl-].C[N+](C)(C)C OKIZCWYLBDKLSU-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 2
- ACFIXJIJDZMPPO-NNYOXOHSSA-N NADPH Chemical compound C1=CCC(C(=O)N)=CN1[C@H]1[C@H](O)[C@H](O)[C@@H](COP(O)(=O)OP(O)(=O)OC[C@@H]2[C@H]([C@@H](OP(O)(O)=O)[C@@H](O2)N2C3=NC=NC(N)=C3N=C2)O)O1 ACFIXJIJDZMPPO-NNYOXOHSSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 108010089610 Nuclear Proteins Proteins 0.000 description 2
- 108700020962 Peroxidase Proteins 0.000 description 2
- 108010010677 Phosphodiesterase I Proteins 0.000 description 2
- 102000000823 Polynucleotide Ligases Human genes 0.000 description 2
- 108010001797 Polynucleotide Ligases Proteins 0.000 description 2
- 102000029797 Prion Human genes 0.000 description 2
- 108091000054 Prion Proteins 0.000 description 2
- 239000013616 RNA primer Substances 0.000 description 2
- 230000006819 RNA synthesis Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000003559 RNA-seq method Methods 0.000 description 2
- 108010052090 Renilla Luciferases Proteins 0.000 description 2
- 108091007415 Small Cajal body-specific RNA Proteins 0.000 description 2
- 229920002125 Sokalan® Polymers 0.000 description 2
- 108010006785 Taq Polymerase Proteins 0.000 description 2
- 241000589499 Thermus thermophilus Species 0.000 description 2
- MZZINWWGSYUHGU-UHFFFAOYSA-J ToTo-1 Chemical compound [I-].[I-].[I-].[I-].C12=CC=CC=C2C(C=C2N(C3=CC=CC=C3S2)C)=CC=[N+]1CCC[N+](C)(C)CCC[N+](C)(C)CCC[N+](C1=CC=CC=C11)=CC=C1C=C1N(C)C2=CC=CC=C2S1 MZZINWWGSYUHGU-UHFFFAOYSA-J 0.000 description 2
- 108010046334 Urease Proteins 0.000 description 2
- 108020000999 Viral RNA Proteins 0.000 description 2
- 241000726445 Viroids Species 0.000 description 2
- GRRMZXFOOGQMFA-UHFFFAOYSA-J YoYo-1 Chemical compound [I-].[I-].[I-].[I-].C12=CC=CC=C2C(C=C2N(C3=CC=CC=C3O2)C)=CC=[N+]1CCC[N+](C)(C)CCC[N+](C)(C)CCC[N+](C1=CC=CC=C11)=CC=C1C=C1N(C)C2=CC=CC=C2O1 GRRMZXFOOGQMFA-UHFFFAOYSA-J 0.000 description 2
- 238000010521 absorption reaction Methods 0.000 description 2
- 108020002494 acetyltransferase Proteins 0.000 description 2
- 102000005421 acetyltransferase Human genes 0.000 description 2
- 239000002253 acid Substances 0.000 description 2
- 239000003377 acid catalyst Substances 0.000 description 2
- 230000003213 activating effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 210000002867 adherens junction Anatomy 0.000 description 2
- 238000001261 affinity purification Methods 0.000 description 2
- 229940072056 alginate Drugs 0.000 description 2
- 229920000615 alginic acid Polymers 0.000 description 2
- 235000010443 alginic acid Nutrition 0.000 description 2
- 125000003282 alkyl amino group Chemical group 0.000 description 2
- 229940024606 amino acid Drugs 0.000 description 2
- 125000004104 aryloxy group Chemical group 0.000 description 2
- 238000004630 atomic force microscopy Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000004676 ballistic electron emission microscopy Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000008901 benefit Effects 0.000 description 2
- VJGNLOIQCWLBJR-UHFFFAOYSA-M benzyl(tributyl)azanium;chloride Chemical compound [Cl-].CCCC[N+](CCCC)(CCCC)CC1=CC=CC=C1 VJGNLOIQCWLBJR-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 2
- HTZCNXWZYVXIMZ-UHFFFAOYSA-M benzyl(triethyl)azanium;chloride Chemical compound [Cl-].CC[N+](CC)(CC)CC1=CC=CC=C1 HTZCNXWZYVXIMZ-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 2
- 102000005936 beta-Galactosidase Human genes 0.000 description 2
- 108010005774 beta-Galactosidase Proteins 0.000 description 2
- 229910052799 carbon Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- CZPLANDPABRVHX-UHFFFAOYSA-N cascade blue Chemical compound C=1C2=CC=CC=C2C(NCC)=CC=1C(C=1C=CC(=CC=1)N(CC)CC)=C1C=CC(=[N+](CC)CC)C=C1 CZPLANDPABRVHX-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 210000000170 cell membrane Anatomy 0.000 description 2
- 108091092356 cellular DNA Proteins 0.000 description 2
- 230000003196 chaotropic effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000004666 chemical force microscopy Methods 0.000 description 2
- 125000003636 chemical group Chemical group 0.000 description 2
- HVYWMOMLDIMFJA-DPAQBDIFSA-N cholesterol Chemical compound C1C=C2C[C@@H](O)CC[C@]2(C)[C@@H]2[C@@H]1[C@@H]1CC[C@H]([C@H](C)CCCC(C)C)[C@@]1(C)CC2 HVYWMOMLDIMFJA-DPAQBDIFSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 238000004587 chromatography analysis Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000001124 conductive atomic force microscopy Methods 0.000 description 2
- 239000000470 constituent Substances 0.000 description 2
- 238000007796 conventional method Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000012937 correction Methods 0.000 description 2
- 125000004093 cyano group Chemical group *C#N 0.000 description 2
- 230000002380 cytological effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000008021 deposition Effects 0.000 description 2
- 229960000633 dextran sulfate Drugs 0.000 description 2
- JLIOTPLALDYAEH-UHFFFAOYSA-M diIC18(7) dye Chemical compound [I-].CC1(C)C2=CC=CC=C2N(CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC)C1=CC=CC=CC=CC1=[N+](CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC)C2=CC=CC=C2C1(C)C JLIOTPLALDYAEH-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 2
- 125000004663 dialkyl amino group Chemical group 0.000 description 2
- 230000004069 differentiation Effects 0.000 description 2
- JVXZRNYCRFIEGV-UHFFFAOYSA-M dilC18(3) dye Chemical compound [O-]Cl(=O)(=O)=O.CC1(C)C2=CC=CC=C2N(CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC)C1=CC=CC1=[N+](CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC)C2=CC=CC=C2C1(C)C JVXZRNYCRFIEGV-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 2
- 238000004667 electrostatic force microscopy Methods 0.000 description 2
- 239000002532 enzyme inhibitor Substances 0.000 description 2
- ZMMJGEGLRURXTF-UHFFFAOYSA-N ethidium bromide Chemical compound [Br-].C12=CC(N)=CC=C2C2=CC=C(N)C=C2[N+](CC)=C1C1=CC=CC=C1 ZMMJGEGLRURXTF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 229960005542 ethidium bromide Drugs 0.000 description 2
- 230000001747 exhibiting effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 102000013165 exonuclease Human genes 0.000 description 2
- 238000010195 expression analysis Methods 0.000 description 2
- 210000002744 extracellular matrix Anatomy 0.000 description 2
- 238000004662 feature-oriented scanning probe microscopy Methods 0.000 description 2
- MHMNJMPURVTYEJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N fluorescein-5-isothiocyanate Chemical compound O1C(=O)C2=CC(N=C=S)=CC=C2C21C1=CC=C(O)C=C1OC1=CC(O)=CC=C21 MHMNJMPURVTYEJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 238000001917 fluorescence detection Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000004680 force modulation microscopy Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000008014 freezing Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000007710 freezing Methods 0.000 description 2
- YFHXZQPUBCBNIP-UHFFFAOYSA-N fura-2 Chemical compound CC1=CC=C(N(CC(O)=O)CC(O)=O)C(OCCOC=2C(=CC=3OC(=CC=3C=2)C=2OC(=CN=2)C(O)=O)N(CC(O)=O)CC(O)=O)=C1 YFHXZQPUBCBNIP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 210000003976 gap junction Anatomy 0.000 description 2
- 108700004892 gelatin methacryloyl Proteins 0.000 description 2
- 230000002068 genetic effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 239000011521 glass Substances 0.000 description 2
- 229940116332 glucose oxidase Drugs 0.000 description 2
- 235000019420 glucose oxidase Nutrition 0.000 description 2
- LEQAOMBKQFMDFZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N glyoxal Chemical compound O=CC=O LEQAOMBKQFMDFZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 229910052737 gold Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- 239000010931 gold Substances 0.000 description 2
- 230000012010 growth Effects 0.000 description 2
- 125000001475 halogen functional group Chemical group 0.000 description 2
- 238000007490 hematoxylin and eosin (H&E) staining Methods 0.000 description 2
- 229920002674 hyaluronan Polymers 0.000 description 2
- 229960003160 hyaluronic acid Drugs 0.000 description 2
- 229910052588 hydroxylapatite Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- 230000002055 immunohistochemical effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000000415 inactivating effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- PNDZEEPOYCVIIY-UHFFFAOYSA-N indo-1 Chemical compound CC1=CC=C(N(CC(O)=O)CC(O)=O)C(OCCOC=2C(=CC=C(C=2)C=2N=C3[CH]C(=CC=C3C=2)C(O)=O)N(CC(O)=O)CC(O)=O)=C1 PNDZEEPOYCVIIY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 238000003780 insertion Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000037431 insertion Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000003993 interaction Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000008611 intercellular interaction Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000009545 invasion Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000002427 irreversible effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000011901 isothermal amplification Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000004654 kelvin probe force microscopy Methods 0.000 description 2
- 201000005202 lung cancer Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 208000020816 lung neoplasm Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 210000001165 lymph node Anatomy 0.000 description 2
- 238000002465 magnetic force microscopy Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000004652 magnetic resonance force microscopy Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000013507 mapping Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000000873 masking effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000007246 mechanism Effects 0.000 description 2
- 239000002609 medium Substances 0.000 description 2
- 201000001441 melanoma Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 150000002739 metals Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- VNWKTOKETHGBQD-UHFFFAOYSA-N methane Chemical compound C VNWKTOKETHGBQD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- WSFSSNUMVMOOMR-NJFSPNSNSA-N methanone Chemical compound O=[14CH2] WSFSSNUMVMOOMR-NJFSPNSNSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 229920000609 methyl cellulose Polymers 0.000 description 2
- 230000011987 methylation Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000007069 methylation reaction Methods 0.000 description 2
- 239000001923 methylcellulose Substances 0.000 description 2
- 244000005700 microbiome Species 0.000 description 2
- 230000000877 morphologic effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 229930027945 nicotinamide-adenine dinucleotide Natural products 0.000 description 2
- VOFUROIFQGPCGE-UHFFFAOYSA-N nile red Chemical compound C1=CC=C2C3=NC4=CC=C(N(CC)CC)C=C4OC3=CC(=O)C2=C1 VOFUROIFQGPCGE-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 238000003415 nucleophilic catalysis Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000005457 optimization Methods 0.000 description 2
- VYNDHICBIRRPFP-UHFFFAOYSA-N pacific blue Chemical compound FC1=C(O)C(F)=C2OC(=O)C(C(=O)O)=CC2=C1 VYNDHICBIRRPFP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- XYJRXVWERLGGKC-UHFFFAOYSA-D pentacalcium;hydroxide;triphosphate Chemical compound [OH-].[Ca+2].[Ca+2].[Ca+2].[Ca+2].[Ca+2].[O-]P([O-])([O-])=O.[O-]P([O-])([O-])=O.[O-]P([O-])([O-])=O XYJRXVWERLGGKC-UHFFFAOYSA-D 0.000 description 2
- 125000002467 phosphate group Chemical group [H]OP(=O)(O[H])O[*] 0.000 description 2
- 150000008300 phosphoramidites Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- 238000000470 piezoresponse force microscopy Methods 0.000 description 2
- 229920003023 plastic Polymers 0.000 description 2
- 239000004033 plastic Substances 0.000 description 2
- 229920002401 polyacrylamide Polymers 0.000 description 2
- 229920000867 polyelectrolyte Polymers 0.000 description 2
- 229920002451 polyvinyl alcohol Polymers 0.000 description 2
- 235000019422 polyvinyl alcohol Nutrition 0.000 description 2
- 230000009145 protein modification Effects 0.000 description 2
- BBEAQIROQSPTKN-UHFFFAOYSA-N pyrene Chemical compound C1=CC=C2C=CC3=CC=CC4=CC=C1C2=C43 BBEAQIROQSPTKN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 125000004076 pyridyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 2
- 238000000988 reflection electron microscopy Methods 0.000 description 2
- 229940043267 rhodamine b Drugs 0.000 description 2
- 238000004621 scanning probe microscopy Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000001350 scanning transmission electron microscopy Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000004574 scanning tunneling microscopy Methods 0.000 description 2
- DYPYMMHZGRPOCK-UHFFFAOYSA-N seminaphtharhodafluor Chemical compound O1C(=O)C2=CC=CC=C2C21C(C=CC=1C3=CC=C(O)C=1)=C3OC1=CC(N)=CC=C21 DYPYMMHZGRPOCK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 125000004469 siloxy group Chemical group [SiH3]O* 0.000 description 2
- KSAVQLQVUXSOCR-UHFFFAOYSA-M sodium lauroyl sarcosinate Chemical compound [Na+].CCCCCCCCCCCC(=O)N(C)CC([O-])=O KSAVQLQVUXSOCR-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 2
- 125000001424 substituent group Chemical group 0.000 description 2
- 235000000346 sugar Nutrition 0.000 description 2
- 230000020382 suppression by virus of host antigen processing and presentation of peptide antigen via MHC class I Effects 0.000 description 2
- 239000004094 surface-active agent Substances 0.000 description 2
- 238000004580 synchrotron x ray scanning tunneling microscopy Methods 0.000 description 2
- 229920001059 synthetic polymer Polymers 0.000 description 2
- IBWGNZVCJVLSHB-UHFFFAOYSA-M tetrabutylphosphanium;chloride Chemical compound [Cl-].CCCC[P+](CCCC)(CCCC)CCCC IBWGNZVCJVLSHB-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 2
- FBOJNMRAZJRCNS-UHFFFAOYSA-M tetraethylphosphanium;chloride Chemical compound [Cl-].CC[P+](CC)(CC)CC FBOJNMRAZJRCNS-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 2
- JGVWCANSWKRBCS-UHFFFAOYSA-N tetramethylrhodamine thiocyanate Chemical compound [Cl-].C=12C=CC(N(C)C)=CC2=[O+]C2=CC(N(C)C)=CC=C2C=1C1=CC=C(SC#N)C=C1C(O)=O JGVWCANSWKRBCS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- FBEVECUEMUUFKM-UHFFFAOYSA-M tetrapropylazanium;chloride Chemical compound [Cl-].CCC[N+](CCC)(CCC)CCC FBEVECUEMUUFKM-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 2
- 125000003396 thiol group Chemical class [H]S* 0.000 description 2
- 230000005945 translocation Effects 0.000 description 2
- 108091005703 transmembrane proteins Proteins 0.000 description 2
- 102000035160 transmembrane proteins Human genes 0.000 description 2
- 230000001960 triggered effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- GETQZCLCWQTVFV-UHFFFAOYSA-N trimethylamine Chemical compound CN(C)C GETQZCLCWQTVFV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 239000003656 tris buffered saline Substances 0.000 description 2
- 238000010798 ubiquitination Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000003612 virological effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000012800 visualization Methods 0.000 description 2
- GLGNXYJARSMNGJ-VKTIVEEGSA-N (1s,2s,3r,4r)-3-[[5-chloro-2-[(1-ethyl-6-methoxy-2-oxo-4,5-dihydro-3h-1-benzazepin-7-yl)amino]pyrimidin-4-yl]amino]bicyclo[2.2.1]hept-5-ene-2-carboxamide Chemical compound CCN1C(=O)CCCC2=C(OC)C(NC=3N=C(C(=CN=3)Cl)N[C@H]3[C@H]([C@@]4([H])C[C@@]3(C=C4)[H])C(N)=O)=CC=C21 GLGNXYJARSMNGJ-VKTIVEEGSA-N 0.000 description 1
- AQKLDBRFLGEHCJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N (2,5-dioxopyrrolidin-1-yl) 6-(prop-2-enoylamino)hexanoate Chemical compound C=CC(=O)NCCCCCC(=O)ON1C(=O)CCC1=O AQKLDBRFLGEHCJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- WFEPUKFABWDABK-UHFFFAOYSA-N (2-amino-5-methylphenyl)phosphonic acid Chemical compound CC1=CC=C(N)C(P(O)(O)=O)=C1 WFEPUKFABWDABK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- SHINASQYHDCLEU-QWWZWVQMSA-N (2r,4r)-4-aminopyrrolidine-2-carboxylic acid Chemical compound N[C@H]1CN[C@@H](C(O)=O)C1 SHINASQYHDCLEU-QWWZWVQMSA-N 0.000 description 1
- SHINASQYHDCLEU-IUYQGCFVSA-N (2r,4s)-4-aminopyrrolidine-2-carboxylic acid Chemical compound N[C@@H]1CN[C@@H](C(O)=O)C1 SHINASQYHDCLEU-IUYQGCFVSA-N 0.000 description 1
- SHINASQYHDCLEU-DMTCNVIQSA-N (2s,4r)-4-aminopyrrolidine-2-carboxylic acid Chemical compound N[C@H]1CN[C@H](C(O)=O)C1 SHINASQYHDCLEU-DMTCNVIQSA-N 0.000 description 1
- SHINASQYHDCLEU-IMJSIDKUSA-N (2s,4s)-4-aminopyrrolidine-2-carboxylic acid Chemical compound N[C@@H]1CN[C@H](C(O)=O)C1 SHINASQYHDCLEU-IMJSIDKUSA-N 0.000 description 1
- SIDULKZCBGMXJL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1-dimethylphosphoryldodecane Chemical compound CCCCCCCCCCCCP(C)(C)=O SIDULKZCBGMXJL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 108020004465 16S ribosomal RNA Proteins 0.000 description 1
- PRDFBSVERLRRMY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2'-(4-ethoxyphenyl)-5-(4-methylpiperazin-1-yl)-2,5'-bibenzimidazole Chemical compound C1=CC(OCC)=CC=C1C1=NC2=CC=C(C=3NC4=CC(=CC=C4N=3)N3CCN(C)CC3)C=C2N1 PRDFBSVERLRRMY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- KGLPWQKSKUVKMJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2,3-dihydrophthalazine-1,4-dione Chemical compound C1=CC=C2C(=O)NNC(=O)C2=C1 KGLPWQKSKUVKMJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- RNIPJYFZGXJSDD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2,4,5-triphenyl-1h-imidazole Chemical class C1=CC=CC=C1C1=NC(C=2C=CC=CC=2)=C(C=2C=CC=CC=2)N1 RNIPJYFZGXJSDD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- HEAHMJLHQCESBZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2,5-diaminobenzenesulfonic acid Chemical compound NC1=CC=C(N)C(S(O)(=O)=O)=C1 HEAHMJLHQCESBZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- XDFNWJDGWJVGGN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-(2,7-dichloro-3,6-dihydroxy-9h-xanthen-9-yl)benzoic acid Chemical compound OC(=O)C1=CC=CC=C1C1C2=CC(Cl)=C(O)C=C2OC2=CC(O)=C(Cl)C=C21 XDFNWJDGWJVGGN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- QURLONWWPWCPIC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-(2-aminoethoxy)ethanol;3,6-dichloro-2-methoxybenzoic acid Chemical compound NCCOCCO.COC1=C(Cl)C=CC(Cl)=C1C(O)=O QURLONWWPWCPIC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- JNGRENQDBKMCCR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-(3-amino-6-iminoxanthen-9-yl)benzoic acid;hydrochloride Chemical compound [Cl-].C=12C=CC(=[NH2+])C=C2OC2=CC(N)=CC=C2C=1C1=CC=CC=C1C(O)=O JNGRENQDBKMCCR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- GLGQRQQFWLTGES-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-[2-[2-[2-[2-(2-decoxyethoxy)ethoxy]ethoxy]ethoxy]ethoxy]ethanol Chemical compound CCCCCCCCCCOCCOCCOCCOCCOCCOCCO GLGQRQQFWLTGES-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- IOOMXAQUNPWDLL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-[6-(diethylamino)-3-(diethyliminiumyl)-3h-xanthen-9-yl]-5-sulfobenzene-1-sulfonate Chemical compound C=12C=CC(=[N+](CC)CC)C=C2OC2=CC(N(CC)CC)=CC=C2C=1C1=CC=C(S(O)(=O)=O)C=C1S([O-])(=O)=O IOOMXAQUNPWDLL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- PDURUKZNVHEHGO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-[6-[bis(carboxymethyl)amino]-5-(carboxymethoxy)-1-benzofuran-2-yl]-1,3-oxazole-5-carboxylic acid Chemical compound O1C=2C=C(N(CC(O)=O)CC(O)=O)C(OCC(=O)O)=CC=2C=C1C1=NC=C(C(O)=O)O1 PDURUKZNVHEHGO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- RJPSHDMGSVVHFA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-[carboxymethyl-[(7-hydroxy-4-methyl-2-oxochromen-8-yl)methyl]amino]acetic acid Chemical compound OC(=O)CN(CC(O)=O)CC1=C(O)C=CC2=C1OC(=O)C=C2C RJPSHDMGSVVHFA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- QKNYBSVHEMOAJP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-amino-2-(hydroxymethyl)propane-1,3-diol;hydron;chloride Chemical compound Cl.OCC(N)(CO)CO QKNYBSVHEMOAJP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- CFCXQQUQLZIZPI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-amino-3,5-dimethylbenzenesulfonic acid Chemical compound CC1=CC(C)=C(N)C(S(O)(=O)=O)=C1 CFCXQQUQLZIZPI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- LTPSRQRIPCVMKQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-amino-5-methylbenzenesulfonic acid Chemical compound CC1=CC=C(N)C(S(O)(=O)=O)=C1 LTPSRQRIPCVMKQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- OGHAROSJZRTIOK-KQYNXXCUSA-N 2-amino-9-[(2r,3r,4s,5r)-3,4-dihydroxy-5-(hydroxymethyl)oxolan-2-yl]-7-methylpurin-9-ium-6-olate Chemical compound C12=NC(N)=NC([O-])=C2N(C)C=[N+]1[C@@H]1O[C@H](CO)[C@@H](O)[C@H]1O OGHAROSJZRTIOK-KQYNXXCUSA-N 0.000 description 1
- KPIVDNYJNOPGBE-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-aminonicotinic acid Chemical compound NC1=NC=CC=C1C(O)=O KPIVDNYJNOPGBE-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 125000000954 2-hydroxyethyl group Chemical group [H]C([*])([H])C([H])([H])O[H] 0.000 description 1
- HAPJROQJVSPKCJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 3-[4-[2-[6-(dibutylamino)naphthalen-2-yl]ethenyl]pyridin-1-ium-1-yl]propane-1-sulfonate Chemical compound C1=CC2=CC(N(CCCC)CCCC)=CC=C2C=C1C=CC1=CC=[N+](CCCS([O-])(=O)=O)C=C1 HAPJROQJVSPKCJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- CPDHBIMOKOHWDD-UHFFFAOYSA-L 3-[4-[4-[4-(diethylamino)phenyl]buta-1,3-dienyl]pyridin-1-ium-1-yl]propyl-triethylazanium;dibromide Chemical compound [Br-].[Br-].C1=CC(N(CC)CC)=CC=C1C=CC=CC1=CC=[N+](CCC[N+](CC)(CC)CC)C=C1 CPDHBIMOKOHWDD-UHFFFAOYSA-L 0.000 description 1
- FYEQKMAVRYRMBL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 3-aminopyridine-4-carboxylic acid Chemical compound NC1=CN=CC=C1C(O)=O FYEQKMAVRYRMBL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- YSCNMFDFYJUPEF-OWOJBTEDSA-N 4,4'-diisothiocyano-trans-stilbene-2,2'-disulfonic acid Chemical compound OS(=O)(=O)C1=CC(N=C=S)=CC=C1\C=C\C1=CC=C(N=C=S)C=C1S(O)(=O)=O YSCNMFDFYJUPEF-OWOJBTEDSA-N 0.000 description 1
- LHYQAEFVHIZFLR-UHFFFAOYSA-L 4-(4-diazonio-3-methoxyphenyl)-2-methoxybenzenediazonium;dichloride Chemical compound [Cl-].[Cl-].C1=C([N+]#N)C(OC)=CC(C=2C=C(OC)C([N+]#N)=CC=2)=C1 LHYQAEFVHIZFLR-UHFFFAOYSA-L 0.000 description 1
- QFVHZQCOUORWEI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 4-[(4-anilino-5-sulfonaphthalen-1-yl)diazenyl]-5-hydroxynaphthalene-2,7-disulfonic acid Chemical compound C=12C(O)=CC(S(O)(=O)=O)=CC2=CC(S(O)(=O)=O)=CC=1N=NC(C1=CC=CC(=C11)S(O)(=O)=O)=CC=C1NC1=CC=CC=C1 QFVHZQCOUORWEI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- IASBMUIXBJNMDW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 4-aminonicotinic acid Chemical compound NC1=CC=NC=C1C(O)=O IASBMUIXBJNMDW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- JYCQQPHGFMYQCF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 4-tert-Octylphenol monoethoxylate Chemical compound CC(C)(C)CC(C)(C)C1=CC=C(OCCO)C=C1 JYCQQPHGFMYQCF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- WOVKYSAHUYNSMH-RRKCRQDMSA-N 5-bromodeoxyuridine Chemical compound C1[C@H](O)[C@@H](CO)O[C@H]1N1C(=O)NC(=O)C(Br)=C1 WOVKYSAHUYNSMH-RRKCRQDMSA-N 0.000 description 1
- RUCHWTKMOWXHLU-UHFFFAOYSA-N 5-nitroanthranilic acid Chemical compound NC1=CC=C([N+]([O-])=O)C=C1C(O)=O RUCHWTKMOWXHLU-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- ZMERMCRYYFRELX-UHFFFAOYSA-N 5-{[2-(iodoacetamido)ethyl]amino}naphthalene-1-sulfonic acid Chemical compound C1=CC=C2C(S(=O)(=O)O)=CC=CC2=C1NCCNC(=O)CI ZMERMCRYYFRELX-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 108020004565 5.8S Ribosomal RNA Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 108020005075 5S Ribosomal RNA Proteins 0.000 description 1
- SAQWCPXBLNGTCC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 6-(prop-2-enoylamino)hexanoic acid Chemical compound OC(=O)CCCCCNC(=O)C=C SAQWCPXBLNGTCC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- IDLISIVVYLGCKO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 6-carboxy-4',5'-dichloro-2',7'-dimethoxyfluorescein Chemical compound O1C(=O)C2=CC=C(C(O)=O)C=C2C21C1=CC(OC)=C(O)C(Cl)=C1OC1=C2C=C(OC)C(O)=C1Cl IDLISIVVYLGCKO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- NALREUIWICQLPS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 7-imino-n,n-dimethylphenothiazin-3-amine;hydrochloride Chemical compound [Cl-].C1=C(N)C=C2SC3=CC(=[N+](C)C)C=CC3=NC2=C1 NALREUIWICQLPS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- SGAOZXGJGQEBHA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 82344-98-7 Chemical compound C1CCN2CCCC(C=C3C4(OC(C5=CC(=CC=C54)N=C=S)=O)C4=C5)=C2C1=C3OC4=C1CCCN2CCCC5=C12 SGAOZXGJGQEBHA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- YIXZUOWWYKISPQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N ATTO 565 para-isomer Chemical compound [O-]Cl(=O)(=O)=O.C=12C=C3CCC[N+](CC)=C3C=C2OC=2C=C3N(CC)CCCC3=CC=2C=1C1=CC(C(O)=O)=CC=C1C(O)=O YIXZUOWWYKISPQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- PWZJEXGKUHVUFP-UHFFFAOYSA-N ATTO 590 meta-isomer Chemical compound [O-]Cl(=O)(=O)=O.C1=2C=C3C(C)=CC(C)(C)N(CC)C3=CC=2OC2=CC3=[N+](CC)C(C)(C)C=C(C)C3=CC2=C1C1=CC=C(C(O)=O)C=C1C(O)=O PWZJEXGKUHVUFP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 108010000239 Aequorin Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 229920001817 Agar Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920000936 Agarose Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 241000059559 Agriotes sordidus Species 0.000 description 1
- QGZKDVFQNNGYKY-UHFFFAOYSA-N Ammonia Chemical class N QGZKDVFQNNGYKY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 108091023037 Aptamer Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 241000239223 Arachnida Species 0.000 description 1
- 241000203069 Archaea Species 0.000 description 1
- 241000205042 Archaeoglobus fulgidus Species 0.000 description 1
- 208000002109 Argyria Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 108050001427 Avidin/streptavidin Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 108020000946 Bacterial DNA Proteins 0.000 description 1
- MWNLTKCQHFZFHN-UHFFFAOYSA-N CBQCA reagent Chemical compound C1=CC(C(=O)O)=CC=C1C(=O)C1=CC2=CC=CC=C2N=C1C=O MWNLTKCQHFZFHN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- ZKQDCIXGCQPQNV-UHFFFAOYSA-N Calcium hypochlorite Chemical compound [Ca+2].Cl[O-].Cl[O-] ZKQDCIXGCQPQNV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 101710132601 Capsid protein Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 108020005197 Catenated DNA Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102000000844 Cell Surface Receptors Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108010001857 Cell Surface Receptors Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 229920001661 Chitosan Polymers 0.000 description 1
- VEXZGXHMUGYJMC-UHFFFAOYSA-M Chloride anion Chemical compound [Cl-] VEXZGXHMUGYJMC-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 1
- 108090000322 Cholinesterases Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102000003914 Cholinesterases Human genes 0.000 description 1
- RURLVUZRUFHCJO-UHFFFAOYSA-N Chromomycin A3 Natural products COC(C1Cc2cc3cc(OC4CC(OC(=O)C)C(OC5CC(O)C(OC)C(C)O5)C(C)O4)c(C)c(O)c3c(O)c2C(=O)C1OC6CC(OC7CC(C)(O)C(OC(=O)C)C(C)O7)C(O)C(C)O6)C(=O)C(O)C(C)O RURLVUZRUFHCJO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 206010008805 Chromosomal abnormalities Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 208000031404 Chromosome Aberrations Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 108091028075 Circular RNA Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 208000005443 Circulating Neoplastic Cells Diseases 0.000 description 1
- DWGWCWDDNTVOGF-UHFFFAOYSA-N Cl.Cl.Cl.Cl.Cl.Cl Chemical compound Cl.Cl.Cl.Cl.Cl.Cl DWGWCWDDNTVOGF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 101710094648 Coat protein Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102000008186 Collagen Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108010035532 Collagen Proteins 0.000 description 1
- IGXWBGJHJZYPQS-SSDOTTSWSA-N D-Luciferin Chemical compound OC(=O)[C@H]1CSC(C=2SC3=CC=C(O)C=C3N=2)=N1 IGXWBGJHJZYPQS-SSDOTTSWSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 102100033195 DNA ligase 4 Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108010008286 DNA nucleotidylexotransferase Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 239000003298 DNA probe Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000001712 DNA sequencing Methods 0.000 description 1
- 102100029764 DNA-directed DNA/RNA polymerase mu Human genes 0.000 description 1
- CYCGRDQQIOGCKX-UHFFFAOYSA-N Dehydro-luciferin Natural products OC(=O)C1=CSC(C=2SC3=CC(O)=CC=C3N=2)=N1 CYCGRDQQIOGCKX-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 102000016911 Deoxyribonucleases Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108010053770 Deoxyribonucleases Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 229920002307 Dextran Polymers 0.000 description 1
- BWGNESOTFCXPMA-UHFFFAOYSA-N Dihydrogen disulfide Chemical compound SS BWGNESOTFCXPMA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 108091005941 EBFP Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 108091005942 ECFP Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102000004533 Endonucleases Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 239000004593 Epoxy Substances 0.000 description 1
- 241000588724 Escherichia coli Species 0.000 description 1
- 101000813126 Escherichia coli O157:H7 Laminin-binding fimbrial subunit ElfA Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 241000206602 Eukaryota Species 0.000 description 1
- LLQPHQFNMLZJMP-UHFFFAOYSA-N Fentrazamide Chemical compound N1=NN(C=2C(=CC=CC=2)Cl)C(=O)N1C(=O)N(CC)C1CCCCC1 LLQPHQFNMLZJMP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229920001917 Ficoll Polymers 0.000 description 1
- BJGNCJDXODQBOB-UHFFFAOYSA-N Fivefly Luciferin Natural products OC(=O)C1CSC(C=2SC3=CC(O)=CC=C3N=2)=N1 BJGNCJDXODQBOB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- OUVXYXNWSVIOSJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N Fluo-4 Chemical compound CC1=CC=C(N(CC(O)=O)CC(O)=O)C(OCCOC=2C(=CC=C(C=2)C2=C3C=C(F)C(=O)C=C3OC3=CC(O)=C(F)C=C32)N(CC(O)=O)CC(O)=O)=C1 OUVXYXNWSVIOSJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 102220566467 GDNF family receptor alpha-1_S65A_mutation Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 102220566469 GDNF family receptor alpha-1_S65T_mutation Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 102220566453 GDNF family receptor alpha-1_Y66F_mutation Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 102220566451 GDNF family receptor alpha-1_Y66H_mutation Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 102220566455 GDNF family receptor alpha-1_Y66W_mutation Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108010093031 Galactosidases Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102000002464 Galactosidases Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108010010803 Gelatin Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 241000193385 Geobacillus stearothermophilus Species 0.000 description 1
- SXRSQZLOMIGNAQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N Glutaraldehyde Chemical compound O=CCCCC=O SXRSQZLOMIGNAQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 102100031181 Glyceraldehyde-3-phosphate dehydrogenase Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 239000004471 Glycine Substances 0.000 description 1
- 244000068988 Glycine max Species 0.000 description 1
- 235000010469 Glycine max Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 108091007417 HOX transcript antisense RNA Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 208000002250 Hematologic Neoplasms Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 241000238631 Hexapoda Species 0.000 description 1
- 108010093488 His-His-His-His-His-His Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 238000010867 Hoechst staining Methods 0.000 description 1
- PMMYEEVYMWASQN-DMTCNVIQSA-N Hydroxyproline Chemical compound O[C@H]1CN[C@H](C(O)=O)C1 PMMYEEVYMWASQN-DMTCNVIQSA-N 0.000 description 1
- DGAQECJNVWCQMB-PUAWFVPOSA-M Ilexoside XXIX Chemical compound C[C@@H]1CC[C@@]2(CC[C@@]3(C(=CC[C@H]4[C@]3(CC[C@@H]5[C@@]4(CC[C@@H](C5(C)C)OS(=O)(=O)[O-])C)C)[C@@H]2[C@]1(C)O)C)C(=O)O[C@H]6[C@@H]([C@H]([C@@H]([C@H](O6)CO)O)O)O.[Na+] DGAQECJNVWCQMB-PUAWFVPOSA-M 0.000 description 1
- 102000008394 Immunoglobulin Fragments Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108010021625 Immunoglobulin Fragments Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 108091092195 Intron Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 241000254158 Lampyridae Species 0.000 description 1
- 108090001090 Lectins Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102000004856 Lectins Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108090001030 Lipoproteins Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102000004895 Lipoproteins Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108020005198 Long Noncoding RNA Proteins 0.000 description 1
- DDWFXDSYGUXRAY-UHFFFAOYSA-N Luciferin Natural products CCc1c(C)c(CC2NC(=O)C(=C2C=C)C)[nH]c1Cc3[nH]c4C(=C5/NC(CC(=O)O)C(C)C5CC(=O)O)CC(=O)c4c3C DDWFXDSYGUXRAY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 108090000988 Lysostaphin Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 108010053229 Lysyl endopeptidase Proteins 0.000 description 1
- FYYHWMGAXLPEAU-UHFFFAOYSA-N Magnesium Chemical compound [Mg] FYYHWMGAXLPEAU-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 101710125418 Major capsid protein Proteins 0.000 description 1
- CERQOIWHTDAKMF-UHFFFAOYSA-M Methacrylate Chemical compound CC(=C)C([O-])=O CERQOIWHTDAKMF-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 1
- 241000203407 Methanocaldococcus jannaschii Species 0.000 description 1
- 241001302042 Methanothermobacter thermautotrophicus Species 0.000 description 1
- 101100010166 Mus musculus Dok3 gene Proteins 0.000 description 1
- NQTADLQHYWFPDB-UHFFFAOYSA-N N-Hydroxysuccinimide Chemical compound ON1C(=O)CCC1=O NQTADLQHYWFPDB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- BAWFJGJZGIEFAR-NNYOXOHSSA-O NAD(+) Chemical compound NC(=O)C1=CC=C[N+]([C@H]2[C@@H]([C@H](O)[C@@H](COP(O)(=O)OP(O)(=O)OC[C@@H]3[C@H]([C@@H](O)[C@@H](O3)N3C4=NC=NC(N)=C4N=C3)O)O2)O)=C1 BAWFJGJZGIEFAR-NNYOXOHSSA-O 0.000 description 1
- KJQIOBFBYLKERY-UHFFFAOYSA-N NC1=C(C=C(C=C1)[N+](=O)[O-])P(O)(O)=O Chemical compound NC1=C(C=C(C=C1)[N+](=O)[O-])P(O)(O)=O KJQIOBFBYLKERY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- GZTGICGLEUUVTI-UHFFFAOYSA-N NC=1C(=NC=CC=1)P(O)(=O)O Chemical compound NC=1C(=NC=CC=1)P(O)(=O)O GZTGICGLEUUVTI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- YUFCYSGNVDIOOD-UHFFFAOYSA-N NC=1C(=NC=NC=1)P(O)(O)=O Chemical compound NC=1C(=NC=NC=1)P(O)(O)=O YUFCYSGNVDIOOD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 241000244206 Nematoda Species 0.000 description 1
- 208000012902 Nervous system disease Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 101710141454 Nucleoprotein Proteins 0.000 description 1
- AWZJFZMWSUBJAJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N OG-514 dye Chemical compound OC(=O)CSC1=C(F)C(F)=C(C(O)=O)C(C2=C3C=C(F)C(=O)C=C3OC3=CC(O)=C(F)C=C32)=C1F AWZJFZMWSUBJAJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 238000012408 PCR amplification Methods 0.000 description 1
- 102000045595 Phosphoprotein Phosphatases Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108700019535 Phosphoprotein Phosphatases Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 108010089430 Phosphoproteins Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102000007982 Phosphoproteins Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108010053210 Phycocyanin Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 229920001311 Poly(hydroxyethyl acrylate) Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 239000004952 Polyamide Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000004698 Polyethylene Substances 0.000 description 1
- 108010039918 Polylysine Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 239000004721 Polyphenylene oxide Substances 0.000 description 1
- 101710083689 Probable capsid protein Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 108010029485 Protein Isoforms Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102000001708 Protein Isoforms Human genes 0.000 description 1
- CZPWVGJYEJSRLH-UHFFFAOYSA-N Pyrimidine Chemical compound C1=CN=CN=C1 CZPWVGJYEJSRLH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 241000205156 Pyrococcus furiosus Species 0.000 description 1
- 238000002123 RNA extraction Methods 0.000 description 1
- 108090001087 RNA ligase (ATP) Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 108020004511 Recombinant DNA Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102000006382 Ribonucleases Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108010083644 Ribonucleases Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 240000004808 Saccharomyces cerevisiae Species 0.000 description 1
- 101100260935 Saccharomyces cerevisiae (strain ATCC 204508 / S288c) TOD6 gene Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 241000689272 Senna sophera Species 0.000 description 1
- 238000012300 Sequence Analysis Methods 0.000 description 1
- BQCADISMDOOEFD-UHFFFAOYSA-N Silver Chemical compound [Ag] BQCADISMDOOEFD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- FKNQFGJONOIPTF-UHFFFAOYSA-N Sodium cation Chemical compound [Na+] FKNQFGJONOIPTF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- IYFATESGLOUGBX-YVNJGZBMSA-N Sorbitan monopalmitate Chemical compound CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC(=O)OC[C@@H](O)[C@H]1OC[C@H](O)[C@H]1O IYFATESGLOUGBX-YVNJGZBMSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 210000001744 T-lymphocyte Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 239000008049 TAE buffer Substances 0.000 description 1
- 108091046869 Telomeric non-coding RNA Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 241001495444 Thermococcus sp. Species 0.000 description 1
- 241000589500 Thermus aquaticus Species 0.000 description 1
- 101000803959 Thermus thermophilus (strain ATCC 27634 / DSM 579 / HB8) DNA ligase Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 108010001244 Tli polymerase Proteins 0.000 description 1
- GYDJEQRTZSCIOI-UHFFFAOYSA-N Tranexamic acid Chemical compound NCC1CCC(C(O)=O)CC1 GYDJEQRTZSCIOI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 102220615016 Transcription elongation regulator 1_S65C_mutation Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108091023040 Transcription factor Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102000040945 Transcription factor Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108090000631 Trypsin Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102000004142 Trypsin Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108091007416 X-inactive specific transcript Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 108091035715 XIST (gene) Proteins 0.000 description 1
- HCHKCACWOHOZIP-UHFFFAOYSA-N Zinc Chemical compound [Zn] HCHKCACWOHOZIP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- UYRDHEJRPVSJFM-VSWVFQEASA-N [(1s,3r)-3-hydroxy-4-[(3e,5e,7e,9e,11z)-11-[4-[(e)-2-[(1r,3s,6s)-3-hydroxy-1,5,5-trimethyl-7-oxabicyclo[4.1.0]heptan-6-yl]ethenyl]-5-oxofuran-2-ylidene]-3,10-dimethylundeca-1,3,5,7,9-pentaenylidene]-3,5,5-trimethylcyclohexyl] acetate Chemical compound C[C@@]1(O)C[C@@H](OC(=O)C)CC(C)(C)C1=C=C\C(C)=C\C=C\C=C\C=C(/C)\C=C/1C=C(\C=C\[C@]23[C@@](O2)(C)C[C@@H](O)CC3(C)C)C(=O)O\1 UYRDHEJRPVSJFM-VSWVFQEASA-N 0.000 description 1
- APERIXFHHNDFQV-UHFFFAOYSA-N [2-[2-[2-[bis(carboxymethyl)amino]-5-methylphenoxy]ethoxy]-4-[3,6-bis(dimethylamino)xanthen-9-ylidene]cyclohexa-2,5-dien-1-ylidene]-bis(carboxymethyl)azanium;chloride Chemical compound [Cl-].C12=CC=C(N(C)C)C=C2OC2=CC(N(C)C)=CC=C2C1=C(C=1)C=CC(=[N+](CC(O)=O)CC(O)=O)C=1OCCOC1=CC(C)=CC=C1N(CC(O)=O)CC(O)=O APERIXFHHNDFQV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- WLKAMFOFXYCYDK-UHFFFAOYSA-N [5-amino-4-[[3-[(2-amino-4-azaniumyl-5-methylphenyl)diazenyl]-4-methylphenyl]diazenyl]-2-methylphenyl]azanium;dichloride Chemical compound [Cl-].[Cl-].CC1=CC=C(N=NC=2C(=CC([NH3+])=C(C)C=2)N)C=C1N=NC1=CC(C)=C([NH3+])C=C1N WLKAMFOFXYCYDK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- ZHAFUINZIZIXFC-UHFFFAOYSA-N [9-(dimethylamino)-10-methylbenzo[a]phenoxazin-5-ylidene]azanium;chloride Chemical compound [Cl-].O1C2=CC(=[NH2+])C3=CC=CC=C3C2=NC2=C1C=C(N(C)C)C(C)=C2 ZHAFUINZIZIXFC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- LVTQIVFSMGDIPF-IVZWLZJFSA-N [[(2r,3s,5r)-5-[4-amino-5-(3-aminoprop-1-ynyl)-2-oxopyrimidin-1-yl]-3-hydroxyoxolan-2-yl]methoxy-hydroxyphosphoryl] phosphono hydrogen phosphate Chemical group O=C1N=C(N)C(C#CCN)=CN1[C@@H]1O[C@H](COP(O)(=O)OP(O)(=O)OP(O)(O)=O)[C@@H](O)C1 LVTQIVFSMGDIPF-IVZWLZJFSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 238000009825 accumulation Methods 0.000 description 1
- HGEVZDLYZYVYHD-UHFFFAOYSA-N acetic acid;2-amino-2-(hydroxymethyl)propane-1,3-diol;2-[2-[bis(carboxymethyl)amino]ethyl-(carboxymethyl)amino]acetic acid Chemical compound CC(O)=O.OCC(N)(CO)CO.OC(=O)CN(CC(O)=O)CCN(CC(O)=O)CC(O)=O HGEVZDLYZYVYHD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- FRTNIYVUDIHXPG-UHFFFAOYSA-N acetic acid;ethane-1,2-diamine Chemical compound CC(O)=O.CC(O)=O.CC(O)=O.CC(O)=O.NCCN FRTNIYVUDIHXPG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 230000021736 acetylation Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000006640 acetylation reaction Methods 0.000 description 1
- RZUBARUFLYGOGC-MTHOTQAESA-L acid fuchsin Chemical compound [Na+].[Na+].[O-]S(=O)(=O)C1=C(N)C(C)=CC(C(=C\2C=C(C(=[NH2+])C=C/2)S([O-])(=O)=O)\C=2C=C(C(N)=CC=2)S([O-])(=O)=O)=C1 RZUBARUFLYGOGC-MTHOTQAESA-L 0.000 description 1
- 238000010669 acid-base reaction Methods 0.000 description 1
- 150000007513 acids Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 239000000654 additive Substances 0.000 description 1
- 108091008108 affimer Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 239000008272 agar Substances 0.000 description 1
- 125000003172 aldehyde group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 150000003973 alkyl amines Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 230000004075 alteration Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000009435 amidation Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000007112 amidation reaction Methods 0.000 description 1
- 125000000539 amino acid group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 150000001413 amino acids Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 230000001745 anti-biotin effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000013459 approach Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000007864 aqueous solution Substances 0.000 description 1
- 150000004982 aromatic amines Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 125000003118 aryl group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- JPIYZTWMUGTEHX-UHFFFAOYSA-N auramine O free base Chemical compound C1=CC(N(C)C)=CC=C1C(=N)C1=CC=C(N(C)C)C=C1 JPIYZTWMUGTEHX-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- GOOXRYWLNNXLFL-UHFFFAOYSA-H azane oxygen(2-) ruthenium(3+) ruthenium(4+) hexachloride Chemical compound N.N.N.N.N.N.N.N.N.N.N.N.N.N.[O--].[O--].[Cl-].[Cl-].[Cl-].[Cl-].[Cl-].[Cl-].[Ru+3].[Ru+3].[Ru+4] GOOXRYWLNNXLFL-UHFFFAOYSA-H 0.000 description 1
- 150000001540 azides Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 239000011805 ball Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000004888 barrier function Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000010009 beating Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000009286 beneficial effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000001588 bifunctional effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000000975 bioactive effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000000035 biogenic effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000012620 biological material Substances 0.000 description 1
- OWMVSZAMULFTJU-UHFFFAOYSA-N bis-tris Chemical compound OCCN(CCO)C(CO)(CO)CO OWMVSZAMULFTJU-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229910052797 bismuth Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 238000004061 bleaching Methods 0.000 description 1
- 210000000601 blood cell Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 210000004556 brain Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 210000005013 brain tissue Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 238000000339 bright-field microscopy Methods 0.000 description 1
- DEGAKNSWVGKMLS-UHFFFAOYSA-N calcein Chemical compound O1C(=O)C2=CC=CC=C2C21C1=CC(CN(CC(O)=O)CC(O)=O)=C(O)C=C1OC1=C2C=C(CN(CC(O)=O)CC(=O)O)C(O)=C1 DEGAKNSWVGKMLS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 238000004364 calculation method Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000002619 cancer immunotherapy Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000000298 carbocyanine Substances 0.000 description 1
- 125000002915 carbonyl group Chemical group [*:2]C([*:1])=O 0.000 description 1
- 235000012730 carminic acid Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 210000003855 cell nucleus Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 210000003850 cellular structure Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 230000008859 change Effects 0.000 description 1
- UMCMPZBLKLEWAF-UHFFFAOYSA-N chaps detergent Chemical compound OC1CC2CC(O)CCC2(C)C2C1C1CCC(C(CCC(=O)NCCC[N+](C)(C)CCCS([O-])(=O)=O)C)C1(C)C(O)C2 UMCMPZBLKLEWAF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 238000012512 characterization method Methods 0.000 description 1
- VYXSBFYARXAAKO-WTKGSRSZSA-N chembl402140 Chemical compound Cl.C1=2C=C(C)C(NCC)=CC=2OC2=C\C(=N/CC)C(C)=CC2=C1C1=CC=CC=C1C(=O)OCC VYXSBFYARXAAKO-WTKGSRSZSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 238000001311 chemical methods and process Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000007385 chemical modification Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000003638 chemical reducing agent Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229940045110 chitosan Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 235000012000 cholesterol Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 229960001231 choline Drugs 0.000 description 1
- OEYIOHPDSNJKLS-UHFFFAOYSA-N choline Chemical compound C[N+](C)(C)CCO OEYIOHPDSNJKLS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- ZYVSOIYQKUDENJ-WKSBCEQHSA-N chromomycin A3 Chemical compound O([C@@H]1C[C@@H](O[C@H](C)[C@@H]1OC(C)=O)OC=1C=C2C=C3C[C@H]([C@@H](C(=O)C3=C(O)C2=C(O)C=1C)O[C@@H]1O[C@H](C)[C@@H](O)[C@H](O[C@@H]2O[C@H](C)[C@@H](O)[C@H](O[C@@H]3O[C@@H](C)[C@H](OC(C)=O)[C@@](C)(O)C3)C2)C1)[C@H](OC)C(=O)[C@@H](O)[C@@H](C)O)[C@@H]1C[C@@H](O)[C@@H](OC)[C@@H](C)O1 ZYVSOIYQKUDENJ-WKSBCEQHSA-N 0.000 description 1
- PMMYEEVYMWASQN-IMJSIDKUSA-N cis-4-Hydroxy-L-proline Chemical compound O[C@@H]1CN[C@H](C(O)=O)C1 PMMYEEVYMWASQN-IMJSIDKUSA-N 0.000 description 1
- PMMYEEVYMWASQN-QWWZWVQMSA-N cis-4-hydroxy-D-proline Chemical compound O[C@H]1C[NH2+][C@@H](C([O-])=O)C1 PMMYEEVYMWASQN-QWWZWVQMSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 238000012650 click reaction Methods 0.000 description 1
- 229920001436 collagen Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229960005188 collagen Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 210000001072 colon Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 229940125758 compound 15 Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 230000021615 conjugation Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000013068 control sample Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000001276 controlling effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 229910052802 copper Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 230000002596 correlated effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- GLNDAGDHSLMOKX-UHFFFAOYSA-N coumarin 120 Chemical compound C1=C(N)C=CC2=C1OC(=O)C=C2C GLNDAGDHSLMOKX-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 238000005520 cutting process Methods 0.000 description 1
- 210000000172 cytosol Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 230000006378 damage Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000001446 dark-field microscopy Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000003247 decreasing effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000006731 degradation reaction Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000012217 deletion Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000037430 deletion Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000004925 denaturation Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000036425 denaturation Effects 0.000 description 1
- CFCUWKMKBJTWLW-UHFFFAOYSA-N deoliosyl-3C-alpha-L-digitoxosyl-MTM Natural products CC=1C(O)=C2C(O)=C3C(=O)C(OC4OC(C)C(O)C(OC5OC(C)C(O)C(OC6OC(C)C(O)C(C)(O)C6)C5)C4)C(C(OC)C(=O)C(O)C(C)O)CC3=CC2=CC=1OC(OC(C)C1O)CC1OC1CC(O)C(O)C(C)O1 CFCUWKMKBJTWLW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000005547 deoxyribonucleotide Substances 0.000 description 1
- 125000002637 deoxyribonucleotide group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 238000011161 development Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000018109 developmental process Effects 0.000 description 1
- 229960002086 dextran Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 238000001152 differential interference contrast microscopy Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000009792 diffusion process Methods 0.000 description 1
- ZQSBJPAQPRVNHU-UHFFFAOYSA-M dilC18(5) dye Chemical compound [O-]Cl(=O)(=O)=O.CC1(C)C2=CC=CC=C2N(CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC)C1=CC=CC=CC1=[N+](CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC)C2=CC=CC=C2C1(C)C ZQSBJPAQPRVNHU-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 1
- 125000002147 dimethylamino group Chemical group [H]C([H])([H])N(*)C([H])([H])[H] 0.000 description 1
- WZRZTHMJPHPAMU-UHFFFAOYSA-L disodium;(3e)-3-[(4-amino-3-sulfonatophenyl)-(4-amino-3-sulfophenyl)methylidene]-6-imino-5-methylcyclohexa-1,4-diene-1-sulfonate Chemical compound [Na+].[Na+].C1=C(S([O-])(=O)=O)C(=N)C(C)=CC1=C(C=1C=C(C(N)=CC=1)S([O-])(=O)=O)C1=CC=C(N)C(S(O)(=O)=O)=C1 WZRZTHMJPHPAMU-UHFFFAOYSA-L 0.000 description 1
- 239000003814 drug Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000007877 drug screening Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000004520 electroporation Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000000295 emission spectrum Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000002616 endonucleolytic effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000007613 environmental effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000006911 enzymatic reaction Methods 0.000 description 1
- 125000003700 epoxy group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 210000003743 erythrocyte Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- IINNWAYUJNWZRM-UHFFFAOYSA-L erythrosin B Chemical compound [Na+].[Na+].[O-]C(=O)C1=CC=CC=C1C1=C2C=C(I)C(=O)C(I)=C2OC2=C(I)C([O-])=C(I)C=C21 IINNWAYUJNWZRM-UHFFFAOYSA-L 0.000 description 1
- CCIVGXIOQKPBKL-UHFFFAOYSA-M ethanesulfonate Chemical compound CCS([O-])(=O)=O CCIVGXIOQKPBKL-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 1
- 125000001495 ethyl group Chemical group [H]C([H])([H])C([H])([H])* 0.000 description 1
- NNMXSTWQJRPBJZ-UHFFFAOYSA-K europium(iii) chloride Chemical compound Cl[Eu](Cl)Cl NNMXSTWQJRPBJZ-UHFFFAOYSA-K 0.000 description 1
- 230000001605 fetal effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000012530 fluid Substances 0.000 description 1
- GVEPBJHOBDJJJI-UHFFFAOYSA-N fluoranthrene Natural products C1=CC(C2=CC=CC=C22)=C3C2=CC=CC3=C1 GVEPBJHOBDJJJI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 102000034287 fluorescent proteins Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108091006047 fluorescent proteins Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 238000013467 fragmentation Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000006062 fragmentation reaction Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000012520 frozen sample Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229920000159 gelatin Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 239000008273 gelatin Substances 0.000 description 1
- 235000019322 gelatine Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 235000011852 gelatine desserts Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 230000007274 generation of a signal involved in cell-cell signaling Effects 0.000 description 1
- 150000004676 glycans Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 108020004445 glyceraldehyde-3-phosphate dehydrogenase Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 230000013595 glycosylation Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000006206 glycosylation reaction Methods 0.000 description 1
- 229940015043 glyoxal Drugs 0.000 description 1
- PCHJSUWPFVWCPO-UHFFFAOYSA-N gold Chemical compound [Au] PCHJSUWPFVWCPO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 230000036449 good health Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000000227 grinding Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000013537 high throughput screening Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000036571 hydration Effects 0.000 description 1
- 150000007857 hydrazones Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 125000004435 hydrogen atom Chemical group [H]* 0.000 description 1
- 230000003301 hydrolyzing effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- LPPJNZJBKFSQGA-UHFFFAOYSA-M hydron;2-hydroxyethyl(trimethyl)azanium;phosphate Chemical compound OP(O)([O-])=O.C[N+](C)(C)CCO LPPJNZJBKFSQGA-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 1
- WGCNASOHLSPBMP-UHFFFAOYSA-N hydroxyacetaldehyde Natural products OCC=O WGCNASOHLSPBMP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 230000033444 hydroxylation Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000005805 hydroxylation reaction Methods 0.000 description 1
- JCYWCSGERIELPG-UHFFFAOYSA-N imes Chemical compound CC1=CC(C)=CC(C)=C1N1C=CN(C=2C(=CC(C)=CC=2C)C)[C]1 JCYWCSGERIELPG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 150000002463 imidates Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 150000002466 imines Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 238000007654 immersion Methods 0.000 description 1
- 210000002865 immune cell Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 230000028993 immune response Effects 0.000 description 1
- 229940127121 immunoconjugate Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 238000010166 immunofluorescence Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000009169 immunotherapy Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000000338 in vitro Methods 0.000 description 1
- 208000027866 inflammatory disease Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 239000003112 inhibitor Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000000977 initiatory effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000011835 investigation Methods 0.000 description 1
- PNDPGZBMCMUPRI-UHFFFAOYSA-N iodine Chemical compound II PNDPGZBMCMUPRI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229920000831 ionic polymer Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 239000002563 ionic surfactant Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229910052741 iridium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 108010074304 kitalase Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 239000002523 lectin Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000029226 lipidation Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000007788 liquid Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000004807 localization Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000033001 locomotion Effects 0.000 description 1
- DLBFLQKQABVKGT-UHFFFAOYSA-L lucifer yellow dye Chemical compound [Li+].[Li+].[O-]S(=O)(=O)C1=CC(C(N(C(=O)NN)C2=O)=O)=C3C2=CC(S([O-])(=O)=O)=CC3=C1N DLBFLQKQABVKGT-UHFFFAOYSA-L 0.000 description 1
- 235000010335 lysozyme Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 108010056929 lyticase Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 238000007403 mPCR Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000012836 macromolecular constituent Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000011777 magnesium Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229910052749 magnesium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 239000006249 magnetic particle Substances 0.000 description 1
- 210000004962 mammalian cell Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 239000003550 marker Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000004949 mass spectrometry Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000001404 mediated effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 208000030159 metabolic disease Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 230000002503 metabolic effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000002207 metabolite Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000002923 metal particle Substances 0.000 description 1
- DWCZIOOZPIDHAB-UHFFFAOYSA-L methyl green Chemical compound [Cl-].[Cl-].C1=CC(N(C)C)=CC=C1C(C=1C=CC(=CC=1)[N+](C)(C)C)=C1C=CC(=[N+](C)C)C=C1 DWCZIOOZPIDHAB-UHFFFAOYSA-L 0.000 description 1
- CXKWCBBOMKCUKX-UHFFFAOYSA-M methylene blue Chemical compound [Cl-].C1=CC(N(C)C)=CC2=[S+]C3=CC(N(C)C)=CC=C3N=C21 CXKWCBBOMKCUKX-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 1
- 229960000907 methylthioninium chloride Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 210000001589 microsome Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 238000001634 microspectroscopy Methods 0.000 description 1
- CFCUWKMKBJTWLW-BKHRDMLASA-N mithramycin Chemical compound O([C@@H]1C[C@@H](O[C@H](C)[C@H]1O)OC=1C=C2C=C3C[C@H]([C@@H](C(=O)C3=C(O)C2=C(O)C=1C)O[C@@H]1O[C@H](C)[C@@H](O)[C@H](O[C@@H]2O[C@H](C)[C@H](O)[C@H](O[C@@H]3O[C@H](C)[C@@H](O)[C@@](C)(O)C3)C2)C1)[C@H](OC)C(=O)[C@@H](O)[C@@H](C)O)[C@H]1C[C@@H](O)[C@H](O)[C@@H](C)O1 CFCUWKMKBJTWLW-BKHRDMLASA-N 0.000 description 1
- 238000010369 molecular cloning Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000012544 monitoring process Methods 0.000 description 1
- MLEBFEHOJICQQS-UHFFFAOYSA-N monodansylcadaverine Chemical compound C1=CC=C2C(N(C)C)=CC=CC2=C1S(=O)(=O)NCCCCCN MLEBFEHOJICQQS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 125000004573 morpholin-4-yl group Chemical group N1(CCOCC1)* 0.000 description 1
- 239000012120 mounting media Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000007837 multiplex assay Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000035772 mutation Effects 0.000 description 1
- VMGAPWLDMVPYIA-HIDZBRGKSA-N n'-amino-n-iminomethanimidamide Chemical compound N\N=C\N=N VMGAPWLDMVPYIA-HIDZBRGKSA-N 0.000 description 1
- ZIUHHBKFKCYYJD-UHFFFAOYSA-N n,n'-methylenebisacrylamide Chemical compound C=CC(=O)NCNC(=O)C=C ZIUHHBKFKCYYJD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- ZTLGJPIZUOVDMT-UHFFFAOYSA-N n,n-dichlorotriazin-4-amine Chemical compound ClN(Cl)C1=CC=NN=N1 ZTLGJPIZUOVDMT-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- SHXOKQKTZJXHHR-UHFFFAOYSA-N n,n-diethyl-5-iminobenzo[a]phenoxazin-9-amine;hydrochloride Chemical compound [Cl-].C1=CC=C2C3=NC4=CC=C(N(CC)CC)C=C4OC3=CC(=[NH2+])C2=C1 SHXOKQKTZJXHHR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- CSJXLKVNKAXFSI-UHFFFAOYSA-N n-(2-aminoethyl)-5-(dimethylamino)naphthalene-1-sulfonamide Chemical compound C1=CC=C2C(N(C)C)=CC=CC2=C1S(=O)(=O)NCCN CSJXLKVNKAXFSI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- AFRBPRLOPBAGCM-UHFFFAOYSA-N n-[2-(1h-indol-4-yl)ethyl]-n-propylpropan-1-amine Chemical compound CCCN(CCC)CCC1=CC=CC2=C1C=CN2 AFRBPRLOPBAGCM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229920005615 natural polymer Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 239000013642 negative control Substances 0.000 description 1
- 201000011682 nervous system cancer Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 230000007935 neutral effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- PGSADBUBUOPOJS-UHFFFAOYSA-N neutral red Chemical compound Cl.C1=C(C)C(N)=CC2=NC3=CC(N(C)C)=CC=C3N=C21 PGSADBUBUOPOJS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 238000007481 next generation sequencing Methods 0.000 description 1
- 229910052759 nickel Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 230000009635 nitrosylation Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000010606 normalization Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000001216 nucleic acid method Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000001668 nucleic acid synthesis Methods 0.000 description 1
- 229960002378 oftasceine Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 210000000956 olfactory bulb Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 238000006362 organocatalysis Methods 0.000 description 1
- 210000002220 organoid Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 229910000489 osmium tetroxide Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 239000012285 osmium tetroxide Substances 0.000 description 1
- 150000003891 oxalate salts Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 125000003431 oxalo group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 230000001590 oxidative effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 150000002923 oximes Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 125000000636 p-nitrophenyl group Chemical group [H]C1=C([H])C(=C([H])C([H])=C1*)[N+]([O-])=O 0.000 description 1
- 229910052763 palladium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 230000036961 partial effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000007170 pathology Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000013610 patient sample Substances 0.000 description 1
- 101150092317 pbf1 gene Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 239000008188 pellet Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000000149 penetrating effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- UTIQDNPUHSAVDN-UHFFFAOYSA-N peridinin Natural products CC(=O)OC1CC(C)(C)C(=C=CC(=CC=CC=CC=C2/OC(=O)C(=C2)C=CC34OC3(C)CC(O)CC4(C)C)C)C(C)(O)C1 UTIQDNPUHSAVDN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- KHIWWQKSHDUIBK-UHFFFAOYSA-N periodic acid Chemical compound OI(=O)(=O)=O KHIWWQKSHDUIBK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 230000000737 periodic effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 108040007629 peroxidase activity proteins Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 125000001997 phenyl group Chemical group [H]C1=C([H])C([H])=C(*)C([H])=C1[H] 0.000 description 1
- 150000004713 phosphodiesters Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- QWYZFXLSWMXLDM-UHFFFAOYSA-M pinacyanol iodide Chemical compound [I-].C1=CC2=CC=CC=C2N(CC)C1=CC=CC1=CC=C(C=CC=C2)C2=[N+]1CC QWYZFXLSWMXLDM-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 1
- 125000004194 piperazin-1-yl group Chemical group [H]N1C([H])([H])C([H])([H])N(*)C([H])([H])C1([H])[H] 0.000 description 1
- 210000002706 plastid Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 229910052697 platinum Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 229960003171 plicamycin Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 230000010287 polarization Effects 0.000 description 1
- 229920002796 poly[α-(4-aminobutyl)-L-glycolic acid) Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 239000004584 polyacrylic acid Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229920002647 polyamide Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 238000006068 polycondensation reaction Methods 0.000 description 1
- 229920000647 polyepoxide Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920000728 polyester Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920000570 polyether Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920000573 polyethylene Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920002338 polyhydroxyethylmethacrylate Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920000656 polylysine Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920001451 polypropylene glycol Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920001282 polysaccharide Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 239000005017 polysaccharide Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229920000036 polyvinylpyrrolidone Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 239000001267 polyvinylpyrrolidone Substances 0.000 description 1
- 235000013855 polyvinylpyrrolidone Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 239000013641 positive control Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000012802 pre-warming Methods 0.000 description 1
- 150000003141 primary amines Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 125000002924 primary amino group Chemical group [H]N([H])* 0.000 description 1
- 230000037452 priming Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000006916 protein interaction Effects 0.000 description 1
- 235000018102 proteins Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 230000004850 protein–protein interaction Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000017854 proteolysis Effects 0.000 description 1
- INCIMLINXXICKS-UHFFFAOYSA-M pyronin Y Chemical compound [Cl-].C1=CC(=[N+](C)C)C=C2OC3=CC(N(C)C)=CC=C3C=C21 INCIMLINXXICKS-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 1
- 238000012175 pyrosequencing Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000002096 quantum dot Substances 0.000 description 1
- 150000003242 quaternary ammonium salts Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 238000010791 quenching Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000000171 quenching effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000001397 quillaja saponaria molina bark Substances 0.000 description 1
- UKOBAUFLOGFCMV-UHFFFAOYSA-N quinacrine mustard Chemical compound C1=C(Cl)C=CC2=C(NC(C)CCCN(CCCl)CCCl)C3=CC(OC)=CC=C3N=C21 UKOBAUFLOGFCMV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- RJSRSRITMWVIQT-UHFFFAOYSA-N quinolin-6-amine Chemical compound N1=CC=CC2=CC(N)=CC=C21 RJSRSRITMWVIQT-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000012070 reactive reagent Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000008707 rearrangement Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000009467 reduction Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000002829 reductive effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 102000037983 regulatory factors Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108091008025 regulatory factors Proteins 0.000 description 1
- BOLDJAUMGUJJKM-LSDHHAIUSA-N renifolin D Natural products CC(=C)[C@@H]1Cc2c(O)c(O)ccc2[C@H]1CC(=O)c3ccc(O)cc3O BOLDJAUMGUJJKM-LSDHHAIUSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 238000002271 resection Methods 0.000 description 1
- HSSLDCABUXLXKM-UHFFFAOYSA-N resorufin Chemical compound C1=CC(=O)C=C2OC3=CC(O)=CC=C3N=C21 HSSLDCABUXLXKM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 230000004043 responsiveness Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000012552 review Methods 0.000 description 1
- MYFATKRONKHHQL-UHFFFAOYSA-N rhodamine 123 Chemical compound [Cl-].COC(=O)C1=CC=CC=C1C1=C2C=CC(=[NH2+])C=C2OC2=CC(N)=CC=C21 MYFATKRONKHHQL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- XFKVYXCRNATCOO-UHFFFAOYSA-M rhodamine 6G Chemical compound [Cl-].C=12C=C(C)C(NCC)=CC2=[O+]C=2C=C(NCC)C(C)=CC=2C=1C1=CC=CC=C1C(=O)OCC XFKVYXCRNATCOO-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 1
- 239000001022 rhodamine dye Substances 0.000 description 1
- 108700038288 rhodamine-phalloidin Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 229910052703 rhodium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 102200089551 rs5030826 Human genes 0.000 description 1
- OARRHUQTFTUEOS-UHFFFAOYSA-N safranin Chemical compound [Cl-].C=12C=C(N)C(C)=CC2=NC2=CC(C)=C(N)C=C2[N+]=1C1=CC=CC=C1 OARRHUQTFTUEOS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 210000003296 saliva Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 239000012266 salt solution Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229930182490 saponin Natural products 0.000 description 1
- 150000007949 saponins Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 229940016590 sarkosyl Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 238000004626 scanning electron microscopy Methods 0.000 description 1
- 150000003335 secondary amines Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 230000011218 segmentation Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000004065 semiconductor Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000011896 sensitive detection Methods 0.000 description 1
- 210000002966 serum Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 230000011664 signaling Effects 0.000 description 1
- 229910052709 silver Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 239000004332 silver Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000011734 sodium Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229910052708 sodium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 239000001509 sodium citrate Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229910001415 sodium ion Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 229940045885 sodium lauroyl sarcosinate Drugs 0.000 description 1
- UGJCNRLBGKEGEH-UHFFFAOYSA-N sodium-binding benzofuran isophthalate Chemical compound COC1=CC=2C=C(C=3C(=CC(=CC=3)C(O)=O)C(O)=O)OC=2C=C1N(CCOCC1)CCOCCOCCN1C(C(=CC=1C=2)OC)=CC=1OC=2C1=CC=C(C(O)=O)C=C1C(O)=O UGJCNRLBGKEGEH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000007787 solid Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000002904 solvent Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000000527 sonication Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000001570 sorbitan monopalmitate Substances 0.000 description 1
- 235000011071 sorbitan monopalmitate Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 229940031953 sorbitan monopalmitate Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 238000012732 spatial analysis Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000003860 storage Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000004960 subcellular localization Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000006467 substitution reaction Methods 0.000 description 1
- 150000008163 sugars Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 230000019635 sulfation Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000005670 sulfation reaction Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000010869 super-resolution microscopy Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000001356 surgical procedure Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000008961 swelling Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000002123 temporal effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 150000003512 tertiary amines Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- LQSATJAZEBYDQQ-UHFFFAOYSA-J tetrapotassium;2-[4-[bis(carboxylatomethyl)amino]-3-(carboxylatomethoxy)phenyl]-1h-indole-6-carboxylate Chemical compound [K+].[K+].[K+].[K+].C1=C(N(CC([O-])=O)CC([O-])=O)C(OCC(=O)[O-])=CC(C=2NC3=CC(=CC=C3C=2)C([O-])=O)=C1 LQSATJAZEBYDQQ-UHFFFAOYSA-J 0.000 description 1
- QOFZZTBWWJNFCA-UHFFFAOYSA-N texas red-X Chemical compound [O-]S(=O)(=O)C1=CC(S(=O)(=O)NCCCCCC(=O)O)=CC=C1C(C1=CC=2CCCN3CCCC(C=23)=C1O1)=C2C1=C(CCC1)C3=[N+]1CCCC3=C2 QOFZZTBWWJNFCA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- ACOJCCLIDPZYJC-UHFFFAOYSA-M thiazole orange Chemical compound CC1=CC=C(S([O-])(=O)=O)C=C1.C1=CC=C2C(C=C3N(C4=CC=CC=C4S3)C)=CC=[N+](C)C2=C1 ACOJCCLIDPZYJC-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 1
- PMMYEEVYMWASQN-IUYQGCFVSA-N trans-4-hydroxy-D-proline Chemical compound O[C@@H]1CN[C@@H](C(O)=O)C1 PMMYEEVYMWASQN-IUYQGCFVSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 238000013520 translational research Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000004627 transmission electron microscopy Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000017105 transposition Effects 0.000 description 1
- GPRLSGONYQIRFK-MNYXATJNSA-N triton Chemical compound [3H+] GPRLSGONYQIRFK-MNYXATJNSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000012588 trypsin Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000005641 tunneling Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000034512 ubiquitination Effects 0.000 description 1
- 210000002700 urine Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 239000011534 wash buffer Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000001993 wax Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229940075420 xanthine Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 229910052727 yttrium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 229910052725 zinc Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 239000011701 zinc Substances 0.000 description 1
Images
Classifications
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G01—MEASURING; TESTING
- G01N—INVESTIGATING OR ANALYSING MATERIALS BY DETERMINING THEIR CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
- G01N33/00—Investigating or analysing materials by specific methods not covered by groups G01N1/00 - G01N31/00
- G01N33/48—Biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Haemocytometers
- G01N33/50—Chemical analysis of biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Testing involving biospecific ligand binding methods; Immunological testing
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C12—BIOCHEMISTRY; BEER; SPIRITS; WINE; VINEGAR; MICROBIOLOGY; ENZYMOLOGY; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING
- C12Q—MEASURING OR TESTING PROCESSES INVOLVING ENZYMES, NUCLEIC ACIDS OR MICROORGANISMS; COMPOSITIONS OR TEST PAPERS THEREFOR; PROCESSES OF PREPARING SUCH COMPOSITIONS; CONDITION-RESPONSIVE CONTROL IN MICROBIOLOGICAL OR ENZYMOLOGICAL PROCESSES
- C12Q1/00—Measuring or testing processes involving enzymes, nucleic acids or microorganisms; Compositions therefor; Processes of preparing such compositions
- C12Q1/68—Measuring or testing processes involving enzymes, nucleic acids or microorganisms; Compositions therefor; Processes of preparing such compositions involving nucleic acids
- C12Q1/6813—Hybridisation assays
- C12Q1/6841—In situ hybridisation
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C12—BIOCHEMISTRY; BEER; SPIRITS; WINE; VINEGAR; MICROBIOLOGY; ENZYMOLOGY; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING
- C12Q—MEASURING OR TESTING PROCESSES INVOLVING ENZYMES, NUCLEIC ACIDS OR MICROORGANISMS; COMPOSITIONS OR TEST PAPERS THEREFOR; PROCESSES OF PREPARING SUCH COMPOSITIONS; CONDITION-RESPONSIVE CONTROL IN MICROBIOLOGICAL OR ENZYMOLOGICAL PROCESSES
- C12Q1/00—Measuring or testing processes involving enzymes, nucleic acids or microorganisms; Compositions therefor; Processes of preparing such compositions
- C12Q1/68—Measuring or testing processes involving enzymes, nucleic acids or microorganisms; Compositions therefor; Processes of preparing such compositions involving nucleic acids
- C12Q1/6806—Preparing nucleic acids for analysis, e.g. for polymerase chain reaction [PCR] assay
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C12—BIOCHEMISTRY; BEER; SPIRITS; WINE; VINEGAR; MICROBIOLOGY; ENZYMOLOGY; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING
- C12Q—MEASURING OR TESTING PROCESSES INVOLVING ENZYMES, NUCLEIC ACIDS OR MICROORGANISMS; COMPOSITIONS OR TEST PAPERS THEREFOR; PROCESSES OF PREPARING SUCH COMPOSITIONS; CONDITION-RESPONSIVE CONTROL IN MICROBIOLOGICAL OR ENZYMOLOGICAL PROCESSES
- C12Q1/00—Measuring or testing processes involving enzymes, nucleic acids or microorganisms; Compositions therefor; Processes of preparing such compositions
- C12Q1/68—Measuring or testing processes involving enzymes, nucleic acids or microorganisms; Compositions therefor; Processes of preparing such compositions involving nucleic acids
- C12Q1/6813—Hybridisation assays
- C12Q1/6816—Hybridisation assays characterised by the detection means
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C12—BIOCHEMISTRY; BEER; SPIRITS; WINE; VINEGAR; MICROBIOLOGY; ENZYMOLOGY; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING
- C12Q—MEASURING OR TESTING PROCESSES INVOLVING ENZYMES, NUCLEIC ACIDS OR MICROORGANISMS; COMPOSITIONS OR TEST PAPERS THEREFOR; PROCESSES OF PREPARING SUCH COMPOSITIONS; CONDITION-RESPONSIVE CONTROL IN MICROBIOLOGICAL OR ENZYMOLOGICAL PROCESSES
- C12Q1/00—Measuring or testing processes involving enzymes, nucleic acids or microorganisms; Compositions therefor; Processes of preparing such compositions
- C12Q1/68—Measuring or testing processes involving enzymes, nucleic acids or microorganisms; Compositions therefor; Processes of preparing such compositions involving nucleic acids
- C12Q1/6813—Hybridisation assays
- C12Q1/6816—Hybridisation assays characterised by the detection means
- C12Q1/6823—Release of bound markers
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C12—BIOCHEMISTRY; BEER; SPIRITS; WINE; VINEGAR; MICROBIOLOGY; ENZYMOLOGY; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING
- C12Q—MEASURING OR TESTING PROCESSES INVOLVING ENZYMES, NUCLEIC ACIDS OR MICROORGANISMS; COMPOSITIONS OR TEST PAPERS THEREFOR; PROCESSES OF PREPARING SUCH COMPOSITIONS; CONDITION-RESPONSIVE CONTROL IN MICROBIOLOGICAL OR ENZYMOLOGICAL PROCESSES
- C12Q1/00—Measuring or testing processes involving enzymes, nucleic acids or microorganisms; Compositions therefor; Processes of preparing such compositions
- C12Q1/68—Measuring or testing processes involving enzymes, nucleic acids or microorganisms; Compositions therefor; Processes of preparing such compositions involving nucleic acids
- C12Q1/6876—Nucleic acid products used in the analysis of nucleic acids, e.g. primers or probes
Definitions
- the present disclosure relates in some aspects to compositions and methods for catalytic de-crosslinking of a fixed biological sample and for preparing the biological sample for in situ analysis.
- Methods are available for analyzing analytes such as nucleic acids and proteins present in a biological sample, e.g., a cell or tissue sample.
- Current methods for analyzing analytes in situ can have low sensitivity and specificity, have high background and/or low signal-to-noise ratio (e.g., due to autofluorescence), have limited plexity, or be biased, time-consuming, labor-intensive, and/or error-prone.
- Improved methods for analyzing analytes in a biological sample are needed. Provided herein are methods and compositions that meet such and other needs.
- Nucleic acid probe-based assay methods for in situ analysis such as single molecule fluorescent hybridization (smFISH) have enabled nanoscale-resolution imaging of RNA in cells and tissues.
- smFISH single molecule fluorescent hybridization
- most methods of analyte detection are not compatible with fixed tissues without specific sample preparation to clear crosslinking and render analytes accessible to biochemical reactions.
- background autofluorescence can arise from and/or be exacerbated by sample fixation/crosslinking, such as formalin-fixation. Background autofluorescence may have a significant, ongoing impact on the ability to detect and resolve fluorescence signals from analytes of interest over other components also present in the biological samples, especially when analysis is carried out over multiple rounds of imaging.
- molecular crosslinks may render analytes (e.g., nucleic acid sequences, epitopes, and/or antigens) less accessible to detection reagents such as labelling agents (e.g., nucleic acid probes targeting cellular DNA or RNA, or antibodies targeting protein analytes), thereby reducing detection efficiency and sensitivity.
- detection reagents such as labelling agents (e.g., nucleic acid probes targeting cellular DNA or RNA, or antibodies targeting protein analytes), thereby reducing detection efficiency and sensitivity.
- a method comprising: a) providing a biological sample immobilized on a substrate, wherein the biological sample is fixed; b) contacting the biological sample with a catalyst that catalyzes de-crosslinking of molecular crosslinks in the biological sample; c) contacting the biological sample with a labelling agent that directly or indirectly binds to an analyte at a location in the biological sample; and d) detecting an optical signal associated with the labelling agent or a product thereof, thereby detecting the analyte at the location in the biological sample.
- a method for sample analysis comprising: a) providing a biological sample immobilized on a substrate, wherein the biological sample is fixed; b) contacting the biological sample with a catalyst that catalyzes de-crosslinking of molecular crosslinks in the biological sample; c) contacting the biological sample with a labelling agent that directly or indirectly binds to an analyte at a location in the biological sample; and d) detecting an optical signal associated with the labelling agent or a product thereof, thereby detecting the analyte at the location in the biological sample.
- the molecular crosslinks are products of one or more crosslinking agents.
- the one or more crosslinking agents comprise an aldehyde, optionally wherein the crosslinking agent comprises formaldehyde.
- the molecular crosslinks can be on RNA, DNA, protein, carbohydrate, lipid, and/or other molecules in the biological sample.
- the catalyst can catalyze de-crosslinking of inter-molecular crosslinks and/or intra-molecular crosslinks in the biological sample, optionally wherein the inter-molecular crosslinks and/or intra-molecular crosslinks comprise an aminal bridge.
- the catalyst can be a water-soluble catalyst.
- the catalyst can be an organic molecule.
- the catalyst can be a transimination catalyst.
- the catalyst can catalyze de-crosslinking of aminal crosslinks in the biological sample.
- the catalyst can catalyze breakdown of hemi-aminal adducts and/or aminal adducts in the biological sample.
- the catalyst can be a compound of formula (I),
- A is selected from the group consisting of —COOH, —P( ⁇ O)(OH) 2 , and S( ⁇ O) 2 OH;
- X 1 , X 2 , X 3 , and X 4 are each independently selected from the group consisting of: CH, CR a , and N;
- each occurrence of R a is independently selected from the group consisting of C 1-6 alkyl, C 1-6 haloalkyl, C 1-6 alkoxy, —NO 2 , —NR′R′′, and —C( ⁇ O)NR′R′′; and each occurrence of R′ and R′′ is independently selected from the group consisting of H and C 1-6 alkyl which is optionally substituted with
- n1 is an integer from 12 to 16.
- the catalyst can comprise one or more compounds selected from the group consisting of
- the catalyst can comprise
- the catalyst can comprise
- the catalyst can comprise
- the catalyst can comprise
- the catalyst can comprise
- the catalyst can comprise
- the catalyst can be a compound of formula (II),
- L 1 is selected from the group consisting of —O—, —N(H)—, —N(C 1-3 alkyl)-, —N(CH 2 CH 2 O) 1-10 —CH 3 —, —S(O) 0-2 —, —CH 2 —, and a bond
- R 1 is selected from the group consisting of: H; C 1-6 alkyl; C 1-6 haloalkyl; C 6-10 aryl optionally substituted with 1-4 R b ; and 5- to 10-membered heteroaryl, wherein 1-4 ring atoms are heteroatoms each independently selected from the group consisting of: N, N(H), N(C 1-3 alkyl), O, and S, wherein the heteroaryl is optionally substituted with 1-4 independently selected R b ; and each R b is independently selected from the group consisting of: halo, cyano, —OH, —NH 2 ,
- the catalyst comprises
- the substrate can comprise a planar surface configured to contact the biological sample.
- the substrate may but does not need to comprise a bead, particle, or microwell.
- the substrate can be transparent.
- the substrate can be a glass slide or a plastic slide.
- the substrate may but does not need to comprise nucleic acid immobilized thereon prior to contacting the biological sample.
- the biological sample can be a tissue section. In any of the preceding embodiments, the biological sample can comprise cells immobilized on the substrate. In some embodiments, the cells are dissociated cells, cultured cells, and/or cells isolated from a subject. In any of the preceding embodiments, the biological sample can be an aldehyde-fixed biological sample. In any of the preceding embodiments, the biological sample can be a formaldehyde-fixed biological sample. In any of the preceding embodiments, the biological sample can be a paraffinzed biological sample. In some embodiments, the biological sample is a formaldehyde-fixed paraffin-embedded (FFPE) biological sample. In any of the preceding embodiments, the biological sample can be a fresh frozen biological sample that has been crosslinked.
- FFPE formaldehyde-fixed paraffin-embedded
- the method can comprise, prior to contacting the biological sample with the catalyst, a step of dehydrating the biological sample.
- the dehydrating step comprises drying the biological sample at 42° C. for 3 hours or drying the biological sample at room temperature overnight.
- the method can comprise, prior to contacting the biological sample with the catalyst, a step of baking the biological sample.
- the baking step comprises baking the biological sample uncovered at 60° C. for 2 hours.
- the method can comprise, prior to contacting the biological sample with the catalyst, a step of de-paraffinizing the biological sample.
- the de-paraffinizing comprises contacting the biological sample with xylene, ethanol, and water, or, sequentially contacting the biological sample with xylene, absolute ethanol, about 96% ethanol, and about 70% ethanol.
- the method can comprise, prior to contacting the biological sample with the catalyst, a step of re-hydrating the biological sample.
- the re-hydrating comprises sequentially contacting the biological sample with 100% ethanol, 100% ethanol, 96% ethanol, 70% ethanol, each for 3 minutes, followed by contacting the biological sample with nuclease free water for 20 seconds.
- the method can comprise, prior to contacting the biological sample with the catalyst, a step of pretreating the biological sample.
- the pretreating comprises contacting the biological sample with a proteinase.
- the proteinase is a collagenase.
- the proteinase is present in a solution or suspension comprising a buffer.
- the method can comprise, prior to contacting the biological sample with the catalyst, a step of permeabilizing the biological sample.
- the method can comprise, prior to contacting the biological sample with the catalyst, a step of staining the biological sample and imaging the stained biological sample.
- the staining comprises the use of a histological stain and/or an immunological stain.
- the catalyst can be contacted with the biological sample at a concentration between about 5 mM and about 500 mM. In any of the preceding embodiments, the catalyst can be contacted with the biological sample at a concentration between about 10 mM and about 400 mM. In any of the preceding embodiments, the catalyst can be contacted with the biological sample at a concentration between about 50 mM and about 300 mM. In any of the preceding embodiments, the catalyst can be contacted with the biological sample at a concentration between about 75 mM and about 250 mM In any of the preceding embodiments, the catalyst can be contacted with the biological sample at a concentration between about 100 mM and about 200 mM.
- the catalyst can be contacted with the biological sample for about 1 minute to about 150 minutes. In any of the preceding embodiments, the catalyst can be contacted with the biological sample for about 5 minute to about 100 minutes. In any of the preceding embodiments, the catalyst can be contacted with the biological sample for about 10 minute to about 50 minutes. In any of the preceding embodiments, the catalyst can be contacted with the biological sample for about 15 minute to about 30 minutes.
- the catalyst can be contacted with the biological sample at a temperature between about 5° C. and about 100° C. In any of the preceding embodiments, the catalyst can be contacted with the biological sample at a temperature between about 50° C. and about 95° C. In any of the preceding embodiments, the catalyst can be contacted with the biological sample at a temperature between about 75° C. and about 90° C. In some embodiments, the catalyst is contacted with the biological sample at 80° C. for 30 minutes.
- a solution or a suspension comprising the catalyst and a buffer can contacted with the biological sample.
- the buffer comprises citrate, tris(hydroxymethyl)aminomethane (Tris), phosphate-buffered saline (PBS), 2-[4- ⁇ (2-hydroxyethyl)piperazin-1-yl]ethanesulfonic acid (HEPES), 2-(N-morpholino)ethanesulfonic acid (IMES), or a combination thereof.
- the buffer can comprise dimethyl sulfoxide (DMSO).
- the buffer can comprise Tris and a chelating agent, optionally wherein the chelating agent is ethylenediaminetetraacetic acid (EDTA) and the buffer is Tris-EDTA (TE).
- the buffer can be present in the solution or suspension at a concentration between about 5 mM and about 250 mM. In any of the preceding embodiments, the buffer can be present in the solution or suspension at a concentration between about 100 mM and about 200 mM In any of the preceding embodiments, the solution or suspension can have a pH between about 4 and about 10, In any of the preceding embodiments, the solution or suspension can have a pH between about 6 and about 8.
- the solution or suspension can comprise sodium dodecyl sulfate (SDS), urea, and/or a proteinase.
- the proteinase is proteinase K.
- the solution or suspension can comprise sodium dodecyl sulfate (SDS) and proteinase K.
- the solution or suspension can comprise urea and proteinase K.
- the urea concentration is between about 0.01 M and about 1 M.
- the proteinase K concentration is between about 0.1 ⁇ g/mL and about 2 ⁇ g/mL.
- the urea concentration is about 0.5 M and the proteinase K concentration is between about 0.5 ⁇ g/mL and about 1 ⁇ g/mL.
- contacting the biological sample with the catalyst can substantially preserve adhesion of the biological sample to the substrate, and/or contacting the biological sample with the catalyst can substantially preserve integrity of the biological sample.
- the method can comprise: after contacting the biological sample with the catalyst, a step of washing the biological sample, optionally wherein the washing comprises washing the biological sample in phosphate-buffered saline with Tween detergent (PBST) for 1 minute for three times: a step of permeabilizing the biological sample before, during, and/or after contacting the biological sample with the catalyst; and/or a step of staining the biological sample and imaging the stained biological sample, optionally wherein the staining comprises the use of a histological stain and/or an immunological stain.
- PBST phosphate-buffered saline with Tween detergent
- the analyte or product thereof can remain in the biological sample during the contacting with the catalyst, during the contacting with the labelling agent, and during detecting the optical signal; and/or the analyte or product thereof. Can substantially remain at the location during the contacting with the catalyst, during the contacting with the labelling agent, and during detecting the optical signal.
- the method nay but does not need to comprise migrating the analyte or a product thereof towards the substrate.
- the migration is passive migration or active migration.
- the method may but does not need to comprise migrating the analyte or a product thereof outside the biological sample.
- the method may but does not need to comprise capturing the analyte or a product thereof by a capture agent immobilized on the substrate.
- the labelling agent may but does not need to be immobilized on the substrate prior to contacting the biological sample.
- a solution or a suspension comprising the labelling agent can be contacted with the biological sample.
- the labelling agent can comprise a binding moiety.
- the binding moiety comprises a nucleic acid or an antibody or epitope binding fragment thereof.
- the labelling agent can comprise a detectable label.
- the detectable label comprises a nucleic acid or an optically detectable label.
- the labelling agent can comprise a reporter oligonucleotide.
- the reporter oligonucleotide comprises a barcode sequence.
- the analyte is a cellular nucleic acid.
- the cellular nucleic acid is genomic DNA, mRNA, or cDNA.
- the labelling agent is a primary probe that hybridizes to the cellular nucleic acid.
- the primary probe comprises a barcode sequence.
- the primary probe can be selected from the group consisting of: a primary probe comprising a 3′ or 5′ overhang upon hybridization to the cellular nucleic acid, optionally wherein the 3′ or 5′ overhang comprises one or more barcode sequences; a primary probe comprising a 3′ overhang and a 5′ overhang upon hybridization to the cellular nucleic acid, optionally wherein the 3′ overhang and the 5′ overhang each independently comprises one or more barcode sequences; a circular primary probe; a circularizable primary probe or probe set; a primary probe or probe set comprising a split hybridization region configured to hybridize to a splint, optionally wherein the split hybridization region comprises one or more barcode sequences; and a combination thereof.
- the labelling agent is a detectable probe that hybridizes to a primary probe or a product or complex thereof, wherein the primary probe hybridizes to the cellular nucleic acid.
- the product or complex of the primary probe is selected from the group consisting of: a rolling circle amplification (RCA) product, a complex comprising an initiator and an amplifier for hybridization chain reaction (HCR), a complex comprising an initiator and an amplifier for linear oligonucleotide hybridization chain reaction (LO-HCR), a primer exchange reaction (PER) product, and a complex comprising a pre-amplifier and an amplifier for branched DNA (bDNA).
- the detectable probe can hybridize to a barcode sequence in the primary probe or product or complex thereof. In any of the preceding embodiments, the detectable probe can comprise a barcode sequence in a region that does not hybridize to the primary probe or product or complex thereof.
- the detectable probe can be selected from the group consisting of: a detectable probe comprising a 3′ or 5′ overhang upon hybridization to the primary probe or product or complex thereof, optionally wherein the 3′ or 5′ overhang comprises one or more barcode sequences; a detectable probe comprising a 3′ overhang and a 5′ overhang upon hybridization to the primary probe or product or complex thereof, optionally wherein the 3′ overhang and the 5′ overhang each independently comprises one or more barcode sequences; a circular detectable probe; a circularizable detectable probe or probe set; a detectable probe or probe set comprising a split hybridization region configured to hybridize to a splint, optionally wherein the split hybridization region comprises one or more barcode sequences; and a combination thereof.
- the detectable probe can comprise a fluorescent label.
- the detectable probe can comprise a region for binding to a fluorescently labelled probe.
- the analyte can comprise a non-nucleic acid moiety, optionally wherein the non-nucleic acid moiety is a protein, a carbohydrate, a lipid, a small molecule, or a complex thereof.
- the labelling agent comprises i) an analyte-binding region that directly or indirectly binds to the non-nucleic acid moiety and ii) a reporter oligonucleotide, optionally wherein the analyte-binding region is an antibody or epitope binding fragment thereof.
- the method can comprise: contacting the biological sample with a first labelling agent that directly or indirectly binds to a nucleic acid analyte at a first location in the biological sample, and detecting a first optical signal associated with the first labelling agent or a product thereof, and contacting the biological sample with a second labelling agent that directly or indirectly binds to a protein analyte at a second location in the biological sample, and detecting a second optical signal associated with the second labelling agent or a product thereof, thereby detecting the nucleic acid analyte and the protein analyte at the first and second locations in the biological sample, respectively.
- the nucleic acid analyte is an mRNA
- the protein analyte is an intracellular protein, a membrane-bound protein, or an extracellular protein.
- the first and second locations can be the same location or different locations.
- the product of the labelling agent can be generated in situ in the biological sample.
- the optical signal can be detected in situ in the biological sample.
- the optical signal can be detected by imaging the biological sample. In some embodiments, the imaging comprises fluorescent microscopy.
- the number of optical signals detected in a unit area in the biological sample can be greater than that without contacting the biological sample with the catalyst.
- the analyte comprises a nucleic acid and the number of optical signals detected per unit nuclei area in the biological sample can be greater than that without contacting the biological sample with the catalyst.
- the intensity of the optical signal detected in the biological sample can be greater than that without contacting the biological sample with the catalyst.
- the signal-to-noise ratio of the optical signal detected in the biological sample can be greater than that without contacting the biological sample with the catalyst.
- a method for sample analysis comprising: a) contacting a biological sample with a catalyst that catalyzes de-crosslinking of molecular crosslinks in the biological sample, wherein the biological sample is a formaldehyde-fixed biological sample immobilized on a substrate before contacting with the catalyst, and wherein the catalyst is a compound of formula (I),
- A is selected from the group consisting of —COOH, —P( ⁇ O)(OH) 2 , and S( ⁇ O) 2 OH;
- X 1 , X 2 , X 3 , and X 4 are each independently selected from the group consisting of: CH, CR a , and N;
- each occurrence of R a is independently selected from the group consisting of C 1-6 alkyl, C 1-6 haloalkyl, C 1-6 alkoxy, —NO 2 , —NR′R′′, and —C( ⁇ O)NR′R′′; and each occurrence of R′ and R′′ is independently selected from the group consisting of H and C 1-6 alkyl which is optionally substituted with
- n1 is an integer from 12 to 16; b) contacting the biological sample with a detectable probe that directly or indirectly binds to a nucleic acid at a first location in the biological sample; and c) detecting an optical signal associated with the detectable probe, thereby detecting the nucleic acid at the first location in the biological sample.
- the biological sample is contacted with a solution or suspension comprising the catalyst in a citrate buffer between pH 5 and pH 7. In some embodiments, the biological sample is contacted with a solution or suspension comprising the catalyst in a TE buffer between pH 8.5 and pH 9.5. In some embodiments, the biological sample is contacted with a solution or suspension comprising the catalyst in a PBS buffer between pH 6.8 and pH 8.0. In any of the preceding embodiments, the catalyst concentration in the solution or suspension can be between about 50 mM and about 400 mM. In any of the preceding embodiments, the catalyst concentration in the solution or suspension can be between about 100 mM and about 200 mM.
- the biological sample can be catalytically de-crosslinked at a temperature between about 60° C. and about 95° C. In any of the preceding embodiments, the biological sample can be catalytically de-crosslinked at a temperature between about 70° C. and about 90° C. In any of the preceding embodiments, the biological sample can be catalytically de-crosslinked at a temperature between about 75° C. and about 85° C. In any of the preceding embodiments, the biological sample can be catalytically de-crosslinked at a temperature between about 75° C. and about 85° C. In any of the preceding embodiments, the biological sample can be catalytically de-crosslinked for about 5 minutes to about 1 hour. In any of the preceding embodiments, the biological sample can be catalytically de-crosslinked for about 10 minutes to about 45 minutes. In any of the preceding embodiments, the biological sample can be catalytically de-crosslinked for about 15 minutes to about 30 minutes.
- the nucleic acid can be an RNA in the biological sample. In any of the preceding embodiments, the nucleic acid can be a nucleic acid probe that directly or indirectly binds to an RNA in the biological sample. In any of the preceding embodiments, the nucleic acid can be a product of an RNA in the biological sample, optionally wherein the nucleic acid is a cDNA of the RNA. In any of the preceding embodiments, the nucleic acid can be a product of a nucleic acid probe that directly or indirectly binds to an RNA in the biological sample. In some embodiments, the nucleic acid is a rolling circle amplification product (RCP).
- RCP rolling circle amplification product
- the method can comprise: d) contacting the biological sample with a detectably labelled antibody or an epitope binding fragment thereof that binds to a polypeptide or complex thereof at a second location in the biological sample; and e) detecting an optical signal associated with the detectably labelled antibody, thereby detecting the polypeptide or complex thereof at the second location in the biological sample.
- the detectably labelled antibody comprises a fluorophore.
- the detectably labelled antibody comprises a reporter oligonucleotide.
- the optical signal associated with the detectably labelled antibody is detected using a detectable probe that directly or indirectly binds to the reporter oligonucleotide.
- a method for sample analysis which includes contacting a biological sample with a catalyst that catalyzes de-crosslinking of molecular crosslinks in the biological sample, wherein the biological sample is a sectioned formaldehyde-fixed cell or tissue sample immobilized on a substrate before contacting with the catalyst; contacting the biological sample with a detectable probe that directly or indirectly binds to an RNA analyte at a first location in the biological sample; detecting an optical signal associated with the detectable probe, thereby detecting the RNA analyte at the first location in the biological sample; contacting the biological sample with a detectably labelled antibody or an epitope binding fragment thereof that binds to a polypeptide or complex thereof at a second location in the biological sample; and detecting an optical signal associated with the detectably labelled antibody, thereby detecting the polypeptide or complex thereof at the second location in the biological sample.
- the optical signals are detected by imaging the biological sample on the substrate.
- FIG. 1 depicts the workflow of an exemplary method disclosed herein.
- FIGS. 2 A- 2 B depict exemplary reactions of fixation chemistry and reversal of molecular crosslinks.
- FIG. 2 A shows formaldehyde fixation affords stable, inert crosslinks between amine residues (e.g., aminal bond, CH 2 -linked amine).
- FIG. 2 B depicts an example of catalytic reversal of aminal crosslinks using a combination of acid catalysis and nucleophilic catalysis.
- FIG. 3 A depicts structures of an exemplary catalyst.
- the pK a2 does not change significantly but the nucleophilicity (N) of —NH 2 does.
- FIG. 3 B depicts structures of an exemplary catalyst under different pH and examples of pH-dependent acid catalysis.
- both compound A and compound B exist in solution at pH 6.8, but only compound B with —COOH catalyzes de-crosslinking reaction.
- the compound exists mostly as a deprotonated form (compound A), which does not catalyze the de-crosslinking reaction.
- FIG. 3 C depicts exemplary phosphonic acid catalysts which perform well at pH 6.8 since —OH of the phosphonic acid exists in solution to catalyze a de-crosslinking reaction.
- FIG. 4 shows detected rolling circle amplification product (RCP) signal density (count/ ⁇ m 2 nuclei area) in catalytically de-crosslinked human breast cancer samples compared to control samples de-crosslinked using a steamer.
- RCP rolling circle amplification product
- FIGS. 5 A- 5 B show representative images of anti-panCK antibody staining in FFPE human breast cancer samples catalytically de-crosslinked in citrate buffer ( FIG. 5 A ) or TE buffer ( FIG. 5 B ), compared to a control sample de-crosslinked using a steamer.
- FIG. 6 shows representative DPAI images of the de-crosslinked FFPE human breast cancer samples.
- FIG. 7 A shows representative images of catalytically de-crosslinked FFPE human breast cancer, melanoma, lymph node, lung cancer, and normal lung tissue samples analyzed using detectable probes targeting RCPs associated with GAPDH/RPLPO in the samples.
- FIG. 7 B shows representative images of catalytically de-crosslinked FFPE human breast cancer, melanoma, lymph node, lung cancer, and normal lung tissue samples stained with an anti-Vimentin antibody.
- FIG. 7 C shows overlaid images of nucleic acid detection and protein detection across the tissue types.
- FIG. 8 shows representative images with detected RCP signals (left panel) and detected RCP signal intensity above local background (mean) (right panel) in catalytically de-crosslinked FFPE normal lung tissue samples.
- FIG. 9 shows representative images with detected RCP signals and detected RCP signal intensity above local background (mean) in catalytically de-crosslinked FFPE mouse brain tissue sections.
- FIG. 10 A- 10 C shows detected rolling circle amplification product (RCP) signal density (count/ ⁇ m 2 nuclei area) in catalytically de-crosslinked human breast cancer samples with Compound 1 and various additives (e.g., SDS, proteinase K, and/or urea) compared to control samples de-crosslinked using Compound 1 only.
- RCP rolling circle amplification product
- compositions and methods are needed for analyzing the spatial localization of analytes in a biological sample, such as various archived tissue materials comprising molecular crosslinks.
- Formalin/formaldehyde fixation is a dominant method for storage of primary tissue samples for pathology and life science research due to its robustness in maintaining tissue architecture at even ambient temperatures.
- most methods of analyte detection are not compatible with fixed tissues without specific sample preparation to clear crosslinking and render analytes accessible to biochemical reactions, including those amenable to signal detection and/or amplification.
- Antigen retrieval is commonly employed using a combination of heat, temperature, buffer, and sometimes pressure to expose antigens for more effective antibody staining, and proteinase digestion or other forms of de-crosslinking are employed to enable effective nucleic acid detection.
- compositions and methods that involve catalytic de-crosslinking for preparing samples, such as FFPE cell and tissue samples.
- a sample such as an otherwise inaccessible fixed or FFPE sample can be treated with a buffer comprising a catalyst or a precursor thereof to provide accessibility of target analyte molecules in the sample for in situ analysis.
- a sample such as an FFPE sample can be de-paraffinized.
- the de-paraffinized sample can be contacted with a buffer (e.g., a citrate buffer) comprising an effective concentration of a catalyst or a precursor thereof for a period of time.
- the sample can be incubated in a buffer together with the catalyst, e.g., a heated buffer.
- the buffer can have antigen retrieving effect.
- the buffer can facilitate and/or promote catalytic de-crosslinking by the catalyst.
- antigen retrieving due to catalytic de-crosslinking can be combined with heating the sample and/or the buffer (e.g., in a thermocycler), and/or be combined with an antigen retrieving effect of the buffer.
- the sample can be washed using a buffer, such as a heated antigen retriever buffer or another buffer to remove products of the de-crosslinking reaction. After the de-crosslinking incubation and/or the de-crosslinking wash, the sample can be subjected to probe/antibody binding and downstream imaging and analysis.
- provided herein are various catalysts, buffer compositions comprising one or more catalysts, combinations of one or more catalysts with one or more other de-crosslinking agents including enzymes/proteases, and/or compositions comprising crowding agents (e.g., PEG20k MW, to mitigate potential RNA loss during de-crosslinking).
- methods involving catalytic de-crosslinking using any one or more of the compositions disclosed herein are methods involving catalytic de-crosslinking for various time periods and/or at various temperatures, optionally with heating and/or one or more post-de-crosslinking washes.
- the temperature of the sample can be adjusted as needed prior to, during, and/or after de-crosslinking, for example, by controlling the rate of thermocycler heating up/down.
- the methods can optionally include staining and/or imaging of the fixed biological sample (e.g., tissue section), of the de-crosslinked biological sample (e.g., tissue section), or both.
- a stain can be any appropriate stain, such as a histological stain (e.g., hematoxylin and eosin) or an immunological stain (e.g., an immunofluorescent stain), or any other stain described herein, e.g., in Section IV-(v).
- Staining e.g., H&E staining
- imaging can be performed before and/or after the de-crosslinked biological sample (e.g., tissue section) is contacted with one or more nucleic acid probes and/or labelling agents (e.g., fluorescently labelled antibodies) and signals associated with the nucleic acid probes and/or labelling agents are detected in the sample.
- nucleic acid probes and/or labelling agents e.g., fluorescently labelled antibodies
- FIG. 1 shows an exemplary method where a fixed sample immobilized on a substrate is provided in step 101 , and the sample can be optionally stained and/or imaged in step 102 . If the sample is paraffin-embedded, a de-paraffinization and re-hydration step can be performed in step 103 to prepare the sample for catalytic de-crosslinking. The sample can again be optionally stained and/or imaged in step 104 prior to de-crosslinking in a buffer comprising a catalyst disclosed herein in step 105 . The sample can be optionally stained and/or imaged after catalytic de-crosslinking in step 106 .
- a signal associated with a first analyte (e.g., nucleic acid or protein) in the de-crosslinked sample can be detected in step 107 , for instance, signals associated with the first analyte can be detected in sequential cycles using detection reagents (e.g., nucleic acid probes).
- a signal associated with a first analyte (e.g., nucleic acid or protein) in the de-crosslinked sample can be detected in step 108 , and in some examples, the first analyte can be a cellular nucleic acid (e.g., genomic DNA, mRNA, or cDNA) and the second analyte can be a protein.
- the sample can be optionally stained and/or imaged after analyte detection in step 109 .
- Catalytic de-crosslinking disclosed herein can improve detection of signals associated with nucleic acid analytes and/or non-nucleic acid analytes (e.g., protein analytes) in a fixed biological sample immobilized on a substrate (for instance, as demonstrated in FIG. 4 , FIGS. 5 A- 5 B , FIGS. 7 A- 7 C , FIG. 8 , and FIG. 9 ) while substantially maintaining or improving sample integrity and/or adhesion to the substrate (for instance, as shown in FIG. 6 ), as compared to sample de-crosslinking without using the catalyst (e.g., using heating in a steamer).
- nucleic acid analytes and/or non-nucleic acid analytes e.g., protein analytes
- signals associated with the analytes at multiple locations in the catalytically de-crosslinked sample can be detected more efficiently (e.g., more signals can be detected in a given sample) and more accurately (e.g., with higher signal-to-noise ratios).
- detection of signals associated with analytes can be probed and detected (as described in Section III) in a catalytically de-crosslinked sample (e.g., as described in Section II).
- a method disclosed herein comprises contacting a fixed biological sample with a composition comprising a catalyst or a precursor thereof.
- a biological sample disclosed herein can include any sample comprising a cell, a tissue, or a derivative of a cell or a tissue.
- a biological sample herein includes a fixed cell or tissue sample comprising molecular crosslinks that can be catalytically de-crosslinked using a catalyst disclosed herein.
- the ability to use a fixed biological sample in an analytical method, such as in situ analysis of biological molecules (e.g., genomic DNA, RNA, cDNA, and/or proteins), is enhanced if the cross-links established during fixation of the biological sample are reversed so that an assay can be carried out before sample degradation occurs.
- data obtained from a de-crosslinked biological sample are similar to that obtained from a fresh sample (e.g., a sample that is not fixed and/or crosslinked).
- a fixed biological sample can be any appropriate fixed biological sample.
- a fixed biological sample can be a fixed tissue sample (e.g., a fixed tissue section).
- a sample herein is not and does not comprise a dissociated tissue/cell suspension.
- Molecules e.g., analytes, labelling agents, nucleic acid probes, etc., or products generated in situ in the sample
- molecules may but do not need to be removed from a sample herein for analysis before, during, or after catalytic de-crosslinking of the sample.
- molecules e.g., analytes, labelling agents, nucleic acid probes, etc.
- signals associated with the molecules are detected at multiple locations in the catalytically de-crosslinked sample, e.g., the signals can be detected in situ in a catalytically de-crosslinked tissue section.
- the biological sample is fixed and the fixation comprises contacting the sample with one or more agents that react with one another and/or with molecules in the biological sample.
- the reaction creates molecular crosslinks between molecules of the one or more agents, between molecules in the biological sample, and/or between molecules of the one or more agents and molecules in the biological sample.
- the one or more agents are crosslinking agents, and the molecular crosslinks are products of one or more reactions between a crosslinking agent and a molecule in the biological sample.
- a biological sample is fixed using one or more crosslinking agents comprising an aldehyde.
- an aldehyde includes a compound containing one or more aldehyde (—CHO) groups, where the aldehyde groups are capable of reacting with an amine (e.g., a primary amine, a secondary amine, or a tertiary amine) or with an amide.
- Amines are derivatives of ammonia, wherein one or more hydrogen atoms in amines have been replaced by a substituent such as an alkyl or aryl group.
- alkylamines and arylamines amines in which both types of substituent are attached to one nitrogen atom may be called alkylarylamines.
- exemplary amines include amino acids (including amino acid residues of a protein having side chains that can react with an aldehyde), biogenic amines, trimethylamine, and aniline.
- molecular crosslinks in a fixed sample are formed via condensation between an aldehyde and an amine, and in some aspects, the condensation does not require heating and/or an acidic condition.
- molecular crosslinks in a fixed sample are formed via condensation between an aldehyde and an amide, e.g., under heating and/or acidic conditions.
- aldehydes can include formaldehyde, paraformaldehyde, glutaraldehyde, glyoxal, and the like.
- fixing a biological sample comprises treating the sample with a crosslinking agent.
- the crosslinking agent comprises formaldehyde.
- Paraformaldehyde (PFA) is a polymer of formaldehyde. While paraformaldehyde itself is not a fixing agent, it can be heated and/or treated under basic conditions until it becomes solubilized and broken down to formaldehyde molecules.
- the molecular crosslinks are on RNA, DNA, protein, carbohydrate, lipid, and/or other molecules in the biological sample.
- the molecular crosslinks comprise one or more aminal crosslinks such as aminal bridges.
- a fixed biological sample can comprise aminal crosslinks among nucleic acids (e.g., genomic DNA, RNA such as mRNA, and/or cDNA), proteins, carbohydrates, lipids, and/or other molecules in the biological sample. Aminal crosslinks can be made, for example, by fixing a sample with formaldehyde.
- the fixative or fixation agent is formaldehyde.
- Formaldehyde as fixative comprises paraformaldehyde (or “PFA”) and formalin, both of which relate to the formaldehyde composition (e.g., formalin is a mixture of formaldehyde and methanol).
- PFA paraformaldehyde
- formalin is a mixture of formaldehyde and methanol
- a formaldehyde-fixed biological sample may be formalin-fixed or PFA-fixed. Any suitable protocols and methods for the use of formaldehyde as a fixation reagent to prepare fixed biological samples can be used in the methods and compositions of the present disclosure.
- a biological sample is a formalin-fixed, paraffin-embedded (FFPE) tissue sample (e.g., an FFPE tissue section).
- FFPE formalin-fixed, paraffin-embedded
- aldehyde fixation methods can be combined with other tissue preservation methods.
- aldehyde fixation can be combined with fresh frozen preservation of tissues, e.g., fresh frozen tissues can be fixed using an aldehyde.
- Aldehyde fixation can also be combined with alcohol fixation, or with any number of commercially available fixation/preservation techniques.
- aldehyde fixation can be combined with salt-rich buffer solutions such as RNAlaterTM, low-temperature preservation buffers such as HypoThermosol, alcohol-PEG fixation (e.g., Neo-Rix, STATFIX, PAGA, UMFIX), PAXGene, Allprotect/Xprotect, CellCover, RN Assist, and/or zinc buffers.
- salt-rich buffer solutions such as RNAlaterTM
- low-temperature preservation buffers such as HypoThermosol
- alcohol-PEG fixation e.g., Neo-Rix, STATFIX, PAGA, UMFIX
- PAXGene e.g., Allprotect/Xprotect, CellCover, RN Assist, and/or zinc buffers.
- preparing fixed (e.g., aldehyde-fixed) biological samples for in situ analysis may comprise catalytic de-crosslinking disclosed herein in combination with additional sample processing steps and/or conditions before, during, and/or after catalytic de-crosslinking.
- Exemplary sample processing steps and/or conditions may include longer permeabilization periods, additional permeabilization reagents, or higher permeabilization reagent concentrations, e.g., compared to samples that are not fixed, in order to allow detection reagents (e.g., nucleic acid probes and/or antibodies or epitope-binding fragments thereof) to bind to analytes in the sample.
- provided herein are methods of de-crosslinking aminal crosslinks in a fixed biological sample.
- methods of in situ analysis using such a de-crosslinked sample are not limited to any particular fixation reagent that results in crosslinks (e.g., aminal crosslinks) and are equally amenable with any fixation method that results in intra-tissue crosslinking events (e.g., aminal intra tissue crosslinking events).
- condensation of an amino group on a first molecule (e.g., nucleic acid or protein) in a sample with formaldehyde can afford a reactive imine, which can react with a proximal amine (e.g., a CH 2 -linked amine on a second molecule of the same or different species as the first molecule) to form an aminal bridge, thereby fixing the sample.
- a proximal amine e.g., a CH 2 -linked amine on a second molecule of the same or different species as the first molecule
- molecular crosslinks could lead to antigen masking and/or background autofluorescence in the sample.
- PFA induced crosslinks are known to be responsible for increased autofluorescence in FFPE tissues.
- molecular crosslinks may block or restrict biochemical reactions such as nucleic acid hybridization or methods of signal amplification utilized for analyte detection.
- Conventional methods for antigen retrieval may not sufficiently retrieve the masked antigens and may not remove or reduce the background autofluorescence due to fixing.
- the catalytic de-crosslinking methods disclosed herein address these and other issues with conventional methods.
- catalytic de-crosslinking provided herein may revert these molecular crosslinks into native amines and thereby reduce the autofluorescence in the sample for in situ assay workflows (e.g., imaging and detecting signals).
- conventional antigen retrieval methods break these crosslinks but do not revert them into native amines and may not be effective as the catalytic de-crosslinking described herein.
- a biological sample can be immobilized on a substrate before, during, and/or after contacting with the catalyst. In some embodiments, the biological sample is immobilized on the substrate before contacting with the catalyst. In some embodiments, the biological sample remains immobilized on the substrate during and after contacting with the catalyst. In some embodiments, the biological sample is immobilized on the substrate after contacting with the catalyst. In some embodiments, the biological sample is immobilized on the substrate during contacting with the catalyst. In some embodiments, a biological sample can be provided in a fixed state. In some embodiments, a fixed biological sample can undergo one or more preparation steps before it is pretreated and/or de-crosslinked.
- the substrate comprises a planar surface configured to contact the biological sample and does not comprises a bead, particle, or microwell, optionally wherein the substrate is a glass slide or a plastic slide.
- the substrate is transparent.
- the substrate is suitable for imaging using fluorescent microscopy, for instance, for in situ analyte detection, e.g., in situ sequencing or in situ sequential hybridization.
- the substrate does not comprises nucleic acid immobilized thereon prior to contacting the biological sample.
- the biological sample is a tissue section.
- the biological sample comprise cells immobilized on the substrate.
- the cells are dissociated cells, cultured cells, and/or cells isolated from a subject.
- the biological sample is an aldehyde-fixed biological sample.
- the biological sample is a formaldehyde-fixed biological sample.
- the biological sample is a paraffinized biological sample.
- the biological sample is a formaldehyde-fixed paraffin-embedded (FFPE) biological sample.
- the biological sample is a fresh frozen biological sample that has been crosslinked.
- the method comprises a step of pre-warming the biological sample.
- a fixed biological sample e.g., an FFPE tissue section
- the fixed biological sample can be pre-warmed by incubation in a water bath.
- the fixed biological sample is a block of embedded tissue (e.g., formalin fixed and paraffin embedded) that can be sliced using a microtome to generate embedded tissue sections, e.g., about 5 ⁇ m in thickness.
- the microtome can be pre-warmed to between about 40° C. and about 43° C. for slicing the fixed biological sample.
- the method comprises a step of dehydrating the biological sample.
- the fixed biological is dehydrated by drying at a temperature higher than room temperature, e.g., at about 20° C. to about 60° C., about 30° C. to about 50° C., about 35° C. to about 45° C., or about 40° C. to about 43° C., such as at about 40° C., 41° C., 42° C., 43° C., 44° C., or 45° C., for a period of time (e.g., about 30 minutes to about 6 hours, about 1 hour to about 5 hours, about 2 hours to about 4 hours, or about 3 hours).
- the fixed biological is dried at room temperature for a period of time (e.g., about 2 hours to about 24 hours, about 5 hour to about 20 hours, about 8 hours to about 16 hours, or overnight), for example, in a desiccator. In some such embodiments, the fixed biological is dried at a temperature higher than room temperature, followed by drying at room temperature.
- the method comprises, prior to contacting the biological sample with the catalyst, a step of baking the biological sample.
- the fixed biological is baked at a temperature, e.g., at about 40° C. to about 80° C., about 45° C. to about 75° C., about 50° C. to about 70° C., or about 55° C. to about 65° C., such as at about 56° C., 58° C., 60° C., 62° C., or 64° C., for a period of time (e.g., about 30 minutes to about 6 hours, about 1 hour to about 5 hours, about 1.5 hours to about 3 hours, or about 2 hours).
- the fixed biological is baked uncovered in an oven.
- the baked fixed biological is calibrated to room temperature for a period of time (e.g., about 3 minutes to about 30 minutes, about 5 minutes to about 20 minutes, or about 7 minutes).
- the sample can be de-paraffinized (e.g., to produce a de-paraffinized fixed biological sample) and re-hydrated.
- de-paraffinizing comprises contacting the biological sample with xylene, ethanol, and water, or, sequentially contacting the biological sample with xylene and an alcohol (e.g., ethanol) series such as absolute ethanol, about 96% ethanol, and about 70% ethanol.
- de-paraffinizing can include treating with xylene and ethanol (e.g., absolute ethanol, about 96% ethanol, and or about 70% ethanol).
- de-paraffinization can include, sequentially, treating with xylene (e.g., once, twice, or more times, each for about 5 minutes to about 15 minutes, such as about 10 minutes each), treating with absolute ethanol (e.g., once, twice, or more times, each for about 1 minute to about 10 minutes, such as about 2 minute to about 5 minutes, e.g., about 3 minutes each), treating with about 96% ethanol (e.g., once, twice, or more times, each for about 1 minute to about 10 minutes, such as about 2 minute to about 5 minutes, e.g., about 3 minutes each), and treating with about 70% ethanol (e.g., once, twice, or more times, each for about 1 minute to about 10 minutes, such as about 2 minute to about 5 minutes, e.g., about 3 minutes each).
- xylene e.g., once, twice, or more times, each for about 5 minutes to about 15 minutes, such as about 10 minutes each
- absolute ethanol e.g., once, twice, or
- the sample can be treated with water for re-hydration (e.g., in nuclease free water (e.g., DEPC water)), e.g., once, twice, or more times, each for about 5 seconds to about 1 minute, such as 10 seconds to about 30 seconds, e.g., about 20 seconds each.
- water for re-hydration e.g., in nuclease free water (e.g., DEPC water)
- nuclease free water e.g., DEPC water
- a fixed biological sample is pretreated with one or more pretreating reagents prior to delivery or application of a de-crosslinking agent (e.g., a catalyst disclosed herein).
- Pretreatment can include permeabilization of the biological sample, for example, using conditions milder than those typically used for extracting analytes.
- a pretreating reagent can include a proteinase (e.g., collagenase).
- the proteinase can be present in any appropriate concentration (e.g., about 0.005 to about 0.5 U/ ⁇ L (e.g., about 0.01 to about 0.5 U/ ⁇ L, about 0.05 to about 0.5 U/ ⁇ L, about 0.1 to about 0.5 U/ ⁇ L, about 0.1 to about 0.3 U/ ⁇ L, or about 0.2 U/ ⁇ L).
- a proteinase can be pepsin, Proteinase K, or an ArcticZymes Proteinase (an unspecific endopeptidase that can be inactivated after use).
- the proteinase can optionally be applied with a buffer, such as Hank's Balanced Salt Solution (HBSS) buffer.
- a pretreating reagent can include a proteinase (e.g., a second proteinase or a proteinase other than pepsin).
- a pretreating reagent may but does not need to include a proteinase.
- a pretreating reagent can include a detergent.
- the detergent can be present in any appropriate concentration (e.g., about 0.05% to about 2% (v/v), about 0.1% to about 1% (v/v), about 0.1% (v/v), or about 0.5% (v/v)).
- the detergent is a non-ionic detergent.
- the detergent comprises TRITONTM X-100.
- the detergent is in a buffer.
- the buffer comprises, for example, tris(hydroxymethyl)aminomethane-Ethylenediaminetetraacetic acid (TE), phosphate-buffered saline (PBS), 2-[4-(2-hydroxyethyl)piperazin-1-yl]ethanesulfonic acid (HEPES), and/or 2-(N-morpholino)ethanesulfonic acid (MES), with a pH of about 7.0 to about 9.0 (e.g., about 7.5 to about 8.5, or about 8.0).
- TE tris(hydroxymethyl)aminomethane-Ethylenediaminetetraacetic acid
- PBS phosphate-buffered saline
- HEPES 2-[4-(2-hydroxyethyl)piperazin-1-yl]ethanesulfonic acid
- MES 2-(N-morpholino)ethanesulfonic acid
- a pretreating reagent can be applied to the biological sample (e.g., a cell or tissue sample such as a tissue section) in any number of ways.
- a pretreating reagent is in solution or suspension.
- the biological sample can be soaked in a solution or suspension comprising a pretreating reagent.
- a pretreating reagent is sprayed onto the biological sample.
- a pretreating reagent is supplied to the biological sample via a microfluidic system (e.g., as a solution or suspension).
- the biological sample is dipped into a solution or suspension of a pretreating reagent, wherein excess solution or suspension is removed from the biological sample.
- a pretreating reagent is delivered to the biological sample via a hydrogel, wherein the hydrogel is a repository for a pretreatment reagent and is contacted with the biological sample.
- the pretreatment can be applied to the biological sample (e.g., a cell or tissue sample such as a tissue section) for a time sufficient to permeabilize a biological sample to facilitate the de-crosslinking agent (e.g., a catalyst disclosed herein) penetrating the biological sample.
- the pretreatment can be applied to the biological sample for between about 1 minute and about 60 minutes.
- the pretreatment can be applied to the biological sample between about 1 minute and about 55 minutes, about 1 minute and about 50 minutes, about 1 minute and about 45 minutes, about 1 minute and about 40 minutes, about 1 minute and about 35 minutes, about 1 minute and about 30 minutes, about 1 minute and about 25 minutes, about 1 minute and about 20 minutes, about 5 minutes and about 60 minutes, about 10 minutes and about 60 minutes, about 10 minutes and about 50 minutes, about 10 minutes and about 40 minutes, or about 10 minutes and about 30 minutes. In some embodiments, the pretreatment can be applied to the biological sample for about 20 minutes.
- the biological sample (e.g., a cell or tissue sample such as a tissue section) can be incubated during pretreatment.
- the biological sample can be incubated between about 30° C. and about 45° C. during pretreatment.
- the biological sample can be at about 31° C., 32° C., 33° C., 34° C., 35° C., 36° C., 37° C., 38° C., 39° C., 40° C., 41° C., 42° C., 43° C., 44° C., or 45° C. during pretreatment.
- the biological sample can be incubated at about 37° C. during pretreatment.
- a fixed biological sample is not pretreated with one or more pretreating reagents and prior to delivery or application of a de-crosslinking agent (e.g., a catalyst disclosed herein) to the biological sample.
- a de-crosslinking agent e.g., a catalyst disclosed herein
- a de-paraffinized and re-hydrated biological is not pretreated by permeabilizing the sample (e.g., using a protease or detergent) prior to contacting the sample with a de-crosslinking agent.
- the method comprises, prior to or after contacting the biological sample with a de-crosslinking agent (e.g., a catalyst disclosed herein), a step of staining the biological sample and/or imaging the stained biological sample, optionally wherein the staining comprises the use of a histological stain and/or an immunological stain.
- a stain can be any appropriate stain, such as a histological stain (e.g., hematoxylin and eosin, H&E) or an immunological stain (e.g., an immunofluorescent stain), or any other stain described herein.
- a stain may include an agent that interacts with an analyte (e.g., an endogenous analyte in a sample) indicative of cell features may include an agent that interacts with an analyte (e.g., an endogenous analyte in a sample) indicative of morphological features and/or cell features, and the analyte may include intracellular analytes, such as proteins, protein modifications (e.g., phosphorylation status or other post-translational modifications), nuclear proteins, cellular membrane proteins, nuclear membrane proteins, or any combination thereof.
- the stain is a nucleic acid stain, an extracellular matrix stain, a cellular membrane stain, a nuclear membrane stain, a cytological stain, and/or any combinations thereof.
- Staining and/or imaging can be carried out before, during, and/or after the fixed biological sample (e.g., a fixed tissue section) is de-crosslinked using a de-crosslinking agent (e.g., a catalyst disclosed herein).
- a de-crosslinking agent e.g., a catalyst disclosed herein.
- staining and/or imaging of the sample after de-crosslinking can be performed and the results can be compared to those before de-crosslinking.
- Images of the sample can be used to monitor cell or tissue morphology and/or sample detachment during sample processing, including drying, baking, de-paraffinization, re-hydration, and/or de-crosslinking, as well as washing and/or permeabilization after de-crosslinking.
- treatment of PFA-treated tissue samples can include heating to 60° C. to 70° C. in Tris buffer for several hours, and yet typically this removes only a fraction of the fixative-induced crosslinks.
- a 3.0% PFA-fixed tissue samples were soaked in 20 mM Tris-HCl (pH 9.0) and then incubated for 2 h at 60° C.
- de-crosslinking enables visualization of RNA—guided endonuclease—in situ labelling signals for DNA sequences in plant tissues,” Journal of Experimental Botany, 71(6):1792-1800, (2020)
- the harsh de-crosslinking treatment conditions can result in permanent damage to biomolecules (e.g., nucleic acid analytes and/or protein analytes, such as those described herein) in the sample.
- a de-crosslinking agent or un-fixing agent herein can be a compound or composition that reverses fixation and/or removes the crosslinks within or between biomolecules (e.g., analytes for analytical methods, such as those described herein) in a sample caused by previous use of a fixation reagent.
- de-crosslinking agents are compounds that act catalytically in removing crosslinks in a fixed sample.
- de-crosslinking agents are compounds that act catalytically in removing aminal crosslinks in a fixed sample.
- de-crosslinking agents can act on biological samples fixed with an aldehyde (e.g., formaldehyde), an N-hydroxysuccinimide (NHS) ester, an imidoester, or a combination thereof.
- aldehyde e.g., formaldehyde
- NHS N-hydroxysuccinimide
- catalysts that catalyze de-crosslinking of inter-molecular crosslinks and/or intra-molecular crosslinks in the biological sample. In some embodiments, provided herein are catalysts that catalyze the cleavage of aminal bridges, thereby de-crosslinking the inter-molecular crosslinks and/or intra-molecular crosslinks.
- the catalyst is a water-soluble catalyst. In some embodiments, the catalyst is an organic molecule. In some embodiments, the catalyst is a transimination catalyst. In some embodiments, the catalyst is a bifunctional transimination catalyst that accelerates hydrazone and oxime formation. In some embodiments, the catalyst catalyzes de-crosslinking of aminal crosslinks in the biological sample. In some embodiments, the catalyst catalyzes breakdown of hemi-aminal adducts and/or aminal adducts in the biological sample.
- Aminal crosslinks can be catalytically reversed using one or more organocatalyst.
- a first C—N bond of the aminal bridge can be broken in an acid-base reaction, and the second C—N bond of the aminal can be broken to generate repaired NH 2 groups on the first and second molecules.
- FIG. 2 B shows aminal crosslinks can be catalytically reversed using a combination of acid catalysis and nucleophilic catalysis.
- the catalyst is a compound of formula (I),
- n1 is an integer from 12 to 16.
- A is —COOH. In some embodiments of formula (I), A is —P( ⁇ O)(OH) 2 . In some embodiments of formula (I), A is —S( ⁇ O) 2 OH.
- X 1 is CH. In some embodiments of Formula (I), X 1 is CR a . In certain of these embodiments, X 1 is C—CH 3 . In some embodiments of Formula (I), X 2 is CH. In some embodiments of Formula (I), X 2 is N. In some embodiments of Formula (I), X 4 is CH. In some embodiments of Formula (I), X 4 is N.
- X 3 is N. In some embodiments of Formula (I), X 3 is CH. In some embodiments of Formula (I), X 3 is CR a . In certain of these embodiments, R a is C 1-6 alkyl (e.g., methyl). In certain embodiments, R a is NO 2 . In certain embodiments, R a is NR′R′′ (e.g., NH 2 ). In certain embodiments, R a is C( ⁇ O)NR′R′′. As a non-limiting example of the foregoing embodiments, R a is
- X 2 and X 4 are CH. In some embodiments of Formula (I), X 1 , X 2 , and X 4 are CH. In certain of these embodiments, X 3 is CR a (e.g., C—CH 3 ). In certain other embodiments, X 3 is N. In certain of the foregoing embodiments (when X 2 and X 4 are CH; or when X 1 , X 2 , and X 4 are CH), A is —COOH or —P( ⁇ O)(OH) 2 .
- the compound of Formula (I) is a compound of Formula (IA):
- A is —COOH.
- R a is C 1-6 alkyl. In certain of these embodiments, R a is C 1-3 alkyl. For example, in some embodiments, R a is methyl. In other of these embodiments, R a is methoxy. In other of these embodiments, R a is —NH 2 . In other of these embodiments, R a is —N(CH 3 ) 2 .
- A is —P( ⁇ O)(OH) 2 .
- R a is C 1-6 alkyl. In certain of these embodiments, R a is C 1-3 alkyl. For example, in some embodiments, R a is methyl. In other of these embodiments, R a is methoxy. In other of these embodiments, R a is —NH 2 . In other of these embodiments, R a is —N(CH 3 ) 2 .
- A is —S( ⁇ O) 2 OH.
- R a is C 1-6 alkyl. In certain of these embodiments, R a is C 1-3 alkyl. For example, in some embodiments, R a is methyl. In other of these embodiments, R a is methoxy. In other of these embodiments, R a is —NH 2 . In other of these embodiments, R a is —N(CH 3 ) 2 .
- the compound of Formula (I) is a compound of Formula (IB):
- X 3 is CH or N.
- A is —P( ⁇ O)(OH) 2 .
- X 3 is N.
- the compound of Formula (I) is a compound of Formula (IC):
- R c is an electron releasing group.
- the electron releasing group (R c ) is selected from the group consisting of alkyl, alkoxy, hydroxy, amino, alkylamino, dialkylamino, mercapto, alkylmercapto, silyloxy, aryloxy, and alkylthio.
- the electron releasing group is lower alkyl or lower alkoxy.
- the electron releasing group is —NH 2 .
- the electron releasing group is —N(CH 3 ) 2 .
- the compound of Formula (I) is a compound of Formula (IC′):
- R c is an electron releasing group.
- the electron releasing group (R c ) is selected from the group consisting of alkyl, alkoxy, hydroxy, amino, alkylamino, dialkylamino, mercapto, alkylmercapto, silyloxy, aryloxy, and alkylthio.
- the electron releasing group is lower alkyl or lower alkoxy.
- the electron releasing group is —NH 2 .
- the electron releasing group is —N(CH 3 ) 2 .
- the sample is contacted with a compound (e.g., in a solution or suspension) for catalytic de-crosslinking selected from the group consisting of 2-amino-5-methylbenzoic acid, 2-amino-5-nitrobenzoic acid, (2-amino-5-methylphenyl)phosphonic acid, 2-amino-5-methylbenzenesulfonic acid, 2,5-diaminobenzenesulfonic acid, 2-amino-3,5-dimethylbenzenesulfonic acid, (2-amino-5-nitrophenyl)phosphonic acid, (4-aminopyridin-3-yl)phosphonic acid, (3-aminopyridin-2-yl)phosphonic acid, (5-aminopyrimidin-4-yl)phosphonic acid, (2-amino-5- ⁇ [2-poly-ethoxy]ethyl ⁇ carbamoyl)phenyl)phosphonic acid, 4-aminonicotinic acid, 3-aminoisonico
- the sample is contacted with Compound 1 (2-amino-5-methylbenzoic acid) in a solution or suspension for catalytic de-crosslinking.
- the sample is contacted with Compound 8 ((4-aminopyridin-3-yl)phosphonic acid) in a solution or suspension for catalytic de-crosslinking.
- the sample is contacted with Compound 15 ((2-aminophenyl)phosphonic acid) in a solution or suspension for catalytic de-crosslinking.
- the catalyst of formula (I) is selected from the group consisting of:
- the catalyst comprises
- the catalyst comprises
- the catalyst comprises
- the catalyst comprises
- the catalyst comprises
- the catalyst comprises
- the catalyst comprises
- the catalyst comprise
- the catalyst comprises
- the catalyst comprises
- the catalyst comprises
- the catalyst comprises
- the catalyst comprises
- the catalyst comprises
- the catalyst comprises
- a compound disclosed herein catalytically breaks down the aminal and hemi-aminal adducts that form in RNA treated with formaldehyde, and is compatible with many RNA extraction and detection conditions.
- Exemplary compounds include those described in Karmakar et al., “Organocatalytic removal of formaldehyde adducts from RNA and DNA bases,” Nature Chemistry, 7: 752-758 (2015); US 2017/0283860; and US 2019/0135774, each of which is incorporated by reference herein in its entirety.
- the catalyst is a compound of formula (II):
- -L 1 -R 1 and the —COOH group are cis to one another. In some embodiments of formula (II), -L 1 -R 1 and the —COOH group are trans to one another.
- the catalyst is a compound of formula (II-a):
- the catalyst is a compound of formula (II-a1):
- the catalyst is a compound of formula (II-a2):
- the catalyst is a compound of formula (II-b):
- the catalyst is a compound of formula (II-b1):
- the catalyst is a compound of formula (II-b2):
- L 1 is —O—. In some embodiments of formula (II), (II-a), (II-a1), (II-a2), (II-b), (II-b1), or (II-b2), L 1 is —N(H)— or —N(C 1-3 alkyl)-. In certain of these embodiments, L 1 is —N(H)—.
- R 1 is H.
- R 1 is a heteroaryl containing 5-10 ring atoms, wherein 1-4 ring atoms are heteroatoms each independently selected from the group consisting of: N, N(H), N(C 1-3 alkyl), O, and S; and wherein the heteroaryl is optionally substituted with 1-4 independently selected R b .
- R 1 is a heteroaryl containing 5-6 ring atoms, wherein 1-4 ring atoms are heteroatoms each independently selected from the group consisting of: N, N(H), N(C 1-3 alkyl), O, and S; and wherein the heteroaryl is optionally substituted with 1-2 independently selected R b .
- R 1 is a heteroaryl containing 6 ring atoms, wherein 1-2 ring atoms are ring nitrogen atoms, and wherein the heteroaryl is optionally substituted with 1-2 independently selected R b .
- R 1 can be pyridyl, which is optionally substituted with 1-2 independently selected R b .
- R 1 can be 3-pyridyl, which is optionally substituted with 1-2 independently selected R b (e.g., unsubstituted 3-pyridyl, 3-pyridyl substituted with one R b , or 3-pyridyl substituted with two R b ).
- R 1 can be 4-pyridyl which is optionally substituted with 1-2 R b (e.g., unsubstituted 4-pyridyl, 4-pyridyl substituted with one R b , or 4-pyridyl substituted with two R).
- the catalyst is a compound of formula (II-a1); L 1 is —O—; and R 1 is heteroaryl containing 6 ring atoms, wherein 1-2 ring atoms are ring nitrogen atoms, and wherein the heteroaryl is optionally substituted with 1-2 independently selected R b .
- R 1 is pyridyl which is optionally substituted with 1-2 independently selected R b .
- R 1 can be 3-pyridyl which is optionally substituted with 1-2 independently selected R b (e.g., unsubstituted 3-pyridyl).
- R 1 can be 4-pyridyl which is optionally substituted with 1-2 R b (e.g., unsubstituted 4-pyridyl).
- the catalyst is a compound of formula (II-a1); L 1 is —O—, —N(H)—, or —N(C 1-3 alkyl)-; and R 1 is H.
- the catalyst is selected from the group consisting of (2S,4R)-4-hydroxyproline, (2R,4S)-4-hydroxyproline, (2S,4S)-4-hydroxyproline, (2R,4R)-4-hydroxyproline, (2S,4R)-4-aminoproline, (2R,4S)-4-aminoproline, (2S,4S)-4-aminoproline, and (2R,4R)-4-aminoproline.
- the catalyst of formula (II) is selected from the group consisting of.
- the catalyst comprises
- the catalyst comprises
- the catalyst comprises
- the catalyst comprises
- the catalyst comprises
- the catalyst comprises
- the catalyst is selected from the group consisting of:
- a catalyst can be contacted with (e.g., applied to) a biological sample at any appropriate concentration.
- An appropriate concentration may depend on factors such as tissue type, fixation reagent used, and degree of crosslinking in the biological sample.
- a catalyst can be contacted with (e.g., applied to) a biological sample in a solution or suspension with a concentration of about 5 mM to about 500 mM (e.g., about 10 mM to about 100 mM, about 10 mM to about 200 mM, about 10 mM to about 300 mM, about 10 mM to about 400 mM, about 100 mM to about 200 mM, about 100 mM to about 300 mM, about 100 mM to about 400 mM, about 100 mM to about 500 mM, about 200 mM to about 300 mM, about 200 mM to about 400 mM, about 200 mM to about 500 mM, about 300 mM to about 400 mM, about 200
- a catalyst can be contacted with (e.g., applied to) a biological sample in a solution or suspension with a concentration of about 10 mM to about 100 mM (e.g., about 10 mM to about 20 mM, about 10 mM to about 30 mM, about 10 mM to about 40 mM, about 10 mM to about 50 mM, about 10 mM to about 60 mM, about 10 mM to about 70 mM, about 10 mM to about 80 mM, about 10 mM to about 90 mM, about 20 mM to about 30 mM, about 20 mM to about 40 mM, about 20 mM to about 50 mM, about 20 mM to about 60 mM, about 20 mM to about 70 mM, about 20 mM to about 80 mM, about 20 mM to about 90 mM, about 20 mM to about 100 mM, about 30 mM to about 40 mM, about
- a catalyst can be contacted with (e.g., applied to) a biological sample in a solution or suspension with a concentration of about 30 mM to about 70 mM of the catalyst. In some embodiments, a catalyst can be contacted with (e.g., applied to) a biological sample in a solution or suspension with a concentration of about 40 mM to about 60 mM of the catalyst. In some embodiments, a catalyst can be contacted with (e.g., applied to) a biological sample in a solution or suspension with a concentration of about 50 mM of the catalyst.
- the catalyst is contacted with the biological sample at a concentration between about 5 mM and about 500 mM. In some embodiments, the catalyst is contacted with the biological sample at a concentration between about 10 mM and about 400 mM. In some embodiments, the catalyst is contacted with the biological sample at a concentration between about 50 mM and about 300 nM.
- the catalyst is contacted with the biological sample at a concentration between about 75 mM and about 250 mM In some embodiments, the catalyst is contacted with the biological sample at a concentration between about 100 mM and about 200 mM, such as about 100 mM, about 110 mM, about 120 mM, about 130 mM, about 140 mM, about 150 mM, about 160 mM, about 170 mM, about 180 mM, about 190 mM, or about 200 mM.
- the catalyst can be contacted to the biological sample for a time sufficient to de-crosslink some or all of the crosslinked nucleic acids and/or proteins in the biological sample (e.g., a cell or tissue sample such as a tissue section).
- the catalyst can be contacted to the biological sample for between 1 minute and 1 day (e.g., between 1 minute and 1 hour, 1 minute and 2 hours, 1 minute and 4 hours, 1 minute and 6 hours, 1 minute and 12 hours, 1 minute and 18 hours, 1 hour and 2 hours, 1 hour and 4 hours, 1 hour and 6 hours, 1 hour and 12 hours, 1 hour and 18 hours, 1 hour and 1 day, 2 hours and 4 hours, 2 hours and 6 hours, 2 hours and 12 hours, 2 hours and 18 hours, 2 hours and 1 day, 4 hours and 6 hours, 4 hours and 12 hours, 4 hours and 18 hours, 4 hours and 1 day, 6 hours and 12 hours, 6 hours and 18 hours, 6 hours and 1 day, 12 hours and 18 hours, 12 hours and 1 day, or 18 hours and 1 day).
- the catalyst is contacted with the biological sample for about 1 minute to about 150 minutes. In some embodiments, the catalyst is contacted with the biological sample for about 5 minute to about 100 minutes. In some embodiments, the catalyst is contacted with the biological sample for about 10 minute to about 50 minutes. In some embodiments, the catalyst is contacted with the biological sample for about 15 minute to about 30 minutes.
- the catalyst can be contacted to the biological sample at a temperature sufficient to de-crosslink some or all of the crosslinked nucleic acids and/or proteins in the biological sample (e.g., a cell or tissue sample such as a tissue section).
- the catalyst is contacted with the biological sample at a temperature between about 5° C. and about 100° C.
- the catalyst is contacted with the biological sample at a temperature between about 50° C. and about 95° C.
- the catalyst is contacted with the biological sample at a temperature between about 60° C. and about 90° C., such as about 60° C., about 65° C., about 70° C., about 75° C., about 80° C., about 85° C., or about 90° C.
- a biological sample (e.g., a cell or tissue sample such as a tissue section) can be incubated while the catalyst is contacted with (e.g., applied to) the biological sample.
- the biological sample can be incubated between about 25° C. and about 100° C.
- the biological sample can be incubated between about 25° C. and about 40° C., about 37° C. and about 60° C., about 45° C. and about 95° C., about 50° C. and about 90° C., about 55° C. and about 85° C., about 60° C. and about 85° C., about 75° C. and about 85° C.
- the biological sample can be incubated at about 80° C.
- an incubation temperature and a contact time can be related. Without being bound by any particular theory, it is believed that if a higher temperature is used, a shorter contact time may be sufficient (e.g., 70° C. to 80° C. for 30 minutes), while if a lower temperature is used, a longer contact time may be beneficial (e.g., 37° C. for 1 day). However, in some cases, both a low temperature and a shorter contact time may be sufficient (e.g., 20° C. to 28° C. for 90 minutes).
- the catalyst can be contacted to the biological sample for between 1 hour and 120 minutes (e.g., between 1 minute and 110 minutes, 1 minute and 100 minutes, 1 minute and 90 minutes, 1 minute and 80 minutes, 1 minute and 70 minutes, 10 minutes and 120 minutes, 20 minutes and 120 minutes, 30 minutes and 120 minutes, 40 minutes and 120 minutes, 50 minutes and 120 minutes.
- the catalyst agent can be applied to the biological sample for about 10 minutes, about 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 110, or about 120 minutes, and at a temperature between about 70° C. and about 95° C., such as about 70° C., about 75° C., about 80° C., about 85° C., about 90° C., or 95° C.
- the catalyst can be contacted to the biological sample for approximately 30 minutes at a temperature between about 75° C. and about 85° C., such as about 80° C.
- a catalyst can be delivered to a biological sample using any appropriate method.
- a catalyst can be delivered as a solution or a suspension.
- a catalyst can be delivered as a solution or a suspension in a buffer.
- the buffer is citrate, tris(hydroxymethyl)aminomethane (Tris), Tris-EDTA, phosphate-buffered saline (PBS), 2-[4-(2-hydroxyethyl)piperazin-1-yl]ethanesulfonic acid (HEPES), 2-(N-morpholino)ethanesulfonic acid (MES), or a combination thereof.
- the buffer is Tris.
- the buffer comprises Tris and a chelating agent, optionally wherein the chelating agent is ethylenediaminetetraacetic acid (EDTA) and the buffer is Tris-EDTA (TE)
- the buffer comprises citrate.
- the buffer comprises citrate and dimethyl sulfoxide (DMSO).
- the buffer comprises 1%-5% (v/v) DMSO.
- the buffer comprises 2% (v/v) DMSO.
- the buffer comprises citrate but no DMSO A buffer can have any appropriate concentration.
- a buffer can have a concentration of about 5 mM to about 60 mM (e.g., about 10 mM to about 50 mM, about 20 mM to about 40 mM, or about 30 mM).
- the catalyst is formulated with DMSO and combined with the buffer (e.g., a citrate buffer, a PBS buffer, or a TE buffer) or before contacting the biological sample.
- the buffer is present in the solution or suspension at a concentration between about 5 mM and about 300 mM. In some embodiments, the buffer is present in the solution or suspension at a concentration between about 10 mM and about. 250 mM, such as between about 100 mM and about 200 mM, such as about 100 mM, about 110 mM, about 120 mM, about 130 mM, about 140 mM, about 150 mM, about 160 mM, about 170 mM, about 180 mM, about 190 mM, or about 200 mM.
- the solution or suspension has a pH between about 4 and about 10. In some embodiments, the solution or suspension has a pH between about 6 and about 9. In some embodiments, the solution or suspension has a pH between about 6.5 and about 8, such as between about 6.8 and about 7.4. In some embodiments, the buffer is present at a concentration between about 100 mM and about 200 mM in the solution or suspension having a pH between about 6.5 and about 8, such as pH 6.6, pH 6.7, pH 6.8, pH 6.9, pH 7.0, pH 7.1, pH 7.2, or pH 7.3, pH 7.4, pH 7.5, pH 7.6, pH 7.7, pH 7.8, or pH 7.9.
- the compound in the solution or suspension can exist in various forms, e.g., depending on the pH of the solution or suspension, and one or more of the forms can function as a catalyst to de-crosslink molecular crosslinks in the sample.
- pH-dependent acid catalysis are shown in FIGS. 3 A- 3 C .
- Compound 1 can exist in two forms—compound A and compound B—in a solution at pH 6.8, but only compound B with —COOH may catalyze a de-crosslinking reaction for reversal of aminal crosslinks.
- Compound 1 exists mostly as compound A, which is a deprotonated form that does not catalyze the de-crosslinking reaction.
- FIG. 3 C shows phosphonic acid catalysts may perform well at pH 6.8 since —OH of the phosphonic acid exists in solution to catalyze a de-crosslinking reaction exemplified in FIG. 2 C .
- Exemplary reagents for inclusion in the solution or suspension described herein may include, but are not limited to, water, various non-ionic detergents, saline-sodium citrate (SSC), sodium phosphate, phosphate buffered saline (PBS), sodium dodecyl sulfate (SDS), urea, proteinase (e.g., proteinase K), bovine serum albumin (BSA), ethylenediaminetetracetic acid (EDTA), a sarkosyl compound (e.g., sodium lauroyl sarcosinate; sarkosyl, ammonium salt; or sarkosyl, potassium salt), tris(hydroxymethyl)aminomethane (tris), tris-HCl (tris hydrochloride), 3-morpholinopropane-1-sulfonic acid (MOPS), TAE buffer (tris EDTA), TBS buffer (tris buffered saline), bis-tris methane,
- the solution or suspension comprises sodium dodecyl sulfate (SDS), urea, and/or a proteinase, optionally wherein the proteinase is proteinase K.
- the solution or suspension comprises SDS and proteinase K.
- the solution or suspension comprises urea and proteinase K.
- the urea concentration is between about 0.01 M and about 1 M, such as 0.01 M, 0.02 M, 0.05 M, 0.1 M, 0.2 M, 0.5 M, 0.75 M, or 1 M, or any concentration in between the aforementioned values.
- the proteinase K concentration is between about 0.1 ⁇ g/mL and about 2 ⁇ g/mL, such as 0.1 ⁇ g/mL, 0.2 ⁇ g/mL, 0.5 ⁇ g/mL, 0.75 ⁇ g/mL, 1 ⁇ g/mL, 1.25 ⁇ g/mL, 1.5 ⁇ g/mL, 1.75 ⁇ g/mL, or 2 ⁇ g/mL, or any concentration in between the aforementioned values.
- the SDS concentration (w/v) is between about 0.01% and about 1%, such as 0.05%, 0.1%, 0.2%, 0.5%, 0.75%, or 1%, or any concentration in between the aforementioned values.
- the solution or suspension comprises 0.05% SDS, 0.2% SDS, 0.5% SDS, 0.05 M urea, 0.5 M urea, 0.2 ⁇ g/ml proteinase K, 0.5 ⁇ g/ml proteinase K, 1 ⁇ g/ml proteinase K, or any combination thereof.
- using SDS, urea, and/or proteinase K in de-crosslinking conditions increases puncta brightness, object counts (e.g., puncta number per unit area), and/or signal-to-noise ratio.
- a catalyst e.g., a compound of formula (I) or (II) disclosed herein
- a solution or suspension comprising phosphate buffered saline (PBS) e.g., a PBS buffer solution having a pH between about 6.5 and about 8, such as pH 6.6, pH 6.7, pH 6.8, pH 6.9, pH 7.0, pH 7.1, pH 7.2, or pH 7.3, pH 7.4, pH 7.5, pH 7.6, pH 7.7, pH 7.8, or pH 7.9.
- PBS phosphate buffered saline
- a compound of formula (I) such as 2-amino-5-methylbenzoic acid, (2-aminophenyl)phosphonic acid, and/or (4-aminopyridin-3-yl)phosphonic acid, as well as a PBS buffer solution having a pH of about 7.4 comprising the compound of formula (I).
- a catalyst e.g., a compound of formula (I) or (II) disclosed herein
- a solution or suspension comprising citrate, e.g., a citrate solution having a pH between about 5 and about 8, such as about pH 5.5, about pH 6.0, about pH 6.5, about pH 7.0, or about pH 7.5
- a catalyst e.g., a compound of formula (I) or (II) disclosed herein
- a citrate buffer solution having a pH of about 6.0.
- a compound of formula (I) such as 2-amino-5-methylbenzoic acid, (2-aminophenyl)phosphonic acid, and/or (4-aminopyridin-3-yl)phosphonic acid, as well as a citrate buffer solution having a pH of about 6.0 comprising the compound of formula (I).
- a catalyst e.g., a compound of formula (I) or (II) disclosed herein
- a solution or suspension comprising Tris, e.g., a Tris-EDTA solution having a pH between about 8 and about 10, such as about pH 8.5, about pH 9.0, about pH 9.5, or about pH 10.0.
- a catalyst e.g., a compound of formula (I) or (II) disclosed herein
- a Tris-EDTA buffer solution having a pH of about 9.0.
- a compound of formula (I) such as 2-amino-5-methylbenzoic acid, (2-aminophenyl)phosphonic acid, and/or (4-aminopyridin-3-yl)phosphonic acid, as well as a Tris-EDTA buffer solution having a pH of about 9.0 comprising the compound of formula (I).
- a catalyst can be contacted with (e.g., applied to) the biological sample (e.g., a cell or tissue sample such as a tissue section) in any number of ways.
- a catalyst is in solution or a suspension.
- the biological sample is soaked in a solution or suspension comprising the catalyst.
- the catalyst is sprayed onto the biological sample, e.g., as a solution or suspension.
- the catalyst is supplied to the biological sample via a microfluidic system (e.g., as a solution or suspension).
- a catalyst is pipetted or otherwise aliquoted onto the biological sample.
- the biological sample is dipped into a solution or suspension of a catalyst, wherein excess solution or suspension is removed from the biological sample.
- a catalyst can be delivered to the biological sample via a hydrogel, wherein the hydrogel is contacted with the biological sample. Application of a catalyst can occur in other suitable ways.
- a composition comprising a catalyst or compound disclosed herein can be used in combination with one or more other de-crosslinking and/or antigen retrieving agents including enzymes such as proteases.
- proteases include a proteinase (e.g., collagenase), which can be present in any appropriate concentration (e.g., about 0.005 to about 0.5 U/ ⁇ L (e.g., about 0.01 to about 0.5 U/ ⁇ L, about 0.05 to about 0.5 U/ ⁇ L, about 0.1 to about 0.5 U/ ⁇ L, about 0.1 to about 0.3 U/ ⁇ L, or about 0.2 U/ ⁇ L).
- a proteinase can be pepsin, Proteinase K, or an ArcticZymes Proteinase (an unspecific endopeptidase that can be inactivated after use).
- the proteinase can optionally be applied with a buffer, such as Hank's Balanced Salt Solution (HBSS) buffer.
- HBSS Hank's Balanced Salt Solution
- a composition comprising a catalyst or compound disclosed herein can be used in combination with one or more crowding agents, e.g., to mitigate potential RNA loss during de-crosslinking.
- Crowding agents are typically high-molecular weight, high valency polymers that may be charged.
- crowding agents may be polymers such as dextran sulfate, polyacrylic acid, polyvinylsulfonic acid, and alginate.
- crowding agents may be polymers similar to dextran sulfate.
- compounds that can function as crowding agents, but have some property of molecular programmability may be used.
- polymers that can function as crowding agents can be used and subsequently the charged group can be cleaved off or neutralized. This can convert the compound into a neutral polymer like PEG, which actually enhances the efficiency of enzymatic reactions.
- polymers can function as a crowding agent, and then be specifically degraded into small monomers and can be easily washed from the sample.
- Examples of programmable polyions or polyelectrolytes for enzyme-compatible enhancement of nucleic acid hybridization kinetics include polycondensation reactions of Cys(Lys) n Cys, polymers such as PEG (PEG20k MW), PVA, or PAA, which may be subsequently modified via a cleavable linker to include chemical groups conferring ionic charge, or polymers formed from monomers including cleavable linkages, such that the polymer may be degraded subsequent to functioning as a crowding agent.
- a biological sample e.g., tissue section
- permeabilized e.g., undergoes permeabilization
- the sample is permeabilized after delivery to or application of a de-crosslinking agent.
- the permeabilization comprises harsher conditions than the optional pretreatment step.
- the permeabilization comprises applying one or more permeabilization reagents to the biological sample.
- a permeabilization reagent can comprise a protease.
- the protease comprises pepsin.
- the protease comprises proteinase K.
- protease comprises ArcticZyme Proteinase.
- the protease is provided in a solution of hydrochloric acid.
- a biological sample e.g., tissue section
- a protease e.g., washed using a solution containing a protease, prior to contacting the biological sample with a labelling agent (e.g., a probe or probe set) that directly or indirectly binds to an analyte at a location in the biological sample.
- a labelling agent e.g., a probe or probe set
- a method comprising contacting an intact biological sample with a labelling agent that directly or indirectly binds to an analyte at a location in the biological sample.
- the permeabilization reagent(s) can be applied to biological sample (e.g., tissue section) in any number of ways.
- the permeabilization reagents can be in solution or suspension.
- the sample is soaked in a solution or suspension of the permeabilization reagent(s).
- the permeabilization reagents are sprayed onto the sample (e.g., as a solution or suspension).
- the permeabilization reagents are supplied to the sample via a microfluidic system (e.g., as a solution or suspension).
- the sample can be dipped into a solution or suspension comprising the permeabilization reagent(s), wherein excess permeabilization reagent is removed from the sample.
- the permeabilization reagent(s) are delivered to the sample via a hydrogel, wherein the hydrogel is contacted with the sample.
- the permeabilization reagent(s) can be contacted to the biological sample (e.g., tissue section) for a time sufficient to permeabilize the sample. In some embodiments, the permeabilization reagent(s) can be contacted to the sample for between 1 minute and 120 minutes.
- the permeabilization reagent(s) can be applied to the sample between about 1 minute and 90 minutes, 1 minute and 80 minutes, 1 minute and 70 minutes, 1 minute and 60 minutes, 1 minute and about 55 minutes, about 1 minute and about 50 minutes, about 1 minute and about 45 minutes, about 1 minute and about 40 minutes, about 1 minute and about 35 minutes, about 1 minute and about 30 minutes, about 1 minute about 5 minutes and about 60 minutes, about 10 minutes and about 60 minutes, about 10 minutes and about 55 minutes, about 10 minutes and about 50 minutes, about 10 minutes and about 45 minutes, about 10 minutes and about 40 minutes, about 15 minutes and about 45 minutes, about 20 minutes and about 40 minutes, about 25 minutes and about 35 minutes.
- the permeabilization reagent(s) can be contacted to the sample for approximately 30 minutes.
- the biological sample e.g., tissue section
- the biological sample can be incubated with the permeabilization reagent(s).
- the sample can be incubated between about 16° C. and about 56° C. (e.g., between about 30° C. and 45° C., or between about 35° C. and about 40° C.).
- the biological sample can be at about 16° C., 18° C., 20° C., 22° C., 24° C., 26° C., 28° C., 30° C., 31° C., 32° C., 33° C., 34° C., 35° C., 36° C., 37° C., 38° C., 39° C., 40° C., 41° C., 42° C., 43° C., 44° C., 45° C., 46° C., 48° C., 50° C., 52° C., 54° C., or 56° C.
- the sample can be incubated at about 37° C.
- the method comprises a step of permeabilizing the biological sample before, during, and/or after contacting the biological sample with the catalyst for catalytic de-crosslinking.
- the method comprises incubating and/or washing a fixed biological sample in a buffer comprising one or more detergents, such as a Tween detergent (e.g., TweenTM 20), before and/or during catalytic de-crosslinking.
- the method comprises incubating and/or washing a catalytically de-crosslinked biological sample in a buffer comprising one or more detergents, such as a Tween detergent (e.g., TweenTM 20.
- the method does not comprise migrating molecules (e.g., analytes, labelling agents, nucleic acid probes, etc., or products generated in situ in the sample) outside of the permeabilized biological sample. In some embodiments, the method does not comprise migrating molecules (e.g., analytes, labelling agents, nucleic acid probes, etc., or products generated in situ in the sample) towards the substrate, optionally wherein the migration is passive migration or active migration. In some embodiments, the method does not comprise capturing molecules (e.g., analytes, labelling agents, nucleic acid probes, etc., or products generated in situ in the sample) by a capture agent immobilized on the substrate.
- migrating molecules e.g., analytes, labelling agents, nucleic acid probes, etc., or products generated in situ in the sample
- a biological sample e.g., tissue section
- a solution containing a detergent in any appropriate concentration (e.g., about 0.05% to about 2% (v/v), about 0.1% to about 1% (v/v), about 0.1% (v/v), or about 0.5% (v/v)).
- the detergent is a non-ionic detergent.
- the detergent comprises TritonTM X-100, TritonTM X-200, TweenTM 20, TweenTM 80, N-lauroyl sarcosine, sodium dodecyl sulfate (SDS), dodecyldimethylphosphine oxide, sorbitan monopalmitate, decylhexaglycol, 4-nonylphenylpolyethylene glycol, CAHPS, IGEPAL CA-630, Sulfobetain-10, Sulfobetain-16, urea, or a combination thereof.
- urea solubilizes and denatures proteins by disrupting noncovalent bonds.
- the buffer comprises, for example, tris(hydroxymethyl)aminomethane-Ethylenediaminetetraacetic acid (TE), phosphate-buffered saline (PBS), 2-[4-(2-hydroxyethyl)piperazin-1-yl]ethanesulfonic acid (HEPES), and/or 2-(N-morpholino)ethanesulfonic acid (MES), with a pH of about 7.0 to about 9.0 (e.g., about 7.5 to about 8.5, or about 8.0).
- the detergent is in a buffer such as PBS.
- the buffer is PBS with a Tween detergent (PBST)
- the method comprises, after contacting the biological sample with the catalyst, a step of washing the biological sample, optionally wherein the biological sample is washed in PBST, e.g., for three times for 1 minute each.
- the method comprises, after contacting the biological sample with the catalyst, a step of staining the biological sample and imaging the stained biological sample prior to containing the sample with a labelling agent that directly or indirectly binds to an analyte at a location in the biological sample, e.g., for analyte detection using nucleic acid probes for in situ hybridization (e.g., sequential hybridization in sequential rounds of probe hybridization and detection) and/or using labelled antibodies for protein detection (e.g., described in Section III-B and Section III-C).
- a labelling agent that directly or indirectly binds to an analyte at a location in the biological sample, e.g., for analyte detection using nucleic acid probes for in situ hybridization (e.g., sequential hybridization in sequential rounds of probe hybridization and detection) and/or using labelled antibodies for protein detection (e.g., described in Section III-B and Section III-C).
- kits for sample analysis comprising contacting a fixed biological sample that has been catalytically de-crosslinked with a labelling agent that binds to an analyte at a location in the de-crosslinked fixed biological sample, and detecting an optical signal associated with the labelling agent or a product thereof, thereby detecting the analyte at the location in the biological sample.
- a biological sample may comprise one or a plurality of analytes of interest.
- an analyte can include any biological substance, structure, moiety, or component to be analyzed.
- a target disclosed herein may similarly include any analyte of interest.
- a target or analyte can be directly or indirectly detected.
- Analytes can be derived from a specific type of cell and/or a specific sub-cellular region.
- analytes can be derived from cytosol, from cell nuclei, from mitochondria, from microsomes, and more generally, from any other compartment, organelle, or portion of a cell.
- Permeabilizing agents that specifically target certain cell compartments and organelles can be used to selectively release analytes from cells for analysis, and/or allow access of one or more reagents (e.g., probes for analyte detection) to the analytes in the cell or cell compartment or organelle.
- the analyte may include any biomolecule, macromolecule, or chemical compound, including a protein or peptide, a lipid or a nucleic acid molecule, or a small molecule, including organic or inorganic molecules.
- the analyte may be a cell or a microorganism, including a virus, or a fragment or product thereof.
- An analyte can be any substance or entity for which a specific binding partner (e.g. an affinity binding partner) can be developed.
- a specific binding partner may be a nucleic acid probe (for a nucleic acid analyte) and may lead directly to the generation of a RCA template (e.g. a padlock or other circularizable probe).
- the specific binding partner may be coupled to a nucleic acid, which may be detected using an RCA strategy, e.g. in an assay which uses or generates a circular nucleic acid molecule which can be the RCA template.
- Analytes of particular interest may include nucleic acid molecules (e.g., cellular nucleic acids), such as DNA (e.g. genomic DNA, mitochondrial DNA, plastid DNA, viral DNA, etc.) and RNA (e.g. mRNA, microRNA, rRNA, snRNA, viral RNA, etc.), and synthetic and/or modified nucleic acid molecules, (e.g.
- DNA e.g. genomic DNA, mitochondrial DNA, plastid DNA, viral DNA, etc.
- RNA e.g. mRNA, microRNA, rRNA, snRNA, viral RNA, etc.
- synthetic and/or modified nucleic acid molecules e.g.
- nucleic acid domains comprising or consisting of synthetic or modified nucleotides such as LNA, PNA, morpholino, etc.
- proteinaceous molecules such as peptides, polypeptides, proteins or prions or any molecule which comprises a protein or polypeptide component, etc., or fragments thereof, or a lipid or carbohydrate molecule, or any molecule which comprise a lipid or carbohydrate component.
- the analyte may be a single molecule or a complex that contains two or more molecular subunits, e.g. including but not limited to protein-DNA complexes, which may or may not be covalently bound to one another, and which may be the same or different.
- analyte may also be a protein complex or protein interaction.
- Such a complex or interaction may thus be a homo- or hetero-multimer.
- Aggregates of molecules, e.g. proteins may also be target analytes, for example aggregates of the same protein or different proteins.
- the analyte may also be a complex between proteins or peptides and nucleic acid molecules such as DNA or RNA, e.g. interactions between proteins and nucleic acids, e.g. regulatory factors, such as transcription factors, and DNA or RNA.
- an analyte herein is endogenous to a biological sample and can include cellular nucleic acid analytes and non-nucleic acid analytes.
- Methods, probes, and kits disclosed herein can be used to analyze nucleic acid analytes (e.g., using a nucleic acid probe or probe set that directly or indirectly hybridizes to a nucleic acid analyte) and/or non-nucleic acid analytes (e.g., using a labelling agent that comprises a reporter oligonucleotide and binds directly or indirectly to a non-nucleic acid analyte) in any suitable combination.
- non-nucleic acid analytes include, but are not limited to, lipids, carbohydrates, peptides, proteins, glycoproteins (N-linked or O-linked), lipoproteins, phosphoproteins, specific phosphorylated or acetylated variants of proteins, amidation variants of proteins, hydroxylation variants of proteins, methylation variants of proteins, ubiquitylation variants of proteins, sulfation variants of proteins, viral coat proteins, extracellular and intracellular proteins, antibodies, and antigen binding fragments.
- the analyte is inside a cell or on a cell surface, such as a transmembrane analyte or one that is attached to the cell membrane.
- the analyte can be an organelle (e.g., nuclei or mitochondria).
- the analyte is an extracellular analyte, such as a secreted analyte.
- exemplary analytes include, but are not limited to, a receptor, an antigen, a surface protein, a transmembrane protein, a cluster of differentiation protein, a protein channel, a protein pump, a carrier protein, a phospholipid, a glycoprotein, a glycolipid, a cell-cell interaction protein complex, an antigen-presenting complex, a major histocompatibility complex, an engineered T-cell receptor, a T-cell receptor, a B-cell receptor, a chimeric antigen receptor, an extracellular matrix protein, a posttranslational modification (e.g., phosphorylation, glycosylation, ubiquitination, nitrosylation, methylation, acetylation or lipidation) state of a cell surface protein
- nucleic acid analytes examples include DNA analytes such as single-stranded DNA (ssDNA), double-stranded DNA (dsDNA), genomic DNA, methylated DNA, specific methylated DNA sequences, fragmented DNA, mitochondrial DNA, in situ synthesized PCR products, and RNA/DNA hybrids.
- the DNA analyte can be a transcript of another nucleic acid molecule (e.g., DNA or RNA such as mRNA) present in a tissue sample.
- RNA analytes such as various types of coding and non-coding RNA.
- examples of the different types of RNA analytes include messenger RNA (mRNA), including a nascent RNA, a pre-mRNA, a primary-transcript RNA, and a processed RNA, such as a capped mRNA (e.g., with a 5′ 7-methyl guanosine cap), a polyadenylated mRNA (poly-A tail at the 3′ end), and a spliced mRNA in which one or more introns have been removed.
- mRNA messenger RNA
- a nascent RNA e.g., a pre-mRNA, a primary-transcript RNA
- a processed RNA such as a capped mRNA (e.g., with a 5′ 7-methyl guanosine cap), a polyadenylated mRNA (poly-A tail at the 3′ end), and
- RNA analyte can be a transcript of another nucleic acid molecule (e.g., DNA or RNA such as viral RNA) present in a tissue sample.
- another nucleic acid molecule e.g., DNA or RNA such as viral RNA
- ncRNA non-coding RNAs
- transfer RNAs tRNAs
- rRNAs ribosomal RNAs
- small non-coding RNAs such as microRNA (miRNA), small interfering RNA (siRNA), Piwi-interacting RNA (piRNA), small nucleolar RNA (snoRNA), small nuclear RNA (snRNA), extracellular RNA (exRNA), small Cajal body-specific RNAs (scaRNAs), and the long ncRNAs such as Xist and HOTAIR.
- the RNA can be small (e.g., less than 200 nucleic acid bases in length) or large (e.g., RNA greater than 200 nucleic acid bases in length).
- small RNAs include 5.8S ribosomal RNA (rRNA), 5S rRNA, tRNA, miRNA, siRNA, snoRNAs, piRNA, tRNA-derived small RNA (tsRNA), and small rDNA-derived RNA (srRNA).
- the RNA can be double-stranded RNA or single-stranded RNA.
- the RNA can be circular RNA.
- the RNA can be a bacterial rRNA (e.g., 16s rRNA or 23s rRNA).
- an analyte may be a denatured nucleic acid, wherein the resulting denatured nucleic acid is single-stranded.
- the nucleic acid may be denatured, for example, optionally using formamide, heat, or both formamide and heat. In some embodiments, the nucleic acid is not denatured for use in a method disclosed herein.
- Methods, probes, and kits disclosed herein can be used to analyze any number of analytes.
- the number of analytes that are analyzed can be at least about 2, at least about 3, at least about 4, at least about 5, at least about 6, at least about 7, at least about 8, at least about 9, at least about 10, at least about 11, at least about 12, at least about 13, at least about 14, at least about 15, at least about 20, at least about 25, at least about 30, at least about 40, at least about 50, at least about 100, at least about 1,000, at least about 10,000, at least about 100,000 or more different analytes present in a region of the sample or within an individual feature of the substrate.
- the analyte can comprise or be associated with a target sequence.
- the target nucleic acid and the target sequence therein may be endogenous to the sample, generated in the sample, added to the sample, or associated with an analyte in the sample.
- the target sequence is a single-stranded target sequence (e.g., a sequence in a rolling circle amplification product).
- the target sequence is a single-stranded target sequence (e.g., in a probe bound directly or indirectly to the analyte).
- the target sequence is a single-stranded target sequence in a primary probe that binds to an analyte of interest in the biological sample.
- the target sequence is a single-stranded target sequence in an intermediate probe which directly or indirectly binds to a primary probe or product thereof, where the primary probe binds to an analyte of interest in the biological sample.
- the target sequence is a single-stranded target sequence in a secondary probe that binds to the primary probe or product thereof.
- the analytes comprises one or more single-stranded target sequences.
- an endogenous analyte e.g., a viral or cellular DNA or RNA
- a product e.g., a hybridization product, a ligation product, an extension product (e.g., by a DNA or RNA polymerase), a replication product, a transcription/reverse transcription product, and/or an amplification product such as a rolling circle amplification (RCA) product
- RCA rolling circle amplification
- a labelling agent that directly or indirectly binds to an analyte in the biological sample is analyzed.
- a product e.g., a hybridization product, a ligation product, an extension product (e.g., by a DNA or RNA polymerase), a replication product, a transcription/reverse transcription product, and/or an amplification product such as a rolling circle amplification (RCA) product
- RCA rolling circle amplification
- the provided methods are for gene expression analysis for RNA transcripts and protein analysis in the same intact biological sample (e.g., a tissue section).
- labelling agents e.g., nucleic acid probes and/or probe sets
- the labelling agents include probes (e.g., the primary probes disclosed herein and/or any detectable probe disclosed herein) may comprise any of a variety of entities that can hybridize to a nucleic acid, typically by Watson-Crick base pairing, such as DNA, RNA, LNA, PNA, etc.
- the nucleic acid probe may comprise a hybridization region that is able to directly or indirectly bind to at least a portion of a target sequence in a target nucleic acid.
- the nucleic acid probe may be able to bind to a specific target nucleic acid (e.g., an mRNA, or other nucleic acids disclosed herein).
- the nucleic acid probes may be detected using a detectable label, and/or by using secondary nucleic acid probes able to bind to the nucleic acid probes.
- the nucleic acid probes e.g., primary probes and/or secondary probes
- a nucleic acid probe disclosed herein can serve as a template or primer for a polymerase, a template or substrate for a ligase, a substrate for a click chemistry reaction, and/or a substrate for a nuclease (e.g., endonuclease or exonuclease for cleavage or digestion).
- a nuclease e.g., endonuclease or exonuclease for cleavage or digestion.
- more than one type of primary nucleic acid probes may be contacted with a sample, e.g., simultaneously or sequentially in any suitable order, such as in sequential probe hybridization/unhybridization cycles.
- more than one type of secondary nucleic acid probes may be contacted with a sample, e.g., simultaneously or sequentially in any suitable order, such as in sequential probe hybridization/unhybridization cycles.
- the secondary probes may comprise probes that bind to a product of a primary probe targeting an analyte.
- more than one type of higher order nucleic acid probes may be contacted with a sample, e.g., simultaneously or sequentially in any suitable order, such as in sequential probe hybridization/unhybridization cycles.
- more than one type of detectably labeled nucleic acid probes may be contacted with a sample, e.g., simultaneously or sequentially in any suitable order, such as in sequential probe hybridization/unhybridization cycles.
- the detectably labeled nucleic acid probes can be used to bind to one or more primary probes, one or more secondary probes, one or more higher order probes, one or more intermediate probes between a primary/secondary/higher order probes, and/or one or more detectably or non-detectably labeled probes (e.g., as in the case of a hybridization chain reaction (HCR), a branched DNA reaction (bDNA), or the like).
- HCR hybridization chain reaction
- bDNA branched DNA reaction
- the plurality of probes or probe sets comprises at least 2, at least 5, at least 10, at least 25, at least 50, at least 75, at least 100, at least 300, at least 1,000, at least 3,000, at least 10,000, at least 30,000, at least 50,000, at least 100,000, at least 250,000, at least 500,000, or at least 1,000,000 distinguishable nucleic acid probes (e.g., primary, secondary, higher order probes, and/or detectably labeled probes) that can be contacted with a sample, e.g., simultaneously or sequentially in any suitable order.
- distinguishable nucleic acid probes e.g., primary, secondary, higher order probes, and/or detectably labeled probes
- the method may comprise one or more intervening reactions and/or processing steps, such as modifications of a target nucleic acid, modifications of a probe or product thereof (e.g., via hybridization, ligation, extension, amplification, cleavage, digestion, branch migration, primer exchange reaction, click chemistry reaction, crosslinking, attachment of a detectable label, activating photo-reactive moieties, etc.), removal of a probe or product thereof (e.g., cleaving off a portion of a probe and/or unhybridizing the entire probe), signal modifications (e.g., quenching, masking, photo-bleaching, signal enhancement (e.g., via FRET), signal amplification, etc.), signal removal (e.g., cleaving off or permanently inactivating a detectable label), crosslinking, de-crosslinking, and/or signal detection.
- intervening reactions and/or processing steps such as modifications of a target nucleic acid, modifications of a probe or product thereof (e.g.
- the hybridization region of the probe or probe set is a target-binding sequence (sometimes also referred to as the targeting region/sequence or the recognition region/sequence) that be positioned anywhere within the probe.
- the target-binding sequence of a primary probe that binds to a target nucleic acid can be 5′ or 3′ to any barcode sequence in the primary probe.
- the target-binding sequence of a secondary probe (which binds to a primary probe or complement or product thereof) can be 5′ or 3′ to any barcode sequence in the secondary probe.
- the target-binding sequence may comprise a sequence that is substantially complementary to a portion of a target nucleic acid.
- the portions may be at least 50%, at least 60%, at least 70%, at least 75%, at least 80%, at least 85%, at least 90%, at least 92%, at least 94%, at least 95%, at least 96%, at least 97%, at least 98%, at least 99%, or 100% complementary.
- the hybridization region of the probe or probe set can be used to identify a particular analyte comprising or associated with a target (e.g., comprising a target sequence).
- a target e.g., comprising a target sequence
- multiple probes can be used, sequentially and/or simultaneously, that can bind to (e.g., hybridize to) different regions of the same target nucleic acid.
- a probe may comprise target-binding sequences (e.g., hybridization regions) that can bind to different target nucleic acid sequences, e.g., various intron and/or exon sequences of the same gene (for detecting splice variants, for example), or sequences of different genes, e.g., for detecting a product that comprises the different target nucleic acid sequences, such as a genome rearrangement (e.g., inversion, transposition, translocation, insertion, deletion, duplication, and/or amplification).
- target-binding sequences e.g., hybridization regions
- target nucleic acid sequences e.g., various intron and/or exon sequences of the same gene (for detecting splice variants, for example)
- sequences of different genes e.g., for detecting a product that comprises the different target nucleic acid sequences, such as a genome rearrangement (e.g., inversion, transposition, translocation, insertion
- RNA, ssDNA, and cell surface or intracellular proteins and/or metabolites are provided herein.
- the labelling agent is an immunohistochemistry (IHC) probe that is excited at various different wavelengths.
- an analyte labelling agent may include an agent that interacts with an analyte (e.g., an endogenous analyte in a sample).
- the labelling agents can comprise a reporter oligonucleotide that is indicative of the analyte or portion thereof interacting with the labelling agent.
- the reporter oligonucleotide may comprise a barcode sequence that permits identification of the labelling agent.
- the sample contacted by the labelling agent can be further contacted with a probe (e.g., a single-stranded probe sequence), that hybridizes to a reporter oligonucleotide of the labelling agent, in order to identify the analyte associated with the labelling agent.
- a probe e.g., a single-stranded probe sequence
- the analyte labelling agent comprises an analyte binding moiety and a labelling agent barcode domain comprising one or more barcode sequences, e.g., a barcode sequence that corresponds to the analyte binding moiety and/or the analyte.
- An analyte binding moiety barcode comprises to a barcode that is associated with or otherwise identifies the analyte binding moiety.
- an analyte binding moiety barcode can be a nucleic acid sequence of a given length and/or sequence that is associated with the analyte binding moiety.
- An analyte binding moiety barcode can generally include any of the variety of aspects of barcodes described herein.
- the method comprises one or more post-fixing (also referred to as post-fixation) steps after contacting the sample with one or more labelling agents.
- post-fixing also referred to as post-fixation
- cell features include cell surface features.
- Analytes may include, but are not limited to, a protein, a receptor, an antigen, a surface protein, a transmembrane protein, a cluster of differentiation protein, a protein channel, a protein pump, a carrier protein, a phospholipid, a glycoprotein, a glycolipid, a cell-cell interaction protein complex, an antigen-presenting complex, a major histocompatibility complex, an engineered T-cell receptor, a T-cell receptor, a B-cell receptor, a chimeric antigen receptor, a gap junction, an adherens junction, or any combination thereof.
- cell features may include intracellular analytes, such as proteins, protein modifications (e.g., phosphorylation status or other post-translational modifications), nuclear proteins, nuclear membrane proteins, or any combination
- an analyte binding moiety may include any molecule or moiety capable of binding to an analyte (e.g., a biological analyte, e.g., a macromolecular constituent).
- a labelling agent may include, but is not limited to, a protein, a peptide, an antibody (or an epitope binding fragment thereof), a lipophilic moiety (such as cholesterol), a cell surface receptor binding molecule, a receptor ligand, a small molecule, a bi-specific antibody, a bi-specific T-cell engager, a T-cell receptor engager, a B-cell receptor engager, a pro-body, an aptamer, a monobody, an affimer, a darpin, and a protein scaffold, or any combination thereof.
- the labelling agents can include (e.g., are attached to) a reporter oligonucleotide that is indicative of the cell surface feature to which the binding group binds.
- the reporter oligonucleotide may comprise a barcode sequence that permits identification of the labelling agent.
- a labelling agent that is specific to one type of cell feature e.g., a first cell surface feature
- a labelling agent that is specific to a different cell feature e.g., a second cell surface feature
- a different reporter oligonucleotide coupled thereto.
- reporter oligonucleotides for a description of exemplary labelling agents, reporter oligonucleotides, and methods of use, see, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 10,550,429; U.S. Pat. Pub. 20190177800; and U.S. Pat. Pub. 20190367969, which are each incorporated by reference herein in their entirety.
- an analyte binding moiety comprises one or more antibodies or antigen binding fragments thereof.
- the antibodies or antigen binding fragments including the analyte binding moiety can specifically bind to a target analyte.
- the analyte is a protein (e.g., a protein on a surface of the biological sample (e.g., a cell) or an intracellular protein).
- a plurality of analyte labelling agents comprising a plurality of analyte binding moieties bind a plurality of analytes present in a biological sample.
- the plurality of analytes comprises a single species of analyte (e.g., a single species of polypeptide).
- the analyte binding moieties of the plurality of analyte labelling agents are the same.
- the analyte binding moieties of the plurality of analyte labelling agents are the different (e.g., members of the plurality of analyte labelling agents can have two or more species of analyte binding moieties, wherein each of the two or more species of analyte binding moieties binds a single species of analyte, e.g., at different binding sites).
- the plurality of analytes comprises multiple different species of analyte (e.g., multiple different species of polypeptides).
- a labelling agent that is specific to a particular cell feature may have a first plurality of the labelling agent (e.g., an antibody or lipophilic moiety) coupled to a first reporter oligonucleotide and a second plurality of the labelling agent coupled to a second reporter oligonucleotide.
- a first plurality of the labelling agent e.g., an antibody or lipophilic moiety
- these reporter oligonucleotides may comprise nucleic acid barcode sequences that permit identification of the labelling agent which the reporter oligonucleotide is coupled to.
- the selection of oligonucleotides as the reporter may provide advantages of being able to generate significant diversity in terms of sequence, while also being readily attachable to most biomolecules, e.g., antibodies, etc., as well as being readily detected.
- Attachment (coupling) of the reporter oligonucleotides to the labelling agents may be achieved through any of a variety of direct or indirect, covalent or non-covalent associations or attachments.
- oligonucleotides may be covalently attached to a portion of a labelling agent (such a protein, e.g., an antibody or antibody fragment) using chemical conjugation techniques (e.g., Lightning-Link® antibody labelling kits available from Innova Biosciences), as well as other non-covalent attachment mechanisms, e.g., using biotinylated antibodies and oligonucleotides (or beads that include one or more biotinylated linker, coupled to oligonucleotides) with an avidin or streptavidin linker.
- a labelling agent such as a protein, e.g., an antibody or antibody fragment
- chemical conjugation techniques e.g., Lightning-Link® antibody labelling kits available from Innova Biosciences
- other non-covalent attachment mechanisms
- Antibody and oligonucleotide biotinylation techniques are available. See, e.g., Fang, et al., “Fluoride-Cleavable Biotinylation Phosphoramidite for 5′-end-Labelling and Affinity Purification of Synthetic Oligonucleotides,” Nucleic Acids Res. Jan. 15, 2003; 31(2):708-715, which is entirely incorporated herein by reference for all purposes. Likewise, protein and peptide biotinylation techniques have been developed and are readily available. See, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 6,265,552, which is entirely incorporated herein by reference for all purposes.
- a labelling agent is indirectly (e.g., via hybridization) coupled to a reporter oligonucleotide comprising a barcode sequence that identifies the label agent.
- the labelling agent may be directly coupled (e.g., covalently bound) to a hybridization oligonucleotide that comprises a sequence that hybridizes with a sequence of the reporter oligonucleotide.
- Hybridization of the hybridization oligonucleotide to the reporter oligonucleotide couples the labelling agent to the reporter oligonucleotide.
- the reporter oligonucleotides are releasable from the labelling agent, such as upon application of a stimulus.
- the reporter oligonucleotide may be attached to the labelling agent through a labile bond (e.g., chemically labile, photolabile, thermally labile, etc.) as generally described for releasing molecules from supports elsewhere herein.
- the labelling agent can comprise a reporter oligonucleotide and a label.
- a label can be fluorophore, a radioisotope, a molecule capable of a colorimetric reaction, a magnetic particle, or any other suitable molecule or compound capable of detection.
- the label can be conjugated to a labelling agent (or reporter oligonucleotide) either directly or indirectly (e.g., the label can be conjugated to a molecule that can bind to the labelling agent or reporter oligonucleotide).
- a label is conjugated to a first oligonucleotide that is complementary (e.g., hybridizes) to a sequence of the reporter oligonucleotide.
- multiple different species of analytes from the biological sample can be subsequently associated with the one or more physical properties of the biological sample.
- the multiple different species of analytes can be associated with locations of the analytes in the biological sample.
- Such information e.g., proteomic information when the analyte binding moiety(ies) recognizes a polypeptide(s)
- can be used in association with other spatial information e.g., genetic information from the biological sample, such as DNA sequence information, transcriptome information (e.g., sequences of transcripts), or both).
- a cell surface protein of a cell can be associated with one or more physical properties of the cell (e.g., a shape, size, activity, or a type of the cell).
- the one or more physical properties can be characterized by imaging the cell.
- the cell can be bound by an analyte labelling agent comprising an analyte binding moiety that binds to the cell surface protein and an analyte binding moiety barcode that identifies that analyte binding moiety.
- Results of protein analysis in a sample e.g., a tissue sample or a cell
- RNA analysis in the sample e.g., a tissue sample or a cell
- the labelling agents e.g., probes or probes sets
- a product of an endogenous analyte and/or a labelling agent is a hybridization product comprising the pairing of substantially complementary or complementary nucleic acid sequences within two different molecules, one of which is the endogenous analyte or the labelling agent (e.g., reporter oligonucleotide attached thereto).
- the other molecule can be another endogenous molecule or an exogenous molecule such as a probe. Pairing can be achieved by any process in which a nucleic acid sequence joins with a substantially or fully complementary sequence through base pairing to form a hybridization complex.
- two nucleic acid sequences are “substantially complementary” if at least 60% (e.g., at least 70%, at least 80%, or at least 90%) of their individual bases are complementary to one another.
- Various probes and probe sets can be hybridized to an endogenous analyte and/or a labelling agent and each probe may comprise one or more barcode sequences.
- various probes and probe sets can be used to generate a product comprising a target sequence that can be hybridized by one or more detectable probes.
- a probe or probe set disclosed herein is a circularizable probe or probe set comprising a barcode region comprising one or more barcode sequences.
- Exemplary barcoded probes or probe sets may be based on a padlock probe, a gapped padlock probe, a SNAIL (Splint Nucleotide Assisted Intramolecular Ligation) probe set, a PLAYR (Proximity Ligation Assay for RNA) probe set, a PLISH (Proximity Ligation in situ Hybridization) probe set, and RNA-templated ligation probes.
- the specific probe or probe set design can vary.
- a product of an endogenous analyte and/or a labelling agent is a ligation product that may comprise a target sequence that can be hybridized by one or more probes described herein.
- the ligation product is formed between two or more endogenous analytes.
- the ligation product is formed between an endogenous analyte and a labelling agent.
- the ligation product is formed between two or more labelling agent.
- the ligation product is an intramolecular ligation of an endogenous analyte.
- the ligation product is an intramolecular ligation of a labelling agent or probe, for example, the circularization of a circularizable probe or probe set upon hybridization to a target sequence.
- the target sequence can be comprised in an endogenous analyte (e.g., nucleic acid such as genomic DNA or mRNA) or a product thereof (e.g., cDNA from a cellular mRNA transcript), or in a labelling agent (e.g., the reporter oligonucleotide) or a product thereof.
- a labelling agent comprising a probe or probe set capable of DNA-templated ligation, such as from a cDNA molecule. See, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 8,551,710, which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety.
- a probe or probe set capable of RNA-templated ligation See, e.g., U.S. Pat. Pub. 2020/0224244 which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety.
- the probe set is a SNAIL probe set. See, e.g., U.S. Pat. Pub. 20190055594, which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety.
- a multiplexed proximity ligation assay See, e.g., U.S. Pat. Pub. 20140194311 which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety.
- a probe or probe set capable of proximity ligation for instance a proximity ligation assay for RNA (e.g., PLAYR) probe set.
- RNA e.g., PLAYR
- a circular probe can be indirectly hybridized to the target nucleic acid.
- the circular construct is formed from a probe set capable of proximity ligation, for instance a proximity ligation in situ hybridization (PLISH) probe set.
- PLISH proximity ligation in situ hybridization
- a circular or circularizable probe or probe set may be used to analyze a reporter oligonucleotide, which may generated using proximity ligation or be subjected to proximity ligation.
- the reporter oligonucleotide of a labelling agent that specifically recognizes a protein can be analyzed using in situ hybridization (e.g., sequential hybridization) and/or in situ sequencing (e.g., using circular or circularizable probes and rolling circle amplification of circular or circularized probes).
- the reporter oligonucleotide of the labelling agent and/or a complement thereof and/or a product e.g., a hybridization product, a ligation product, an extension product (e.g., by a DNA or RNA polymerase), a replication product, a transcription/reverse transcription product, and/or an amplification product
- a product e.g., a hybridization product, a ligation product, an extension product (e.g., by a DNA or RNA polymerase), a replication product, a transcription/reverse transcription product, and/or an amplification product
- an analyte (a nucleic acid analyte or non-nucleic acid analyte) can be specifically bound by two labelling agents (e.g., antibodies) each of which is attached to a reporter oligonucleotide (e.g., DNA) that can participate in ligation, replication, and sequence decoding reactions, e.g., using a probe or probe set (e.g., a padlock probe, a SNAIL probe set, a circular probe, a gapped padlock probe, or a gapped padlock probe and a connector).
- the probe set may comprise two or more probe oligonucleotides, each comprising a region that is complementary to each other.
- a proximity ligation reaction can include reporter oligonucleotides attached to pairs of antibodies that can be joined by ligation if the antibodies have been brought in proximity to each other, e.g., by binding the same target protein (complex), and the DNA ligation products that form are then used to template PCR amplification, as described for example in Söderberg et al., Methods. (2008), 45(3): 227-32, the entire contents of which are incorporated herein by reference.
- a proximity ligation reaction can include reporter oligonucleotides attached to antibodies that each bind to one member of a binding pair or complex, for example, for analyzing a binding between members of the binding pair or complex.
- two analytes in proximity can be specifically bound by two labelling agents (e.g., antibodies) each of which is attached to a reporter oligonucleotide (e.g., DNA) that can participate, when in proximity when bound to their respective targets, in ligation, replication, and/or sequence decoding reactions.
- labelling agents e.g., antibodies
- reporter oligonucleotide e.g., DNA
- one or more reporter oligonucleotides aid in the ligation of the probe.
- the probe may form a circularized probe.
- one or more suitable probes can be used and ligated, wherein the one or more probes comprise a sequence that is complementary to the one or more reporter oligonucleotides (or portion thereof).
- the probe may comprise one or more barcode sequences.
- the one or more reporter oligonucleotide may serve as a primer for rolling circle amplification (RCA) of the circularized probe.
- a nucleic acid other than the one or more reporter oligonucleotide is used as a primer for rolling circle amplification (RCA) of the circularized probe.
- a nucleic acid capable of hybridizing to the circularized probe at a sequence other than sequence(s) hybridizing to the one or more reporter oligonucleotide can be used as the primer for RCA.
- the primer in a SNAIL probe set is used as the primer for RCA.
- one or more analytes can be specifically bound by two primary antibodies, each of which is in turn recognized by a secondary antibody each attached to a reporter oligonucleotide (e.g., DNA).
- a reporter oligonucleotide e.g., DNA
- Each nucleic acid molecule can aid in the ligation of the probe to form a circularized probe.
- the probe can comprise one or more barcode sequences.
- the reporter oligonucleotide may serve as a primer for rolling circle amplification of the circularized probe.
- the nucleic acid molecules, circularized probes, and RCA products can be analyzed using any suitable method disclosed herein for in situ analysis.
- the ligation involves chemical ligation. In some embodiments, the ligation involves template dependent ligation. In some embodiments, the ligation involves template independent ligation. In some embodiments, the ligation involves enzymatic ligation.
- the enzymatic ligation involves use of a ligase.
- the ligase used herein comprises an enzyme that is commonly used to join polynucleotides together or to join the ends of a single polynucleotide.
- An RNA ligase, a DNA ligase, or another variety of ligase can be used to ligate two nucleotide sequences together.
- Ligases comprise ATP-dependent double-strand polynucleotide ligases, NAD-i-dependent double-strand DNA or RNA ligases and single-strand polynucleotide ligases, for example any of the ligases described in EC 6.5.1.1 (ATP-dependent ligases), EC 6.5.1.2 (NAD+-dependent ligases), EC 6.5.1.3 (RNA ligases).
- Specific examples of ligases comprise bacterial ligases such as E. coli DNA ligase, Tth DNA ligase, Thermococcus sp.
- the ligase is a T4 RNA ligase.
- the ligase is a splintR ligase.
- the ligase is a single stranded DNA ligase.
- the ligase is a T4 DNA ligase.
- the ligase is a ligase that has an DNA-splinted DNA ligase activity. In some embodiments, the ligase is a ligase that has an RNA-splinted DNA ligase activity.
- the ligation herein is a direct ligation. In some embodiments, the ligation herein is an indirect ligation. “Direct ligation” means that the ends of the polynucleotides hybridize immediately adjacently to one another to form a substrate for a ligase enzyme resulting in their ligation to each other (intramolecular ligation). Alternatively, “indirect” means that the ends of the polynucleotides hybridize non-adjacently to one another, e.g., separated by one or more intervening nucleotides or “gaps”.
- said ends are not ligated directly to each other, but instead occurs either via the intermediacy of one or more intervening (so-called “gap” or “gap-filling” (oligo)nucleotides) or by the extension of the 3′ end of a probe to “fill” the “gap” corresponding to said intervening nucleotides (intermolecular ligation).
- the gap of one or more nucleotides between the hybridized ends of the polynucleotides may be “filled” by one or more “gap” (oligo)nucleotide(s) which are complementary to a splint, padlock probe, or target nucleic acid.
- the gap may be a gap of 1 to 60 nucleotides or a gap of 1 to 40 nucleotides or a gap of 3 to 40 nucleotides.
- the gap may be a gap of about 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 or 10 or more nucleotides, of any integer (or range of integers) of nucleotides in between the indicated values.
- the gap between said terminal regions may be filled by a gap oligonucleotide or by extending the 3′ end of a polynucleotide.
- ligation involves ligating the ends of the probe to at least one gap (oligo)nucleotide, such that the gap (oligo)nucleotide becomes incorporated into the resulting polynucleotide.
- the ligation herein is preceded by gap filling. In other embodiments, the ligation herein does not require gap filling.
- ligation of the polynucleotides produces polynucleotides with melting temperature higher than that of unligated polynucleotides.
- ligation stabilizes the hybridization complex containing the ligated polynucleotides prior to subsequent steps, comprising amplification and detection.
- a high fidelity ligase such as a thermostable DNA ligase (e.g., a Taq DNA ligase)
- Thermostable DNA ligases are active at elevated temperatures, allowing further discrimination by incubating the ligation at a temperature near the melting temperature (T m ) of the DNA strands. This selectively reduces the concentration of annealed mismatched substrates (expected to have a slightly lower T m around the mismatch) over annealed fully base-paired substrates.
- T m melting temperature
- high-fidelity ligation can be achieved through a combination of the intrinsic selectivity of the ligase active site and balanced conditions to reduce the incidence of annealed mismatched dsDNA.
- the ligation herein is a proximity ligation of ligating two (or more) nucleic acid sequences that are in proximity with each other, e.g., through enzymatic means (e.g., a ligase).
- proximity ligation can include a “gap-filling” step that involves incorporation of one or more nucleic acids by a polymerase, based on the nucleic acid sequence of a template nucleic acid molecule, spanning a distance between the two nucleic acid molecules of interest (see, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 7,264,929, the entire contents of which are incorporated herein by reference).
- a wide variety of different methods can be used for proximity ligating nucleic acid molecules, including (but not limited to) “sticky-end” and “blunt-end” ligations.
- single-stranded ligation can be used to perform proximity ligation on a single-stranded nucleic acid molecule.
- Sticky-end proximity ligations involve the hybridization of complementary single-stranded sequences between the two nucleic acid molecules to be joined, prior to the ligation event itself.
- Blunt-end proximity ligations generally do not include hybridization of complementary regions from each nucleic acid molecule because both nucleic acid molecules lack a single-stranded overhang at the site of ligation.
- Any of such products of extension may comprise a target sequence that can be hybridized by the plurality of probes or probe sets described herein.
- the plurality of probes or probe sets comprises a primer.
- a primer is generally a single-stranded nucleic acid sequence having a 3′ end that can be used as a substrate for a nucleic acid polymerase in a nucleic acid extension reaction.
- RNA primers are formed of RNA nucleotides, and are used in RNA synthesis, while DNA primers are formed of DNA nucleotides and used in DNA synthesis.
- Primers can also include both RNA nucleotides and DNA nucleotides (e.g., in a random or designed pattern). Primers can also include other natural or synthetic nucleotides described herein that can have additional functionality.
- DNA primers can be used to prime RNA synthesis and vice versa (e.g., RNA primers can be used to prime DNA synthesis).
- Primers can vary in length. For example, primers can be about 6 bases to about 120 bases. For example, primers can include up to about 25 bases.
- a primer may in some cases, refer to a primer binding sequence.
- a primer extension reaction generally refers to any method where two nucleic acid sequences become linked (e.g., hybridized) by an overlap of their respective terminal complementary nucleic acid sequences (e.g., for example, 3′ termini).
- nucleic acid extension e.g., an enzymatic extension
- Enzymatic extension can be performed by an enzyme including, but not limited to, a polymerase and/or a reverse transcriptase.
- a product of an endogenous analyte and/or a labelling agent is an amplification product of one or more polynucleotides, for instance, a circular probe or circularizable probe or probe set.
- the amplifying is achieved by performing rolling circle amplification (RCA).
- RCA rolling circle amplification
- a primer that hybridizes to the circular probe or circularized probe is added and used as such for amplification.
- the RCA comprises a linear RCA, a branched RCA, a dendritic RCA, or any combination thereof.
- the amplification is performed at a temperature between or between about 20° C. and about 60° C. In some embodiments, the amplification is performed at a temperature between or between about 30° C. and about 40° C. In some aspects, the amplification step, such as the rolling circle amplification (RCA) is performed at a temperature between at or about 25° C. and at or about 50° C., such as at or about 25° C., 27° C., 29° C., 31° C., 33° C., 35° C., 37° C., 39° C., 41° C., 43° C., 45° C., 47° C., or 49° C.
- RCA rolling circle amplification
- a primer upon addition of a DNA polymerase in the presence of appropriate dNTP precursors and other cofactors, a primer is elongated to produce multiple copies of the circular template.
- This amplification step can utilize isothermal amplification or non-isothermal amplification.
- the hybridization complex after the formation of the hybridization complex and association of the amplification probe, the hybridization complex is rolling-circle amplified to generate a cDNA nanoball (e.g., amplicon) containing multiple copies of the cDNA.
- Techniques for rolling circle amplification (RCA) include linear RCA, a branched RCA, a dendritic RCA, or any combination thereof.
- Exemplary polymerases for use in RCA comprise DNA polymerase such phi29 ( ⁇ 29) polymerase, Klenow fragment, Bacillus stearothermophilus DNA polymerase (BST), T4 DNA polymerase, T7 DNA polymerase, or DNA polymerase I.
- DNA polymerase such as phi29 ( ⁇ 29) polymerase, Klenow fragment, Bacillus stearothermophilus DNA polymerase (BST), T4 DNA polymerase, T7 DNA polymerase, or DNA polymerase I.
- BST Bacillus stearothermophilus DNA polymerase
- T4 DNA polymerase T7 DNA polymerase
- DNA polymerase I DNA polymerase
- modified nucleotides can be added to the reaction to incorporate the modified nucleotides in the amplification product (e.g., nanoball).
- the modified nucleotides comprise amine-modified nucleotides.
- the amplification products comprises a modified nucleotide, such as an amine-modified nucleotide.
- the amine-modified nucleotide comprises an acrylic acid N-hydroxysuccinimide moiety modification.
- examples of other amine-modified nucleotides comprise, but are not limited to, a 5-Aminoallyl-dUTP moiety modification, a 5-Propargylamino-dCTP moiety modification, a N 6 -6-Aminohexyl-dATP moiety modification, or a 7-Deaza-7-Propargylamino-dATP moiety modification.
- the polynucleotides and/or amplification product can be anchored to a polymer matrix.
- the polymer matrix can be a hydrogel.
- one or more of the polynucleotide probe(s) can be modified to contain functional groups that can be used as an anchoring site to attach the polynucleotide probes and/or amplification product to a polymer matrix.
- Exemplary modification and polymer matrix that can be employed in accordance with the provided embodiments comprise those described in, for example, US 2016/0024555, US 2018/0251833, US 2017/0219465, U.S. Pat. Nos.
- the scaffold also contains modifications or functional groups that can react with or incorporate the modifications or functional groups of the probe set or amplification product.
- the scaffold can comprise oligonucleotides, polymers or chemical groups, to provide a matrix and/or support structures.
- the amplification products may be immobilized within the matrix generally at the location of the nucleic acid being amplified, thereby creating a localized colony of amplicons.
- the amplification products may be immobilized within the matrix by steric factors.
- the amplification products may also be immobilized within the matrix by covalent or noncovalent bonding. In this manner, the amplification products may be considered to be attached to the matrix.
- the amplification products may be considered to be attached to the matrix.
- the amplification products By being immobilized to the matrix, such as by covalent bonding or cross-linking, the size and spatial relationship of the original amplicons is maintained.
- the amplification products are resistant to movement or unraveling under mechanical stress.
- the amplification products are copolymerized and/or covalently attached to the surrounding matrix thereby preserving their spatial relationship and any information inherent thereto.
- the amplification products are those generated from DNA or RNA within a cell embedded in the matrix
- the amplification products can also be functionalized to form covalent attachment to the matrix preserving their spatial information within the cell thereby providing a subcellular localization distribution pattern.
- the provided methods involve embedding the one or more polynucleotide probe sets and/or the amplification products in the presence of hydrogel subunits to form one or more hydrogel-embedded amplification products.
- the hydrogel-tissue chemistry described comprises covalently attaching nucleic acids to in situ synthesized hydrogel for tissue clearing, enzyme diffusion, and multiple-cycle sequencing while an existing hydrogel-tissue chemistry method cannot.
- amine-modified nucleotides are comprised in the amplification step (e.g., RCA), functionalized with an acrylamide moiety using acrylic acid N-hydroxysuccinimide esters, and copolymerized with acrylamide monomers to form a hydrogel.
- the RCA template may comprise the target analyte, or a part thereof, where the target analyte is a nucleic acid, or it may be provided or generated as a proxy, or a marker, for the analyte.
- the detection of numerous different analytes may use a RCA-based detection system, e.g., where the signal is provided by generating a target sequence from a circular RCA template which is provided or generated in the assay, and the target sequence is detected to detect the corresponding analyte.
- the target sequence may thus be regarded as a reporter which is detected to detect the target analyte.
- the RCA template may also be regarded as a reporter for the target analyte; the target sequence is generated based on the RCA template, and comprises complementary copies of the RCA template.
- the RCA template determines the signal which is detected, and is thus indicative of the target analyte.
- the RCA template may be a probe, or a part or component of a probe, or may be generated from a probe, or it may be a component of a detection assay (e.g. a reagent in a detection assay), which is used as a reporter for the assay, or a part of a reporter, or signal-generation system.
- the RCA template used to generate the target sequence may thus be a circular (e.g.
- a product herein comprises a molecule or a complex generated in a series of reactions, e.g., hybridization, ligation, extension, replication, transcription/reverse transcription, and/or amplification (e.g., rolling circle amplification), in any suitable combination.
- a product comprising a target sequence for a target-binding region in a probe may be a hybridization complex formed of a cellular nucleic acid in a sample and an exogenously added nucleic acid probe or a product generated therefrom.
- the exogenously added nucleic acid probe e.g., plurality of probes or probe sets
- the labelling agents may bind or hybridize to a target.
- a target comprises a target sequence for a probe or probe set.
- the plurality of probes or probe sets may be used to generate a product comprising signal amplification components.
- the amplification comprises one or more probe hybridizations and generation of amplified signals associated with the labelling agents (e.g., probes).
- Exemplary signal amplification methods include targeted assembly of branched structures (e.g., bDNA).
- detection of nucleic acids sequences in situ includes combination of the sequential decoding methods described herein with an assembly for branched signal amplification using the nucleic acid probes provided herein.
- the assembly complex comprises an amplifier hybridized directly or indirectly (via one or more oligonucleotides) to a sequence of a cellular nucleic acid.
- the probes After contacting the biological sample with a plurality of labelling agents (e.g., probes or probe sets), the probes may be directly detected by determining detectable labels (if present), and/or detected by using one or more other probes that bind directly or indirectly to the plurality of probes or probe sets or products thereof.
- the one or more other probes may comprise a detectable label.
- a primary nucleic acid probe can bind to a target nucleic acid in the sample, and a secondary nucleic acid probe can be introduced to bind to the primary nucleic acid probe, where the secondary nucleic acid probe or a product thereof can then be detected using detectable probes (e.g., detectably labeled probes).
- detectable probes e.g., detectably labeled probes
- Higher order probes that directly or indirectly bind to the secondary nucleic acid probe or product thereof may also be used, and the higher order probes or products thereof can then be detected using detectably labeled probes.
- a secondary nucleic acid probe binds to a primary nucleic acid probe directly hybridized to the target nucleic acid.
- a secondary nucleic acid probe (e.g., a first detectable probe or a second detectable probe disclosed herein) may contain a recognition sequence able to bind to or hybridize with a primary nucleic acid probe (e.g., probes or probe sets disclosed herein) or a product thereof (e.g., an RCA product), e.g., at a barcode sequence or portion(s) thereof of the probes or probe sets or products thereof.
- a secondary nucleic acid probe may bind to a combination of barcode sequences (which may be continuous or spaced from one another) in the probes or probe sets, a product thereof. In some embodiments, the binding is specific, or the binding may be such that a recognition sequence preferentially binds to or hybridizes with only one of the barcode sequences or complements thereof that are present.
- the secondary nucleic acid probe may also contain one or more detectable labels. If more than one secondary nucleic acid probe is used, the detectable labels may be the same or different.
- the recognition sequences may be of any length, and multiple recognition sequences in the same or different secondary nucleic acid probes may be of the same or different lengths. If more than one recognition sequence is used, the recognition sequences may independently have the same or different lengths. For instance, the recognition sequence may be at least 4, at least 5, least 6, least 7, least 8, least 9, at least 10, least 11, least 12, least 13, least 14, at least 15, least 16, least 17, least 18, least 19, at least 20, at least 25, at least 30, at least 35, at least 40, or at least 50 nucleotides in length. In some embodiments, the recognition sequence may be no more than 48, no more than 40, no more than 32, no more than 24, no more than 16, no more than 12, no more than 10, no more than 8, or no more than 6 nucleotides in length.
- the recognition sequence may have a length of between 5 and 8, between 6 and 12, or between 7 and 15 nucleotides, etc.
- the recognition sequence is of the same length as a barcode sequence or complement thereof of a primary nucleic acid probe or a product thereof.
- the recognition sequence may be at least 50%, at least 60%, at least 70%, at least 75%, at least 80%, at least 85%, at least 90%, at least 92%, at least 94%, at least 95%, at least 96%, at least 97%, at least 98%, at least 99%, or at least 100% complementary to the barcode sequence or complement thereof.
- the probes or probe sets, or an intermediate probe may also comprise 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15 or more, 20 or more, 32 or more, 40 or more, or 50 or more barcode sequences.
- a first probe may contain a first target-binding sequence, a first barcode sequence, and a second barcode sequence
- a second, different probe may contain a second target-binding sequence (that is different from the first target-binding sequence in the first probe), the same first barcode sequence as in the first probe, but a third barcode sequence instead of the second barcode sequence.
- Such probes may thereby be distinguished by determining the various barcode sequence combinations present or associated with a given probe at a given location in a sample.
- the nucleic acid probes disclosed herein may be made using only 2 or only 3 of the 4 bases, such as leaving out all the “G” s and/or leaving out all of the “C” s within the probe. Sequences lacking either “G” s or “C” s may form very little secondary structure, and can contribute to more uniform, faster hybridization in certain embodiments.
- a nucleic acid probe disclosed herein may contain a detectable label such as a fluorophore.
- one or more probes of a plurality of nucleic acid probes used in an assay may lack a detectable label, while one or more other probes in the plurality each comprises a detectable label selected from a limited pool of distinct detectable labels (e.g., red, green, yellow, and blue fluorophores), and the absence of detectable label may be used as a separate “color.” As such, detectable labels are not required in all cases.
- a primary nucleic acid probe disclosed herein lacks a detectable label.
- a detectable label may be incorporated into an amplification product of a probe, such as via incorporation of a modified nucleotide into an RCA product of a circularized probe, the amplification product itself in some embodiments is not detectably labeled.
- a probe that binds to the primary nucleic acid probe or a product thereof e.g., a secondary nucleic acid probe that binds to a barcode sequence or complement thereof in the primary nucleic acid probe or product thereof
- a secondary nucleic acid probe disclosed herein lacks a detectable label, and a detectably labeled probe that binds to the secondary nucleic acid probe or a product thereof (e.g., at a barcode sequence or complement thereof in the secondary nucleic acid probe or product thereof) can be used to detect the second nucleic acid probe or product thereof.
- signals associated with the detectably labeled probes can be used to detect one or more barcode sequences in the secondary probe and/or one or more barcode sequences in the primary probe, e.g., by using sequential hybridization of detectably labeled probes, sequencing-by-ligation, and/or sequencing-by-hybridization.
- the barcode sequences are used to combinatorially encode a plurality of analytes of interest.
- signals associated with the detectably labeled probes at particular locations in a biological sample can be used to generate distinct signal signatures that each corresponds to an analyte in the sample, thereby identifying the analytes at the particular locations, e.g., for in situ spatial analysis of the sample.
- probes or probe sets described herein comprises one or more other components, such as one or more primer binding sequences (e.g., to allow for enzymatic amplification of probes), enzyme recognition sequences (e.g., for endonuclease cleavage), or the like.
- primer binding sequences e.g., to allow for enzymatic amplification of probes
- enzyme recognition sequences e.g., for endonuclease cleavage
- the components of the nucleic acid probe may be arranged in any suitable order.
- targets e.g., analytes
- labelling agents e.g., probes or probe sets
- the probes or probe sets described herein are in turn targeted by secondary probes e.g., intermediate probes, which are also barcoded through the incorporation of one or more barcode sequences that are separate from a recognition sequence in a secondary probe that directly or indirectly binds the probes or probe sets described herein or a product thereof.
- a secondary probe may bind to a barcode sequence in the primary probe.
- tertiary probes and optionally even higher order probes may be used to target the secondary probes, e.g., at a barcode sequence or complement thereof in a secondary probe or product thereof.
- the tertiary probes and/or even higher order probes may comprise one or more barcode sequences and/or one or more detectable labels.
- a tertiary probe is a detectably labeled probe that hybridizes to a barcode sequence (or complement thereof) of a secondary probe (or product thereof).
- the location of one or more analytes in the sample and the identity of the analyte(s) can be determined.
- the presence/absence, absolute or relative abundance, an amount, a level, a concentration, an activity, and/or a relation with another analyte of a particular analyte can be analyzed in situ in the sample.
- labelling agents e.g., probes or probe sets
- assay methods to couple target nucleic acid detection, signal amplification (e.g., through nucleic acid amplification such as RCA, and/or hybridization of a plurality of detectably labeled probes, such as in hybridization chain reactions and the like, e.g., described in Section III-C), and decoding of the barcodes.
- probes or probe sets described herein, or intermediate probes can be selected from the group consisting of a circular probe, a circularizable probe, and a linear probe.
- a circular probe can be one that is pre-circularized prior to hybridization to a target nucleic acid and/or one or more other probes.
- a circularizable probe can be one that can be circularized upon hybridization to a target nucleic acid and/or one or more other probes such as a splint.
- a linear probe can be one that comprises a target recognition sequence and a sequence that does not hybridize to a target nucleic acid, such as a 5′ overhang, a 3′ overhang, and/or a linker or spacer (which may comprise a nucleic acid sequence or a non-nucleic acid moiety).
- a target nucleic acid such as a 5′ overhang, a 3′ overhang, and/or a linker or spacer (which may comprise a nucleic acid sequence or a non-nucleic acid moiety).
- the sequence e.g., the 5′ overhang, 3′ overhang, and/or linker or spacer
- the sequence is non-hybridizing to the target nucleic acid but may hybridize to one another and/or one or more other probes, such as detectably labeled probes.
- probes or probe sets described herein can comprise a circularizable probe that does not require gap filling to circularize upon hybridization to a template (e.g., a target nucleic acid and/or a probe such as a splint), a gapped circularizable probe (e.g., one that requires gap filling to circularize upon hybridization to a template), an L-shaped probe (e.g., one that comprises a target recognition sequence and a 5′ or 3′ overhang upon hybridization to a target nucleic acid or a probe), a U-shaped probe (e.g., one that comprises a target recognition sequence, a 5′ overhang, and a 3′ overhang upon hybridization to a target nucleic acid or a probe), a V-shaped probe (e.g., one that comprises at least two target recognition sequences and
- a primary probe, a secondary probe, and/or a higher order probe disclosed herein can comprise a probe that is ligated to itself or another probe using DNA-templated and/or RNA-templated ligation.
- a primary probe, a secondary probe, and/or a higher order probe disclosed herein can be a DNA molecule and can comprise one or more other types of nucleotides, modified nucleotides, and/or nucleotide analogues, such as one or more ribonucleotides.
- the ligation can be a DNA ligation on a DNA template.
- the ligation can be a DNA ligation on an RNA template, and the probes can comprise RNA-templated ligation probes.
- a primary probe, a secondary probe, and/or a higher order probe disclosed herein can comprise a padlock-like probe or probe set, such as one described in US 2019/0055594, US 2021/0164039, US 2016/0108458, or US 2020/0224243, each of which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety. Any suitable combination of the probe designs described herein can be used.
- probes or probe sets described herein can comprise two or more parts.
- a probe can comprise one or more features of and/or be modified based on: a split FISH probe or probe set described in WO 2021/167526A1 or Goh et al., “Highly specific multiplexed RNA imaging in tissues with split-FISH,” Nat Methods 17(7):689-693 (2020), which are incorporated herein by reference in their entireties; a Z-probe or probe set, such as one described in U.S. Pat. No. 7,709,198 B2, U.S. Pat. No.
- probes or probe sets described herein comprise one or more features and/or is modified to allow for generation and detection of a first signal that does not comprise a nucleic acid amplification step (e.g., the first signal can be an smFISH signal).
- the probes or probe sets described herein for each target comprises probes directly hybridize to multiple regions (e.g., sequences) of the same transcript.
- the probes or probe sets described herein comprise a circular probe or circularizable probe or probe set comprises one or more features and/or is modified to allow for generation and detection of a second signal that comprises an amplification step (e.g., extension and/or amplification catalyzed by a polymerase).
- any suitable circularizable probe or probe set may be used to generate the RCA template which is used to generate the RCA product.
- the probe or reporter (the RCA template) is in the form of a linear molecule having ligatable ends which may circularized by ligating the ends together directly or indirectly, e.g. to each other, or to the respective ends of an intervening (“gap”) oligonucleotide or to an extended 3′ end of the circularizable RCA template.
- a circularizable template may also be provided in two or more parts, namely two or more molecules (e.g. oligonucleotides) which may be ligated together to form a circle.
- the circularizable RCA template (or template part or portion) may comprise at its respective 3′ and 5′ ends regions of complementarity to corresponding cognate complementary regions (or binding sites) in the ligation template, which may be adjacent where the ends are directly ligated to each other, or non-adjacent, with an intervening “gap” sequence, where indirect ligation is to take place.
- probes or probe sets disclosed herein can be pre-assembled from multiple components, e.g., prior to contacting the probe with a target nucleic acid or a sample.
- a nucleic acid probe disclosed herein can be assembled during and/or after contacting a target nucleic acid or a sample with multiple components.
- a nucleic acid probe disclosed herein is assembled in situ in a sample.
- the multiple components can be contacted with a target nucleic acid or a sample in any suitable order and any suitable combination.
- a first component and a second component can be contacted with a target nucleic acid, to allow binding between the components and/or binding between the first and/or second components with the target nucleic acid.
- a reaction involving either or both components and/or the target nucleic acid, between the components, and/or between either one or both components and the target nucleic acid can be performed, such as hybridization, ligation, primer extension and/or amplification, chemical or enzymatic cleavage, click chemistry, or any combination thereof.
- a third component can be added prior to, during, or after the reaction.
- a third component can be added prior to, during, or after contacting the sample with the first and/or second components.
- the first, second, and third components can be contacted with the sample in any suitable combination, sequentially or simultaneously.
- the nucleic acid probe can be assembled in situ in a stepwise manner, each step with the addition of one or more components, or in a dynamic process where all components are assembled together.
- One or more removing steps e.g., by washing the sample such as under stringent conditions, may be performed at any point during the assembling process to remove or destabilize undesired intermediates and/or components at that point and increase the chance of accurate probe assembly and specific target binding of the assembled probe.
- the methods provided herein comprise performing rolling circle amplification of a circular probe or a circularized probe generated from a circularizable probe or probe set.
- a probe disclosed herein can comprise a 5′ flap which may be recognized by a structure-specific cleavage enzyme, e.g. an enzyme capable of recognizing the junction between a single-stranded 5′ overhang and a DNA duplex, and cleaving the single-stranded overhang.
- a structure-specific cleavage enzyme e.g. an enzyme capable of recognizing the junction between a single-stranded 5′ overhang and a DNA duplex, and cleaving the single-stranded overhang.
- the branched three-strand structure which is the substrate for the structure-specific cleavage enzyme may be formed by 5′ end of one probe part and the 3′ end of another probe part when both have hybridized to a target, as well as by the 5′ and 3′ ends of a one-part probe.
- Enzymes suitable for such cleavage include Flap endonucleases (FENS), which are a class of enzymes having endonucleolytic activity and being capable of catalyzing the hydrolytic cleavage of the phosphodiester bond at the junction of single- and double-stranded DNA.
- FENS Flap endonucleases
- cleavage of the additional sequence 5′ to the first target-specific binding site is performed by a structure-specific cleavage enzyme, e.g. a Flap endonuclease.
- Suitable Flap endonucleases are described in Ma et al. 2000. JBC 275, 24693-24700 and in US 2020/0224244 and may include P. furiosus (Pfu), A.
- an enzyme capable of recognizing and degrading a single-stranded oligonucleotide having a free 5′ end may be used to cleave an additional sequence (5′ flap) from a structure as described above.
- an enzyme having 5′ nuclease activity may be used to cleave a 5′ additional sequence.
- Such 5′ nuclease activity may be 5′ exonuclease and/or 5′ endonuclease activity.
- a 5′ nuclease enzyme is capable of recognizing a free 5′ end of a single-stranded oligonucleotide and degrading said single-stranded oligonucleotide.
- a 5′ exonuclease degrades a single-stranded oligonucleotide having a free 5′ end by degrading the oligonucleotide into constituent mononucleotides from its 5′ end.
- a 5′ endonuclease activity may cleave the 5′ flap sequence internally at one or more nucleotides.
- a 5′ nuclease activity may take place by the enzyme traversing the single-stranded oligonucleotide to a region of duplex once it has recognized the free 5′ end, and cleaving the single-stranded region into larger constituent nucleotides (e.g. dinucleotides or trinucleotides), or cleaving the entire 5′ single-stranded region, e.g. as described in Lyamichev et al. 1999. PNAS 96, 6143-6148 for Taq DNA polymerase and the 5′ nuclease thereof.
- larger constituent nucleotides e.g. dinucleotides or trinucleotides
- Preferred enzymes having 5′ nuclease activity include Exonuclease VIII, or a native or recombinant DNA polymerase enzyme from Thermus aquaticus (Taq), Thermus thermophilus or Thermus flavus , or the nuclease domain therefrom.
- a target sequence for a probe disclosed herein may be comprised in any analyte (e.g., target) disclose herein, including an endogenous analyte (e.g., a viral or cellular nucleic acid), a labelling agent, or a product of an endogenous analyte and/or a labelling agent.
- a target sequence for a probe disclosed herein comprises one or more ribonucleotides.
- one or more of the target sequences includes one or more barcode(s), e.g., at least two, three, four, five, six, seven, eight, nine, ten, or more barcodes.
- Barcodes can spatially-resolve molecular components found in biological samples, for example, within a cell or a tissue sample.
- a barcode can be attached to an analyte or to another moiety or structure in a reversible or irreversible manner.
- a barcode can be added to, for example, a fragment of a deoxyribonucleic acid (DNA) or ribonucleic acid (RNA) sample before or during sequencing of the sample.
- DNA deoxyribonucleic acid
- RNA ribonucleic acid
- Barcodes can allow for identification and/or quantification of individual sequencing-reads (e.g., a barcode can be or can include a unique molecular identifier or “UMI”).
- a barcode comprises about 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, or more than 30 nucleotides.
- a barcode may be a barcode region.
- a barcode comprises two or more sub-barcodes that together function as a single barcode.
- a polynucleotide barcode can include two or more polynucleotide sequences (e.g., sub-barcodes) that are separated by one or more non-barcode sequences.
- the one or more barcode(s) can also provide a platform for targeting functionalities, such as oligonucleotides, oligonucleotide-antibody conjugates, oligonucleotide-streptavidin conjugates, modified oligonucleotides, affinity purification, detectable moieties, enzymes, enzymes for detection assays or other functionalities, and/or for detection and identification of the polynucleotide.
- functionalities such as oligonucleotides, oligonucleotide-antibody conjugates, oligonucleotide-streptavidin conjugates, modified oligonucleotides, affinity purification, detectable moieties, enzymes, enzymes for detection assays or other functionalities, and/or for detection and identification of the polynucleotide.
- barcodes or complements thereof e.g., barcode sequences or complements thereof comprised by the labelling agents (e.g., probes) disclosed herein or products thereof
- SBS sequencing by synthesis
- SBL sequencing by ligation
- SBH sequencing by hybridization
- barcoding schemes and/or barcode detection schemes as described in RNA sequential probing of targets RNA SPOTs
- smFISH single-molecule fluorescent in situ hybridization
- MEFISH multiplexed error-robust fluorescence in situ hybridization
- seqFISH+ sequential fluorescence in situ hybridization
- the methods provided herein can include analyzing the barcodes by sequential hybridization and detection with a plurality of labelled probes (e.g., detection probes (e.g., detection oligos) or barcode probes).
- the barcode detection steps can be performed as described in hybridization-based in situ sequencing (HybISS).
- probes can be detected and analyzed (e.g., detected or sequenced) as performed in fluorescent in situ sequencing (FISSEQ), or as performed in the detection steps of the spatially-resolved transcript amplicon readout mapping (STARmap) method.
- signals associated with an analyte can be detected as performed in sequential fluorescent in situ hybridization (seqFISH).
- a barcode sequencing method in a barcode sequencing method, barcode sequences are detected for identification of other molecules including nucleic acid molecules (DNA or RNA) longer than the barcode sequences themselves, as opposed to direct sequencing of the longer nucleic acid molecules.
- the barcode sequences contained in the probes or RCA products are detected, rather than endogenous sequences, which can be an efficient read-out in terms of information per cycle of sequencing. Because the barcode sequences are pre-determined, they can also be designed to feature error detection and correction mechanisms, see, e.g., U.S. Pat. Pub. 20190055594 and U.S. Pat. Pub. 20210164039, which are hereby incorporated by reference in their entirety.
- the detectable probes are detectably labeled or comprise a detectable label.
- label and “detectable label” comprise a directly or indirectly detectable moiety that is associated with (e.g., conjugated to) a molecule to be detected, e.g., a nucleic acid molecule that comprises a detectable label.
- the detectable label can be directly detectable by itself (e.g., radioisotope labels or fluorescent labels) or, in the case of an enzymatic label, can be indirectly detectable, e.g., by catalyzing chemical alterations of a substrate compound or composition, which substrate compound or composition is directly detectable.
- Detectable labels can be suitable for small scale detection and/or suitable for high-throughput screening.
- suitable detectable labels include, but are not limited to, radioisotopes (radioactive isotopes), fluorophores, fluorescers, chemiluminescent compounds, bioluminescent compounds, dyes, enzymes, enzyme substrates, enzyme cofactors, enzyme inhibitors, chromophores, dyes, metal ions, metal sols, ligands (e.g., biotin or haptens) and the like.
- radioisotopes radioactive isotopes
- fluorophores fluorescers
- chemiluminescent compounds include, but are not limited to, fluorophores, fluorescers, chemiluminescent compounds, bioluminescent compounds, dyes, enzymes, enzyme substrates, enzyme cofactors, enzyme inhibitors, chromophores, dyes, metal ions, metal sols, ligands (e.g., biotin or haptens) and the like.
- the detectable label comprises a luminophore.
- the luminophore is a fluorophore.
- fluorophore comprises a substance or a portion thereof that is capable of exhibiting fluorescence in the detectable range.
- GFP green fluorescent protein
- EGFP enhanced green fluorescent protein
- the detectable label is a fluorophore.
- the fluorophore can be from a group that includes: 7-AAD (7-Aminoactinomycin D), Acridine Orange (+DNA), Acridine Orange (+RNA), Alexa Fluor® 350, Alexa Fluor® 430, Alexa Fluor® 488, Alexa Fluor® 532, Alexa Fluor® 546, Alexa Fluor® 555, Alexa Fluor® 568, Alexa Fluor® 594, Alexa Fluor® 633, Alexa Fluor® 647, Alexa Fluor® 660, Alexa Fluor® 680, Alexa Fluor® 700, Alexa Fluor® 750, Allophycocyanin (APC), AMCA/AMCA-X, 7-Aminoactinomycin D (7-AAD), 7-Amino-4-methylcoumarin, 6-Aminoquinoline, Aniline Blue, ANS, APC-Cy7, ATTO-TAGTM CBQCA, ATTO-
- the detectable label comprises an infrared fluorophore.
- An “infrared fluorophore” emits infrared light.
- the infrared fluorophore has a longer excitation wavelength than a traditional fluorophore.
- detectable labels comprise, but are not limited to, various radioactive moieties, enzymes, prosthetic groups, fluorescent markers, luminescent markers, bioluminescent markers, metal particles, protein-protein binding pairs and protein-antibody binding pairs.
- fluorescent proteins comprise, but are not limited to, yellow fluorescent protein (YFP), green fluorescence protein (GFP), cyan fluorescence protein (CFP), umbelliferone, fluorescein, fluorescein isothiocyanate, rhodamine, dichlorotriazinylamine fluorescein, dansyl chloride and phycoerythrin.
- bioluminescent markers comprise, but are not limited to, luciferase (e.g., bacterial, firefly and click beetle), luciferin, aequorin and the like.
- enzyme systems having visually detectable signals comprise, but are not limited to, galactosidases, glucorimidases, phosphatases, peroxidases and cholinesterases.
- Identifiable markers also comprise radioactive compounds such as 125 I, 35 S, 14 C, or 3 H. Identifiable markers are commercially available from a variety of sources.
- fluorescent labels and nucleotides and/or polynucleotides conjugated to such fluorescent labels comprise those described in, for example, Hoagland, Handbook of Fluorescent Probes and Research Chemicals, Ninth Edition (Molecular Probes, Inc., Eugene, 2002); Keller and Manak, DNA Probes, 2nd Edition (Stockton Press, New York, 1993); Eckstein, editor, Oligonucleotides and Analogues: A Practical Approach (IRL Press, Oxford, 1991); and Wetmur, Critical Reviews in Biochemistry and Molecular Biology, 26:227-259 (1991).
- exemplary techniques and methods methodologies applicable to the provided embodiments comprise those described in, for example, U.S. Pat. Nos.
- one or more fluorescent dyes are used as labels for labeled target sequences, for example, as described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,188,934 (4,7-dichlorofluorescein dyes); U.S. Pat. No. 5,366,860 (spectrally resolvable rhodamine dyes); U.S. Pat. No. 5,847,162 (4,7-dichlororhodamine dyes); U.S. Pat. No. 4,318,846 (ether-substituted fluorescein dyes); U.S. Pat. No. 5,800,996 (energy transfer dyes); U.S. Pat. No.
- fluorescent label comprises a signaling moiety that conveys information through the fluorescent absorption and/or emission properties of one or more molecules.
- Exemplary fluorescent properties comprise fluorescence intensity, fluorescence lifetime, emission spectrum characteristics and energy transfer.
- one or more detectable labels can be attached to a labelling agent or nucleic acid probe disclosed herein.
- the one or more detectable labels can be incorporated during nucleic acid polymerization or amplification (e.g., Cy5®-labeled nucleotides, such as Cy5®-dCTP).
- Examples of commercially available fluorescent nucleotide analogues readily incorporated into nucleotide and/or polynucleotide sequences comprise, but are not limited to, Cy3-dCTP, Cy3-dUTP, Cy5-dCTP, Cy5-dUTP (Amersham Biosciences, Piscataway, N.J.), fluorescein-12-dUTP, tetramethylrhodamine-6-dUTP, TEXAS REDTM-5-dUTP, CASCADE BLUETM-7-dUTP, BODIPY TMFL-14-dUTP, BODIPY TMR-14-dUTP, BODIPY TMTR-14-dUTP, RHOD AMINE GREENTM-5-dUTP, OREGON GREENRTM 488-5-dUTP, TEXAS REDTM-12-dUTP, BODIPYTM 630/650-14-dUTP, BODIPYTM 650/665-14-dUTP,
- one or more detectable labels can be attached via post-synthetic attachment.
- Fluorophores available for post-synthetic attachment comprise, but are not limited to, ALEXA FLUORTM 350, ALEXA FLUORTM 532, ALEXA FLUORTM 546, ALEXA FLUORTM 568, ALEXA FLUORTM 594, ALEXA FLUORTM 647, BODIPY 493/503, BODIPY FL, BODIPY R6G, BODIPY 530/550, BODIPY TMR, BODIPY 558/568, BODIPY 558/568, BODIPY 564/570, BODIPY 576/589, BODIPY 581/591, BODIPY 630/650, BODIPY 650/665, Cascade Blue, Cascade Yellow, Dansyl, lissamine rhodamine B, Marina Blue, Oregon Green 488, Oregon Green 514, Pacific Blue, r
- FRET tandem fluorophores may also be used, comprising, but not limited to, PerCP-Cy5.5, PE-Cy5, PE-Cy5.5, PE-Cy7, PE-Texas Red, APC-Cy7, PE-Alexa dyes (610, 647, 680), and APC-Alexa dyes.
- metallic silver or gold particles may be used to enhance signal from fluorescently labeled nucleotide and/or polynucleotide sequences (Lakowicz et a1. (2003) Bio Techniques 34:62)
- Biotin may also be used as a label on a nucleic acid molecule, and subsequently bound by a detectably labeled avidin/streptavidin derivative (e.g., phycoerythrin-conjugated streptavidin), or a detectably labeled anti-biotin antibody.
- Digoxigenin may be incorporated as a label and subsequently bound by a detectably labeled anti-digoxigenin antibody (e.g., fluoresceinated anti-digoxigenin).
- An aminoallyl-dUTP residue may be incorporated into a polynucleotide sequence and subsequently coupled to an N-hydroxy succinimide (NHS) derivatized fluorescent dye.
- NHS N-hydroxy succinimide
- any member of a conjugate pair may be incorporated into a detection polynucleotide provided that a detectably labeled conjugate partner can be bound to permit detection.
- the term antibody refers to an antibody molecule of any class, or any sub-fragment thereof, such as an Fab.
- suitable labels for use in the methods provided herein may comprise fluorescein (FAM), digoxigenin, dinitrophenol (DNP), dansyl, biotin, bromodeoxyuridine (BrdU), hexahistidine (6xHis), and phosphor-amino acids (e.g., P-tyr, P-ser, P-thr).
- FAM fluorescein
- DNP dinitrophenol
- PrdU bromodeoxyuridine
- 6xHis hexahistidine
- phosphor-amino acids e.g., P-tyr, P-ser, P-thr
- the following hapten/antibody pairs are used for detection, in which each of the antibodies is derivatized with a detectable label: biotin/a-biotin, digoxigenin/a-digoxigenin, dinitrophenol (DNP)/a-DNP, 5-Carboxyfluorescein (FAM)/a-FAM.
- a nucleic acid molecule e.g., detectable probe
- a hapten that is then bound by a capture agent, e.g., as disclosed in U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,344,757, 5,702,888, 5,354,657, 5,198,537 and 4,849,336, and 5,073,562, each of which is herein incorporated by reference in its entirety.
- a capture agent e.g., as disclosed in U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,344,757, 5,702,888, 5,354,657, 5,198,537 and 4,849,336, and 5,073,562, each of which is herein incorporated by reference in its entirety.
- Many different hapten-capture agent pairs are available for use.
- Exemplary haptens comprise, but are not limited to, biotin, des-biotin and other derivatives, dinitrophenol, dansyl, fluorescein, Cy5, and digoxigenin.
- a capture agent may be avidin, streptavidin, or antibodies.
- Antibodies may be used as capture agents for the other haptens (many dye-antibody pairs being commercially available, e.g., Molecular Probes, Eugene, Oreg.).
- a detectable label is or includes a luminescent or chemiluminescent moiety.
- luminescent/chemiluminescent moieties include, but are not limited to, peroxidases such as horseradish peroxidase (HRP), soybean peroxidase (SP), alkaline phosphatase, and luciferase. These protein moieties can catalyze chemiluminescent reactions given the appropriate substrates (e.g., an oxidizing reagent plus a chemiluminescent compound.
- Non-limiting examples of chemiluminescent compound families include 2,3-dihydro-1,4-phthalazinedione luminol, 5-amino-6,7,8-trimethoxy- and the dimethylamino[ca]benz analog. These compounds can luminesce in the presence of alkaline hydrogen peroxide or calcium hypochlorite and base.
- chemiluminescent compound families include, e.g., 2,4,5-triphenylimidazoles, para-dimethylamino and -methoxy substituents, oxalates such as oxalyl active esters, p-nitrophenyl, N-alkyl acridinum esters, luciferins, lucigenins, or acridinium esters.
- a detectable label is or includes a metal-based or mass-based label.
- small cluster metal ions, metals, or semiconductors may act as a mass code.
- the metals can be selected from Groups 3-15 of the periodic table, e.g., Y, La, Ag, Au, Pt, Ni, Pd, Rh, Ir, Co, Cu, Bi, or a combination thereof.
- the detectable label is detected in situ.
- the detectable label can be qualitatively detected (e.g., optically or spectrally), or it can be quantified.
- Qualitative detection generally includes a detection method in which the existence or presence of the detectable label is confirmed, whereas quantifiable detection generally includes a detection method having a quantifiable (e.g., numerically reportable) value such as an intensity, duration, polarization, and/or other properties.
- detectably labeled features can include a fluorescent, a colorimetric, or a chemiluminescent label attached to a bead (see, for example, Rajeswari et al., J. Microbiol Methods 139:22-28, 2017, and Forcucci et al., J. Biomed Opt. 10:105010, 2015, the entire contents of each of which are incorporated herein by reference).
- the method includes detection of the probe or probe set hybridized to the target (e.g., target sequence) or any products generated therefrom or a derivative thereof.
- the method can further comprise imaging the biological sample to detect a ligation product or a circularized probe or product thereof.
- a sequence of the ligation product, rolling circle amplification product, or other generated product can be analyzed in situ in the biological sample.
- the imaging can comprise detecting a signal associated with a fluorescently labeled probe that directly or indirectly binds to a rolling circle amplification product of the circularized probe.
- sequence of the sequence of the ligation product, rolling circle amplification product, or other generated product can be analyzed by sequential hybridization, sequencing by hybridization, sequencing by ligation, sequencing by synthesis, sequencing by binding, or a combination thereof.
- a sequence associated with the target nucleic acid or the probes or probe sets described herein can comprise one or more barcode sequences or complements thereof.
- the sequence of the rolling circle amplification product can comprise one or more barcode sequences or complements thereof.
- a probe can comprise one or more barcode sequences or complements thereof.
- the one or more barcode sequences can comprise a barcode sequence corresponding to the target nucleic acid.
- the one or more barcode sequences can comprise a barcode sequence corresponding to the sequence of interest, such as variant(s) of a single nucleotide of interest.
- the detecting step can comprise contacting the biological sample with one or more detectable probes that directly or indirectly hybridize to the rolling circle amplification product, and dehybridizing the one or more detectable probes from the rolling circle amplification product.
- the contacting and dehybridizing steps can be repeated with the one or more detectable probes and/or one or more other detectable probes that directly or indirectly hybridize to the rolling circle amplification product.
- the detecting step can comprise contacting the biological sample with one or more first detectable probes that directly hybridize to the plurality of probes or probe sets. In some instances, the detecting step can comprise contacting the biological sample with one or more first detectable probes that indirectly hybridize to the plurality of probes or probe sets. In any of the embodiments herein, the detecting step can comprise contacting the biological sample with one or more first detectable probes that directly or indirectly hybridize to the plurality of probes or probe sets.
- the detecting step can comprise contacting the biological sample with one or more intermediate probes that directly or indirectly hybridize to the plurality of probes or probe sets, rolling circle amplification product generated using the plurality of probes or probe sets, wherein the one or more intermediate probes are detectable using one or more detectable probes.
- the detecting step can further comprise dehybridizing the one or more intermediate probes and/or the one or more detectable probes from the rolling circle amplification product or the plurality of probes or probe sets.
- the contacting and dehybridizing steps can be repeated with the one or more intermediate probes, the one or more detectable probes, one or more other intermediate probes, and/or one or more other detectable probes.
- the detection may be spatial, e.g., in two or three dimensions. In some embodiments, the detection may be quantitative, e.g., the amount or concentration of a primary nucleic acid probe (and of a target nucleic acid) may be determined. In some embodiments, the plurality of probes or probe sets (e.g., primary probes), secondary probes, higher order probes, and/or detectable probes may comprise any of a variety of entities able to hybridize a nucleic acid, e.g., DNA, RNA, LNA, and/or PNA, etc., depending on the application.
- a nucleic acid e.g., DNA, RNA, LNA, and/or PNA, etc., depending on the application.
- a method disclosed herein may also comprise one or more signal amplification components.
- the present disclosure relates to the detection of nucleic acids sequences in situ using probe hybridization and generation of amplified signals associated with the probes, wherein background signal is reduced and sensitivity is increased.
- the RCA product generated using a method disclosed herein can be detected in with a method that comprises signal amplification.
- signal amplification may comprise use of the plurality of probes or probe sets.
- Exemplary signal amplification methods include targeted deposition of detectable reactive molecules around the site of probe hybridization, targeted assembly of branched structures (e.g., bDNA or branched assay using locked nucleic acid (LNA)), programmed in situ growth of concatemers by enzymatic rolling circle amplification (RCA) (e.g., as described in US 2019/0055594 incorporated herein by reference), hybridization chain reaction, assembly of topologically catenated DNA structures using serial rounds of chemical ligation (clampFISH), signal amplification via hairpin-mediated concatemerization (e.g., as described in US 2020/0362398 incorporated herein by reference), e.g., primer exchange reactions such as signal amplification by exchange reaction (SABER) or SABER with DNA-Exchange (Exchange-SABER).
- a non-enzymatic signal amplification method may be used.
- the detectable reactive molecules may comprise tyramide, such as used in tyramide signal amplification (TSA) or multiplexed catalyzed reporter deposition (CARD)-FISH.
- the detectable reactive molecule may be releasable and/or cleavable from a detectable label such as a fluorophore.
- a method disclosed herein comprises multiplexed analysis of a biological sample comprising consecutive cycles of probe hybridization, fluorescence imaging, and signal removal, where the signal removal comprises removing the fluorophore from a fluorophore-labeled reactive molecule (e.g., tyramide).
- Exemplary detectable reactive reagents and methods are described in U.S. Pat. No. 6,828,109, US 2019/0376956, US 2019/0376956, US 2022/0026433, US 2022/0128565, and US 2021/0222234, all of which are incorporated herein by reference in their entireties.
- hybridization chain reaction can be used for signal amplification.
- HCR is an enzyme-free nucleic acid amplification based on a triggered chain of hybridization of nucleic acid molecules starting from HCR monomers, which hybridize to one another to form a nicked nucleic acid polymer. This polymer is the product of the HCR reaction which is ultimately detected in order to indicate the presence of the target analyte.
- HCR is described in detail in Dirks and Pierce, 2004, PNAS, 101(43), 15275-15278 and in U.S. Pat. Nos.
- HCR monomers typically comprise a hairpin, or other metastable nucleic acid structure.
- HCR stable hairpin monomer
- first and second HCR monomers undergo a chain reaction of hybridization events to form a long nicked double-stranded DNA molecule when an “initiator” nucleic acid molecule is introduced.
- the HCR monomers have a hairpin structure comprising a double stranded stem region, a loop region connecting the two strands of the stem region, and a single stranded region at one end of the double stranded stem region. The single stranded region which is exposed (and which is thus available for hybridization to another molecule, e.g.
- the initiator or other HCR monomer when the monomers are in the hairpin structure may be known as the “toehold region” (or “input domain”).
- the first HCR monomers each further comprise a sequence which is complementary to a sequence in the exposed toehold region of the second HCR monomers. This sequence of complementarity in the first HCR monomers may be known as the “interacting region” (or “output domain”).
- the second HCR monomers each comprise an interacting region (output domain), e.g. a sequence which is complementary to the exposed toehold region (input domain) of the first HCR monomers. In the absence of the HCR initiator, these interacting regions are protected by the secondary structure (e.g.
- the hairpin monomers are stable or kinetically trapped (also referred to as “metastable”), and remain as monomers (e.g. preventing the system from rapidly equilibrating), because the first and second sets of HCR monomers cannot hybridize to each other.
- the initiator once the initiator is introduced, it is able to hybridize to the exposed toehold region of a first HCR monomer, and invade it, causing it to open up. This exposes the interacting region of the first HCR monomer (e.g. the sequence of complementarity to the toehold region of the second HCR monomers), allowing it to hybridize to and invade a second HCR monomer at the toehold region.
- This hybridization and invasion in turn opens up the second HCR monomer, exposing its interacting region (which is complementary to the toehold region of the first HCR monomers), and allowing it to hybridize to and invade another first HCR monomer.
- the reaction continues in this manner until all of the HCR monomers are exhausted (e.g. all of the HCR monomers are incorporated into a polymeric chain).
- this chain reaction leads to the formation of a nicked chain of alternating units of the first and second monomer species.
- the presence of the HCR initiator is thus required in order to trigger the HCR reaction by hybridization to and invasion of a first HCR monomer.
- the first and second HCR monomers are designed to hybridize to one another are thus may be defined as cognate to one another. They are also cognate to a given HCR initiator sequence.
- HCR monomers which interact with one another may be described as a set of HCR monomers or an HCR monomer, or hairpin, system.
- An HCR reaction could be carried out with more than two species or types of HCR monomers.
- a system involving three HCR monomers could be used.
- each first HCR monomer may comprise an interacting region which binds to the toehold region of a second HCR monomer;
- each second HCR may comprise an interacting region which binds to the toehold region of a third HCR monomer;
- each third HCR monomer may comprise an interacting region which binds to the toehold region of a first HCR monomer.
- the HCR polymerization reaction would then proceed as described above, except that the resulting product would be a polymer having a repeating unit of first, second and third monomers consecutively.
- Corresponding systems with larger numbers of sets of HCR monomers could readily be conceived.
- linear oligo hybridization chain reaction can also be used for signal amplification.
- a method of detecting an analyte in a sample comprising: (i) performing a linear oligo hybridization chain reaction (LO-HCR), wherein an initiator is contacted with a plurality of LO-HCR monomers of at least a first and a second species to generate a polymeric LO-HCR product hybridized to a target nucleic acid molecule, wherein the first species comprises a first hybridization region complementary to the initiator and a second hybridization region complementary to the second species, wherein the first species and the second species are linear, single-stranded nucleic acid molecules; wherein the initiator is provided in one or more parts, and hybridizes directly or indirectly to or is comprised in the target nucleic acid molecule; and (ii) detecting the polymeric product, thereby detecting the analyt
- LO-HCR linear oligo hybridization chain reaction
- the first species and/or the second species may not comprise a hairpin structure.
- the plurality of LO-HCR monomers may not comprise a metastable secondary structure.
- the LO-HCR polymer may not comprise a branched structure.
- performing the linear oligo hybridization chain reaction comprises contacting the target nucleic acid molecule with the initiator to provide the initiator hybridized to the target nucleic acid molecule.
- the target nucleic acid molecule and/or the analyte can be an RCA product. Exemplary methods and compositions for LO-HCR are described in US 2021/0198723, incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.
- detection of nucleic acids sequences in situ may comprise an assembly for branched signal amplification.
- the assembly complex comprises an amplifier hybridized directly or indirectly (via one or more oligonucleotides) to a probe or probe set.
- the assembly includes one or more amplifiers each including an amplifier repeating sequence.
- the one or more amplifiers is labeled. Described herein is a method of using the aforementioned assembly, including for example, using the assembly in multiplexed error-robust fluorescent in situ hybridization (MERFISH) applications, with branched DNA amplification for signal readout.
- the amplifier repeating sequence is about 5-30 nucleotides, and is repeated N times in the amplifier.
- the amplifier repeating sequence is about 20 nucleotides, and is repeated at least two times in the amplifier. In some aspects, the one or more amplifier repeating sequence is labeled.
- exemplary branched signal amplification see e.g., U.S. Pat. Pub. No. US20200399689A1 and Xia et al., Multiplexed Detection of RNA using MERFISH and branched DNA amplification. Scientific Reports (2019), each of which is fully incorporated by reference herein.
- the plurality of probes or probe sets can be detected in with a method that comprises signal amplification by performing a primer exchange reaction (PER).
- PER primer exchange reaction
- a primer with domain on its 3′ end binds to a catalytic hairpin, and is extended with a new domain by a strand displacing polymerase.
- a primer with domain 1 on its 3′ ends binds to a catalytic hairpin, and is extended with a new domain 1 by a strand displacing polymerase, with repeated cycles generating a concatemer of repeated domain 1 sequences.
- the strand displacing polymerase is Bst.
- the catalytic hairpin includes a stopper which releases the strand displacing polymerase.
- branch migration displaces the extended primer, which can then dissociate.
- the primer undergoes repeated cycles to form a concatemer primer.
- a plurality of concatemer primers is contacted with a sample comprising the plurality of probes or probe sets described herein.
- the plurality of probes or probe sets may be contacted with a plurality of concatemer primers and a plurality of labeled probes. see e.g., U.S. Pat. Pub. No. US20190106733, which is incorporated herein by reference, for exemplary molecules and PER reaction components.
- the methods comprise sequencing all or a portion of the amplification product, such as one or more barcode sequences present in the amplification product, e.g., via DNA sequencing.
- the analysis and/or sequence determination comprises sequencing all or a portion of the amplification product or the probe(s) and/or in situ hybridization to the amplification product or the probe(s).
- the sequencing step involves sequencing by hybridization, sequencing by ligation, and/or fluorescent in situ sequencing, hybridization-based in situ sequencing and/or wherein the in situ hybridization comprises sequential fluorescent in situ hybridization.
- the analysis and/or sequence determination comprises detecting a polymer generated by a hybridization chain reaction (HCR) reaction, see e.g., US 2017/0009278, which is incorporated herein by reference, for exemplary probes and HCR reaction components.
- HCR hybridization chain reaction
- the detection or determination comprises hybridizing to the amplification product a detection oligonucleotide labeled with a fluorophore, an isotope, a mass tag, or a combination thereof. In some embodiments, the detection or determination comprises imaging the amplification product.
- the target nucleic acid is an mRNA in a tissue sample, and the detection or determination is performed when the target nucleic acid and/or the amplification product is in situ in the tissue sample.
- the provided methods comprise imaging the amplification product (e.g., amplicon) and/or one or more portions of the plurality of probes or probe sets, for example, via binding of the detection probe and detecting the detectable label.
- the detection probe comprises a detectable label that can be measured and quantitated.
- label and “detectable label” comprise a directly or indirectly detectable moiety that is associated with (e.g., conjugated to) a molecule to be detected, e.g., a detectable probe, comprising, but not limited to, fluorophores, radioactive isotopes, fluorescers, chemiluminescers, enzymes, enzyme substrates, enzyme cofactors, enzyme inhibitors, chromophores, dyes, metal ions, metal sols, ligands (e.g., biotin or haptens) and the like.
- a detectable probe comprising, but not limited to, fluorophores, radioactive isotopes, fluorescers, chemiluminescers, enzymes, enzyme substrates, enzyme cofactors, enzyme inhibitors, chromophores, dyes, metal ions, metal sols, ligands (e.g., biotin or haptens) and the like.
- fluorophore comprises a substance or a portion thereof that is capable of exhibiting fluorescence in the detectable range.
- labels that may be used in accordance with the provided embodiments comprise, but are not limited to phycoerythrin, Alexa dyes, fluorescein, YPet, CyPet, Cascade blue, allophycocyanin, Cy3, Cy5, Cy7, rhodamine, dansyl, umbelliferone, Texas red, luminol, acradimum esters, biotin, green fluorescent protein (GFP), enhanced green fluorescent protein (EGFP), yellow fluorescent protein (YFP), enhanced yellow fluorescent protein (EYFP), blue fluorescent protein (BFP), red fluorescent protein (RFP), firefly luciferase, Renilla luciferase, NADPH, beta-galactosidase, horseradish peroxidase, glucose oxidase, alkaline phosphatase, chloramphenical acetyl
- Fluorescence detection in tissue samples can often be hindered by the presence of strong background fluorescence.
- “Autofluorescence” is the general term used to distinguish background fluorescence (that can arise from a variety of sources, including aldehyde fixation, extracellular matrix components, red blood cells, lipofuscin, and the like) from the desired immunofluorescence from the fluorescently labeled antibodies or probes. Tissue autofluorescence can lead to difficulties in distinguishing the signals due to fluorescent antibodies or probes from the general background.
- a method disclosed herein utilizes one or more agents to reduce tissue autofluorescence, for example, Autofluorescence Eliminator (Sigma/EMD Millipore), TrueBlack Lipofuscin Autofluorescence Quencher (Biotium), MaxBlock Autofluorescence Reducing Reagent Kit (MaxVision Biosciences), and/or a very intense black dye (e.g., Sudan Black, or comparable dark chromophore).
- Autofluorescence Eliminator Sigma/EMD Millipore
- Biotium TrueBlack Lipofuscin Autofluorescence Quencher
- MaxBlock Autofluorescence Reducing Reagent Kit MaxVision Biosciences
- a very intense black dye e.g., Sudan Black, or comparable dark chromophore
- a detectable probe containing a detectable label can be used to detect the plurality of probes or probe sets and/or amplification products (e.g., amplicon) described herein.
- the methods involve incubating the detectable probe containing the detectable label with the sample, washing unbound detectable probe, and detecting the label, e.g., by imaging.
- the detecting comprises performing microscopy, scanning mass spectrometry or other imaging techniques described herein. In such aspects, the detecting comprises determining a signal, e.g., a fluorescent signal. In some aspects, the detection (comprising imaging) is carried out using any of a number of different types of microscopy, e.g., confocal microscopy, two-photon microscopy, light-field microscopy, intact tissue expansion microscopy, and/or CLARITYTM-optimized light sheet microscopy (COLM).
- confocal microscopy e.g., two-photon microscopy, light-field microscopy, intact tissue expansion microscopy, and/or CLARITYTM-optimized light sheet microscopy (COLM).
- fluorescence microscopy is used for detection and imaging of the detection probe.
- a fluorescence microscope is an optical microscope that uses fluorescence and phosphorescence instead of, or in addition to, reflection and absorption to study properties of organic or inorganic substances.
- fluorescence microscopy a sample is illuminated with light of a wavelength which excites fluorescence in the sample. The fluoresced light, which is usually at a longer wavelength than the illumination, is then imaged through a microscope objective.
- Two filters may be used in this technique; an illumination (or excitation) filter which ensures the illumination is near monochromatic and at the correct wavelength, and a second emission (or barrier) filter which ensures none of the excitation light source reaches the detector.
- the “fluorescence microscope” comprises any microscope that uses fluorescence to generate an image, whether it is a more simple set up like an epifluorescence microscope, or a more complicated design such as a confocal microscope, which uses optical sectioning to get better resolution of the fluorescent image.
- confocal microscopy is used for detection and imaging of the detection probe.
- Confocal microscopy uses point illumination and a pinhole in an optically conjugate plane in front of the detector to eliminate out-of-focus signal.
- the image's optical resolution is much better than that of wide-field microscopes.
- this increased resolution is at the cost of decreased signal intensity—so long exposures are often required.
- 2D or 3D imaging requires scanning over a regular raster (e.g., a rectangular pattern of parallel scanning lines) in the specimen.
- the achievable thickness of the focal plane is defined mostly by the wavelength of the used light divided by the numerical aperture of the objective lens, but also by the optical properties of the specimen.
- the thin optical sectioning possible makes these types of microscopes particularly good at 3D imaging and surface profiling of samples.
- CLARITYTM-optimized light sheet microscopy (COLM) provides an alternative microscopy for fast 3D imaging of large clarified samples. COLM interrogates large immunostained tissues, permits increased speed of acquisition and results in a higher quality of generated data.
- microscopy Other types of microscopy that can be employed comprise bright field microscopy, oblique illumination microscopy, dark field microscopy, phase contrast, differential interference contrast (DIC) microscopy, interference reflection microscopy (also known as reflected interference contrast, or RIC), single plane illumination microscopy (SPIM), super-resolution microscopy, laser microscopy, electron microscopy (EM), Transmission electron microscopy (TEM), Scanning electron microscopy (SEM), reflection electron microscopy (REM), Scanning transmission electron microscopy (STEM) and low-voltage electron microscopy (LVEM), scanning probe microscopy (SPM), atomic force microscopy (ATM), ballistic electron emission microscopy (BEEM), chemical force microscopy (CFM), conductive atomic force microscopy (C-AFM), electrochemical scanning tunneling microscope (ECSTM), electrostatic force microscopy (EFM), fluidic force microscope (FluidFM), force modulation microscopy (FMM), feature-oriented scanning probe microscopy (FOSPM
- sequencing can be performed in situ.
- In situ sequencing typically involves incorporation of a labeled nucleotide (e.g., fluorescently labeled mononucleotides or dinucleotides) in a sequential, template-dependent manner or hybridization of a labeled primer (e.g., a labeled random hexamer) to a nucleic acid template such that the identities (e.g., nucleotide sequence) of the incorporated nucleotides or labeled primer extension products can be determined, and consequently, the nucleotide sequence of the corresponding template nucleic acid.
- identities e.g., nucleotide sequence
- Exemplary techniques for in situ sequencing comprise, but are not limited to, STARmap (described for example in Wang et al., (2016) Science, 361(6499) 5691), MERFISH (described for example in Moffitt, (2016) Methods in Enzymology, 572, 1-49), hybridization-based in situ sequencing (HybISS) (described for example in Gyllborg et al., Nucleic Acids Res (2020) 48(19):e112, and FISSEQ (described for example in US 2019/0032121). In some cases, sequencing can be performed after the analytes are released from the biological sample.
- sequencing can be performed by sequencing-by-synthesis (SBS).
- SBS sequencing-by-synthesis
- a sequencing primer is complementary to sequences at or near the one or more barcode(s).
- sequencing-by-synthesis can comprise reverse transcription and/or amplification in order to generate a template sequence from which a primer sequence can bind.
- Exemplary SBS methods comprise those described for example, but not limited to, US 2007/0166705, US 2006/0188901, U.S. Pat. No. 7,057,026, US 2006/0240439, US 2006/0281109, US 2011/005986, US 2005/0100900, U.S. Pat. No. 9,217,178, US 2009/0118128, US 2012/0270305, US 2013/0260372, and US 2013/0079232.
- sequence analysis of nucleic acids can be performed by sequential hybridization (e.g., sequencing by hybridization and/or sequential in situ fluorescence hybridization).
- sequential fluorescence hybridization can involve sequential hybridization of detection probes comprising an oligonucleotide and a detectable label.
- a method disclosed herein comprises sequential hybridization of the detectable probes disclosed herein, including detectably labeled probes (e.g., fluorophore conjugated oligonucleotides) and/or probes that are not detectably labeled per se but are capable of binding (e.g., via nucleic acid hybridization) and being detected by detectably labeled probes.
- detectably labeled probes e.g., fluorophore conjugated oligonucleotides
- probes that are not detectably labeled per se but are capable of binding (e.g., via nucleic acid hybridization) and being detected by detectably labeled probes.
- Exemplary methods comprising sequential fluorescence hybridization of detectable probes are described in US 2019/0161796, US 2020/0224244, US 2022/0010358, US 2021/0340618, and WO 2021/138676, all of which are incorporated herein by reference.
- sequencing can be performed using single molecule sequencing by ligation.
- Such techniques utilize DNA ligase to incorporate oligonucleotides and identify the incorporation of such oligonucleotides.
- the oligonucleotides typically have different labels that are correlated with the identity of a particular nucleotide in a sequence to which the oligonucleotides hybridize.
- Aspects and features involved in sequencing by ligation are described, for example, in Shendure et a1 . Science (2005), 309: 1728-1732, and in U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,599,675; 5,750,341; 6,969,488; 6,172,218; and 6,306,597.
- the barcodes of the probes are targeted by detectably labeled detection oligonucleotides, such as fluorescently labeled oligonucleotides.
- detectably labeled detection oligonucleotides such as fluorescently labeled oligonucleotides.
- one or more decoding schemes are used to decode the signals, such as fluorescence, for sequence determination.
- barcodes e.g., primary and/or secondary barcode sequences
- RNA SPOTs RNA sequential probing of targets
- seqFISH sequential fluorescent in situ hybridization
- smFISH single-molecule fluorescent in situ hybridization
- MEFISH multiplexed error-robust fluorescence in situ hybridization
- HybISS hybridization-based in situ sequencing
- FISSEQ fluorescent in situ sequencing
- STARmap spatially-resolved transcript amplicon readout mapping
- the methods provided herein comprise analyzing the barcodes by sequential hybridization and detection with a plurality of labelled probes (e.g., detection oligonucleotides or detectable probes).
- labelled probes e.g., detection oligonucleotides or detectable probes.
- Exemplary decoding schemes are described in Eng et al., “Transcriptome-scale Super-Resolved Imaging in Tissues by RNA SeqFISH+,” Nature 568(7751):235-239 (2019); Chen et al., Science; 348(6233):aaa6090 (2015); Gyllborg et al., Nucleic Acids Res (2020) 48(19):el 12; U.S. Pat. No.
- these assays enable signal amplification, combinatorial decoding, and error correction schemes at the same time.
- nucleic acid hybridization can be used for sequencing. These methods utilize labeled nucleic acid decoder probes that are complementary to at least a portion of a barcode sequence. Multiplex decoding can be performed with pools of many different probes with distinguishable labels. Non-limiting examples of nucleic acid hybridization sequencing are described for example in U.S. Pat. No. 8,460,865, and in Gunderson et al., Genome Research 14:870-877 (2004).
- real-time monitoring of DNA polymerase activity can be used during sequencing.
- nucleotide incorporations can be detected through fluorescence resonance energy transfer (FRET), as described for example in Levene et al., Science (2003), 299, 682-686, Lundquist et al., Opt. Lett . (2008), 33, 1026-1028, and Korlach et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA (2008), 105, 1176-1181.
- FRET fluorescence resonance energy transfer
- the analysis and/or sequence determination can be carried out at room temperature for best preservation of tissue morphology with low background noise and error reduction. In some embodiments, the analysis and/or sequence determination comprises eliminating error accumulation as sequencing proceeds.
- the analysis and/or sequence determination involves washing to remove unbound polynucleotides, thereafter revealing a fluorescent product for imaging.
- the provided embodiments can be applied to an in situ method of analyzing target nucleic acid sequences (e.g., RNAs) and/or other targets (e.g., proteins) in intact tissues or samples in which the spatial information has been preserved.
- the embodiments can be applied in an imaging or detection method for multiplexed analysis of nucleic acids and/or other targets (e.g., proteins).
- the provided embodiments can be used to identify or detect regions and/or sequences of interest in target nucleic acids.
- analysis is performed on one or more images captured, and may comprise processing the image(s) and/or quantifying signals observed.
- a method disclosed herein comprises multiplexed analysis of a biological sample comprising consecutive cycles of probe hybridization, fluorescence imaging, and probe removal.
- images of signals from different fluorescent and/or non-fluorescent channels and/or detectable probe hybridization cycles can be compared and analyzed.
- images of signals (or absence thereof) at a particular location in a sample from different fluorescent channels and/or sequential detectable probe hybridization cycles can be aligned to analyze an analyte at the location.
- a particular location in a sample can be tracked and signal spots from sequential hybridization cycles can be analyzed to detect a target polynucleotide sequence (e.g., an associated barcode sequence or subsequence thereof) at the location.
- the analysis may comprise processing information of one or more cell types, one or more types of analytes, a number or level of analyte, and/or a number or level of cells detected in a particular region of the sample.
- the analysis comprises detecting a sequence e.g., a barcode sequence present in an amplification product at a location in the sample.
- the analysis includes quantification of puncta (e.g., if amplification products are detected).
- the analysis includes determining whether particular cells and/or signals are present that correlate with one or more analytes from a particular panel. In some instances, the analysis includes using single cell segmentation and resolution to determine cell type frequencies in a region of interest of a sample. In some embodiments, the obtained information may be compared to a positive and negative control, to another selected region of interest, or to a threshold of a feature to determine if the region of interest exhibits a certain feature or phenotype. In some cases, the information may comprise signals from a cell, a region, and/or comprise readouts from multiple detectable labels. In some case, the analysis further includes displaying the information from the analysis or detection step. In some embodiments, software may be used to automate the processing, analysis, and/or display of data.
- a sample disclosed herein can be or derived from any biological sample.
- Methods, probes, and kits disclosed herein may be used for analyzing a biological sample, which may be obtained from a subject using any of a variety of techniques including, but not limited to, biopsy, surgery, and laser capture microscopy (LCM), and generally comprises cells and/or other biological material from the subject.
- a biological sample can be obtained from a prokaryote such as a bacterium, an archaea, a virus, or a viroid.
- a biological sample can also be obtained from non-mammalian organisms (e.g., a plant, an insect, an arachnid, a nematode, a fungus, or an amphibian).
- a biological sample can also be obtained from a eukaryote, such as a tissue sample, a patient derived organoid (PDO) or patient derived xenograft (PDX).
- a biological sample from an organism may comprise one or more other organisms or components therefrom.
- a mammalian tissue section may comprise a prion, a viroid, a virus, a bacterium, a fungus, or components from other organisms, in addition to mammalian cells and non-cellular tissue components.
- Subjects from which biological samples can be obtained can be healthy or asymptomatic individuals, individuals that have or are suspected of having a disease (e.g., a patient with a disease such as cancer) or a pre-disposition to a disease, and/or individuals in need of therapy or suspected of needing therapy.
- a disease e.g., a patient with a disease such as cancer
- a pre-disposition to a disease e.g., a pre-disposition to a disease
- the biological sample can include any number of macromolecules, for example, cellular macromolecules and organelles (e.g., mitochondria and nuclei).
- the biological sample can be obtained as a tissue sample, such as a tissue section, biopsy, a core biopsy, needle aspirate, or fine needle aspirate.
- the sample can be a fluid sample, such as a blood sample, urine sample, or saliva sample.
- the sample can be a skin sample, a colon sample, a cheek swab, a histology sample, a histopathology sample, a plasma or serum sample, a tumor sample, living cells, cultured cells, a clinical sample such as, for example, whole blood or blood-derived products, blood cells, or cultured tissues or cells, including cell suspensions.
- the biological sample may comprise cells which are deposited on a surface.
- Bio samples can be derived from a homogeneous culture or population of the subjects or organisms mentioned herein or alternatively from a collection of several different organisms, for example, in a community or ecosystem.
- Biological samples can include one or more diseased cells.
- a diseased cell can have altered metabolic properties, gene expression, protein expression, and/or morphologic features. Examples of diseases include inflammatory disorders, metabolic disorders, nervous system disorders, and cancer.
- Cancer cells can be derived from solid tumors, hematological malignancies, cell lines, or obtained as circulating tumor cells.
- Biological samples can also include fetal cells and immune cells.
- the sample is a cell pellet or cell block.
- the biological sample comprises a tissue sample.
- the tissue sample is a tissue biopsy.
- the biological sample is a tumor biopsy.
- the biological sample is a surgical resection.
- the biological sample comprises a tumor or a portion of a tumor.
- Biological samples can include analytes (e.g., protein, RNA, and/or DNA) embedded in a 3D matrix.
- amplicons e.g., rolling circle amplification products
- analytes e.g., protein, RNA, and/or DNA
- a 3D matrix may comprise a network of natural molecules and/or synthetic molecules that are chemically and/or enzymatically linked, e.g., by crosslinking.
- a 3D matrix may comprise a synthetic polymer.
- a 3D matrix comprises a hydrogel.
- a substrate herein can be any support that is insoluble in aqueous liquid and which allows for positioning of biological samples, analytes, features, and/or reagents on the support.
- a biological sample can be attached to a substrate. Attachment of the biological sample can be irreversible or reversible, depending upon the nature of the sample and subsequent steps in the analytical method.
- the sample can be attached to the substrate reversibly by applying a suitable polymer coating to the substrate, and contacting the sample to the polymer coating. The sample can then be detached from the substrate, e.g., using an organic solvent that at least partially dissolves the polymer coating. Hydrogels are examples of polymers that are suitable for this purpose.
- the substrate can be coated or functionalized with one or more substances to facilitate attachment of the sample to the substrate.
- Suitable substances that can be used to coat or functionalize the substrate include, but are not limited to, lectins, poly-lysine, antibodies, and polysaccharides.
- a variety of steps can be performed to prepare or process a biological sample for and/or during an assay. Except where indicated otherwise, the preparative or processing steps described below can generally be combined in any manner and in any order to appropriately prepare or process a particular sample for and/or analysis.
- a biological sample can be harvested from a subject (e.g., via surgical biopsy, whole subject sectioning) or grown in vitro on a growth substrate or culture dish as a population of cells, and prepared for analysis as a tissue slice or tissue section. Grown samples may be sufficiently thin for analysis without further processing steps. Alternatively, grown samples, and samples obtained via biopsy or sectioning, can be prepared as thin tissue sections using a mechanical cutting apparatus such as a vibrating blade microtome. As another alternative, in some embodiments, a thin tissue section can be prepared by applying a touch imprint of a biological sample to a suitable substrate material.
- the thickness of the tissue section can be a fraction of (e.g., less than 0.9, 0.8, 0.7, 0.6, 0.5, 0.4, 0.3, 0.2, or 0.1) the maximum cross-sectional dimension of a cell.
- tissue sections having a thickness that is larger than the maximum cross-section cell dimension can also be used.
- cryostat sections can be used, which can be, e.g., 10-20 ⁇ m thick.
- the thickness of a tissue section typically depends on the method used to prepare the section and the physical characteristics of the tissue, and therefore sections having a wide variety of different thicknesses can be prepared and used.
- the thickness of the tissue section can be at least 0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4, 0.5, 0.7, 1.0, 1.5, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 12, 13, 14, 15, 20, 30, 40, or 50 ⁇ m.
- Thicker sections can also be used if desired or convenient, e.g., at least 70, 80, 90, or 100 ⁇ m or more.
- the thickness of a tissue section is between 1-100 ⁇ m, 1-50 ⁇ m, 1-30 ⁇ m, 1-25 ⁇ m, 1-20 ⁇ m, 1-15 ⁇ m, 1-10 ⁇ m, 2-8 ⁇ m, 3-7 ⁇ m, or 4-6 ⁇ m, but as mentioned above, sections with thicknesses larger or smaller than these ranges can also be analysed.
- Multiple sections can also be obtained from a single biological sample.
- multiple tissue sections can be obtained from a surgical biopsy sample by performing serial sectioning of the biopsy sample using a sectioning blade. Spatial information among the serial sections can be preserved in this manner, and the sections can be analysed successively to obtain three-dimensional information about the biological sample.
- the biological sample (e.g., a tissue section as described above) can be prepared by deep freezing at a temperature suitable to maintain or preserve the integrity (e.g., the physical characteristics) of the tissue structure.
- the frozen tissue sample can be sectioned, e.g., thinly sliced, onto a substrate surface using any number of suitable methods.
- a tissue sample can be prepared using a chilled microtome (e.g., a cryostat) set at a temperature suitable to maintain both the structural integrity of the tissue sample and the chemical properties of the nucleic acids in the sample.
- a temperature can be, e.g., less than ⁇ 15° C., less than ⁇ 20° C., or less than ⁇ 25° C.
- the biological sample can be prepared using formalin-fixation and paraffin-embedding (FFPE), which are established methods.
- FFPE formalin-fixation and paraffin-embedding
- cell suspensions and other non-tissue samples can be prepared using formalin-fixation and paraffin-embedding.
- the sample can be sectioned as described above.
- the paraffin-embedding material can be removed from the tissue section (e.g., deparaffinization) by incubating the tissue section in an appropriate solvent (e.g., xylene) followed by a rinse (e.g., 99.5% ethanol for 2 minutes, 96% ethanol for 2 minutes, and 70% ethanol for 2 minutes).
- a biological sample can be fixed in any of a variety of other fixatives to preserve the biological structure of the sample prior to analysis.
- a sample can be fixed via immersion in ethanol, methanol, acetone, paraformaldehyde (PFA)-Triton, and combinations thereof.
- acetone fixation is used with fresh frozen samples, which can include, but are not limited to, cortex tissue, mouse olfactory bulb, human brain tumor, human post-mortem brain, and breast cancer samples.
- pre-permeabilization steps may not be performed.
- acetone fixation can be performed in conjunction with permeabilization steps.
- the methods provided herein comprises one or more post-fixing (also referred to as postfixation) steps.
- one or more post-fixing step is performed after contacting a sample with a polynucleotide disclosed herein, e.g., one or more probes such as a circular or circularizable probe (e.g., a padlock probe).
- one or more post-fixing step is performed after a hybridization complex comprising a probe and a target is formed in a sample.
- one or more post-fixing step is performed prior to a ligation reaction disclosed herein, such as the ligation to circularize a circularizable probe or probe set.
- one or more post-fixing step is performed after contacting a sample with a binding or labelling agent (e.g., an antibody or antigen binding fragment thereof) for a non-nucleic acid analyte such as a protein analyte.
- the labelling agent can comprise a nucleic acid molecule (e.g., reporter oligonucleotide) comprising a sequence corresponding to the labelling agent and therefore corresponds to (e.g., uniquely identifies) the analyte.
- the labelling agent can comprise a reporter oligonucleotide comprising one or more barcode sequences.
- a post-fixing step may be performed using any suitable fixation reagent disclosed herein, for example, 3% (w/v) paraformaldehyde in DEPC-PBS.
- a biological sample can be embedded in any of a variety of other embedding materials to provide structural substrate to the sample prior to sectioning and other handling steps.
- the embedding material can be removed e.g., prior to analysis of tissue sections obtained from the sample.
- suitable embedding materials include, but are not limited to, waxes, resins (e.g., methacrylate resins), epoxies, and agar.
- the biological sample can be embedded in a matrix (e.g., a hydrogel matrix). Embedding the sample in this manner typically involves contacting the biological sample with a hydrogel such that the biological sample becomes surrounded by the hydrogel.
- a hydrogel matrix e.g., a hydrogel matrix
- the sample can be embedded by contacting the sample with a suitable polymer material, and activating the polymer material to form a hydrogel.
- the hydrogel is formed such that the hydrogel is internalized within the biological sample.
- the biological sample is immobilized in the hydrogel via cross-linking of the polymer material that forms the hydrogel.
- Cross-linking can be performed chemically and/or photochemically, or alternatively by any other hydrogel-formation method.
- the composition and application of the hydrogel-matrix to a biological sample typically depends on the nature and preparation of the biological sample (e.g., sectioned, non-sectioned, type of fixation).
- the hydrogel-matrix can include a monomer solution and an ammonium persulfate (APS) initiator/tetramethylethylenediamine (TEMED) accelerator solution.
- APS ammonium persulfate
- TEMED tetramethylethylenediamine
- the biological sample consists of cells (e.g., cultured cells or cells disassociated from a tissue sample)
- the cells can be incubated with the monomer solution and APS/TEMED solutions.
- hydrogel-matrix gels are formed in compartments, including but not limited to devices used to culture, maintain, or transport the cells.
- hydrogel-matrices can be formed with monomer solution plus APS/TEMED added to the compartment to a depth ranging from about 0.1 m to about 2 mm.
- hydrogel embedding of biological samples are described for example in Chen et al., Science 347(6221):543-548, 2015, the entire contents of which are incorporated herein by reference.
- biological samples can be stained using a wide variety of stains and staining techniques.
- a sample can be stained using any number of stains and/or immunohistochemical reagents.
- One or more staining steps may be performed to prepare or process a biological sample for an assay described herein or may be performed during and/or after an assay.
- the sample can be contacted with one or more nucleic acid stains, membrane stains (e.g., cellular or nuclear membrane), cytological stains, or combinations thereof.
- the stain may be specific to proteins, phospholipids, DNA (e.g., dsDNA, ssDNA), RNA, an organelle or compartment of the cell.
- the sample may be contacted with one or more labeled antibodies (e.g., a primary antibody specific for the analyte of interest and a labeled secondary antibody specific for the primary antibody).
- labeled antibodies e.g., a primary antibody specific for the analyte of interest and a labeled secondary antibody specific for the primary antibody.
- cells in the sample can be segmented using one or more images taken of the stained sample.
- the stain is performed using a lipophilic dye.
- the staining is performed with a lipophilic carbocyanine or aminostyryl dye, or analogs thereof (e.g., DiI, DiO, DiR, DiD).
- Other cell membrane stains may include FM and RH dyes or immunohistochemical reagents specific for cell membrane proteins.
- the stain may include but is not limited to, acridine orange, acid fuchsin, Bismarck brown, carmine, coomassie blue, cresyl violet, DAPI, eosin, ethidium bromide, acid fuchsine, haematoxylin, Hoechst stains, iodine, methyl green, methylene blue, neutral red, Nile blue, Nile red, osmium tetroxide, ruthenium red, propidium iodide, rhodamine (e.g., rhodamine B), or safranine, or derivatives thereof.
- the sample may be stained with haematoxylin and eosin (H&E).
- the sample can be stained using hematoxylin and eosin (H&E) staining techniques, using Papanicolaou staining techniques, Masson's trichrome staining techniques, silver staining techniques, Sudan staining techniques, and/or using Periodic Acid Schiff (PAS) staining techniques.
- HPA staining is typically performed after formalin or acetone fixation.
- the sample can be stained using Romanowsky stain, including Wright's stain, Jenner's stain, Can-Grunwald stain, Leishman stain, and Giemsa stain.
- biological samples can be destained. Methods of destaining or discoloring a biological sample generally depend on the nature of the stain(s) applied to the sample. For example, in some embodiments, one or more immunofluorescent stains are applied to the sample via antibody coupling. Such stains can be removed using techniques such as cleavage of disulfide linkages via treatment with a reducing agent and detergent washing, chaotropic salt treatment, treatment with antigen retrieval solution, and treatment with an acidic glycine buffer. Methods for multiplexed staining and destaining are described, for example, in Bolognesi et al., J. Histochem. Cytochem.
- a biological sample embedded in a matrix can be isometrically expanded.
- Isometric expansion methods that can be used include hydration, a preparative step in expansion microscopy, as described in Chen et al., Science 347(6221):543-548, 2015.
- Isometric expansion can be performed by anchoring one or more components of a biological sample to a gel, followed by gel formation, proteolysis, and swelling.
- analytes in the sample, products of the analytes, and/or probes associated with analytes in the sample can be anchored to the matrix (e.g., hydrogel).
- Isometric expansion of the biological sample can occur prior to immobilization of the biological sample on a substrate, or after the biological sample is immobilized to a substrate.
- the isometrically expanded biological sample can be removed from the substrate prior to contacting the substrate with probes disclosed herein.
- the steps used to perform isometric expansion of the biological sample can depend on the characteristics of the sample (e.g., thickness of tissue section, fixation, cross-linking), and/or the analyte of interest (e.g., different conditions to anchor RNA, DNA, and protein to a gel).
- characteristics of the sample e.g., thickness of tissue section, fixation, cross-linking
- analyte of interest e.g., different conditions to anchor RNA, DNA, and protein to a gel.
- proteins in the biological sample are anchored to a swellable gel such as a polyelectrolyte gel.
- An antibody can be directed to the protein before, after, or in conjunction with being anchored to the swellable gel.
- DNA and/or RNA in a biological sample can also be anchored to the swellable gel via a suitable linker.
- linkers include, but are not limited to, 6-((Acryloyl)amino) hexanoic acid (Acryloyl-X SE) (available from ThermoFisher, Waltham, MA), Label-IT Amine (available from MirusBio, Madison, WI) and Label X (described for example in Chen et al., Nat. Methods 13:679-684, 2016, the entire contents of which are incorporated herein by reference).
- Isometric expansion of the sample can increase the spatial resolution of the subsequent analysis of the sample.
- the increased resolution in spatial profiling can be determined by comparison of an isometrically expanded sample with a sample that has not been isometrically expanded.
- a biological sample is isometrically expanded to a size at least 2 ⁇ , 2.1 ⁇ , 2.2 ⁇ , 2.3 ⁇ , 2.4 ⁇ , 2.5 ⁇ , 2.6 ⁇ , 2.7 ⁇ , 2.8 ⁇ , 2.9 ⁇ , 3 ⁇ , 3.1 ⁇ , 3.2 ⁇ , 3.3 ⁇ , 3.4 ⁇ , 3.5 ⁇ , 3.6 ⁇ , 3.7 ⁇ , 3.8 ⁇ , 3.9 ⁇ , 4 ⁇ , 4.1 ⁇ , 4.2 ⁇ , 4.3 ⁇ , 4.4 ⁇ , 4.5 ⁇ , 4.6 ⁇ , 4.7 ⁇ , 4.8 ⁇ , or 4.9 ⁇ its non-expanded size.
- the sample is isometrically expanded to at least 2 ⁇ and less than 20 ⁇ of its non-expanded size.
- the biological sample is reversibly cross-linked prior to or during an in situ assay.
- the analytes, polynucleotides and/or amplification product (e.g., amplicon) of an analyte or a probe bound thereto can be anchored to a polymer matrix.
- the polymer matrix can be a hydrogel.
- one or more of the polynucleotide probe(s) and/or amplification product (e.g., amplicon) thereof can be modified to contain functional groups that can be used as an anchoring site to attach the polynucleotide probes and/or amplification product to a polymer matrix.
- a modified probe comprising oligo dT may be used to bind to mRNA molecules of interest, followed by reversible crosslinking of the mRNA molecules.
- the biological sample is immobilized in a hydrogel via cross-linking of the polymer material that forms the hydrogel.
- Cross-linking can be performed chemically and/or photochemically, or alternatively by any other hydrogel-formation method.
- a hydrogel may include a macromolecular polymer gel including a network. Within the network, some polymer chains can optionally be cross-linked, although cross-linking does not always occur.
- a hydrogel can include hydrogel subunits, such as, but not limited to, acrylamide, bis-acrylamide, polyacrylamide and derivatives thereof, poly(ethylene glycol) and derivatives thereof (e.g. PEG-acrylate (PEG-DA), PEG-RGD), gelatin-methacryloyl (GelMA), methacrylated hyaluronic acid (MeHA), polyaliphatic polyurethanes, polyether polyurethanes, polyester polyurethanes, polyethylene copolymers, polyamides, polyvinyl alcohols, polypropylene glycol, polytetramethylene oxide, polyvinyl pyrrolidone, polyacrylamide, poly(hydroxyethyl acrylate), and poly(hydroxyethyl methacrylate), collagen, hyaluronic acid, chitosan, dextran, agarose, gelatin, alginate, protein polymers, methylcellulose, and the like, and combinations thereof.
- hydrogel subunits such as,
- a hydrogel comprises a hybrid material, e.g., the hydrogel material comprises elements of both synthetic and natural polymers.
- the hydrogel material comprises elements of both synthetic and natural polymers. Examples of suitable hydrogels are described, for example, in U.S. Pat. Nos. 6,391,937, 9,512,422, and 9,889,422, and in U.S. Patent Application Publication Nos. 2017/0253918, 2018/0052081 and 2010/0055733, the entire contents of each of which are incorporated herein by reference.
- the hydrogel can form the substrate.
- the substrate comprises a hydrogel and one or more second materials.
- the hydrogel is placed on top of one or more second materials.
- the hydrogel can be pre-formed and then placed on top of, underneath, or in any other configuration with one or more second materials.
- hydrogel formation occurs after contacting one or more second materials during formation of the substrate. Hydrogel formation can also occur within a structure (e.g., wells, ridges, projections, and/or markings) located on a substrate.
- hydrogel formation on a substrate occurs before, contemporaneously with, or after probes are provided to the sample.
- hydrogel formation can be performed on the substrate already containing the probes.
- hydrogel formation occurs within a biological sample.
- a biological sample e.g., tissue section
- hydrogel subunits are infused into the biological sample, and polymerization of the hydrogel is initiated by an external or internal stimulus.
- functionalization chemistry in embodiments in which a hydrogel is formed within a biological sample, functionalization chemistry can be used.
- functionalization chemistry includes hydrogel-tissue chemistry (HTC).
- HTC hydrogel-tissue chemistry
- Any hydrogel-tissue backbone (e.g., synthetic or native) suitable for HTC can be used for anchoring biological macromolecules and modulating functionalization.
- Non-limiting examples of methods using HTC backbone variants include CLARITY, PACT, ExM, SWITCH and ePACT.
- hydrogel formation within a biological sample is permanent.
- biological macromolecules can permanently adhere to the hydrogel allowing multiple rounds of interrogation.
- hydrogel formation within a biological sample is reversible.
- additional reagents are added to the hydrogel subunits before, contemporaneously with, and/or after polymerization.
- additional reagents can include but are not limited to oligonucleotides (e.g., probes), endonucleases to fragment DNA, fragmentation buffer for DNA, DNA polymerase enzymes, dNTPs used to amplify the nucleic acid and to attach the barcode to the amplified fragments.
- Other enzymes can be used, including without limitation, RNA polymerase, ligase, proteinase K, and DNAse.
- Additional reagents can also include reverse transcriptase enzymes, including enzymes with terminal transferase activity, primers, and switch oligonucleotides.
- optical labels are added to the hydrogel subunits before, contemporaneously with, and/or after polymerization.
- HTC reagents are added to the hydrogel before, contemporaneously with, and/or after polymerization.
- a cell labelling agent is added to the hydrogel before, contemporaneously with, and/or after polymerization.
- a cell-penetrating agent is added to the hydrogel before, contemporaneously with, and/or after polymerization.
- Hydrogels embedded within biological samples can be cleared using any suitable method.
- electrophoretic tissue clearing methods can be used to remove biological macromolecules from the hydrogel-embedded sample.
- a hydrogel-embedded sample is stored before or after clearing of hydrogel, in a medium (e.g., a mounting medium, methylcellulose, or other semi-solid mediums).
- a method disclosed herein comprises de-crosslinking the reversibly cross-linked biological sample.
- the de-crosslinking does not need to be complete.
- only a portion of molecular crosslinks in the reversibly cross-linked biological sample are de-crosslinked.
- a biological sample can be permeabilized to facilitate transfer of species (such as probes) into the sample. If a sample is not permeabilized sufficiently, probes that enter the sample and bind to analytes therein may be too low to enable adequate analysis. Conversely, if the tissue sample is too permeable, the relative spatial relationship of the analytes within the tissue sample can be lost. Hence, a balance between permeabilizing the tissue sample enough to obtain good signal intensity while still maintaining the spatial resolution of the analyte distribution in the sample is desirable.
- species such as probes
- a biological sample can be permeabilized by exposing the sample to one or more permeabilizing agents.
- Suitable agents for this purpose include, but are not limited to, organic solvents (e.g., acetone, ethanol, and methanol), cross-linking agents (e.g., paraformaldehyde), detergents (e.g., saponin, Triton X-100TM or Tween-20TM), and enzymes (e.g., trypsin, proteases).
- the biological sample can be incubated with a cellular permeabilizing agent to facilitate permeabilization of the sample. Additional methods for sample permeabilization are described, for example, in Jamur et al., Method Mol. Biol. 588:63-66, 2010, the entire contents of which are incorporated herein by reference. Any suitable method for sample permeabilization can generally be used in connection with the samples described herein.
- the biological sample can be permeabilized by adding one or more lysis reagents to the sample.
- suitable lysis agents include, but are not limited to, bioactive reagents such as lysis enzymes that are used for lysis of different cell types, e.g., gram positive or negative bacteria, plants, yeast, mammalian, such as lysozymes, achromopeptidase, lysostaphin, labiase, kitalase, lyticase, and a variety of other commercially available lysis enzymes.
- lysis agents can additionally or alternatively be added to the biological sample to facilitate permeabilization.
- surfactant-based lysis solutions can be used to lyse sample cells. Lysis solutions can include ionic surfactants such as, for example, sarcosyl and sodium dodecyl sulfate (SDS). More generally, chemical lysis agents can include, without limitation, organic solvents, chelating agents, detergents, surfactants, and chaotropic agents.
- the biological sample can be permeabilized by non-chemical permeabilization methods.
- Non-chemical permeabilization methods that can be used herein include, but are not limited to, physical lysis techniques such as electroporation, mechanical permeabilization methods (e.g., bead beating using a homogenizer and grinding balls to mechanically disrupt sample tissue structures), acoustic permeabilization (e.g., sonication), and thermal lysis techniques such as heating to induce thermal permeabilization of the sample.
- Additional reagents can be added to a biological sample to perform various functions prior to analysis of the sample.
- DNase and RNase inactivating agents or inhibitors such as proteinase K, and/or chelating agents such as EDTA, can be added to the sample.
- a method disclosed herein may comprise a step for increasing accessibility of a nucleic acid for binding, e.g., a denaturation step to open up DNA in a cell for hybridization by a probe.
- proteinase K treatment may be used to free up DNA with proteins bound thereto.
- RNA analyte species of interest can be selectively enriched.
- one or more species of RNA of interest can be selected by addition of one or more oligonucleotides to the sample.
- the additional oligonucleotide is a sequence used for priming a reaction by an enzyme (e.g., a polymerase).
- an enzyme e.g., a polymerase
- one or more primer sequences with sequence complementarity to one or more RNAs of interest can be used to amplify the one or more RNAs of interest, thereby selectively enriching these RNAs.
- a first and second probe that is specific for (e.g., specifically hybridizes to) each RNA or cDNA analyte are used.
- templated ligation is used to detect gene expression in a biological sample.
- An analyte of interest such as a protein
- a labelling agent or binding agent e.g., an antibody or epitope binding fragment thereof
- the binding agent is conjugated or otherwise associated with a reporter oligonucleotide comprising a reporter sequence that identifies the binding agent, can be targeted for analysis.
- Probes may be hybridized to the reporter oligonucleotide and ligated in a templated ligation reaction to generate a product for analysis.
- gaps between the probe oligonucleotides may first be filled prior to ligation, using, for example, Mu polymerase, DNA polymerase, RNA polymerase, reverse transcriptase, VENT polymerase, Taq polymerase, and/or any combinations, derivatives, and variants (e.g., engineered mutants) thereof.
- the assay can further include amplification of templated ligation products (e.g., by multiplex PCR).
- RNA can be down-selected (e.g., removed) using any of a variety of methods.
- probes can be administered to a sample that selectively hybridize to ribosomal RNA (rRNA), thereby reducing the pool and concentration of rRNA in the sample.
- rRNA ribosomal RNA
- DSN duplex-specific nuclease treatment can remove rRNA (see, e.g., Archer, et a1, Selective and flexible depletion of problematic sequences from RNA-seq libraries at the cDNA stage, BMC Genomics, 15 401, (2014), the entire contents of which are incorporated herein by reference).
- hydroxyapatite chromatography can remove abundant species (e.g., rRNA) (see, e.g., Vandernoot, V.A., cDNA normalization by hydroxyapatite chromatography to enrich transcriptome diversity in RNA-seq applications, Biotechniques, 53(6) 373-80, (2012), the entire contents of which are incorporated herein by reference).
- rRNA abundant species
- Vandernoot, V.A. cDNA normalization by hydroxyapatite chromatography to enrich transcriptome diversity in RNA-seq applications
- kits for example comprising a compound disclosed herein (e.g., in Section II-C) for catalytic de-crosslinking of a fixed biological sample.
- the compound is provided in a composition (e.g., a composition comprising DMSO) and the kit can further comprise one or more other compositions, e.g., a buffer for the compound.
- a solution or a suspension comprising the catalyst and a buffer is provided.
- the buffer comprises citrate, tris(hydroxymethyl)aminomethane (Tris) phosphate-buffered saline (PBS), 2-[4-(2-hydroxyethyl)piperazin-1-yl]ethanesulfonic acid (HEPES), 2-(N-morpholino)ethanesulfonic acid (MES), or a combination thereof.
- the solution or suspension comprises sodium dodecyl sulfate (SDS), urea, and/or a proteinase (e.g., proteinase K).
- the kits can comprise one or more reagents required for one or more steps comprising hybridization, ligation, extension, detection, and/or sample preparation as described herein.
- the kit comprises one or more labelling agents, e.g., disclosed in Section III-B and Section III-C.
- the kit comprises one or more oligonucleotides, e.g., nucleic acid probes disclosed in Section III-B and Section III-C, for detecting one or more nucleic acid analytes and/or one or more non-nucleic acid analytes.
- the kit comprises one or more antibodies (e.g., for detecting protein analytes) which can be optionally labelled with a detectable label such as a fluorophore and/or a reporter oligonucleotide.
- kits may be present in separate containers or certain compatible components may be pre-combined into a single container.
- the kits further contain instructions for using the components of the kit to practice the provided methods.
- kits can contain reagents and/or consumables required for performing one or more steps of the provided methods.
- the kits contain reagents for fixing (e.g., crosslinking), embedding, and/or permeabilizing the biological sample.
- the kits contain reagents, such as enzymes and buffers.
- the kit can also comprise any of the reagents described herein, e.g., wash buffer.
- the kits contain reagents for detection and/or sequencing, such as barcode detection probes or detectable labels.
- the kits optionally contain other components, for example nucleic acid primers, enzymes and reagents, buffers, nucleotides, and reagents for additional assays.
- the provided embodiments can be applied in an in situ method of analyzing nucleic acid sequences, such as fluorescent in situ hybridization (FISH)-based methods, in situ transcriptomic analysis or in situ sequencing, for example from intact tissues or samples in which the spatial information has been preserved.
- FISH fluorescent in situ hybridization
- the embodiments can be applied in an imaging or detection method for multiplexed nucleic acid analysis.
- the provided embodiments can be used to detect a signal associated with a detectable label of a nucleic acid probe that is hybridized to a target sequence of a target nucleic acid in a biological sample.
- the target nucleic acid comprises a single-nucleotide polymorphism (SNP). In some embodiments, the target nucleic acid comprises is a single-nucleotide variant (SNV). In some embodiments, the target nucleic acid comprises a single-nucleotide substitution. In some embodiments, the target nucleic acid comprises a point mutation. In some embodiments, the target nucleic acid comprises a single-nucleotide insertion.
- SNP single-nucleotide polymorphism
- SNV single-nucleotide variant
- the target nucleic acid comprises a single-nucleotide substitution. In some embodiments, the target nucleic acid comprises a point mutation. In some embodiments, the target nucleic acid comprises a single-nucleotide insertion.
- the embodiments can be applied in investigative and/or diagnostic applications, for example, for characterization or assessment of particular cell or a tissue from a subject.
- Applications of the provided method can comprise biomedical research and clinical diagnostics.
- biomedical research applications comprise, but are not limited to, spatially resolved gene expression analysis for biological investigation or drug screening.
- clinical diagnostics applications comprise, but are not limited to, detecting gene markers such as disease, immune responses, bacterial or viral DNA/RNA for patient samples.
- the embodiments can be applied to visualize the distribution of genetically encoded markers in whole tissue at subcellular resolution, for example, chromosomal abnormalities (inversions, duplications, translocations, etc.), loss of genetic heterozygosity, the presence of gene alleles indicative of a predisposition towards disease or good health, likelihood of responsiveness to therapy, or in personalized medicine or ancestry.
- chromosomal abnormalities inversions, duplications, translocations, etc.
- loss of genetic heterozygosity loss of genetic heterozygosity
- likelihood of responsiveness to therapy or in personalized medicine or ancestry.
- polynucleotide refers to polymeric forms of nucleotides of any length, either ribonucleotides or deoxyribonucleotides.
- this term comprises, but is not limited to, single-, double-, or multi-stranded DNA or RNA, genomic DNA, cDNA, DNA-RNA hybrids, or a polymer comprising purine and pyrimidine bases or other natural, chemically or biochemically modified, non-natural, or derivatized nucleotide bases.
- the backbone of the polynucleotide can comprise sugars and phosphate groups (as may typically be found in RNA or DNA), or modified or substituted sugar or phosphate groups.
- Hybridization as used herein may refer to the process in which two single-stranded polynucleotides bind non-covalently to form a stable double-stranded polynucleotide.
- the resulting double-stranded polynucleotide can be a “hybrid” or “duplex.”
- “Hybridization conditions” typically include salt concentrations of approximately less than 1 M, often less than about 500 mM and may be less than about 200 mM.
- a “hybridization buffer” includes a buffered salt solution such as 5% SSPE, or other such buffers known in the art.
- Hybridization temperatures can be as low as 5° C., but are typically greater than 22° C., and more typically greater than about 30° C., and typically in excess of 37° C.
- Hybridizations are often performed under stringent conditions, e.g., conditions under which a sequence will hybridize to its target sequence but will not hybridize to other, non-complementary sequences. Stringent conditions are sequence-dependent and are different in different circumstances. For example, longer fragments may require higher hybridization temperatures for specific hybridization than short fragments. As other factors may affect the stringency of hybridization, including base composition and length of the complementary strands, presence of organic solvents, and the extent of base mismatching, the combination of parameters is more important than the absolute measure of any one parameter alone.
- T m can be the temperature at which a population of double-stranded nucleic acid molecules becomes half dissociated into single strands.
- the stability of a hybrid is a function of the ion concentration and temperature.
- a hybridization reaction is performed under conditions of lower stringency, followed by washes of varying, but higher, stringency.
- Exemplary stringent conditions include a salt concentration of at least 0.01 M to no more than 1 M sodium ion concentration (or other salt) at a pH of about 7.0 to about 8.3 and a temperature of at least 25° C.
- 5 ⁇ SSPE 750 mM NaCl, 50 mM sodium phosphate, 5 mM EDTA at pH 7.4
- a temperature of approximately 30° C. are suitable for allele-specific hybridizations, though a suitable temperature depends on the length and/or GC content of the region hybridized.
- “stringency of hybridization” in determining percentage mismatch can be as follows: 1) high stringency: 0.1 ⁇ SSPE, 0.1% SDS, 65° C.; 2) medium stringency: 0.2 ⁇ SSPE, 0.1% SDS, 50° C. (also referred to as moderate stringency); and 3) low stringency: 1.0 ⁇ SSPE, 0.1% SDS, 50° C. It is understood that equivalent stringencies may be achieved using alternative buffers, salts and temperatures.
- moderately stringent hybridization can refer to conditions that permit a nucleic acid molecule such as a probe to bind a complementary nucleic acid molecule.
- the hybridized nucleic acid molecules generally have at least 60% identity, including for example at least any of 70%, 75%, 80%, 85%, 90%, or 95% identity.
- Moderately stringent conditions can be conditions equivalent to hybridization in 50% formamide, 5 ⁇ Denhardt's solution, 5 ⁇ SSPE, 0.2% SDS at 42° C., followed by washing in 0.2 ⁇ SSPE, 0.2% SDS, at 42° C.
- High stringency conditions can be provided, for example, by hybridization in 50% formamide, 5 ⁇ Denhardt's solution, 5 ⁇ SSPE, 0.2% SDS at 42° C., followed by washing in 0.1 ⁇ SSPE, and 0.1% SDS at 65° C.
- Low stringency hybridization can refer to conditions equivalent to hybridization in 10% formamide, 5 ⁇ Denhardt's solution, 6 ⁇ SSPE, 0.2% SDS at 22° C., followed by washing in 1 ⁇ SSPE, 0.2% SDS, at 37° C.
- Denhardt's solution contains 1% Ficoll, 1% polyvinylpyrolidone, and 1% bovine serum albumin (BSA).
- BSA bovine serum albumin
- 20 ⁇ SSPE sodium chloride, sodium phosphate, ethylene diamide tetraacetic acid (EDTA) contains 3M sodium chloride, 0.2M sodium phosphate, and 0.025 M EDTA.
- RNA or DNA strand will hybridize under selective hybridization conditions to its complement.
- selective hybridization will occur when there is at least about 65% complementary over a stretch of at least 14 to 25 nucleotides, preferably at least about 75%, more preferably at least about 90% complementary. See M. Kanehisa, Nucleic Acids Res. 12:203 (1984).
- a “primer” used herein can be an oligonucleotide, either natural or synthetic, that is capable, upon forming a duplex with a polynucleotide template, of acting as a point of initiation of nucleic acid synthesis and being extended from its 3′ end along the template so that an extended duplex is formed.
- the sequence of nucleotides added during the extension process is determined by the sequence of the template polynucleotide.
- Primers usually are extended by a DNA polymerase.
- Ligation may refer to the formation of a covalent bond or linkage between the termini of two or more nucleic acids, e.g., oligonucleotides and/or polynucleotides, in a template-driven reaction.
- the nature of the bond or linkage may vary widely and the ligation may be carried out enzymatically or chemically.
- ligations are usually carried out enzymatically to form a phosphodiester linkage between a 5′ carbon terminal nucleotide of one oligonucleotide with a 3′ carbon of another nucleotide.
- Sequence determination means determination of information relating to the nucleotide base sequence of a nucleic acid. Such information may include the identification or determination of partial as well as full sequence information of the nucleic acid. Sequence information may be determined with varying degrees of statistical reliability or confidence. In one aspect, the term includes the determination of the identity and ordering of a plurality of contiguous nucleotides in a nucleic acid. “High throughput digital sequencing” or “next generation sequencing” means sequence determination using methods that determine many (typically thousands to billions) of nucleic acid sequences in an intrinsically parallel manner, e.g.
- DNA templates are prepared for sequencing not one at a time, but in a bulk process, and where many sequences are read out preferably in parallel, or alternatively using an ultra-high throughput serial process that itself may be parallelized.
- Such methods include but are not limited to pyrosequencing (for example, as commercialized by 454 Life Sciences, Inc., Branford, Conn.); sequencing by ligation (for example, as commercialized in the SOLiDTM technology, Life Technologies, Inc., Carlsbad, Calif.); sequencing by synthesis using modified nucleotides (such as commercialized in TruSeqTM and HiSeqTM technology by Illumina, Inc., San Diego, Calif; HeliScopeTM by Helicos Biosciences Corporation, Cambridge, Ma.; and PacBio RS by Pacific Biosciences of California, Inc., Menlo Park, Calif), sequencing by ion detection technologies (such as Ion TorrentTM technology, Life Technologies, Carlsbad, Calif); sequencing of DNA nanoballs (Complete Genomics, Inc., Mountain View, Calif.
- Multiplexing or “multiplex assay” herein may refer to an assay or other analytical method in which the presence and/or amount of multiple targets, e.g., multiple nucleic acid target sequences, can be assayed simultaneously by using more than one probe, each of which has at least one different detection characteristic, e.g., fluorescence characteristic (for example excitation wavelength, emission wavelength, emission intensity, FWHM (full width at half maximum peak height), or fluorescence lifetime) or a unique nucleic acid or protein sequence characteristic.
- fluorescence characteristic for example excitation wavelength, emission wavelength, emission intensity, FWHM (full width at half maximum peak height), or fluorescence lifetime
- Example 1 FFPE Sample Preparation, De-Paraffinization, and De-Crosslinking
- FFPE formalin-fixed, paraffin-embedded
- the slides were baked uncovered in an oven, and then calibrated to room temperature.
- the sections were de-paraffinized and dehydrated using xylene and absolute ethanol.
- the sections were then re-hydrated using an ethanol series (e.g., 96% ethanol followed by 70% ethanol), and then re-hydrated in nuclease free water (e.g., DEPC water).
- the slides were gently dried to allow application of a cassette to seal around the tissue sections, without letting the tissue section to dry completely.
- a de-crosslinking buffer can function as an antigen retriever buffer.
- the sections were washed three times with RNase-free phosphate-buffered saline (PBS) or PBST (phosphate-buffered saline solution with a low-concentration detergent solution, e.g., 0.05% to 0.1% TweenTM 20) prior to application of labelling agents (e.g., detectable nucleic acid probes for nucleic acids and/or labelled antibodies for proteins) to the tissue samples.
- labelling agents e.g., detectable nucleic acid probes for nucleic acids and/or labelled antibodies for proteins
- FFPE human breast cancer tissues were sectioned to 5 m thickness, transferred to Superfrost ⁇ Plus slides, and processed essentially as described in Example 1.
- 2-amino-5-methylbenzoic acid (Compound 1) was used as the de-crosslinking agent and applied to de-paraffinized and re-hydrated samples in a buffer solution, such as a solution of citrate buffer at pH 6 or a solution of Tris-EDTA (TE) buffer at pH 9.
- the samples were incubated under various de-crosslinking temperatures (e.g., 80° C. or 95° C.) for various time periods (e.g., 15 minutes or 30 minutes).
- Different concentrations of the de-crosslinking agent in the buffer solutions were tested, including 0 mM, 50 mM, 100 mM, 200 mM, and 400 mM of Compound 1.
- the de-crosslinked and washed tissue samples can be immediately used for analyte detection.
- circularizable probes e.g., padlock probes
- MALAT-1/ACTB nuclear/cytoplasmic
- GAPDH/RPLPO cytoplasmic RNA transcripts
- hybridization buffers e.g., including SSC and formamide
- each circularizable probe also contained a common anchor region and a barcode region. Then, the probe hybridization mixture was removed and the samples were washed.
- a ligation reaction mix e.g., containing a SplintR® ligase buffer, RNase inhibitor and SplintR® ligase
- a rolling circle amplification (RCA) primer were added to the samples and incubated for probe circularization and RCA primer hybridization to the probes.
- the samples were washed and an RCA reaction mixture (containing Phi29 reaction buffer, dNTPs, Phi29 polymerase) was added and incubated for RCA of the circularized probes.
- the samples were washed (e.g., in PBST) and detectable probes in a hybridization buffer (e.g., containing SSC and formamide) were hybridized to RCA products (RCPs) in the sample.
- the detectable probes included probes that hybridize to sequences (e.g., barcode sequences or anchor sequences) in the RCPs and comprise overhangs for hybridization of fluorescently labelled detection oligonucleotides.
- the samples were imaged in fluorescent microscope with 40 ⁇ objective and the signals associated with the RCPs were quantified using a software.
- the samples were also stained with DAPI and/or labelled antibodies, e.g., fluorescently labelled anti-Vimentin antibody or anti-panCK antibody.
- the samples were stripped (e.g., using a denaturing agent) and contacted with additional detectable probes or labelled antibodies for the next imaging round.
- FIG. 4 shows the detected object count per nucleic area (RCP count/ ⁇ m 2 nuclei area) in cells of the human breast cancer samples treated with Compound 1 for de-crosslinking under various combinations of the de-crosslinking temperature (80° C. or 95° C.), time (15 minutes or 30 minutes), buffer (Citrate or TE), and catalyst concentration (0 mM, 50 mM, 100 mM, 200 mM, or 400 mM).
- the RCPs were detected using detectable probes targeting the common anchor region in the RCPs.
- FIGS. 5 A- 5 B show representative images of anti-panCK antibody staining in a control sample (de-crosslinked in a steamer) and in samples de-crosslinked using the indicated de-crosslinking temperature, time, and catalyst concentration in either the citrate buffer ( FIG. 5 A ) or the TE buffer ( FIG. 5 B ).
- antibody staining e.g., antibody positive signal intensity
- FIGS. 5 A- 5 B show representative images of anti-panCK antibody staining in a control sample (de-crosslinked in a steamer) and in samples de-crosslinked using the indicated de-crosslinking temperature, time, and catalyst concentration in either the citrate buffer ( FIG. 5 A ) or the TE buffer ( FIG. 5 B ).
- FIG. 6 shows representative DPAI images of the tissue samples de-crosslinked in a thermal cycler (using citrate buffer, pH 6) at various combinations of temperature and time, either in the absence of the catalyst (0 mM) or using 200 mM of the catalyst.
- Example 3 Analyte Detection in De-Crosslinked FFPE Samples from Various Tissues
- FFPE human breast cancer, melanoma, lymph node, lung cancer, and normal lung tissues were processed essentially as described in Example 1.
- 2-amino-5-methylbenzoic acid (Compound 1) or (4-aminopyridin-3-yl)phosphonic acid (Compound 8) was used as the de-crosslinking agent and applied to de-paraffinized and re-hydrated samples in a buffer solution, such as a solution of citrate buffer at pH 6 or a solution of TE buffer at pH 9.
- the samples were incubated under various de-crosslinking temperatures (e.g., 80° C. or 95° C.) for 30 minutes, using 0 mM or 200 mM of Compound 1 or Compound 8.
- Analytes in the de-crosslinked tissue samples were detected essentially as described in Example 2.
- FIG. 7 A shows representative images of the tissue samples analyzed using detectable probes targeting the common anchor region to detect the RCPs, demonstrating that catalytic de-crosslinking using either Compound 1 or Compound 8 enhanced visualization of transcripts GAPDH/RPLPO or MALAT-I/ACTB (data not shown) across the tissue types, as compared to de-crosslinking in a steamer.
- FIG. 7 B shows representative images of the tissue samples stained with an anti-Vimentin antibody.
- Catalytic de-crosslinking using either Compound 1 or Compound 8 enhanced anti-Vimentin antibody staining across the tissue types, as compared to de-crosslinking in a steamer and de-crosslinking with heating at 95° C. in TE buffer.
- FIG. 7 C shows overlaid images of RNA detection and protein detection, demonstrating that catalytic de-crosslinking using either Compound 1 or Compound 8 enhanced RNA/protein visualization across the tissue types.
- FIG. 8 shows the detected object count per nucleic area (RCP count/ ⁇ m 2 nuclei area) in normal lung tissue samples.
- the RCPs were detected using detectable probes targeting barcode sequences for MALAT-I/ACTB or GAPDH/RPLPO or targeting the common anchor region in the RCPs (representative images in FIG. 8 , left panel).
- Higher RCP densities detected object count per nucleic area (RCP count/ ⁇ m 2 nuclei area)) were observed in samples catalytically de-crosslinked using either Compound 1 or Compound 8, as compared to control samples de-crosslinked in a steamer (data not shown).
- Catalytic de-crosslinking also improved detected objected signal intensity above local background, as measured by detected object signal intensity above local background (mean) in FIG. 8 , right panel.
- FFPE mouse brain tissues were processed essentially as described in Example 1, and gene expression analysis for RNA transcripts and protein analysis (e.g., anti-GFAP antibody staining) in the dentate gyrus (DG) region were performed essentially as described in Examples 2 and 3.
- RNA transcripts and protein analysis e.g., anti-GFAP antibody staining
- DG dentate gyrus
- Four de-crosslinking agent and buffer combinations were tested: Compound 1 in citrate buffer (pH 6.8), Compound 15 in citrate buffer (pH 6.8), Compound 18 (trans-4-hydroxy-L-proline) in citrate buffer (pH 6.8), and Compound 1 in PBS (pH 7.4).
- FIG. 9 shows the detected object signal intensity above local background (mean) in the mouse brain tissues, detected using detectable probes targeting the common anchor region in the RCPs.
- De-crosslinking with Compound 15 in citrate buffer (pH 6.8), Compound 18 in citrate buffer (pH 6.8), and Compound 1 in PBS (pH 7.4) all showed improved signal density compared to de-crosslinking with Compound 1 in citrate buffer (pH 6.8).
- Antibody staining was comparable among the de-crosslinking agent and buffer combinations (data not shown).
- FFPE human breast cancer samples sectioned to 5 m thickness were processed essentially as described in Example 2.
- 2-amino-5-methylbenzoic acid (Compound 1) was used as the de-crosslinking agent and applied to de-paraffinized and re-hydrated samples in a buffer solution with various additives, such as 0.05% SDS, 0.2% SDS, 0.5% SDS, 0.05 M urea, 0.5 M urea, 0.2 ⁇ g/ml proteinase K, 0.5 ⁇ g/ml proteinase K, 1 ⁇ g/ml proteinase K, and combinations thereof.
- the samples were incubated at 80° C. for 30 minutes, using 150 mM of Compound 1.
- Analytes in the de-crosslinked tissue samples were detected essentially as described in Example 2 using circularizable probes (e.g., padlock probes) targeting ACTB, GAPDH, MALAT-1, RPLPO, Eef2, Ppib, POLR2A RNA transcripts.
- Detectable probes were hybridized to sequences (e.g., barcode sequences or anchor sequences) in the RCPs and comprised overhangs for hybridization of fluorescently labelled detection oligonucleotides.
- the samples were imaged in fluorescent microscope with 40 ⁇ objective and the signals associated with the RCPs were quantified using a software.
- FIG. 10 A- 10 C show the detected object count per nucleic area (RCP count/ ⁇ m 2 nuclei area) in cells of the human breast cancer samples treated with Compound 1 for de-crosslinking in the presence or absence of additives SDS, urea, and/or proteinase K as indicated.
- De-crosslinking with Compound 1 in the presence of SDS and proteinase K, or Compound 1 in the presence of urea and proteinase K appeared to improve the detection of RCPs (e.g., decreased autofluorescence, increased puncta brightness and/or increased puncta numbers), as reflected by the increased detected object counts per nucleic area as compared to control samples treated with Compound 1 with no additional additives or with single additives.
- RCPs e.g., decreased autofluorescence, increased puncta brightness and/or increased puncta numbers
- de-crosslinking using Compound 1 in the presence of both 0.5 M urea and 1 ⁇ g/ml proteinase K or Compound 1 in the presence of both 0.5 M urea with 0.5 ⁇ g/ml Proteinase K showed increases in puncta brightness and/or numbers detected.
- antibody staining e.g., antibody positive signal intensity for Pan cytokeratin, Vimentin, and Ki67
- Tissue morphology was also observed to be preserved post workflow and detection as confirmed by H&E staining that was performed.
Abstract
The present disclosure relates in some aspects to methods and compositions for in situ analysis involving catalytic de-crosslinking of biological samples.
Description
- This application claims priority to U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 63/353,506, filed Jun. 17, 2022, entitled “CATALYTIC DE-CROSSLINKING OF SAMPLES FOR IN SITU ANALYSIS,” which is herein incorporated by reference in its entirety for all purposes.
- The present disclosure relates in some aspects to compositions and methods for catalytic de-crosslinking of a fixed biological sample and for preparing the biological sample for in situ analysis.
- Methods are available for analyzing analytes such as nucleic acids and proteins present in a biological sample, e.g., a cell or tissue sample. Current methods for analyzing analytes in situ can have low sensitivity and specificity, have high background and/or low signal-to-noise ratio (e.g., due to autofluorescence), have limited plexity, or be biased, time-consuming, labor-intensive, and/or error-prone. Improved methods for analyzing analytes in a biological sample are needed. Provided herein are methods and compositions that meet such and other needs.
- Nucleic acid probe-based assay methods for in situ analysis such as single molecule fluorescent hybridization (smFISH) have enabled nanoscale-resolution imaging of RNA in cells and tissues. However, most methods of analyte detection are not compatible with fixed tissues without specific sample preparation to clear crosslinking and render analytes accessible to biochemical reactions. In one aspect, background autofluorescence can arise from and/or be exacerbated by sample fixation/crosslinking, such as formalin-fixation. Background autofluorescence may have a significant, ongoing impact on the ability to detect and resolve fluorescence signals from analytes of interest over other components also present in the biological samples, especially when analysis is carried out over multiple rounds of imaging. In another aspect, molecular crosslinks may render analytes (e.g., nucleic acid sequences, epitopes, and/or antigens) less accessible to detection reagents such as labelling agents (e.g., nucleic acid probes targeting cellular DNA or RNA, or antibodies targeting protein analytes), thereby reducing detection efficiency and sensitivity. As such, de-crosslinking fixed samples for in situ analysis is critical and improved methods are needed.
- In some embodiments, provided herein is a method comprising: a) providing a biological sample immobilized on a substrate, wherein the biological sample is fixed; b) contacting the biological sample with a catalyst that catalyzes de-crosslinking of molecular crosslinks in the biological sample; c) contacting the biological sample with a labelling agent that directly or indirectly binds to an analyte at a location in the biological sample; and d) detecting an optical signal associated with the labelling agent or a product thereof, thereby detecting the analyte at the location in the biological sample.
- In some embodiments, disclosed herein is a method for sample analysis, comprising: a) providing a biological sample immobilized on a substrate, wherein the biological sample is fixed; b) contacting the biological sample with a catalyst that catalyzes de-crosslinking of molecular crosslinks in the biological sample; c) contacting the biological sample with a labelling agent that directly or indirectly binds to an analyte at a location in the biological sample; and d) detecting an optical signal associated with the labelling agent or a product thereof, thereby detecting the analyte at the location in the biological sample.
- In some embodiments, the molecular crosslinks are products of one or more crosslinking agents. In some embodiments, the one or more crosslinking agents comprise an aldehyde, optionally wherein the crosslinking agent comprises formaldehyde. In any of the embodiments herein, the molecular crosslinks can be on RNA, DNA, protein, carbohydrate, lipid, and/or other molecules in the biological sample.
- In any of the embodiments herein, the catalyst can catalyze de-crosslinking of inter-molecular crosslinks and/or intra-molecular crosslinks in the biological sample, optionally wherein the inter-molecular crosslinks and/or intra-molecular crosslinks comprise an aminal bridge. In any of the embodiments herein, the catalyst can be a water-soluble catalyst. In any of the embodiments herein, the catalyst can be an organic molecule. In any of the embodiments herein, the catalyst can be a transimination catalyst. In any of the embodiments herein, the catalyst can catalyze de-crosslinking of aminal crosslinks in the biological sample. In any of the embodiments herein, the catalyst can catalyze breakdown of hemi-aminal adducts and/or aminal adducts in the biological sample.
- In any of the embodiments herein, the catalyst can be a compound of formula (I),
- or a salt, zwitterion, or solvate thereof, wherein: A is selected from the group consisting of —COOH, —P(═O)(OH)2, and S(═O)2OH; X1, X2, X3, and X4 are each independently selected from the group consisting of: CH, CRa, and N; each occurrence of Ra is independently selected from the group consisting of C1-6 alkyl, C1-6 haloalkyl, C1-6 alkoxy, —NO2, —NR′R″, and —C(═O)NR′R″; and each occurrence of R′ and R″ is independently selected from the group consisting of H and C1-6 alkyl which is optionally substituted with
- wherein n1 is an integer from 12 to 16.
- In any of the preceding embodiments, the catalyst can comprise one or more compounds selected from the group consisting of
- or a salt, zwitterion, or solvate thereof. In any of the preceding embodiments, the catalyst can comprise
- or a salt, zwitterion, or solvate thereof. In any of the preceding embodiments, the catalyst can comprise
- or a salt, zwitterion, or solvate thereof. In any of the preceding embodiments, the catalyst can comprise
- or a salt, zwitterion, or solvate thereof. In any of the preceding embodiments, the catalyst can comprise
- or a combination thereof, or a salt, zwitterion, or solvate thereof. In any of the preceding embodiments, the catalyst can comprise
- or a salt, zwitterion, or solvate thereof. In any of the preceding embodiments, the catalyst can comprise
- or a salt, zwitterion, or solvate thereof.
- In any of the embodiments herein, the catalyst can be a compound of formula (II),
- or a salt, zwitterion, or solvate thereof, wherein: L1 is selected from the group consisting of —O—, —N(H)—, —N(C1-3 alkyl)-, —N(CH2CH2O)1-10—CH3—, —S(O)0-2—, —CH2—, and a bond; R1 is selected from the group consisting of: H; C1-6 alkyl; C1-6 haloalkyl; C6-10 aryl optionally substituted with 1-4 Rb; and 5- to 10-membered heteroaryl, wherein 1-4 ring atoms are heteroatoms each independently selected from the group consisting of: N, N(H), N(C1-3 alkyl), O, and S, wherein the heteroaryl is optionally substituted with 1-4 independently selected Rb; and each Rb is independently selected from the group consisting of: halo, cyano, —OH, —NH2, —NH(C1-3 alkyl), —N(C1-3 alkyl)2, C1-6 alkyl, C1-6 haloalkyl, C1-4 alkoxy, and C1-4 haloalkoxy.
- In some embodiments, the catalyst comprises
- or a salt, zwitterion, or solvate thereof.
- In any of the embodiments herein, the substrate can comprise a planar surface configured to contact the biological sample. In any of the embodiments herein, the substrate may but does not need to comprise a bead, particle, or microwell. In any of the preceding embodiments, the substrate can be transparent. In any of the preceding embodiments, the substrate can be a glass slide or a plastic slide. In any of the preceding embodiments, the substrate may but does not need to comprise nucleic acid immobilized thereon prior to contacting the biological sample.
- In any of the preceding embodiments, the biological sample can be a tissue section. In any of the preceding embodiments, the biological sample can comprise cells immobilized on the substrate. In some embodiments, the cells are dissociated cells, cultured cells, and/or cells isolated from a subject. In any of the preceding embodiments, the biological sample can be an aldehyde-fixed biological sample. In any of the preceding embodiments, the biological sample can be a formaldehyde-fixed biological sample. In any of the preceding embodiments, the biological sample can be a paraffinzed biological sample. In some embodiments, the biological sample is a formaldehyde-fixed paraffin-embedded (FFPE) biological sample. In any of the preceding embodiments, the biological sample can be a fresh frozen biological sample that has been crosslinked.
- In any of the preceding embodiments, the method can comprise, prior to contacting the biological sample with the catalyst, a step of dehydrating the biological sample. In some embodiments, the dehydrating step comprises drying the biological sample at 42° C. for 3 hours or drying the biological sample at room temperature overnight. In any of the preceding embodiments, the method can comprise, prior to contacting the biological sample with the catalyst, a step of baking the biological sample. In some embodiments, the baking step comprises baking the biological sample uncovered at 60° C. for 2 hours. In any of the preceding embodiments, the method can comprise, prior to contacting the biological sample with the catalyst, a step of de-paraffinizing the biological sample. In some embodiments, the de-paraffinizing comprises contacting the biological sample with xylene, ethanol, and water, or, sequentially contacting the biological sample with xylene, absolute ethanol, about 96% ethanol, and about 70% ethanol. In any of the preceding embodiments, the method can comprise, prior to contacting the biological sample with the catalyst, a step of re-hydrating the biological sample. In some embodiments, the re-hydrating comprises sequentially contacting the biological sample with 100% ethanol, 100% ethanol, 96% ethanol, 70% ethanol, each for 3 minutes, followed by contacting the biological sample with nuclease free water for 20 seconds.
- In any of the preceding embodiments, the method can comprise, prior to contacting the biological sample with the catalyst, a step of pretreating the biological sample. In some embodiments, the pretreating comprises contacting the biological sample with a proteinase. In some embodiments, the proteinase is a collagenase. In some embodiments, the proteinase is present in a solution or suspension comprising a buffer. In any of the preceding embodiments, the method can comprise, prior to contacting the biological sample with the catalyst, a step of permeabilizing the biological sample. In any of the preceding embodiments, the method can comprise, prior to contacting the biological sample with the catalyst, a step of staining the biological sample and imaging the stained biological sample. In some embodiments the staining comprises the use of a histological stain and/or an immunological stain.
- In any of the preceding embodiments, the catalyst can be contacted with the biological sample at a concentration between about 5 mM and about 500 mM. In any of the preceding embodiments, the catalyst can be contacted with the biological sample at a concentration between about 10 mM and about 400 mM. In any of the preceding embodiments, the catalyst can be contacted with the biological sample at a concentration between about 50 mM and about 300 mM. In any of the preceding embodiments, the catalyst can be contacted with the biological sample at a concentration between about 75 mM and about 250 mM In any of the preceding embodiments, the catalyst can be contacted with the biological sample at a concentration between about 100 mM and about 200 mM.
- In any of the preceding embodiments, the catalyst can be contacted with the biological sample for about 1 minute to about 150 minutes. In any of the preceding embodiments, the catalyst can be contacted with the biological sample for about 5 minute to about 100 minutes. In any of the preceding embodiments, the catalyst can be contacted with the biological sample for about 10 minute to about 50 minutes. In any of the preceding embodiments, the catalyst can be contacted with the biological sample for about 15 minute to about 30 minutes.
- In any of the preceding embodiments, the catalyst can be contacted with the biological sample at a temperature between about 5° C. and about 100° C. In any of the preceding embodiments, the catalyst can be contacted with the biological sample at a temperature between about 50° C. and about 95° C. In any of the preceding embodiments, the catalyst can be contacted with the biological sample at a temperature between about 75° C. and about 90° C. In some embodiments, the catalyst is contacted with the biological sample at 80° C. for 30 minutes.
- In any of the preceding embodiments, a solution or a suspension comprising the catalyst and a buffer can contacted with the biological sample. In some embodiments, the buffer comprises citrate, tris(hydroxymethyl)aminomethane (Tris), phosphate-buffered saline (PBS), 2-[4-˜(2-hydroxyethyl)piperazin-1-yl]ethanesulfonic acid (HEPES), 2-(N-morpholino)ethanesulfonic acid (IMES), or a combination thereof. In any of the preceding embodiments, the buffer can comprise dimethyl sulfoxide (DMSO). In any of the preceding embodiments, the buffer can comprise Tris and a chelating agent, optionally wherein the chelating agent is ethylenediaminetetraacetic acid (EDTA) and the buffer is Tris-EDTA (TE).
- In any of the preceding embodiments, the buffer can be present in the solution or suspension at a concentration between about 5 mM and about 250 mM. In any of the preceding embodiments, the buffer can be present in the solution or suspension at a concentration between about 100 mM and about 200 mM In any of the preceding embodiments, the solution or suspension can have a pH between about 4 and about 10, In any of the preceding embodiments, the solution or suspension can have a pH between about 6 and about 8.
- In any of the preceding embodiments, the solution or suspension can comprise sodium dodecyl sulfate (SDS), urea, and/or a proteinase. In some embodiments, the proteinase is proteinase K. In any of the preceding embodiments, the solution or suspension can comprise sodium dodecyl sulfate (SDS) and proteinase K. In any of the preceding embodiments, the solution or suspension can comprise urea and proteinase K. In some embodiments, the urea concentration is between about 0.01 M and about 1 M. In some embodiments, the proteinase K concentration is between about 0.1 μg/mL and about 2 μg/mL. In some embodiments, the urea concentration is about 0.5 M and the proteinase K concentration is between about 0.5 μg/mL and about 1 μg/mL.
- In any of the preceding embodiments, contacting the biological sample with the catalyst can substantially preserve adhesion of the biological sample to the substrate, and/or contacting the biological sample with the catalyst can substantially preserve integrity of the biological sample.
- In any of the preceding embodiments, the method can comprise: after contacting the biological sample with the catalyst, a step of washing the biological sample, optionally wherein the washing comprises washing the biological sample in phosphate-buffered saline with Tween detergent (PBST) for 1 minute for three times: a step of permeabilizing the biological sample before, during, and/or after contacting the biological sample with the catalyst; and/or a step of staining the biological sample and imaging the stained biological sample, optionally wherein the staining comprises the use of a histological stain and/or an immunological stain.
- In any of the preceding embodiments, the analyte or product thereof can remain in the biological sample during the contacting with the catalyst, during the contacting with the labelling agent, and during detecting the optical signal; and/or the analyte or product thereof. Can substantially remain at the location during the contacting with the catalyst, during the contacting with the labelling agent, and during detecting the optical signal.
- In any of the preceding embodiments, the method nay but does not need to comprise migrating the analyte or a product thereof towards the substrate. In some embodiments, the migration is passive migration or active migration. In any of the preceding embodiments, the method may but does not need to comprise migrating the analyte or a product thereof outside the biological sample. In any of the preceding embodiments, the method may but does not need to comprise capturing the analyte or a product thereof by a capture agent immobilized on the substrate.
- In any of the preceding embodiments, the labelling agent may but does not need to be immobilized on the substrate prior to contacting the biological sample. In any of the preceding embodiments, a solution or a suspension comprising the labelling agent can be contacted with the biological sample. In any of the preceding embodiments, the labelling agent can comprise a binding moiety. In some embodiments, the binding moiety comprises a nucleic acid or an antibody or epitope binding fragment thereof. In any of the preceding embodiments, the labelling agent can comprise a detectable label. In some embodiments, the detectable label comprises a nucleic acid or an optically detectable label. In any of the preceding embodiments, the labelling agent can comprise a reporter oligonucleotide. In some embodiments, the reporter oligonucleotide comprises a barcode sequence.
- In any of the preceding embodiments, the analyte is a cellular nucleic acid. In some embodiments, the cellular nucleic acid is genomic DNA, mRNA, or cDNA. In some embodiments, the labelling agent is a primary probe that hybridizes to the cellular nucleic acid. In some embodiments, the primary probe comprises a barcode sequence. In any of the preceding embodiments, the primary probe can be selected from the group consisting of: a primary probe comprising a 3′ or 5′ overhang upon hybridization to the cellular nucleic acid, optionally wherein the 3′ or 5′ overhang comprises one or more barcode sequences; a primary probe comprising a 3′ overhang and a 5′ overhang upon hybridization to the cellular nucleic acid, optionally wherein the 3′ overhang and the 5′ overhang each independently comprises one or more barcode sequences; a circular primary probe; a circularizable primary probe or probe set; a primary probe or probe set comprising a split hybridization region configured to hybridize to a splint, optionally wherein the split hybridization region comprises one or more barcode sequences; and a combination thereof. In some embodiments, the labelling agent is a detectable probe that hybridizes to a primary probe or a product or complex thereof, wherein the primary probe hybridizes to the cellular nucleic acid. In some embodiments, the product or complex of the primary probe is selected from the group consisting of: a rolling circle amplification (RCA) product, a complex comprising an initiator and an amplifier for hybridization chain reaction (HCR), a complex comprising an initiator and an amplifier for linear oligonucleotide hybridization chain reaction (LO-HCR), a primer exchange reaction (PER) product, and a complex comprising a pre-amplifier and an amplifier for branched DNA (bDNA). In any of the preceding embodiments, the detectable probe can hybridize to a barcode sequence in the primary probe or product or complex thereof. In any of the preceding embodiments, the detectable probe can comprise a barcode sequence in a region that does not hybridize to the primary probe or product or complex thereof. In any of the preceding embodiments, the detectable probe can be selected from the group consisting of: a detectable probe comprising a 3′ or 5′ overhang upon hybridization to the primary probe or product or complex thereof, optionally wherein the 3′ or 5′ overhang comprises one or more barcode sequences; a detectable probe comprising a 3′ overhang and a 5′ overhang upon hybridization to the primary probe or product or complex thereof, optionally wherein the 3′ overhang and the 5′ overhang each independently comprises one or more barcode sequences; a circular detectable probe; a circularizable detectable probe or probe set; a detectable probe or probe set comprising a split hybridization region configured to hybridize to a splint, optionally wherein the split hybridization region comprises one or more barcode sequences; and a combination thereof. In any of the preceding embodiments, the detectable probe can comprise a fluorescent label. In any of the preceding embodiments, the detectable probe can comprise a region for binding to a fluorescently labelled probe.
- In any of the preceding embodiments, the analyte can comprise a non-nucleic acid moiety, optionally wherein the non-nucleic acid moiety is a protein, a carbohydrate, a lipid, a small molecule, or a complex thereof. In some embodiments, the labelling agent comprises i) an analyte-binding region that directly or indirectly binds to the non-nucleic acid moiety and ii) a reporter oligonucleotide, optionally wherein the analyte-binding region is an antibody or epitope binding fragment thereof.
- In any of the preceding embodiments, the method can comprise: contacting the biological sample with a first labelling agent that directly or indirectly binds to a nucleic acid analyte at a first location in the biological sample, and detecting a first optical signal associated with the first labelling agent or a product thereof, and contacting the biological sample with a second labelling agent that directly or indirectly binds to a protein analyte at a second location in the biological sample, and detecting a second optical signal associated with the second labelling agent or a product thereof, thereby detecting the nucleic acid analyte and the protein analyte at the first and second locations in the biological sample, respectively.
- In some embodiments, the nucleic acid analyte is an mRNA, and the protein analyte is an intracellular protein, a membrane-bound protein, or an extracellular protein. In any of the preceding embodiments, the first and second locations can be the same location or different locations.
- In any of the preceding embodiments, the product of the labelling agent can be generated in situ in the biological sample. In any of the preceding embodiments, the optical signal can be detected in situ in the biological sample. In any of the preceding embodiments, the optical signal can be detected by imaging the biological sample. In some embodiments, the imaging comprises fluorescent microscopy.
- In any of the preceding embodiments, the number of optical signals detected in a unit area in the biological sample can be greater than that without contacting the biological sample with the catalyst. In any of the preceding embodiments, the analyte comprises a nucleic acid and the number of optical signals detected per unit nuclei area in the biological sample can be greater than that without contacting the biological sample with the catalyst. In any of the preceding embodiments, the intensity of the optical signal detected in the biological sample can be greater than that without contacting the biological sample with the catalyst. In any of the preceding embodiments, the signal-to-noise ratio of the optical signal detected in the biological sample can be greater than that without contacting the biological sample with the catalyst.
- In some aspects, disclosed herein is a method for sample analysis, comprising: a) contacting a biological sample with a catalyst that catalyzes de-crosslinking of molecular crosslinks in the biological sample, wherein the biological sample is a formaldehyde-fixed biological sample immobilized on a substrate before contacting with the catalyst, and wherein the catalyst is a compound of formula (I),
- or a salt, zwitterion, or solvate thereof, wherein: A is selected from the group consisting of —COOH, —P(═O)(OH)2, and S(═O)2OH; X1, X2, X3, and X4 are each independently selected from the group consisting of: CH, CRa, and N; each occurrence of Ra is independently selected from the group consisting of C1-6 alkyl, C1-6 haloalkyl, C1-6 alkoxy, —NO2, —NR′R″, and —C(═O)NR′R″; and each occurrence of R′ and R″ is independently selected from the group consisting of H and C1-6 alkyl which is optionally substituted with
- wherein n1 is an integer from 12 to 16; b) contacting the biological sample with a detectable probe that directly or indirectly binds to a nucleic acid at a first location in the biological sample; and c) detecting an optical signal associated with the detectable probe, thereby detecting the nucleic acid at the first location in the biological sample.
- In some embodiments, the biological sample is contacted with a solution or suspension comprising the catalyst in a citrate buffer between pH 5 and pH 7. In some embodiments, the biological sample is contacted with a solution or suspension comprising the catalyst in a TE buffer between pH 8.5 and pH 9.5. In some embodiments, the biological sample is contacted with a solution or suspension comprising the catalyst in a PBS buffer between pH 6.8 and pH 8.0. In any of the preceding embodiments, the catalyst concentration in the solution or suspension can be between about 50 mM and about 400 mM. In any of the preceding embodiments, the catalyst concentration in the solution or suspension can be between about 100 mM and about 200 mM.
- In any of the preceding embodiments, the biological sample can be catalytically de-crosslinked at a temperature between about 60° C. and about 95° C. In any of the preceding embodiments, the biological sample can be catalytically de-crosslinked at a temperature between about 70° C. and about 90° C. In any of the preceding embodiments, the biological sample can be catalytically de-crosslinked at a temperature between about 75° C. and about 85° C. In any of the preceding embodiments, the biological sample can be catalytically de-crosslinked at a temperature between about 75° C. and about 85° C. In any of the preceding embodiments, the biological sample can be catalytically de-crosslinked for about 5 minutes to about 1 hour. In any of the preceding embodiments, the biological sample can be catalytically de-crosslinked for about 10 minutes to about 45 minutes. In any of the preceding embodiments, the biological sample can be catalytically de-crosslinked for about 15 minutes to about 30 minutes.
- In any of the preceding embodiments, the nucleic acid can be an RNA in the biological sample. In any of the preceding embodiments, the nucleic acid can be a nucleic acid probe that directly or indirectly binds to an RNA in the biological sample. In any of the preceding embodiments, the nucleic acid can be a product of an RNA in the biological sample, optionally wherein the nucleic acid is a cDNA of the RNA. In any of the preceding embodiments, the nucleic acid can be a product of a nucleic acid probe that directly or indirectly binds to an RNA in the biological sample. In some embodiments, the nucleic acid is a rolling circle amplification product (RCP).
- In any of the preceding embodiments, the method can comprise: d) contacting the biological sample with a detectably labelled antibody or an epitope binding fragment thereof that binds to a polypeptide or complex thereof at a second location in the biological sample; and e) detecting an optical signal associated with the detectably labelled antibody, thereby detecting the polypeptide or complex thereof at the second location in the biological sample. In some embodiments, the detectably labelled antibody comprises a fluorophore. In some embodiments, the detectably labelled antibody comprises a reporter oligonucleotide. In some embodiments, the optical signal associated with the detectably labelled antibody is detected using a detectable probe that directly or indirectly binds to the reporter oligonucleotide.
- Provided herein is a method for sample analysis which includes contacting a biological sample with a catalyst that catalyzes de-crosslinking of molecular crosslinks in the biological sample, wherein the biological sample is a sectioned formaldehyde-fixed cell or tissue sample immobilized on a substrate before contacting with the catalyst; contacting the biological sample with a detectable probe that directly or indirectly binds to an RNA analyte at a first location in the biological sample; detecting an optical signal associated with the detectable probe, thereby detecting the RNA analyte at the first location in the biological sample; contacting the biological sample with a detectably labelled antibody or an epitope binding fragment thereof that binds to a polypeptide or complex thereof at a second location in the biological sample; and detecting an optical signal associated with the detectably labelled antibody, thereby detecting the polypeptide or complex thereof at the second location in the biological sample. In some instances, the optical signals are detected by imaging the biological sample on the substrate. In some embodiments, the catalyst comprises
- or a salt, zwitterion, or solvate thereof.
- The drawings illustrate certain features and advantages of this disclosure. These embodiments are not intended to limit the scope of the appended claims in any manner.
- This patent or application file contains at least one drawing executed in color. Copies of this patent or patent application publication with color drawing(s) will be provided by the Office upon request and payment of the necessary fee.
-
FIG. 1 depicts the workflow of an exemplary method disclosed herein. -
FIGS. 2A-2B depict exemplary reactions of fixation chemistry and reversal of molecular crosslinks.FIG. 2A shows formaldehyde fixation affords stable, inert crosslinks between amine residues (e.g., aminal bond, CH2-linked amine).FIG. 2B depicts an example of catalytic reversal of aminal crosslinks using a combination of acid catalysis and nucleophilic catalysis. -
FIG. 3A depicts structures of an exemplary catalyst. In some aspects, with varying R groups, the pKa2 does not change significantly but the nucleophilicity (N) of —NH2 does.FIG. 3B depicts structures of an exemplary catalyst under different pH and examples of pH-dependent acid catalysis. In this example, both compound A and compound B exist in solution at pH 6.8, but only compound B with —COOH catalyzes de-crosslinking reaction. However, atpH 9, the compound exists mostly as a deprotonated form (compound A), which does not catalyze the de-crosslinking reaction.FIG. 3C depicts exemplary phosphonic acid catalysts which perform well at pH 6.8 since —OH of the phosphonic acid exists in solution to catalyze a de-crosslinking reaction. -
FIG. 4 shows detected rolling circle amplification product (RCP) signal density (count/μm2 nuclei area) in catalytically de-crosslinked human breast cancer samples compared to control samples de-crosslinked using a steamer. -
FIGS. 5A-5B show representative images of anti-panCK antibody staining in FFPE human breast cancer samples catalytically de-crosslinked in citrate buffer (FIG. 5A ) or TE buffer (FIG. 5B ), compared to a control sample de-crosslinked using a steamer. -
FIG. 6 shows representative DPAI images of the de-crosslinked FFPE human breast cancer samples. -
FIG. 7A shows representative images of catalytically de-crosslinked FFPE human breast cancer, melanoma, lymph node, lung cancer, and normal lung tissue samples analyzed using detectable probes targeting RCPs associated with GAPDH/RPLPO in the samples.FIG. 7B shows representative images of catalytically de-crosslinked FFPE human breast cancer, melanoma, lymph node, lung cancer, and normal lung tissue samples stained with an anti-Vimentin antibody.FIG. 7C shows overlaid images of nucleic acid detection and protein detection across the tissue types. -
FIG. 8 shows representative images with detected RCP signals (left panel) and detected RCP signal intensity above local background (mean) (right panel) in catalytically de-crosslinked FFPE normal lung tissue samples. -
FIG. 9 shows representative images with detected RCP signals and detected RCP signal intensity above local background (mean) in catalytically de-crosslinked FFPE mouse brain tissue sections. -
FIG. 10A-10C shows detected rolling circle amplification product (RCP) signal density (count/μm2 nuclei area) in catalytically de-crosslinked human breast cancer samples withCompound 1 and various additives (e.g., SDS, proteinase K, and/or urea) compared to control samples de-crosslinked usingCompound 1 only. - All publications, comprising patent documents, scientific articles and databases, referred to in this application are incorporated by reference in their entirety for all purposes to the same extent as if each individual publication were individually incorporated by reference. If a definition set forth herein is contrary to or otherwise inconsistent with a definition set forth in the patents, applications, published applications and other publications that are herein incorporated by reference, the definition set forth herein prevails over the definition that is incorporated herein by reference.
- The section headings used herein are for organizational purposes only and are not to be construed as limiting the subject matter described.
- Compositions and methods are needed for analyzing the spatial localization of analytes in a biological sample, such as various archived tissue materials comprising molecular crosslinks. Formalin/formaldehyde fixation is a dominant method for storage of primary tissue samples for pathology and life science research due to its robustness in maintaining tissue architecture at even ambient temperatures. However, most methods of analyte detection are not compatible with fixed tissues without specific sample preparation to clear crosslinking and render analytes accessible to biochemical reactions, including those amenable to signal detection and/or amplification. Antigen retrieval is commonly employed using a combination of heat, temperature, buffer, and sometimes pressure to expose antigens for more effective antibody staining, and proteinase digestion or other forms of de-crosslinking are employed to enable effective nucleic acid detection.
- In some embodiments, provided herein are compositions and methods that involve catalytic de-crosslinking for preparing samples, such as FFPE cell and tissue samples. In some embodiments, a sample such as an otherwise inaccessible fixed or FFPE sample can be treated with a buffer comprising a catalyst or a precursor thereof to provide accessibility of target analyte molecules in the sample for in situ analysis. In some embodiments, a sample such as an FFPE sample can be de-paraffinized. In some embodiments, the de-paraffinized sample can be contacted with a buffer (e.g., a citrate buffer) comprising an effective concentration of a catalyst or a precursor thereof for a period of time. In some embodiments, the sample can be incubated in a buffer together with the catalyst, e.g., a heated buffer. In some embodiments, the buffer can have antigen retrieving effect. In some embodiments, the buffer can facilitate and/or promote catalytic de-crosslinking by the catalyst. In some embodiments, antigen retrieving due to catalytic de-crosslinking can be combined with heating the sample and/or the buffer (e.g., in a thermocycler), and/or be combined with an antigen retrieving effect of the buffer. In some embodiments, the sample can be washed using a buffer, such as a heated antigen retriever buffer or another buffer to remove products of the de-crosslinking reaction. After the de-crosslinking incubation and/or the de-crosslinking wash, the sample can be subjected to probe/antibody binding and downstream imaging and analysis.
- In some embodiments, provided herein are various catalysts, buffer compositions comprising one or more catalysts, combinations of one or more catalysts with one or more other de-crosslinking agents including enzymes/proteases, and/or compositions comprising crowding agents (e.g., PEG20k MW, to mitigate potential RNA loss during de-crosslinking). In some embodiments, provided herein are methods involving catalytic de-crosslinking using any one or more of the compositions disclosed herein. In some embodiments, provided herein are methods involving catalytic de-crosslinking for various time periods and/or at various temperatures, optionally with heating and/or one or more post-de-crosslinking washes. In some embodiments, the temperature of the sample can be adjusted as needed prior to, during, and/or after de-crosslinking, for example, by controlling the rate of thermocycler heating up/down.
- In some embodiments, the methods can optionally include staining and/or imaging of the fixed biological sample (e.g., tissue section), of the de-crosslinked biological sample (e.g., tissue section), or both. A stain can be any appropriate stain, such as a histological stain (e.g., hematoxylin and eosin) or an immunological stain (e.g., an immunofluorescent stain), or any other stain described herein, e.g., in Section IV-(v). Staining (e.g., H&E staining) and/or imaging can be performed before and/or after the de-crosslinked biological sample (e.g., tissue section) is contacted with one or more nucleic acid probes and/or labelling agents (e.g., fluorescently labelled antibodies) and signals associated with the nucleic acid probes and/or labelling agents are detected in the sample.
-
FIG. 1 shows an exemplary method where a fixed sample immobilized on a substrate is provided instep 101, and the sample can be optionally stained and/or imaged instep 102. If the sample is paraffin-embedded, a de-paraffinization and re-hydration step can be performed instep 103 to prepare the sample for catalytic de-crosslinking. The sample can again be optionally stained and/or imaged instep 104 prior to de-crosslinking in a buffer comprising a catalyst disclosed herein instep 105. The sample can be optionally stained and/or imaged after catalytic de-crosslinking instep 106. A signal associated with a first analyte (e.g., nucleic acid or protein) in the de-crosslinked sample can be detected instep 107, for instance, signals associated with the first analyte can be detected in sequential cycles using detection reagents (e.g., nucleic acid probes). A signal associated with a first analyte (e.g., nucleic acid or protein) in the de-crosslinked sample can be detected instep 108, and in some examples, the first analyte can be a cellular nucleic acid (e.g., genomic DNA, mRNA, or cDNA) and the second analyte can be a protein. The sample can be optionally stained and/or imaged after analyte detection instep 109. - Catalytic de-crosslinking disclosed herein can improve detection of signals associated with nucleic acid analytes and/or non-nucleic acid analytes (e.g., protein analytes) in a fixed biological sample immobilized on a substrate (for instance, as demonstrated in
FIG. 4 ,FIGS. 5A-5B ,FIGS. 7A-7C ,FIG. 8 , andFIG. 9 ) while substantially maintaining or improving sample integrity and/or adhesion to the substrate (for instance, as shown inFIG. 6 ), as compared to sample de-crosslinking without using the catalyst (e.g., using heating in a steamer). As such, signals associated with the analytes at multiple locations in the catalytically de-crosslinked sample can be detected more efficiently (e.g., more signals can be detected in a given sample) and more accurately (e.g., with higher signal-to-noise ratios). For example, detection of signals associated with analytes can be probed and detected (as described in Section III) in a catalytically de-crosslinked sample (e.g., as described in Section II). - In some embodiments, provided herein are methods and compositions for providing a fixed biological sample immobilized on a substrate, and for catalytically de-crosslinking molecular crosslinks in the fixed biological sample. In some embodiments, a method disclosed herein comprises contacting a fixed biological sample with a composition comprising a catalyst or a precursor thereof.
- A. Fixed Biological Samples
- A biological sample disclosed herein can include any sample comprising a cell, a tissue, or a derivative of a cell or a tissue. In some embodiments, a biological sample herein includes a fixed cell or tissue sample comprising molecular crosslinks that can be catalytically de-crosslinked using a catalyst disclosed herein. The ability to use a fixed biological sample in an analytical method, such as in situ analysis of biological molecules (e.g., genomic DNA, RNA, cDNA, and/or proteins), is enhanced if the cross-links established during fixation of the biological sample are reversed so that an assay can be carried out before sample degradation occurs. In some aspects, data obtained from a de-crosslinked biological sample are similar to that obtained from a fresh sample (e.g., a sample that is not fixed and/or crosslinked).
- A fixed biological sample can be any appropriate fixed biological sample. In some embodiments, a fixed biological sample can be a fixed tissue sample (e.g., a fixed tissue section). In some embodiments, a sample herein is not and does not comprise a dissociated tissue/cell suspension. Molecules (e.g., analytes, labelling agents, nucleic acid probes, etc., or products generated in situ in the sample) may but do not need to be removed from a sample herein for analysis before, during, or after catalytic de-crosslinking of the sample. In some embodiments, molecules (e.g., analytes, labelling agents, nucleic acid probes, etc.) are not removed from a sample herein for analysis. In some embodiments, signals associated with the molecules (e.g., analytes, labelling agents, nucleic acid probes, etc., or products generated in situ in the sample) are detected at multiple locations in the catalytically de-crosslinked sample, e.g., the signals can be detected in situ in a catalytically de-crosslinked tissue section.
- In some embodiments, the biological sample is fixed and the fixation comprises contacting the sample with one or more agents that react with one another and/or with molecules in the biological sample. In some embodiments, the reaction creates molecular crosslinks between molecules of the one or more agents, between molecules in the biological sample, and/or between molecules of the one or more agents and molecules in the biological sample. In some embodiments, the one or more agents are crosslinking agents, and the molecular crosslinks are products of one or more reactions between a crosslinking agent and a molecule in the biological sample.
- In some embodiments, a biological sample is fixed using one or more crosslinking agents comprising an aldehyde. In some embodiments, an aldehyde includes a compound containing one or more aldehyde (—CHO) groups, where the aldehyde groups are capable of reacting with an amine (e.g., a primary amine, a secondary amine, or a tertiary amine) or with an amide. Amines are derivatives of ammonia, wherein one or more hydrogen atoms in amines have been replaced by a substituent such as an alkyl or aryl group. These may respectively be called alkylamines and arylamines, and amines in which both types of substituent are attached to one nitrogen atom may be called alkylarylamines. Exemplary amines include amino acids (including amino acid residues of a protein having side chains that can react with an aldehyde), biogenic amines, trimethylamine, and aniline. In some embodiments, molecular crosslinks in a fixed sample are formed via condensation between an aldehyde and an amine, and in some aspects, the condensation does not require heating and/or an acidic condition. Amides having the structure R—CO—NR′R″ in which a nitrogen atom is attached to a carbonyl group. In some embodiments, molecular crosslinks in a fixed sample are formed via condensation between an aldehyde and an amide, e.g., under heating and/or acidic conditions. Exemplary aldehydes can include formaldehyde, paraformaldehyde, glutaraldehyde, glyoxal, and the like.
- In some embodiments, fixing a biological sample comprises treating the sample with a crosslinking agent. In some embodiments, the crosslinking agent comprises formaldehyde. Paraformaldehyde (PFA) is a polymer of formaldehyde. While paraformaldehyde itself is not a fixing agent, it can be heated and/or treated under basic conditions until it becomes solubilized and broken down to formaldehyde molecules.
- In some embodiments, the molecular crosslinks are on RNA, DNA, protein, carbohydrate, lipid, and/or other molecules in the biological sample. In some embodiments, the molecular crosslinks comprise one or more aminal crosslinks such as aminal bridges. In some embodiments, a fixed biological sample can comprise aminal crosslinks among nucleic acids (e.g., genomic DNA, RNA such as mRNA, and/or cDNA), proteins, carbohydrates, lipids, and/or other molecules in the biological sample. Aminal crosslinks can be made, for example, by fixing a sample with formaldehyde.
- In some embodiments, the fixative or fixation agent is formaldehyde. Formaldehyde as fixative comprises paraformaldehyde (or “PFA”) and formalin, both of which relate to the formaldehyde composition (e.g., formalin is a mixture of formaldehyde and methanol). Thus, a formaldehyde-fixed biological sample may be formalin-fixed or PFA-fixed. Any suitable protocols and methods for the use of formaldehyde as a fixation reagent to prepare fixed biological samples can be used in the methods and compositions of the present disclosure. In some embodiments, a biological sample is a formalin-fixed, paraffin-embedded (FFPE) tissue sample (e.g., an FFPE tissue section).
- In some embodiments, aldehyde fixation methods can be combined with other tissue preservation methods. For example, aldehyde fixation can be combined with fresh frozen preservation of tissues, e.g., fresh frozen tissues can be fixed using an aldehyde. Aldehyde fixation can also be combined with alcohol fixation, or with any number of commercially available fixation/preservation techniques. For example, aldehyde fixation can be combined with salt-rich buffer solutions such as RNAlater™, low-temperature preservation buffers such as HypoThermosol, alcohol-PEG fixation (e.g., Neo-Rix, STATFIX, PAGA, UMFIX), PAXGene, Allprotect/Xprotect, CellCover, RN Assist, and/or zinc buffers.
- In some embodiments, preparing fixed (e.g., aldehyde-fixed) biological samples for in situ analysis may comprise catalytic de-crosslinking disclosed herein in combination with additional sample processing steps and/or conditions before, during, and/or after catalytic de-crosslinking. Exemplary sample processing steps and/or conditions may include longer permeabilization periods, additional permeabilization reagents, or higher permeabilization reagent concentrations, e.g., compared to samples that are not fixed, in order to allow detection reagents (e.g., nucleic acid probes and/or antibodies or epitope-binding fragments thereof) to bind to analytes in the sample.
- In some embodiments, provided herein are methods of de-crosslinking aminal crosslinks in a fixed biological sample. In some embodiments, provided herein are methods of in situ analysis using such a de-crosslinked sample. The methods described herein are not limited to any particular fixation reagent that results in crosslinks (e.g., aminal crosslinks) and are equally amenable with any fixation method that results in intra-tissue crosslinking events (e.g., aminal intra tissue crosslinking events).
- In an exemplary fixation method, as shown in
FIG. 2A , condensation of an amino group on a first molecule (e.g., nucleic acid or protein) in a sample with formaldehyde can afford a reactive imine, which can react with a proximal amine (e.g., a CH2-linked amine on a second molecule of the same or different species as the first molecule) to form an aminal bridge, thereby fixing the sample. While fixing can help stabilize the sample, molecular crosslinks could lead to antigen masking and/or background autofluorescence in the sample. For example, PFA induced crosslinks are known to be responsible for increased autofluorescence in FFPE tissues. In some cases, molecular crosslinks may block or restrict biochemical reactions such as nucleic acid hybridization or methods of signal amplification utilized for analyte detection. Conventional methods for antigen retrieval may not sufficiently retrieve the masked antigens and may not remove or reduce the background autofluorescence due to fixing. The catalytic de-crosslinking methods disclosed herein address these and other issues with conventional methods. In some aspects, catalytic de-crosslinking provided herein may revert these molecular crosslinks into native amines and thereby reduce the autofluorescence in the sample for in situ assay workflows (e.g., imaging and detecting signals). In some cases, conventional antigen retrieval methods break these crosslinks but do not revert them into native amines and may not be effective as the catalytic de-crosslinking described herein. - B. Preparing Samples for Catalytic De-Crosslinking
- A biological sample can be immobilized on a substrate before, during, and/or after contacting with the catalyst. In some embodiments, the biological sample is immobilized on the substrate before contacting with the catalyst. In some embodiments, the biological sample remains immobilized on the substrate during and after contacting with the catalyst. In some embodiments, the biological sample is immobilized on the substrate after contacting with the catalyst. In some embodiments, the biological sample is immobilized on the substrate during contacting with the catalyst. In some embodiments, a biological sample can be provided in a fixed state. In some embodiments, a fixed biological sample can undergo one or more preparation steps before it is pretreated and/or de-crosslinked.
- In some embodiments, the substrate comprises a planar surface configured to contact the biological sample and does not comprises a bead, particle, or microwell, optionally wherein the substrate is a glass slide or a plastic slide. In some embodiments, the substrate is transparent. In some embodiments, the substrate is suitable for imaging using fluorescent microscopy, for instance, for in situ analyte detection, e.g., in situ sequencing or in situ sequential hybridization. In some embodiments, the substrate does not comprises nucleic acid immobilized thereon prior to contacting the biological sample. In some embodiments, the biological sample is a tissue section. In some embodiments, the biological sample comprise cells immobilized on the substrate. In some embodiments, the cells are dissociated cells, cultured cells, and/or cells isolated from a subject. In some embodiments, the biological sample is an aldehyde-fixed biological sample. In some embodiments, the biological sample is a formaldehyde-fixed biological sample. In some embodiments, the biological sample is a paraffinized biological sample. In some embodiments, the biological sample is a formaldehyde-fixed paraffin-embedded (FFPE) biological sample. In some embodiments, the biological sample is a fresh frozen biological sample that has been crosslinked.
- In some embodiments, prior to contacting the biological sample with the catalyst, the method comprises a step of pre-warming the biological sample. In some embodiments, a fixed biological sample (e.g., an FFPE tissue section) can be pre-warmed to between about 20° C. and about 60° C., e.g., about 30° C. to about 50° C., about 35° C. to about 45° C., or about 40° C. to about 43° C. In some embodiments, the fixed biological sample can be pre-warmed by incubation in a water bath. In some embodiments, the fixed biological sample is a block of embedded tissue (e.g., formalin fixed and paraffin embedded) that can be sliced using a microtome to generate embedded tissue sections, e.g., about 5 μm in thickness. In some embodiments, the microtome can be pre-warmed to between about 40° C. and about 43° C. for slicing the fixed biological sample.
- In some embodiments, prior to contacting the biological sample with the catalyst, the method comprises a step of dehydrating the biological sample. In some such embodiments, the fixed biological is dehydrated by drying at a temperature higher than room temperature, e.g., at about 20° C. to about 60° C., about 30° C. to about 50° C., about 35° C. to about 45° C., or about 40° C. to about 43° C., such as at about 40° C., 41° C., 42° C., 43° C., 44° C., or 45° C., for a period of time (e.g., about 30 minutes to about 6 hours, about 1 hour to about 5 hours, about 2 hours to about 4 hours, or about 3 hours). In some such embodiments, the fixed biological is dried at room temperature for a period of time (e.g., about 2 hours to about 24 hours, about 5 hour to about 20 hours, about 8 hours to about 16 hours, or overnight), for example, in a desiccator. In some such embodiments, the fixed biological is dried at a temperature higher than room temperature, followed by drying at room temperature.
- In some embodiments, the method comprises, prior to contacting the biological sample with the catalyst, a step of baking the biological sample. In some such embodiments, the fixed biological is baked at a temperature, e.g., at about 40° C. to about 80° C., about 45° C. to about 75° C., about 50° C. to about 70° C., or about 55° C. to about 65° C., such as at about 56° C., 58° C., 60° C., 62° C., or 64° C., for a period of time (e.g., about 30 minutes to about 6 hours, about 1 hour to about 5 hours, about 1.5 hours to about 3 hours, or about 2 hours). In some such embodiments, the fixed biological is baked uncovered in an oven. In some such embodiments, the baked fixed biological is calibrated to room temperature for a period of time (e.g., about 3 minutes to about 30 minutes, about 5 minutes to about 20 minutes, or about 7 minutes).
- In some such embodiments, for paraffin-embedded biological samples (e.g., FFPE samples), the sample can be de-paraffinized (e.g., to produce a de-paraffinized fixed biological sample) and re-hydrated. In some embodiments, de-paraffinizing comprises contacting the biological sample with xylene, ethanol, and water, or, sequentially contacting the biological sample with xylene and an alcohol (e.g., ethanol) series such as absolute ethanol, about 96% ethanol, and about 70% ethanol. In some embodiments, de-paraffinizing can include treating with xylene and ethanol (e.g., absolute ethanol, about 96% ethanol, and or about 70% ethanol). In some embodiments, de-paraffinization can include, sequentially, treating with xylene (e.g., once, twice, or more times, each for about 5 minutes to about 15 minutes, such as about 10 minutes each), treating with absolute ethanol (e.g., once, twice, or more times, each for about 1 minute to about 10 minutes, such as about 2 minute to about 5 minutes, e.g., about 3 minutes each), treating with about 96% ethanol (e.g., once, twice, or more times, each for about 1 minute to about 10 minutes, such as about 2 minute to about 5 minutes, e.g., about 3 minutes each), and treating with about 70% ethanol (e.g., once, twice, or more times, each for about 1 minute to about 10 minutes, such as about 2 minute to about 5 minutes, e.g., about 3 minutes each). In some embodiments, the sample can be treated with water for re-hydration (e.g., in nuclease free water (e.g., DEPC water)), e.g., once, twice, or more times, each for about 5 seconds to about 1 minute, such as 10 seconds to about 30 seconds, e.g., about 20 seconds each.
- In some embodiments, a fixed biological sample is pretreated with one or more pretreating reagents prior to delivery or application of a de-crosslinking agent (e.g., a catalyst disclosed herein). Pretreatment can include permeabilization of the biological sample, for example, using conditions milder than those typically used for extracting analytes.
- In some embodiments, a pretreating reagent can include a proteinase (e.g., collagenase). The proteinase can be present in any appropriate concentration (e.g., about 0.005 to about 0.5 U/μL (e.g., about 0.01 to about 0.5 U/μL, about 0.05 to about 0.5 U/μL, about 0.1 to about 0.5 U/μL, about 0.1 to about 0.3 U/μL, or about 0.2 U/μL). In some embodiments, a proteinase can be pepsin, Proteinase K, or an ArcticZymes Proteinase (an unspecific endopeptidase that can be inactivated after use). The proteinase can optionally be applied with a buffer, such as Hank's Balanced Salt Solution (HBSS) buffer. In some embodiments, if pepsin is used for permeabilization, a pretreating reagent can include a proteinase (e.g., a second proteinase or a proteinase other than pepsin). In some embodiments, if Proteinase K is used for permeabilization, a pretreating reagent may but does not need to include a proteinase.
- In some embodiments, a pretreating reagent can include a detergent. The detergent can be present in any appropriate concentration (e.g., about 0.05% to about 2% (v/v), about 0.1% to about 1% (v/v), about 0.1% (v/v), or about 0.5% (v/v)). In some embodiments, the detergent is a non-ionic detergent. In some embodiments, the detergent comprises TRITON™ X-100. In some embodiments, the detergent is in a buffer. In some embodiments, the buffer comprises, for example, tris(hydroxymethyl)aminomethane-Ethylenediaminetetraacetic acid (TE), phosphate-buffered saline (PBS), 2-[4-(2-hydroxyethyl)piperazin-1-yl]ethanesulfonic acid (HEPES), and/or 2-(N-morpholino)ethanesulfonic acid (MES), with a pH of about 7.0 to about 9.0 (e.g., about 7.5 to about 8.5, or about 8.0).
- A pretreating reagent can be applied to the biological sample (e.g., a cell or tissue sample such as a tissue section) in any number of ways. In some embodiments, a pretreating reagent is in solution or suspension. In some embodiments, the biological sample can be soaked in a solution or suspension comprising a pretreating reagent. In some embodiments, a pretreating reagent is sprayed onto the biological sample. In some embodiments, a pretreating reagent is supplied to the biological sample via a microfluidic system (e.g., as a solution or suspension). In some embodiments, the biological sample is dipped into a solution or suspension of a pretreating reagent, wherein excess solution or suspension is removed from the biological sample. In some embodiments, a pretreating reagent is delivered to the biological sample via a hydrogel, wherein the hydrogel is a repository for a pretreatment reagent and is contacted with the biological sample.
- The pretreatment can be applied to the biological sample (e.g., a cell or tissue sample such as a tissue section) for a time sufficient to permeabilize a biological sample to facilitate the de-crosslinking agent (e.g., a catalyst disclosed herein) penetrating the biological sample. In some embodiments, the pretreatment can be applied to the biological sample for between about 1 minute and about 60 minutes. In some embodiments, the pretreatment can be applied to the biological sample between about 1 minute and about 55 minutes, about 1 minute and about 50 minutes, about 1 minute and about 45 minutes, about 1 minute and about 40 minutes, about 1 minute and about 35 minutes, about 1 minute and about 30 minutes, about 1 minute and about 25 minutes, about 1 minute and about 20 minutes, about 5 minutes and about 60 minutes, about 10 minutes and about 60 minutes, about 10 minutes and about 50 minutes, about 10 minutes and about 40 minutes, or about 10 minutes and about 30 minutes. In some embodiments, the pretreatment can be applied to the biological sample for about 20 minutes.
- The biological sample (e.g., a cell or tissue sample such as a tissue section) can be incubated during pretreatment. In some embodiments, the biological sample can be incubated between about 30° C. and about 45° C. during pretreatment. In some embodiments, the biological sample can be at about 31° C., 32° C., 33° C., 34° C., 35° C., 36° C., 37° C., 38° C., 39° C., 40° C., 41° C., 42° C., 43° C., 44° C., or 45° C. during pretreatment. In some embodiments, the biological sample can be incubated at about 37° C. during pretreatment.
- In some embodiments, after drying, baking, de-paraffinization, and/or re-hydration, a fixed biological sample is not pretreated with one or more pretreating reagents and prior to delivery or application of a de-crosslinking agent (e.g., a catalyst disclosed herein) to the biological sample. In some embodiments, a de-paraffinized and re-hydrated biological is not pretreated by permeabilizing the sample (e.g., using a protease or detergent) prior to contacting the sample with a de-crosslinking agent.
- In some embodiments, the method comprises, prior to or after contacting the biological sample with a de-crosslinking agent (e.g., a catalyst disclosed herein), a step of staining the biological sample and/or imaging the stained biological sample, optionally wherein the staining comprises the use of a histological stain and/or an immunological stain. A stain can be any appropriate stain, such as a histological stain (e.g., hematoxylin and eosin, H&E) or an immunological stain (e.g., an immunofluorescent stain), or any other stain described herein. In some embodiments, a stain may include an agent that interacts with an analyte (e.g., an endogenous analyte in a sample) indicative of cell features may include an agent that interacts with an analyte (e.g., an endogenous analyte in a sample) indicative of morphological features and/or cell features, and the analyte may include intracellular analytes, such as proteins, protein modifications (e.g., phosphorylation status or other post-translational modifications), nuclear proteins, cellular membrane proteins, nuclear membrane proteins, or any combination thereof. In some instances, the stain is a nucleic acid stain, an extracellular matrix stain, a cellular membrane stain, a nuclear membrane stain, a cytological stain, and/or any combinations thereof.
- Staining and/or imaging can be carried out before, during, and/or after the fixed biological sample (e.g., a fixed tissue section) is de-crosslinked using a de-crosslinking agent (e.g., a catalyst disclosed herein). In some embodiments, staining and/or imaging of the sample after de-crosslinking can be performed and the results can be compared to those before de-crosslinking. Images of the sample can be used to monitor cell or tissue morphology and/or sample detachment during sample processing, including drying, baking, de-paraffinization, re-hydration, and/or de-crosslinking, as well as washing and/or permeabilization after de-crosslinking.
- C. De-Crosslinking Agents and Catalytic De-Crosslinking
- Conditions for reversing the effects of fixing a biological sample tend to be harsh. See e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 7,919,280; US 2005/0014203; US 2009/0202998A1; Masuda et al., “Analysis of chemical modification of RNA from formalin-fixed samples and optimization of molecular biology applications for such samples,” Nucleic Acids Research 27(22): 4436-4443, (1999); Evers et al., “The effect of formaldehyde fixation on RNA: optimization of formaldehyde adduct removal,” Journal of Molecular Diagnostics 13(3): 282-288, (2011); and Beechem, “High-Plex spatially resolved RNA and protein detection using digital spatial profiling: A technology designed for immuno-oncology biomarker discovery and translational research,” Biomarkers for Immunotherapy of Cancer. Humana, New York, NY, 2020. 563-583, each of which is incorporated by reference herein in its entirety. For example, treatment of PFA-treated tissue samples can include heating to 60° C. to 70° C. in Tris buffer for several hours, and yet typically this removes only a fraction of the fixative-induced crosslinks. In another example, a 3.0% PFA-fixed tissue samples were soaked in 20 mM Tris-HCl (pH 9.0) and then incubated for 2 h at 60° C. for de-crosslinking (Nagaki et al., “De-crosslinking enables visualization of RNA—guided endonuclease—in situ labelling signals for DNA sequences in plant tissues,” Journal of Experimental Botany, 71(6):1792-1800, (2020)). The harsh de-crosslinking treatment conditions can result in permanent damage to biomolecules (e.g., nucleic acid analytes and/or protein analytes, such as those described herein) in the sample.
- In some embodiments, a de-crosslinking agent or un-fixing agent herein can be a compound or composition that reverses fixation and/or removes the crosslinks within or between biomolecules (e.g., analytes for analytical methods, such as those described herein) in a sample caused by previous use of a fixation reagent. In some embodiments, de-crosslinking agents are compounds that act catalytically in removing crosslinks in a fixed sample. In some embodiments, de-crosslinking agents are compounds that act catalytically in removing aminal crosslinks in a fixed sample. In some embodiments, de-crosslinking agents can act on biological samples fixed with an aldehyde (e.g., formaldehyde), an N-hydroxysuccinimide (NHS) ester, an imidoester, or a combination thereof.
- In some embodiments, provided herein are catalysts that catalyze de-crosslinking of inter-molecular crosslinks and/or intra-molecular crosslinks in the biological sample. In some embodiments, provided herein are catalysts that catalyze the cleavage of aminal bridges, thereby de-crosslinking the inter-molecular crosslinks and/or intra-molecular crosslinks.
- In some embodiments, the catalyst is a water-soluble catalyst. In some embodiments, the catalyst is an organic molecule. In some embodiments, the catalyst is a transimination catalyst. In some embodiments, the catalyst is a bifunctional transimination catalyst that accelerates hydrazone and oxime formation. In some embodiments, the catalyst catalyzes de-crosslinking of aminal crosslinks in the biological sample. In some embodiments, the catalyst catalyzes breakdown of hemi-aminal adducts and/or aminal adducts in the biological sample.
- Aminal crosslinks (e.g., aminal bridges) can be catalytically reversed using one or more organocatalyst. In some embodiments, in catalytic reversal of aminal crosslinks, a first C—N bond of the aminal bridge can be broken in an acid-base reaction, and the second C—N bond of the aminal can be broken to generate repaired NH2 groups on the first and second molecules.
FIG. 2B shows aminal crosslinks can be catalytically reversed using a combination of acid catalysis and nucleophilic catalysis. - In some embodiments, the catalyst is a compound of formula (I),
-
- or a salt, zwitterion, or solvate thereof, wherein:
- A is selected from the group consisting of —COOH, —P(═O)(OH)2, and —S(═O)2OH;
- X1, X2, X3, and X4 are each independently selected from the group consisting of: CH, CRa, and N;
- each occurrence of Ra is independently selected from the group consisting of C1-6 alkyl, C1-6 haloalkyl, C1-6 alkoxy, —NO2, —NR′R″, and —C(═O)NR′R″; and
- each occurrence of R′ and R″ is independently selected from the group consisting of H and C1-6 alkyl which is optionally substituted with
- wherein n1 is an integer from 12 to 16.
- In some embodiments of formula (I), it is provided that when A is —P(═O)(OH)2 and X1, X2, and X4 are CH, then X3 is other than C—CH3.
- In some embodiments of formula (I), A is —COOH. In some embodiments of formula (I), A is —P(═O)(OH)2. In some embodiments of formula (I), A is —S(═O)2OH.
- In some embodiments of Formula (I), X1 is CH. In some embodiments of Formula (I), X1 is CRa. In certain of these embodiments, X1 is C—CH3. In some embodiments of Formula (I), X2 is CH. In some embodiments of Formula (I), X2 is N. In some embodiments of Formula (I), X4 is CH. In some embodiments of Formula (I), X4 is N.
- In some embodiments of Formula (I), X3 is N. In some embodiments of Formula (I), X3 is CH. In some embodiments of Formula (I), X3 is CRa. In certain of these embodiments, Ra is C1-6 alkyl (e.g., methyl). In certain embodiments, Ra is NO2. In certain embodiments, Ra is NR′R″ (e.g., NH2). In certain embodiments, Ra is C(═O)NR′R″. As a non-limiting example of the foregoing embodiments, Ra is
- In some embodiments of Formula (I), X2 and X4 are CH. In some embodiments of Formula (I), X1, X2, and X4 are CH. In certain of these embodiments, X3 is CRa (e.g., C—CH3). In certain other embodiments, X3 is N. In certain of the foregoing embodiments (when X2 and X4 are CH; or when X1, X2, and X4 are CH), A is —COOH or —P(═O)(OH)2.
- In some embodiments, the compound of Formula (I) is a compound of Formula (IA):
- or a salt, zwitterion, or solvate thereof.
- In some embodiments of Formula (IA), A is —COOH. In some of these embodiments of Formula (IA), Ra is C1-6 alkyl. In certain of these embodiments, Ra is C1-3 alkyl. For example, in some embodiments, Ra is methyl. In other of these embodiments, Ra is methoxy. In other of these embodiments, Ra is —NH2. In other of these embodiments, Ra is —N(CH3)2.
- In some embodiments of Formula (IA), A is —P(═O)(OH)2. In some of these embodiments of Formula (IA), Ra is C1-6 alkyl. In certain of these embodiments, Ra is C1-3 alkyl. For example, in some embodiments, Ra is methyl. In other of these embodiments, Ra is methoxy. In other of these embodiments, Ra is —NH2. In other of these embodiments, Ra is —N(CH3)2.
- In some embodiments of Formula (IA), A is —S(═O)2OH. In some of these embodiments of Formula (IA), Ra is C1-6 alkyl. In certain of these embodiments, Ra is C1-3 alkyl. For example, in some embodiments, Ra is methyl. In other of these embodiments, Ra is methoxy. In other of these embodiments, Ra is —NH2. In other of these embodiments, Ra is —N(CH3)2.
- In some embodiments, the compound of Formula (I) is a compound of Formula (IB):
- or a salt, zwitterion, or solvate thereof, wherein: X3 is CH or N.
- In some embodiments of Formula (IB), A is —P(═O)(OH)2. In some embodiments of Formula (IB), X3 is N.
- In some embodiments, the compound of Formula (I) is a compound of Formula (IC):
- or a salt, zwitterion, or solvate thereof, wherein Rc is an electron releasing group. In some of these embodiments, the electron releasing group (Rc) is selected from the group consisting of alkyl, alkoxy, hydroxy, amino, alkylamino, dialkylamino, mercapto, alkylmercapto, silyloxy, aryloxy, and alkylthio. In some of these embodiments, the electron releasing group is lower alkyl or lower alkoxy. In other of these embodiments, the electron releasing group is —NH2. In still other of these embodiments, the electron releasing group is —N(CH3)2.
- In some embodiments, the compound of Formula (I) is a compound of Formula (IC′):
- or a salt, zwitterion, or solvate thereof, wherein Rc is an electron releasing group. In some of these embodiments, the electron releasing group (Rc) is selected from the group consisting of alkyl, alkoxy, hydroxy, amino, alkylamino, dialkylamino, mercapto, alkylmercapto, silyloxy, aryloxy, and alkylthio. In some of these embodiments, the electron releasing group is lower alkyl or lower alkoxy. In other of these embodiments, the electron releasing group is —NH2. In still other of these embodiments, the electron releasing group is —N(CH3)2.
- In some embodiments, the sample is contacted with a compound (e.g., in a solution or suspension) for catalytic de-crosslinking selected from the group consisting of 2-amino-5-methylbenzoic acid, 2-amino-5-nitrobenzoic acid, (2-amino-5-methylphenyl)phosphonic acid, 2-amino-5-methylbenzenesulfonic acid, 2,5-diaminobenzenesulfonic acid, 2-amino-3,5-dimethylbenzenesulfonic acid, (2-amino-5-nitrophenyl)phosphonic acid, (4-aminopyridin-3-yl)phosphonic acid, (3-aminopyridin-2-yl)phosphonic acid, (5-aminopyrimidin-4-yl)phosphonic acid, (2-amino-5-{[2-poly-ethoxy]ethyl}carbamoyl)phenyl)phosphonic acid, 4-aminonicotinic acid, 3-aminoisonicotinic acid, 2-aminonicotinic acid, and (2-aminophenyl)phosphonic acid. In some embodiments, the sample is contacted with Compound 1 (2-amino-5-methylbenzoic acid) in a solution or suspension for catalytic de-crosslinking. In some embodiments, the sample is contacted with Compound 8 ((4-aminopyridin-3-yl)phosphonic acid) in a solution or suspension for catalytic de-crosslinking. In some embodiments, the sample is contacted with Compound 15 ((2-aminophenyl)phosphonic acid) in a solution or suspension for catalytic de-crosslinking.
- In some embodiments, the catalyst of formula (I) is selected from the group consisting of:
- In some embodiments, the catalyst comprises
- or a salt zwitterion, or solvate thereof. In some embodiments, the catalyst comprises
- or a salt, zwitterion, or solvate thereof. In some embodiments, the catalyst comprises
- or a salt, zwitterion, or solvate thereof. In some embodiments, the catalyst comprises
- or a salt, zwitterion, or solvate thereof. In some embodiments, the catalyst comprises
- or a salt, zwitterion, or solvate thereof. In some embodiments, the catalyst comprises
- or a salt, zwitterion, or solvate thereof. In some embodiments, the catalyst comprises
- or a salt, zwitterion, or solvate thereof. In some embodiments, the catalyst comprise
- or a salt, zwitterion, or solvate thereof. In some embodiments, the catalyst comprises
- or a salt, zwitterion, or solvate thereof. In some embodiments, the catalyst comprises
- or a salt, zwitterion, or solvate thereof. In some embodiments, the catalyst comprises
- or a zwitterion, or solvate thereof. In some embodiments, the catalyst comprises
- or a salt, zwitterion, or solvate thereof. In some embodiments, the catalyst comprises
- or a salt, zwitterion, or solvate thereof. In some embodiments, the catalyst comprises
- or a salt, zwitterion, or solvate thereof. In some embodiments, the catalyst comprises
- or a salt, zwitterion, or solvate thereof.
- In some embodiments, a compound disclosed herein catalytically breaks down the aminal and hemi-aminal adducts that form in RNA treated with formaldehyde, and is compatible with many RNA extraction and detection conditions. Exemplary compounds include those described in Karmakar et al., “Organocatalytic removal of formaldehyde adducts from RNA and DNA bases,” Nature Chemistry, 7: 752-758 (2015); US 2017/0283860; and US 2019/0135774, each of which is incorporated by reference herein in its entirety.
- In some embodiments, the catalyst is a compound of formula (II):
-
- or a salt, zwitterion, or solvate thereof, wherein:
- L1 is selected from the group consisting of —O—, —N(H)—, —N(C1-3 alkyl), —N(CH2CH2O)1-10—CH3—, —S(O)0-2—, —CH2—, and a bond;
- R1 is selected from the group consisting of: H; C1-6 alkyl; C1-6 haloalkyl; C6-10 aryl optionally substituted with 1-4 Rb; and 5- to 10-membered heteroaryl, wherein 1-4 ring atoms are heteroatoms each independently selected from the group consisting of: N, N(H), N(C1-3 alkyl), O, and S, wherein the heteroaryl is optionally substituted with 1-4 independently selected Rb; and
- each Rb is independently selected from the group consisting of: halo, cyano, —OH, —NH2, —NH(C1-3 alkyl), —N(C1-3 alkyl)2, C1-6 alkyl, C1-6 haloalkyl, C1-4 alkoxy, and C1-4 haloalkoxy.
- In some embodiments of formula (II), -L1-R1 and the —COOH group are cis to one another. In some embodiments of formula (II), -L1-R1 and the —COOH group are trans to one another.
- In some embodiments of formula (II), the catalyst is a compound of formula (II-a):
- or a salt, zwitterion, or solvate thereof.
- In some embodiments of formula (II), the catalyst is a compound of formula (II-a1):
- or a salt, zwitterion, or solvate thereof.
- In some embodiments of formula (II), the catalyst is a compound of formula (II-a2):
- or a salt, zwitterion, or solvate thereof.
- In some embodiments of formula (II), the catalyst is a compound of formula (II-b):
- or a salt, zwitterion, or solvate thereof.
- In some embodiments of formula (II), the catalyst is a compound of formula (II-b1):
- or a salt, zwitterion, or solvate thereof.
- In some embodiments of formula (II), the catalyst is a compound of formula (II-b2):
- or a salt, zwitterion, or solvate thereof.
- In some embodiments of formula (II), (II-a), (II-a1), (II-a2), (II-b), (II-b1), or (II-b2), L1 is —O—. In some embodiments of formula (II), (II-a), (II-a1), (II-a2), (II-b), (II-b1), or (II-b2), L1 is —N(H)— or —N(C1-3 alkyl)-. In certain of these embodiments, L1 is —N(H)—.
- In some embodiments of formula (II), (II-a), (II-a1), (II-a2), (II-b), (II-b1), or (II-b2), R1 is H.
- In some embodiments of formula (II), (II-a), (II-a1), (II-a2), (II-b), (II-b1), or (II-b2), R1 is a heteroaryl containing 5-10 ring atoms, wherein 1-4 ring atoms are heteroatoms each independently selected from the group consisting of: N, N(H), N(C1-3 alkyl), O, and S; and wherein the heteroaryl is optionally substituted with 1-4 independently selected Rb.
- In certain of these embodiments, R1 is a heteroaryl containing 5-6 ring atoms, wherein 1-4 ring atoms are heteroatoms each independently selected from the group consisting of: N, N(H), N(C1-3 alkyl), O, and S; and wherein the heteroaryl is optionally substituted with 1-2 independently selected Rb.
- In certain of the foregoing embodiments, R1 is a heteroaryl containing 6 ring atoms, wherein 1-2 ring atoms are ring nitrogen atoms, and wherein the heteroaryl is optionally substituted with 1-2 independently selected Rb.
- As a non-limiting example of the foregoing embodiments, R1 can be pyridyl, which is optionally substituted with 1-2 independently selected Rb. For example, R1 can be 3-pyridyl, which is optionally substituted with 1-2 independently selected Rb (e.g., unsubstituted 3-pyridyl, 3-pyridyl substituted with one Rb, or 3-pyridyl substituted with two Rb). As another non-limiting example, R1 can be 4-pyridyl which is optionally substituted with 1-2 Rb (e.g., unsubstituted 4-pyridyl, 4-pyridyl substituted with one Rb, or 4-pyridyl substituted with two R).
- In some embodiments of formula (II), the catalyst is a compound of formula (II-a1); L1 is —O—; and R1 is heteroaryl containing 6 ring atoms, wherein 1-2 ring atoms are ring nitrogen atoms, and wherein the heteroaryl is optionally substituted with 1-2 independently selected Rb. In certain of these embodiments, R1 is pyridyl which is optionally substituted with 1-2 independently selected Rb. For example, R1 can be 3-pyridyl which is optionally substituted with 1-2 independently selected Rb (e.g., unsubstituted 3-pyridyl). As another non-limiting example, R1 can be 4-pyridyl which is optionally substituted with 1-2 Rb (e.g., unsubstituted 4-pyridyl).
- In some embodiments of formula (II), the catalyst is a compound of formula (II-a1); L1 is —O—, —N(H)—, or —N(C1-3 alkyl)-; and R1 is H.
- In some embodiments, the catalyst is selected from the group consisting of (2S,4R)-4-hydroxyproline, (2R,4S)-4-hydroxyproline, (2S,4S)-4-hydroxyproline, (2R,4R)-4-hydroxyproline, (2S,4R)-4-aminoproline, (2R,4S)-4-aminoproline, (2S,4S)-4-aminoproline, and (2R,4R)-4-aminoproline.
- In some embodiments, the catalyst of formula (II) is selected from the group consisting of.
- In some embodiments, the catalyst comprises
- or a salt, zwitterion, or solvate thereof. In some embodiments, the catalyst comprises
- or a salt, zwitterion, or solvate thereof. In some embodiments, the catalyst comprises
- or a salt, zwitterion, or solvate thereof. In some embodiments, the catalyst comprises
- or a salt, zwitterion, or solvate thereof. In some embodiments, the catalyst comprises
- or a salt, zwitterion, or solvate thereof. In some embodiments, the catalyst comprises
- or a salt, zwitterion, or solvate thereof.
- In some embodiments, the catalyst is selected from the group consisting of:
- A catalyst can be contacted with (e.g., applied to) a biological sample at any appropriate concentration. An appropriate concentration may depend on factors such as tissue type, fixation reagent used, and degree of crosslinking in the biological sample. In some embodiments, a catalyst can be contacted with (e.g., applied to) a biological sample in a solution or suspension with a concentration of about 5 mM to about 500 mM (e.g., about 10 mM to about 100 mM, about 10 mM to about 200 mM, about 10 mM to about 300 mM, about 10 mM to about 400 mM, about 100 mM to about 200 mM, about 100 mM to about 300 mM, about 100 mM to about 400 mM, about 100 mM to about 500 mM, about 200 mM to about 300 mM, about 200 mM to about 400 mM, about 200 mM to about 500 mM, about 300 mM to about 400 mM, about 300 mM to about 500 mM, or about 400 mM to about 500 mM). In some embodiments, a catalyst can be contacted with (e.g., applied to) a biological sample in a solution or suspension with a concentration of about 10 mM to about 100 mM (e.g., about 10 mM to about 20 mM, about 10 mM to about 30 mM, about 10 mM to about 40 mM, about 10 mM to about 50 mM, about 10 mM to about 60 mM, about 10 mM to about 70 mM, about 10 mM to about 80 mM, about 10 mM to about 90 mM, about 20 mM to about 30 mM, about 20 mM to about 40 mM, about 20 mM to about 50 mM, about 20 mM to about 60 mM, about 20 mM to about 70 mM, about 20 mM to about 80 mM, about 20 mM to about 90 mM, about 20 mM to about 100 mM, about 30 mM to about 40 mM, about 30 mM to about 50 mM, about 30 mM to about 60 mM, about 30 mM to about 70 mM, about 30 mM to about 80 mM, about 30 mM to about 90 mM, about 30 mM to about 100 mM, about 40 mM to about 50 mM, about 40 mM to about 60 mM, about 40 mM to about 70 mM, about 40 mM to about 80 mM, about 40 mM to about 90 mM, about 40 mM to about 100 mM, about 50 mM to about 60 mM, about 50 mM to about 70 mM, about 50 mM to about 80 mM, about 50 mM to about 90 mM, about 50 mM to about 100 mM, about 60 mM to about 70 mM, about 60 mM to about 80 mM, about 60 mM to about 90 mM, about 60 mM to about 100 mM, about 70 mM to about 80 mM, about 70 mM to about 90 mM, about 70 mM to about 100 mM, about 80 mM to about 90 mM, about 80 mM to about 100 mM, or about 90 mM to about 100 mM) of the catalyst. In some embodiments, a catalyst can be contacted with (e.g., applied to) a biological sample in a solution or suspension with a concentration of about 30 mM to about 70 mM of the catalyst. In some embodiments, a catalyst can be contacted with (e.g., applied to) a biological sample in a solution or suspension with a concentration of about 40 mM to about 60 mM of the catalyst. In some embodiments, a catalyst can be contacted with (e.g., applied to) a biological sample in a solution or suspension with a concentration of about 50 mM of the catalyst.
- In some embodiments, the catalyst is contacted with the biological sample at a concentration between about 5 mM and about 500 mM. In some embodiments, the catalyst is contacted with the biological sample at a concentration between about 10 mM and about 400 mM. In some embodiments, the catalyst is contacted with the biological sample at a concentration between about 50 mM and about 300 nM. In some embodiments, the catalyst is contacted with the biological sample at a concentration between about 75 mM and about 250 mM In some embodiments, the catalyst is contacted with the biological sample at a concentration between about 100 mM and about 200 mM, such as about 100 mM, about 110 mM, about 120 mM, about 130 mM, about 140 mM, about 150 mM, about 160 mM, about 170 mM, about 180 mM, about 190 mM, or about 200 mM.
- The catalyst can be contacted to the biological sample for a time sufficient to de-crosslink some or all of the crosslinked nucleic acids and/or proteins in the biological sample (e.g., a cell or tissue sample such as a tissue section). In some embodiments, the catalyst can be contacted to the biological sample for between 1 minute and 1 day (e.g., between 1 minute and 1 hour, 1 minute and 2 hours, 1 minute and 4 hours, 1 minute and 6 hours, 1 minute and 12 hours, 1 minute and 18 hours, 1 hour and 2 hours, 1 hour and 4 hours, 1 hour and 6 hours, 1 hour and 12 hours, 1 hour and 18 hours, 1 hour and 1 day, 2 hours and 4 hours, 2 hours and 6 hours, 2 hours and 12 hours, 2 hours and 18 hours, 2 hours and 1 day, 4 hours and 6 hours, 4 hours and 12 hours, 4 hours and 18 hours, 4 hours and 1 day, 6 hours and 12 hours, 6 hours and 18 hours, 6 hours and 1 day, 12 hours and 18 hours, 12 hours and 1 day, or 18 hours and 1 day). In some embodiments, the catalyst is contacted with the biological sample for about 1 minute to about 150 minutes. In some embodiments, the catalyst is contacted with the biological sample for about 5 minute to about 100 minutes. In some embodiments, the catalyst is contacted with the biological sample for about 10 minute to about 50 minutes. In some embodiments, the catalyst is contacted with the biological sample for about 15 minute to about 30 minutes.
- The catalyst can be contacted to the biological sample at a temperature sufficient to de-crosslink some or all of the crosslinked nucleic acids and/or proteins in the biological sample (e.g., a cell or tissue sample such as a tissue section). In some embodiments, the catalyst is contacted with the biological sample at a temperature between about 5° C. and about 100° C. In some embodiments, the catalyst is contacted with the biological sample at a temperature between about 50° C. and about 95° C. In some embodiments, the catalyst is contacted with the biological sample at a temperature between about 60° C. and about 90° C., such as about 60° C., about 65° C., about 70° C., about 75° C., about 80° C., about 85° C., or about 90° C.
- A biological sample (e.g., a cell or tissue sample such as a tissue section) can be incubated while the catalyst is contacted with (e.g., applied to) the biological sample. In some embodiments, the biological sample can be incubated between about 25° C. and about 100° C. In some embodiments, the biological sample can be incubated between about 25° C. and about 40° C., about 37° C. and about 60° C., about 45° C. and about 95° C., about 50° C. and about 90° C., about 55° C. and about 85° C., about 60° C. and about 85° C., about 75° C. and about 85° C. In some embodiments, the biological sample can be incubated at about 80° C.
- In some embodiments, an incubation temperature and a contact time can be related. Without being bound by any particular theory, it is believed that if a higher temperature is used, a shorter contact time may be sufficient (e.g., 70° C. to 80° C. for 30 minutes), while if a lower temperature is used, a longer contact time may be beneficial (e.g., 37° C. for 1 day). However, in some cases, both a low temperature and a shorter contact time may be sufficient (e.g., 20° C. to 28° C. for 90 minutes). In some embodiments, the catalyst can be contacted to the biological sample for between 1 hour and 120 minutes (e.g., between 1 minute and 110 minutes, 1 minute and 100 minutes, 1 minute and 90 minutes, 1 minute and 80 minutes, 1 minute and 70 minutes, 10 minutes and 120 minutes, 20 minutes and 120 minutes, 30 minutes and 120 minutes, 40 minutes and 120 minutes, 50 minutes and 120 minutes. In some embodiments, the catalyst agent can be applied to the biological sample for about 10 minutes, about 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 110, or about 120 minutes, and at a temperature between about 70° C. and about 95° C., such as about 70° C., about 75° C., about 80° C., about 85° C., about 90° C., or 95° C. In some embodiments, the catalyst can be contacted to the biological sample for approximately 30 minutes at a temperature between about 75° C. and about 85° C., such as about 80° C.
- A catalyst can be delivered to a biological sample using any appropriate method. In some embodiments, a catalyst can be delivered as a solution or a suspension. In some embodiments, a catalyst can be delivered as a solution or a suspension in a buffer. In some embodiments, the buffer is citrate, tris(hydroxymethyl)aminomethane (Tris), Tris-EDTA, phosphate-buffered saline (PBS), 2-[4-(2-hydroxyethyl)piperazin-1-yl]ethanesulfonic acid (HEPES), 2-(N-morpholino)ethanesulfonic acid (MES), or a combination thereof. In some embodiments, the buffer is Tris. In some embodiments, the buffer comprises Tris and a chelating agent, optionally wherein the chelating agent is ethylenediaminetetraacetic acid (EDTA) and the buffer is Tris-EDTA (TE) In some embodiments, the buffer comprises citrate. In some embodiments, the buffer comprises citrate and dimethyl sulfoxide (DMSO). In some embodiments, the buffer comprises 1%-5% (v/v) DMSO. In some embodiments, the buffer comprises 2% (v/v) DMSO. In some embodiments, the buffer comprises citrate but no DMSO A buffer can have any appropriate concentration. For example, in some embodiments, a buffer can have a concentration of about 5 mM to about 60 mM (e.g., about 10 mM to about 50 mM, about 20 mM to about 40 mM, or about 30 mM). In some embodiments, the catalyst is formulated with DMSO and combined with the buffer (e.g., a citrate buffer, a PBS buffer, or a TE buffer) or before contacting the biological sample.
- In some embodiments, the buffer is present in the solution or suspension at a concentration between about 5 mM and about 300 mM. In some embodiments, the buffer is present in the solution or suspension at a concentration between about 10 mM and about. 250 mM, such as between about 100 mM and about 200 mM, such as about 100 mM, about 110 mM, about 120 mM, about 130 mM, about 140 mM, about 150 mM, about 160 mM, about 170 mM, about 180 mM, about 190 mM, or about 200 mM.
- In some embodiments, the solution or suspension has a pH between about 4 and about 10. In some embodiments, the solution or suspension has a pH between about 6 and about 9. In some embodiments, the solution or suspension has a pH between about 6.5 and about 8, such as between about 6.8 and about 7.4. In some embodiments, the buffer is present at a concentration between about 100 mM and about 200 mM in the solution or suspension having a pH between about 6.5 and about 8, such as pH 6.6, pH 6.7, pH 6.8, pH 6.9, pH 7.0, pH 7.1, pH 7.2, or pH 7.3, pH 7.4, pH 7.5, pH 7.6, pH 7.7, pH 7.8, or pH 7.9.
- In some embodiments, the compound in the solution or suspension can exist in various forms, e.g., depending on the pH of the solution or suspension, and one or more of the forms can function as a catalyst to de-crosslink molecular crosslinks in the sample. Examples of pH-dependent acid catalysis are shown in
FIGS. 3A-3C . For instance, inFIG. 3B ,Compound 1 can exist in two forms—compound A and compound B—in a solution at pH 6.8, but only compound B with —COOH may catalyze a de-crosslinking reaction for reversal of aminal crosslinks. AtpH 9,Compound 1 exists mostly as compound A, which is a deprotonated form that does not catalyze the de-crosslinking reaction.FIG. 3C shows phosphonic acid catalysts may perform well at pH 6.8 since —OH of the phosphonic acid exists in solution to catalyze a de-crosslinking reaction exemplified inFIG. 2C . - Exemplary reagents for inclusion in the solution or suspension described herein may include, but are not limited to, water, various non-ionic detergents, saline-sodium citrate (SSC), sodium phosphate, phosphate buffered saline (PBS), sodium dodecyl sulfate (SDS), urea, proteinase (e.g., proteinase K), bovine serum albumin (BSA), ethylenediaminetetracetic acid (EDTA), a sarkosyl compound (e.g., sodium lauroyl sarcosinate; sarkosyl, ammonium salt; or sarkosyl, potassium salt), tris(hydroxymethyl)aminomethane (tris), tris-HCl (tris hydrochloride), 3-morpholinopropane-1-sulfonic acid (MOPS), TAE buffer (tris EDTA), TBS buffer (tris buffered saline), bis-tris methane, 4-(2-hydroxyethyl)-1-piperazineethanesulfonic acid (HEPES buffer), dimethyl sulfoxide (DMSO), quaternary ammonium salts (e.g., tetramethylammonium chloride (TMAC)), trimethybenzylammonium chloride (TMBAC), tetraethylphosphonium chloride (TEPC), triethylbenzylammonium chloride (TEBAC), tetra-n-propylammonium chloride (TPAC), tri-n-butylbenzylammonium chloride (TBBAC), tetra-n-butylphosphonium chloride (TBPC), (3-((3-cholamidopropyl) dimethylammonio)-1-propanesulfonate) (3-((3-cholamidopropyl) dimethylammonio)-1-propanesulfonate) (CHAPS detergent), and choline dihydrogen phosphate (choline DHP). The solution or suspension may include a zwitterionic catalyst and/or a zwitterionic detergent.
- In some embodiments, the solution or suspension comprises sodium dodecyl sulfate (SDS), urea, and/or a proteinase, optionally wherein the proteinase is proteinase K. In some embodiments, the solution or suspension comprises SDS and proteinase K. In some embodiments, the solution or suspension comprises urea and proteinase K. In some embodiments, the urea concentration is between about 0.01 M and about 1 M, such as 0.01 M, 0.02 M, 0.05 M, 0.1 M, 0.2 M, 0.5 M, 0.75 M, or 1 M, or any concentration in between the aforementioned values. In some embodiments, the proteinase K concentration is between about 0.1 μg/mL and about 2 μg/mL, such as 0.1 μg/mL, 0.2 μg/mL, 0.5 μg/mL, 0.75 μg/mL, 1 μg/mL, 1.25 μg/mL, 1.5 μg/mL, 1.75 μg/mL, or 2 μg/mL, or any concentration in between the aforementioned values. In some embodiments, the SDS concentration (w/v) is between about 0.01% and about 1%, such as 0.05%, 0.1%, 0.2%, 0.5%, 0.75%, or 1%, or any concentration in between the aforementioned values. In some embodiments, the solution or suspension comprises 0.05% SDS, 0.2% SDS, 0.5% SDS, 0.05 M urea, 0.5 M urea, 0.2 μg/ml proteinase K, 0.5 μg/ml proteinase K, 1 μg/ml proteinase K, or any combination thereof. In some embodiments, using SDS, urea, and/or proteinase K in de-crosslinking conditions increases puncta brightness, object counts (e.g., puncta number per unit area), and/or signal-to-noise ratio.
- In some embodiments, disclosed herein is a catalyst (e.g., a compound of formula (I) or (II) disclosed herein) in a solution or suspension comprising phosphate buffered saline (PBS), e.g., a PBS buffer solution having a pH between about 6.5 and about 8, such as pH 6.6, pH 6.7, pH 6.8, pH 6.9, pH 7.0, pH 7.1, pH 7.2, or pH 7.3, pH 7.4, pH 7.5, pH 7.6, pH 7.7, pH 7.8, or pH 7.9. In some embodiments, disclosed herein is a catalyst (e.g., a compound of formula (I) or (II) disclosed herein) in a PBS buffer solution having a pH of about 7.4. In some embodiments, disclosed herein is a compound of formula (I), such as 2-amino-5-methylbenzoic acid, (2-aminophenyl)phosphonic acid, and/or (4-aminopyridin-3-yl)phosphonic acid, as well as a PBS buffer solution having a pH of about 7.4 comprising the compound of formula (I).
- In some embodiments, disclosed herein is a catalyst (e.g., a compound of formula (I) or (II) disclosed herein) in a solution or suspension comprising citrate, e.g., a citrate solution having a pH between about 5 and about 8, such as about pH 5.5, about pH 6.0, about pH 6.5, about pH 7.0, or about pH 7.5 In some embodiments, disclosed herein is a catalyst (e.g., a compound of formula (I) or (II) disclosed herein) in a citrate buffer solution having a pH of about 6.0. In some embodiments, disclosed herein is a compound of formula (I), such as 2-amino-5-methylbenzoic acid, (2-aminophenyl)phosphonic acid, and/or (4-aminopyridin-3-yl)phosphonic acid, as well as a citrate buffer solution having a pH of about 6.0 comprising the compound of formula (I).
- In some embodiments, disclosed herein is a catalyst (e.g., a compound of formula (I) or (II) disclosed herein) in a solution or suspension comprising Tris, e.g., a Tris-EDTA solution having a pH between about 8 and about 10, such as about pH 8.5, about pH 9.0, about pH 9.5, or about pH 10.0. In some embodiments, disclosed herein is a catalyst (e.g., a compound of formula (I) or (II) disclosed herein) in a Tris-EDTA buffer solution having a pH of about 9.0. In some embodiments, disclosed herein is a compound of formula (I), such as 2-amino-5-methylbenzoic acid, (2-aminophenyl)phosphonic acid, and/or (4-aminopyridin-3-yl)phosphonic acid, as well as a Tris-EDTA buffer solution having a pH of about 9.0 comprising the compound of formula (I).
- A catalyst can be contacted with (e.g., applied to) the biological sample (e.g., a cell or tissue sample such as a tissue section) in any number of ways. In some embodiments, a catalyst is in solution or a suspension. In some embodiments, the biological sample is soaked in a solution or suspension comprising the catalyst. In some embodiments, the catalyst is sprayed onto the biological sample, e.g., as a solution or suspension. In some embodiments, the catalyst is supplied to the biological sample via a microfluidic system (e.g., as a solution or suspension). In some embodiments, a catalyst is pipetted or otherwise aliquoted onto the biological sample. In some embodiments, the biological sample is dipped into a solution or suspension of a catalyst, wherein excess solution or suspension is removed from the biological sample. In some embodiments, a catalyst can be delivered to the biological sample via a hydrogel, wherein the hydrogel is contacted with the biological sample. Application of a catalyst can occur in other suitable ways.
- In some embodiments, a composition comprising a catalyst or compound disclosed herein can be used in combination with one or more other de-crosslinking and/or antigen retrieving agents including enzymes such as proteases. Exemplary proteases include a proteinase (e.g., collagenase), which can be present in any appropriate concentration (e.g., about 0.005 to about 0.5 U/μL (e.g., about 0.01 to about 0.5 U/μL, about 0.05 to about 0.5 U/μL, about 0.1 to about 0.5 U/μL, about 0.1 to about 0.3 U/μL, or about 0.2 U/μL). In some embodiments, a proteinase can be pepsin, Proteinase K, or an ArcticZymes Proteinase (an unspecific endopeptidase that can be inactivated after use). The proteinase can optionally be applied with a buffer, such as Hank's Balanced Salt Solution (HBSS) buffer.
- In some embodiments, a composition comprising a catalyst or compound disclosed herein can be used in combination with one or more crowding agents, e.g., to mitigate potential RNA loss during de-crosslinking. Crowding agents are typically high-molecular weight, high valency polymers that may be charged. For example, crowding agents may be polymers such as dextran sulfate, polyacrylic acid, polyvinylsulfonic acid, and alginate. Optionally, crowding agents may be polymers similar to dextran sulfate. In some embodiments, compounds that can function as crowding agents, but have some property of molecular programmability may be used. For example, some polymers that can function as crowding agents can be used and subsequently the charged group can be cleaved off or neutralized. This can convert the compound into a neutral polymer like PEG, which actually enhances the efficiency of enzymatic reactions. In some embodiments, polymers can function as a crowding agent, and then be specifically degraded into small monomers and can be easily washed from the sample. Examples of programmable polyions or polyelectrolytes for enzyme-compatible enhancement of nucleic acid hybridization kinetics (e.g., for hybridization of nucleic acid probes to molecules in the sample after de-crosslinking) include polycondensation reactions of Cys(Lys)nCys, polymers such as PEG (PEG20k MW), PVA, or PAA, which may be subsequently modified via a cleavable linker to include chemical groups conferring ionic charge, or polymers formed from monomers including cleavable linkages, such that the polymer may be degraded subsequent to functioning as a crowding agent.
- D. Preparing De-Crosslinked Samples for In Situ Analysis
- In some embodiments, after catalytic de-crosslinking, a biological sample (e.g., tissue section) is permeabilized (e.g., undergoes permeabilization). In some embodiments, the sample is permeabilized after delivery to or application of a de-crosslinking agent. In some embodiments, the permeabilization comprises harsher conditions than the optional pretreatment step. In some embodiments, the permeabilization comprises applying one or more permeabilization reagents to the biological sample. In some embodiments, a permeabilization reagent can comprise a protease. In some embodiments, the protease comprises pepsin. In some embodiments, the protease comprises proteinase K. In some embodiments, the protease comprises ArcticZyme Proteinase. In some embodiments, the protease is provided in a solution of hydrochloric acid. In some embodiments, after catalytic de-crosslinking, a biological sample (e.g., tissue section) is contacted with a protease, e.g., washed using a solution containing a protease, prior to contacting the biological sample with a labelling agent (e.g., a probe or probe set) that directly or indirectly binds to an analyte at a location in the biological sample. In some examples, provided is a method comprising contacting an intact biological sample with a labelling agent that directly or indirectly binds to an analyte at a location in the biological sample.
- The permeabilization reagent(s) can be applied to biological sample (e.g., tissue section) in any number of ways. In some embodiments, the permeabilization reagents can be in solution or suspension. In some embodiments, the sample is soaked in a solution or suspension of the permeabilization reagent(s). In some embodiments, the permeabilization reagents are sprayed onto the sample (e.g., as a solution or suspension). In some embodiments, the permeabilization reagents are supplied to the sample via a microfluidic system (e.g., as a solution or suspension). In some embodiments, the sample can be dipped into a solution or suspension comprising the permeabilization reagent(s), wherein excess permeabilization reagent is removed from the sample. In some embodiments, the permeabilization reagent(s) are delivered to the sample via a hydrogel, wherein the hydrogel is contacted with the sample.
- The permeabilization reagent(s) can be contacted to the biological sample (e.g., tissue section) for a time sufficient to permeabilize the sample. In some embodiments, the permeabilization reagent(s) can be contacted to the sample for between 1 minute and 120 minutes. In some embodiments, the permeabilization reagent(s) can be applied to the sample between about 1 minute and 90 minutes, 1 minute and 80 minutes, 1 minute and 70 minutes, 1 minute and 60 minutes, 1 minute and about 55 minutes, about 1 minute and about 50 minutes, about 1 minute and about 45 minutes, about 1 minute and about 40 minutes, about 1 minute and about 35 minutes, about 1 minute and about 30 minutes, about 1 minute about 5 minutes and about 60 minutes, about 10 minutes and about 60 minutes, about 10 minutes and about 55 minutes, about 10 minutes and about 50 minutes, about 10 minutes and about 45 minutes, about 10 minutes and about 40 minutes, about 15 minutes and about 45 minutes, about 20 minutes and about 40 minutes, about 25 minutes and about 35 minutes. In some embodiments, the permeabilization reagent(s) can be contacted to the sample for approximately 30 minutes.
- The biological sample (e.g., tissue section) can be incubated with the permeabilization reagent(s). In some embodiments, the sample can be incubated between about 16° C. and about 56° C. (e.g., between about 30° C. and 45° C., or between about 35° C. and about 40° C.). In some embodiments, the biological sample can be at about 16° C., 18° C., 20° C., 22° C., 24° C., 26° C., 28° C., 30° C., 31° C., 32° C., 33° C., 34° C., 35° C., 36° C., 37° C., 38° C., 39° C., 40° C., 41° C., 42° C., 43° C., 44° C., 45° C., 46° C., 48° C., 50° C., 52° C., 54° C., or 56° C. In some embodiments, the sample can be incubated at about 37° C.
- In some embodiments, the method comprises a step of permeabilizing the biological sample before, during, and/or after contacting the biological sample with the catalyst for catalytic de-crosslinking. In some embodiments, the method comprises incubating and/or washing a fixed biological sample in a buffer comprising one or more detergents, such as a Tween detergent (e.g., Tween™ 20), before and/or during catalytic de-crosslinking. In some embodiments, the method comprises incubating and/or washing a catalytically de-crosslinked biological sample in a buffer comprising one or more detergents, such as a Tween detergent (e.g.,
Tween™ 20. - In some embodiments, the method does not comprise migrating molecules (e.g., analytes, labelling agents, nucleic acid probes, etc., or products generated in situ in the sample) outside of the permeabilized biological sample. In some embodiments, the method does not comprise migrating molecules (e.g., analytes, labelling agents, nucleic acid probes, etc., or products generated in situ in the sample) towards the substrate, optionally wherein the migration is passive migration or active migration. In some embodiments, the method does not comprise capturing molecules (e.g., analytes, labelling agents, nucleic acid probes, etc., or products generated in situ in the sample) by a capture agent immobilized on the substrate.
- In some embodiments, after catalytic de-crosslinking, a biological sample (e.g., tissue section) can be incubated and/or washed with a solution containing a detergent in any appropriate concentration (e.g., about 0.05% to about 2% (v/v), about 0.1% to about 1% (v/v), about 0.1% (v/v), or about 0.5% (v/v)). In some embodiments, the detergent is a non-ionic detergent. In some embodiments, the detergent comprises Triton™ X-100, Triton™ X-200,
Tween™ 20, Tween™ 80, N-lauroyl sarcosine, sodium dodecyl sulfate (SDS), dodecyldimethylphosphine oxide, sorbitan monopalmitate, decylhexaglycol, 4-nonylphenylpolyethylene glycol, CAHPS, IGEPAL CA-630, Sulfobetain-10, Sulfobetain-16, urea, or a combination thereof. In some embodiments, urea solubilizes and denatures proteins by disrupting noncovalent bonds. In some embodiments, the buffer comprises, for example, tris(hydroxymethyl)aminomethane-Ethylenediaminetetraacetic acid (TE), phosphate-buffered saline (PBS), 2-[4-(2-hydroxyethyl)piperazin-1-yl]ethanesulfonic acid (HEPES), and/or 2-(N-morpholino)ethanesulfonic acid (MES), with a pH of about 7.0 to about 9.0 (e.g., about 7.5 to about 8.5, or about 8.0). In some embodiments, the detergent is in a buffer such as PBS. In some embodiments, the buffer is PBS with a Tween detergent (PBST) In some embodiments, the method comprises, after contacting the biological sample with the catalyst, a step of washing the biological sample, optionally wherein the biological sample is washed in PBST, e.g., for three times for 1 minute each. - In some embodiments, the method comprises, after contacting the biological sample with the catalyst, a step of staining the biological sample and imaging the stained biological sample prior to containing the sample with a labelling agent that directly or indirectly binds to an analyte at a location in the biological sample, e.g., for analyte detection using nucleic acid probes for in situ hybridization (e.g., sequential hybridization in sequential rounds of probe hybridization and detection) and/or using labelled antibodies for protein detection (e.g., described in Section III-B and Section III-C).
- In some embodiments, provided herein are methods and compositions for sample analysis comprising contacting a fixed biological sample that has been catalytically de-crosslinked with a labelling agent that binds to an analyte at a location in the de-crosslinked fixed biological sample, and detecting an optical signal associated with the labelling agent or a product thereof, thereby detecting the analyte at the location in the biological sample. A biological sample may comprise one or a plurality of analytes of interest. Methods for performing multiplexed assays to analyze two or more different analytes in a single biological sample are provided.
- The methods, probes, and kits disclosed herein can be used to detect and analyze a wide variety of different analytes. In some aspects, an analyte can include any biological substance, structure, moiety, or component to be analyzed. In some aspects, a target disclosed herein may similarly include any analyte of interest. In some examples, a target or analyte can be directly or indirectly detected.
- Analytes can be derived from a specific type of cell and/or a specific sub-cellular region. For example, analytes can be derived from cytosol, from cell nuclei, from mitochondria, from microsomes, and more generally, from any other compartment, organelle, or portion of a cell. Permeabilizing agents that specifically target certain cell compartments and organelles can be used to selectively release analytes from cells for analysis, and/or allow access of one or more reagents (e.g., probes for analyte detection) to the analytes in the cell or cell compartment or organelle.
- The analyte may include any biomolecule, macromolecule, or chemical compound, including a protein or peptide, a lipid or a nucleic acid molecule, or a small molecule, including organic or inorganic molecules. The analyte may be a cell or a microorganism, including a virus, or a fragment or product thereof. An analyte can be any substance or entity for which a specific binding partner (e.g. an affinity binding partner) can be developed. Such a specific binding partner may be a nucleic acid probe (for a nucleic acid analyte) and may lead directly to the generation of a RCA template (e.g. a padlock or other circularizable probe). Alternatively, the specific binding partner may be coupled to a nucleic acid, which may be detected using an RCA strategy, e.g. in an assay which uses or generates a circular nucleic acid molecule which can be the RCA template.
- Analytes of particular interest may include nucleic acid molecules (e.g., cellular nucleic acids), such as DNA (e.g. genomic DNA, mitochondrial DNA, plastid DNA, viral DNA, etc.) and RNA (e.g. mRNA, microRNA, rRNA, snRNA, viral RNA, etc.), and synthetic and/or modified nucleic acid molecules, (e.g. including nucleic acid domains comprising or consisting of synthetic or modified nucleotides such as LNA, PNA, morpholino, etc.), proteinaceous molecules such as peptides, polypeptides, proteins or prions or any molecule which comprises a protein or polypeptide component, etc., or fragments thereof, or a lipid or carbohydrate molecule, or any molecule which comprise a lipid or carbohydrate component. The analyte may be a single molecule or a complex that contains two or more molecular subunits, e.g. including but not limited to protein-DNA complexes, which may or may not be covalently bound to one another, and which may be the same or different. Thus in addition to cells or microorganisms, such a complex analyte may also be a protein complex or protein interaction. Such a complex or interaction may thus be a homo- or hetero-multimer. Aggregates of molecules, e.g. proteins may also be target analytes, for example aggregates of the same protein or different proteins. The analyte may also be a complex between proteins or peptides and nucleic acid molecules such as DNA or RNA, e.g. interactions between proteins and nucleic acids, e.g. regulatory factors, such as transcription factors, and DNA or RNA.
- A. Endogenous Analytes
- In some embodiments, an analyte herein is endogenous to a biological sample and can include cellular nucleic acid analytes and non-nucleic acid analytes. Methods, probes, and kits disclosed herein can be used to analyze nucleic acid analytes (e.g., using a nucleic acid probe or probe set that directly or indirectly hybridizes to a nucleic acid analyte) and/or non-nucleic acid analytes (e.g., using a labelling agent that comprises a reporter oligonucleotide and binds directly or indirectly to a non-nucleic acid analyte) in any suitable combination.
- Examples of non-nucleic acid analytes include, but are not limited to, lipids, carbohydrates, peptides, proteins, glycoproteins (N-linked or O-linked), lipoproteins, phosphoproteins, specific phosphorylated or acetylated variants of proteins, amidation variants of proteins, hydroxylation variants of proteins, methylation variants of proteins, ubiquitylation variants of proteins, sulfation variants of proteins, viral coat proteins, extracellular and intracellular proteins, antibodies, and antigen binding fragments. In some embodiments, the analyte is inside a cell or on a cell surface, such as a transmembrane analyte or one that is attached to the cell membrane. In some embodiments, the analyte can be an organelle (e.g., nuclei or mitochondria). In some embodiments, the analyte is an extracellular analyte, such as a secreted analyte. Exemplary analytes include, but are not limited to, a receptor, an antigen, a surface protein, a transmembrane protein, a cluster of differentiation protein, a protein channel, a protein pump, a carrier protein, a phospholipid, a glycoprotein, a glycolipid, a cell-cell interaction protein complex, an antigen-presenting complex, a major histocompatibility complex, an engineered T-cell receptor, a T-cell receptor, a B-cell receptor, a chimeric antigen receptor, an extracellular matrix protein, a posttranslational modification (e.g., phosphorylation, glycosylation, ubiquitination, nitrosylation, methylation, acetylation or lipidation) state of a cell surface protein, a gap junction, and an adherens junction.
- Examples of nucleic acid analytes include DNA analytes such as single-stranded DNA (ssDNA), double-stranded DNA (dsDNA), genomic DNA, methylated DNA, specific methylated DNA sequences, fragmented DNA, mitochondrial DNA, in situ synthesized PCR products, and RNA/DNA hybrids. The DNA analyte can be a transcript of another nucleic acid molecule (e.g., DNA or RNA such as mRNA) present in a tissue sample.
- Examples of nucleic acid analytes also include RNA analytes such as various types of coding and non-coding RNA. Examples of the different types of RNA analytes include messenger RNA (mRNA), including a nascent RNA, a pre-mRNA, a primary-transcript RNA, and a processed RNA, such as a capped mRNA (e.g., with a 5′ 7-methyl guanosine cap), a polyadenylated mRNA (poly-A tail at the 3′ end), and a spliced mRNA in which one or more introns have been removed. Also included in the analytes disclosed herein are non-capped mRNA, a non-polyadenylated mRNA, and a non-spliced mRNA. The RNA analyte can be a transcript of another nucleic acid molecule (e.g., DNA or RNA such as viral RNA) present in a tissue sample. Examples of a non-coding RNAs (ncRNA) that is not translated into a protein include transfer RNAs (tRNAs) and ribosomal RNAs (rRNAs), as well as small non-coding RNAs such as microRNA (miRNA), small interfering RNA (siRNA), Piwi-interacting RNA (piRNA), small nucleolar RNA (snoRNA), small nuclear RNA (snRNA), extracellular RNA (exRNA), small Cajal body-specific RNAs (scaRNAs), and the long ncRNAs such as Xist and HOTAIR. The RNA can be small (e.g., less than 200 nucleic acid bases in length) or large (e.g., RNA greater than 200 nucleic acid bases in length). Examples of small RNAs include 5.8S ribosomal RNA (rRNA), 5S rRNA, tRNA, miRNA, siRNA, snoRNAs, piRNA, tRNA-derived small RNA (tsRNA), and small rDNA-derived RNA (srRNA). The RNA can be double-stranded RNA or single-stranded RNA. The RNA can be circular RNA. The RNA can be a bacterial rRNA (e.g., 16s rRNA or 23s rRNA).
- In some embodiments described herein, an analyte may be a denatured nucleic acid, wherein the resulting denatured nucleic acid is single-stranded. The nucleic acid may be denatured, for example, optionally using formamide, heat, or both formamide and heat. In some embodiments, the nucleic acid is not denatured for use in a method disclosed herein.
- Methods, probes, and kits disclosed herein can be used to analyze any number of analytes. For example, the number of analytes that are analyzed can be at least about 2, at least about 3, at least about 4, at least about 5, at least about 6, at least about 7, at least about 8, at least about 9, at least about 10, at least about 11, at least about 12, at least about 13, at least about 14, at least about 15, at least about 20, at least about 25, at least about 30, at least about 40, at least about 50, at least about 100, at least about 1,000, at least about 10,000, at least about 100,000 or more different analytes present in a region of the sample or within an individual feature of the substrate.
- In any embodiment described herein, the analyte can comprise or be associated with a target sequence. In some embodiments, the target nucleic acid and the target sequence therein may be endogenous to the sample, generated in the sample, added to the sample, or associated with an analyte in the sample. In some embodiments, the target sequence is a single-stranded target sequence (e.g., a sequence in a rolling circle amplification product). In some embodiments, the target sequence is a single-stranded target sequence (e.g., in a probe bound directly or indirectly to the analyte). In some embodiments, the target sequence is a single-stranded target sequence in a primary probe that binds to an analyte of interest in the biological sample. In some embodiments, the target sequence is a single-stranded target sequence in an intermediate probe which directly or indirectly binds to a primary probe or product thereof, where the primary probe binds to an analyte of interest in the biological sample. In some embodiments, the target sequence is a single-stranded target sequence in a secondary probe that binds to the primary probe or product thereof. In some embodiments, the analytes comprises one or more single-stranded target sequences.
- B. Analyte Detection
- In some embodiments, provided herein are methods, probes, and kits for analyzing one or more products of an endogenous analyte and/or a labelling agent in a biological sample. In some embodiments, an endogenous analyte (e.g., a viral or cellular DNA or RNA) or a product (e.g., a hybridization product, a ligation product, an extension product (e.g., by a DNA or RNA polymerase), a replication product, a transcription/reverse transcription product, and/or an amplification product such as a rolling circle amplification (RCA) product) thereof is analyzed. In some embodiments, a labelling agent that directly or indirectly binds to an analyte in the biological sample is analyzed. In some embodiments, a product (e.g., a hybridization product, a ligation product, an extension product (e.g., by a DNA or RNA polymerase), a replication product, a transcription/reverse transcription product, and/or an amplification product such as a rolling circle amplification (RCA) product) of a labelling agent that directly or indirectly binds to an analyte in the biological sample is analyzed. In some instances, the provided methods are for gene expression analysis for RNA transcripts and protein analysis in the same intact biological sample (e.g., a tissue section).
- Disclosed herein in some aspects are labelling agents (e.g., nucleic acid probes and/or probe sets) that are introduced into a cell or used to otherwise contact a biological sample such as a tissue sample. The labelling agents include probes (e.g., the primary probes disclosed herein and/or any detectable probe disclosed herein) may comprise any of a variety of entities that can hybridize to a nucleic acid, typically by Watson-Crick base pairing, such as DNA, RNA, LNA, PNA, etc. The nucleic acid probe may comprise a hybridization region that is able to directly or indirectly bind to at least a portion of a target sequence in a target nucleic acid. The nucleic acid probe may be able to bind to a specific target nucleic acid (e.g., an mRNA, or other nucleic acids disclosed herein). In some embodiments, the nucleic acid probes may be detected using a detectable label, and/or by using secondary nucleic acid probes able to bind to the nucleic acid probes. In some embodiments, the nucleic acid probes (e.g., primary probes and/or secondary probes) are compatible with one or more biological and/or chemical reactions. For instance, a nucleic acid probe disclosed herein can serve as a template or primer for a polymerase, a template or substrate for a ligase, a substrate for a click chemistry reaction, and/or a substrate for a nuclease (e.g., endonuclease or exonuclease for cleavage or digestion).
- In some embodiments, more than one type of primary nucleic acid probes may be contacted with a sample, e.g., simultaneously or sequentially in any suitable order, such as in sequential probe hybridization/unhybridization cycles. In some embodiments, more than one type of secondary nucleic acid probes may be contacted with a sample, e.g., simultaneously or sequentially in any suitable order, such as in sequential probe hybridization/unhybridization cycles. In some embodiments, the secondary probes may comprise probes that bind to a product of a primary probe targeting an analyte. In some embodiments, more than one type of higher order nucleic acid probes may be contacted with a sample, e.g., simultaneously or sequentially in any suitable order, such as in sequential probe hybridization/unhybridization cycles. In some embodiments, more than one type of detectably labeled nucleic acid probes may be contacted with a sample, e.g., simultaneously or sequentially in any suitable order, such as in sequential probe hybridization/unhybridization cycles. In some embodiments, the detectably labeled nucleic acid probes can be used to bind to one or more primary probes, one or more secondary probes, one or more higher order probes, one or more intermediate probes between a primary/secondary/higher order probes, and/or one or more detectably or non-detectably labeled probes (e.g., as in the case of a hybridization chain reaction (HCR), a branched DNA reaction (bDNA), or the like). In some embodiments, the plurality of probes or probe sets comprises at least 2, at least 5, at least 10, at least 25, at least 50, at least 75, at least 100, at least 300, at least 1,000, at least 3,000, at least 10,000, at least 30,000, at least 50,000, at least 100,000, at least 250,000, at least 500,000, or at least 1,000,000 distinguishable nucleic acid probes (e.g., primary, secondary, higher order probes, and/or detectably labeled probes) that can be contacted with a sample, e.g., simultaneously or sequentially in any suitable order. Between any of the probe contacting steps disclosed herein, the method may comprise one or more intervening reactions and/or processing steps, such as modifications of a target nucleic acid, modifications of a probe or product thereof (e.g., via hybridization, ligation, extension, amplification, cleavage, digestion, branch migration, primer exchange reaction, click chemistry reaction, crosslinking, attachment of a detectable label, activating photo-reactive moieties, etc.), removal of a probe or product thereof (e.g., cleaving off a portion of a probe and/or unhybridizing the entire probe), signal modifications (e.g., quenching, masking, photo-bleaching, signal enhancement (e.g., via FRET), signal amplification, etc.), signal removal (e.g., cleaving off or permanently inactivating a detectable label), crosslinking, de-crosslinking, and/or signal detection.
- The hybridization region of the probe or probe set is a target-binding sequence (sometimes also referred to as the targeting region/sequence or the recognition region/sequence) that be positioned anywhere within the probe. For instance, the target-binding sequence of a primary probe that binds to a target nucleic acid can be 5′ or 3′ to any barcode sequence in the primary probe. Likewise, the target-binding sequence of a secondary probe (which binds to a primary probe or complement or product thereof) can be 5′ or 3′ to any barcode sequence in the secondary probe. In some embodiments, the target-binding sequence may comprise a sequence that is substantially complementary to a portion of a target nucleic acid. In some embodiments, the portions may be at least 50%, at least 60%, at least 70%, at least 75%, at least 80%, at least 85%, at least 90%, at least 92%, at least 94%, at least 95%, at least 96%, at least 97%, at least 98%, at least 99%, or 100% complementary.
- The hybridization region of the probe or probe set can be used to identify a particular analyte comprising or associated with a target (e.g., comprising a target sequence). In some cases, multiple probes can be used, sequentially and/or simultaneously, that can bind to (e.g., hybridize to) different regions of the same target nucleic acid. In other examples, a probe may comprise target-binding sequences (e.g., hybridization regions) that can bind to different target nucleic acid sequences, e.g., various intron and/or exon sequences of the same gene (for detecting splice variants, for example), or sequences of different genes, e.g., for detecting a product that comprises the different target nucleic acid sequences, such as a genome rearrangement (e.g., inversion, transposition, translocation, insertion, deletion, duplication, and/or amplification).
- In some embodiments, provided herein are methods, probes, and kits for analyzing endogenous analytes (e.g., RNA, ssDNA, and cell surface or intracellular proteins and/or metabolites) in a sample using one or more labelling agents.
- In some embodiments, the labelling agent is an immunohistochemistry (IHC) probe that is excited at various different wavelengths. In some embodiments, an analyte labelling agent may include an agent that interacts with an analyte (e.g., an endogenous analyte in a sample). In some embodiments, the labelling agents can comprise a reporter oligonucleotide that is indicative of the analyte or portion thereof interacting with the labelling agent. For example, the reporter oligonucleotide may comprise a barcode sequence that permits identification of the labelling agent. In some cases, the sample contacted by the labelling agent can be further contacted with a probe (e.g., a single-stranded probe sequence), that hybridizes to a reporter oligonucleotide of the labelling agent, in order to identify the analyte associated with the labelling agent. In some embodiments, the analyte labelling agent comprises an analyte binding moiety and a labelling agent barcode domain comprising one or more barcode sequences, e.g., a barcode sequence that corresponds to the analyte binding moiety and/or the analyte. An analyte binding moiety barcode comprises to a barcode that is associated with or otherwise identifies the analyte binding moiety. In some embodiments, by identifying an analyte binding moiety by identifying its associated analyte binding moiety barcode, the analyte to which the analyte binding moiety binds can also be identified. An analyte binding moiety barcode can be a nucleic acid sequence of a given length and/or sequence that is associated with the analyte binding moiety. An analyte binding moiety barcode can generally include any of the variety of aspects of barcodes described herein.
- In some embodiments, the method comprises one or more post-fixing (also referred to as post-fixation) steps after contacting the sample with one or more labelling agents.
- In the methods described herein, one or more labelling agents capable of binding to or otherwise coupling to one or more features may be used to characterize analytes, cells and/or cell features. In some instances, cell features include cell surface features. Analytes may include, but are not limited to, a protein, a receptor, an antigen, a surface protein, a transmembrane protein, a cluster of differentiation protein, a protein channel, a protein pump, a carrier protein, a phospholipid, a glycoprotein, a glycolipid, a cell-cell interaction protein complex, an antigen-presenting complex, a major histocompatibility complex, an engineered T-cell receptor, a T-cell receptor, a B-cell receptor, a chimeric antigen receptor, a gap junction, an adherens junction, or any combination thereof. In some instances, cell features may include intracellular analytes, such as proteins, protein modifications (e.g., phosphorylation status or other post-translational modifications), nuclear proteins, nuclear membrane proteins, or any combination thereof.
- In some embodiments, an analyte binding moiety may include any molecule or moiety capable of binding to an analyte (e.g., a biological analyte, e.g., a macromolecular constituent). A labelling agent may include, but is not limited to, a protein, a peptide, an antibody (or an epitope binding fragment thereof), a lipophilic moiety (such as cholesterol), a cell surface receptor binding molecule, a receptor ligand, a small molecule, a bi-specific antibody, a bi-specific T-cell engager, a T-cell receptor engager, a B-cell receptor engager, a pro-body, an aptamer, a monobody, an affimer, a darpin, and a protein scaffold, or any combination thereof. The labelling agents can include (e.g., are attached to) a reporter oligonucleotide that is indicative of the cell surface feature to which the binding group binds. For example, the reporter oligonucleotide may comprise a barcode sequence that permits identification of the labelling agent. For example, a labelling agent that is specific to one type of cell feature (e.g., a first cell surface feature) may have coupled thereto a first reporter oligonucleotide, while a labelling agent that is specific to a different cell feature (e.g., a second cell surface feature) may have a different reporter oligonucleotide coupled thereto. For a description of exemplary labelling agents, reporter oligonucleotides, and methods of use, see, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 10,550,429; U.S. Pat. Pub. 20190177800; and U.S. Pat. Pub. 20190367969, which are each incorporated by reference herein in their entirety.
- In some embodiments, an analyte binding moiety comprises one or more antibodies or antigen binding fragments thereof. The antibodies or antigen binding fragments including the analyte binding moiety can specifically bind to a target analyte. In some embodiments, the analyte is a protein (e.g., a protein on a surface of the biological sample (e.g., a cell) or an intracellular protein). In some embodiments, a plurality of analyte labelling agents comprising a plurality of analyte binding moieties bind a plurality of analytes present in a biological sample. In some embodiments, the plurality of analytes comprises a single species of analyte (e.g., a single species of polypeptide). In some embodiments in which the plurality of analytes comprises a single species of analyte, the analyte binding moieties of the plurality of analyte labelling agents are the same. In some embodiments in which the plurality of analytes comprises a single species of analyte, the analyte binding moieties of the plurality of analyte labelling agents are the different (e.g., members of the plurality of analyte labelling agents can have two or more species of analyte binding moieties, wherein each of the two or more species of analyte binding moieties binds a single species of analyte, e.g., at different binding sites). In some embodiments, the plurality of analytes comprises multiple different species of analyte (e.g., multiple different species of polypeptides).
- In other instances, e.g., to facilitate sample multiplexing, a labelling agent that is specific to a particular cell feature may have a first plurality of the labelling agent (e.g., an antibody or lipophilic moiety) coupled to a first reporter oligonucleotide and a second plurality of the labelling agent coupled to a second reporter oligonucleotide.
- In some aspects, these reporter oligonucleotides may comprise nucleic acid barcode sequences that permit identification of the labelling agent which the reporter oligonucleotide is coupled to. The selection of oligonucleotides as the reporter may provide advantages of being able to generate significant diversity in terms of sequence, while also being readily attachable to most biomolecules, e.g., antibodies, etc., as well as being readily detected.
- Attachment (coupling) of the reporter oligonucleotides to the labelling agents may be achieved through any of a variety of direct or indirect, covalent or non-covalent associations or attachments. For example, oligonucleotides may be covalently attached to a portion of a labelling agent (such a protein, e.g., an antibody or antibody fragment) using chemical conjugation techniques (e.g., Lightning-Link® antibody labelling kits available from Innova Biosciences), as well as other non-covalent attachment mechanisms, e.g., using biotinylated antibodies and oligonucleotides (or beads that include one or more biotinylated linker, coupled to oligonucleotides) with an avidin or streptavidin linker. Antibody and oligonucleotide biotinylation techniques are available. See, e.g., Fang, et al., “Fluoride-Cleavable Biotinylation Phosphoramidite for 5′-end-Labelling and Affinity Purification of Synthetic Oligonucleotides,” Nucleic Acids Res. Jan. 15, 2003; 31(2):708-715, which is entirely incorporated herein by reference for all purposes. Likewise, protein and peptide biotinylation techniques have been developed and are readily available. See, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 6,265,552, which is entirely incorporated herein by reference for all purposes. Furthermore, click reaction chemistry may be used to couple reporter oligonucleotides to labelling agents. Commercially available kits, such as those from Thunderlink and Abcam, and techniques common in the art may be used to couple reporter oligonucleotides to labelling agents as appropriate. In another example, a labelling agent is indirectly (e.g., via hybridization) coupled to a reporter oligonucleotide comprising a barcode sequence that identifies the label agent. For instance, the labelling agent may be directly coupled (e.g., covalently bound) to a hybridization oligonucleotide that comprises a sequence that hybridizes with a sequence of the reporter oligonucleotide. Hybridization of the hybridization oligonucleotide to the reporter oligonucleotide couples the labelling agent to the reporter oligonucleotide. In some embodiments, the reporter oligonucleotides are releasable from the labelling agent, such as upon application of a stimulus. For example, the reporter oligonucleotide may be attached to the labelling agent through a labile bond (e.g., chemically labile, photolabile, thermally labile, etc.) as generally described for releasing molecules from supports elsewhere herein.
- In some cases, the labelling agent can comprise a reporter oligonucleotide and a label. A label can be fluorophore, a radioisotope, a molecule capable of a colorimetric reaction, a magnetic particle, or any other suitable molecule or compound capable of detection. The label can be conjugated to a labelling agent (or reporter oligonucleotide) either directly or indirectly (e.g., the label can be conjugated to a molecule that can bind to the labelling agent or reporter oligonucleotide). In some cases, a label is conjugated to a first oligonucleotide that is complementary (e.g., hybridizes) to a sequence of the reporter oligonucleotide.
- In some embodiments, multiple different species of analytes (e.g., polypeptides) from the biological sample can be subsequently associated with the one or more physical properties of the biological sample. For example, the multiple different species of analytes can be associated with locations of the analytes in the biological sample. Such information (e.g., proteomic information when the analyte binding moiety(ies) recognizes a polypeptide(s)) can be used in association with other spatial information (e.g., genetic information from the biological sample, such as DNA sequence information, transcriptome information (e.g., sequences of transcripts), or both). For example, a cell surface protein of a cell can be associated with one or more physical properties of the cell (e.g., a shape, size, activity, or a type of the cell). The one or more physical properties can be characterized by imaging the cell. The cell can be bound by an analyte labelling agent comprising an analyte binding moiety that binds to the cell surface protein and an analyte binding moiety barcode that identifies that analyte binding moiety. Results of protein analysis in a sample (e.g., a tissue sample or a cell) can be associated with DNA and/or RNA analysis in the sample.
- a. Hybridization
- In some embodiments, the labelling agents (e.g., probes or probes sets) described herein can be used to detect an endogenous analyte, a product of an endogenous analyte and/or a labelling agent is a hybridization product comprising the pairing of substantially complementary or complementary nucleic acid sequences within two different molecules, one of which is the endogenous analyte or the labelling agent (e.g., reporter oligonucleotide attached thereto). The other molecule can be another endogenous molecule or an exogenous molecule such as a probe. Pairing can be achieved by any process in which a nucleic acid sequence joins with a substantially or fully complementary sequence through base pairing to form a hybridization complex. For purposes of hybridization, two nucleic acid sequences are “substantially complementary” if at least 60% (e.g., at least 70%, at least 80%, or at least 90%) of their individual bases are complementary to one another.
- Various probes and probe sets can be hybridized to an endogenous analyte and/or a labelling agent and each probe may comprise one or more barcode sequences. In some instances, various probes and probe sets can be used to generate a product comprising a target sequence that can be hybridized by one or more detectable probes. In some instances, a probe or probe set disclosed herein is a circularizable probe or probe set comprising a barcode region comprising one or more barcode sequences. Exemplary barcoded probes or probe sets may be based on a padlock probe, a gapped padlock probe, a SNAIL (Splint Nucleotide Assisted Intramolecular Ligation) probe set, a PLAYR (Proximity Ligation Assay for RNA) probe set, a PLISH (Proximity Ligation in situ Hybridization) probe set, and RNA-templated ligation probes. The specific probe or probe set design can vary.
- b. Ligation
- In some embodiments, a product of an endogenous analyte and/or a labelling agent is a ligation product that may comprise a target sequence that can be hybridized by one or more probes described herein. In some embodiments, the ligation product is formed between two or more endogenous analytes. In some embodiments, the ligation product is formed between an endogenous analyte and a labelling agent. In some embodiments, the ligation product is formed between two or more labelling agent. In some embodiments, the ligation product is an intramolecular ligation of an endogenous analyte. In some embodiments, the ligation product is an intramolecular ligation of a labelling agent or probe, for example, the circularization of a circularizable probe or probe set upon hybridization to a target sequence. The target sequence can be comprised in an endogenous analyte (e.g., nucleic acid such as genomic DNA or mRNA) or a product thereof (e.g., cDNA from a cellular mRNA transcript), or in a labelling agent (e.g., the reporter oligonucleotide) or a product thereof.
- In some embodiments, provided herein is a labelling agent comprising a probe or probe set capable of DNA-templated ligation, such as from a cDNA molecule. See, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 8,551,710, which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety. In some embodiments, provided herein is a probe or probe set capable of RNA-templated ligation. See, e.g., U.S. Pat. Pub. 2020/0224244 which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety. In some embodiments, the probe set is a SNAIL probe set. See, e.g., U.S. Pat. Pub. 20190055594, which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety.
- In some embodiments, provided herein is a multiplexed proximity ligation assay. See, e.g., U.S. Pat. Pub. 20140194311 which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety. In some embodiments, provided herein is a probe or probe set capable of proximity ligation, for instance a proximity ligation assay for RNA (e.g., PLAYR) probe set. See, e.g., U.S. Pat. Pub. 20160108458, which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety. In some embodiments, a circular probe can be indirectly hybridized to the target nucleic acid. In some embodiments, the circular construct is formed from a probe set capable of proximity ligation, for instance a proximity ligation in situ hybridization (PLISH) probe set. See, e.g., U.S. Pat. Pub. 2020/0224243 which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety.
- In some embodiments, a circular or circularizable probe or probe set may be used to analyze a reporter oligonucleotide, which may generated using proximity ligation or be subjected to proximity ligation. In some examples, the reporter oligonucleotide of a labelling agent that specifically recognizes a protein can be analyzed using in situ hybridization (e.g., sequential hybridization) and/or in situ sequencing (e.g., using circular or circularizable probes and rolling circle amplification of circular or circularized probes). Further, the reporter oligonucleotide of the labelling agent and/or a complement thereof and/or a product (e.g., a hybridization product, a ligation product, an extension product (e.g., by a DNA or RNA polymerase), a replication product, a transcription/reverse transcription product, and/or an amplification product) thereof can be recognized by another labelling agent and analyzed.
- In some embodiments, an analyte (a nucleic acid analyte or non-nucleic acid analyte) can be specifically bound by two labelling agents (e.g., antibodies) each of which is attached to a reporter oligonucleotide (e.g., DNA) that can participate in ligation, replication, and sequence decoding reactions, e.g., using a probe or probe set (e.g., a padlock probe, a SNAIL probe set, a circular probe, a gapped padlock probe, or a gapped padlock probe and a connector). In some embodiments, the probe set may comprise two or more probe oligonucleotides, each comprising a region that is complementary to each other. For example, a proximity ligation reaction can include reporter oligonucleotides attached to pairs of antibodies that can be joined by ligation if the antibodies have been brought in proximity to each other, e.g., by binding the same target protein (complex), and the DNA ligation products that form are then used to template PCR amplification, as described for example in Söderberg et al., Methods. (2008), 45(3): 227-32, the entire contents of which are incorporated herein by reference. In some embodiments, a proximity ligation reaction can include reporter oligonucleotides attached to antibodies that each bind to one member of a binding pair or complex, for example, for analyzing a binding between members of the binding pair or complex. For detection of analytes using oligonucleotides in proximity, see, e.g., U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2002/0051986, the entire contents of which are incorporated herein by reference. In some embodiments, two analytes in proximity can be specifically bound by two labelling agents (e.g., antibodies) each of which is attached to a reporter oligonucleotide (e.g., DNA) that can participate, when in proximity when bound to their respective targets, in ligation, replication, and/or sequence decoding reactions.
- In some embodiments, one or more reporter oligonucleotides (and optionally one or more other nucleic acid molecules such as a connector) aid in the ligation of the probe. Upon ligation, the probe may form a circularized probe. In some embodiments, one or more suitable probes can be used and ligated, wherein the one or more probes comprise a sequence that is complementary to the one or more reporter oligonucleotides (or portion thereof). The probe may comprise one or more barcode sequences. In some embodiments, the one or more reporter oligonucleotide may serve as a primer for rolling circle amplification (RCA) of the circularized probe. In some embodiments, a nucleic acid other than the one or more reporter oligonucleotide is used as a primer for rolling circle amplification (RCA) of the circularized probe. For example, a nucleic acid capable of hybridizing to the circularized probe at a sequence other than sequence(s) hybridizing to the one or more reporter oligonucleotide can be used as the primer for RCA. In other examples, the primer in a SNAIL probe set is used as the primer for RCA.
- In some embodiments, one or more analytes can be specifically bound by two primary antibodies, each of which is in turn recognized by a secondary antibody each attached to a reporter oligonucleotide (e.g., DNA). Each nucleic acid molecule can aid in the ligation of the probe to form a circularized probe. In some instances, the probe can comprise one or more barcode sequences. Further, the reporter oligonucleotide may serve as a primer for rolling circle amplification of the circularized probe. The nucleic acid molecules, circularized probes, and RCA products can be analyzed using any suitable method disclosed herein for in situ analysis.
- In some embodiments, the ligation involves chemical ligation. In some embodiments, the ligation involves template dependent ligation. In some embodiments, the ligation involves template independent ligation. In some embodiments, the ligation involves enzymatic ligation.
- In some embodiments, the enzymatic ligation involves use of a ligase. In some aspects, the ligase used herein comprises an enzyme that is commonly used to join polynucleotides together or to join the ends of a single polynucleotide. An RNA ligase, a DNA ligase, or another variety of ligase can be used to ligate two nucleotide sequences together. Ligases comprise ATP-dependent double-strand polynucleotide ligases, NAD-i-dependent double-strand DNA or RNA ligases and single-strand polynucleotide ligases, for example any of the ligases described in EC 6.5.1.1 (ATP-dependent ligases), EC 6.5.1.2 (NAD+-dependent ligases), EC 6.5.1.3 (RNA ligases). Specific examples of ligases comprise bacterial ligases such as E. coli DNA ligase, Tth DNA ligase, Thermococcus sp. (strain 9° N) DNA ligase (9° N™ DNA ligase, New England Biolabs), Taq DNA ligase, Ampligase™ (Epicentre Biotechnologies) and phage ligases such as T3 DNA ligase, T4 DNA ligase and T7 DNA ligase and mutants thereof. In some embodiments, the ligase is a T4 RNA ligase. In some embodiments, the ligase is a splintR ligase. In some embodiments, the ligase is a single stranded DNA ligase. In some embodiments, the ligase is a T4 DNA ligase. In some embodiments, the ligase is a ligase that has an DNA-splinted DNA ligase activity. In some embodiments, the ligase is a ligase that has an RNA-splinted DNA ligase activity.
- In some embodiments, the ligation herein is a direct ligation. In some embodiments, the ligation herein is an indirect ligation. “Direct ligation” means that the ends of the polynucleotides hybridize immediately adjacently to one another to form a substrate for a ligase enzyme resulting in their ligation to each other (intramolecular ligation). Alternatively, “indirect” means that the ends of the polynucleotides hybridize non-adjacently to one another, e.g., separated by one or more intervening nucleotides or “gaps”. In some embodiments, said ends are not ligated directly to each other, but instead occurs either via the intermediacy of one or more intervening (so-called “gap” or “gap-filling” (oligo)nucleotides) or by the extension of the 3′ end of a probe to “fill” the “gap” corresponding to said intervening nucleotides (intermolecular ligation). In some cases, the gap of one or more nucleotides between the hybridized ends of the polynucleotides may be “filled” by one or more “gap” (oligo)nucleotide(s) which are complementary to a splint, padlock probe, or target nucleic acid. The gap may be a gap of 1 to 60 nucleotides or a gap of 1 to 40 nucleotides or a gap of 3 to 40 nucleotides. In specific embodiments, the gap may be a gap of about 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 or 10 or more nucleotides, of any integer (or range of integers) of nucleotides in between the indicated values. In some embodiments, the gap between said terminal regions may be filled by a gap oligonucleotide or by extending the 3′ end of a polynucleotide. In some cases, ligation involves ligating the ends of the probe to at least one gap (oligo)nucleotide, such that the gap (oligo)nucleotide becomes incorporated into the resulting polynucleotide. In some embodiments, the ligation herein is preceded by gap filling. In other embodiments, the ligation herein does not require gap filling.
- In some embodiments, ligation of the polynucleotides produces polynucleotides with melting temperature higher than that of unligated polynucleotides. Thus, in some aspects, ligation stabilizes the hybridization complex containing the ligated polynucleotides prior to subsequent steps, comprising amplification and detection.
- In some aspects, a high fidelity ligase, such as a thermostable DNA ligase (e.g., a Taq DNA ligase), is used. Thermostable DNA ligases are active at elevated temperatures, allowing further discrimination by incubating the ligation at a temperature near the melting temperature (Tm) of the DNA strands. This selectively reduces the concentration of annealed mismatched substrates (expected to have a slightly lower Tm around the mismatch) over annealed fully base-paired substrates. Thus, high-fidelity ligation can be achieved through a combination of the intrinsic selectivity of the ligase active site and balanced conditions to reduce the incidence of annealed mismatched dsDNA.
- In some embodiments, the ligation herein is a proximity ligation of ligating two (or more) nucleic acid sequences that are in proximity with each other, e.g., through enzymatic means (e.g., a ligase). In some embodiments, proximity ligation can include a “gap-filling” step that involves incorporation of one or more nucleic acids by a polymerase, based on the nucleic acid sequence of a template nucleic acid molecule, spanning a distance between the two nucleic acid molecules of interest (see, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 7,264,929, the entire contents of which are incorporated herein by reference). A wide variety of different methods can be used for proximity ligating nucleic acid molecules, including (but not limited to) “sticky-end” and “blunt-end” ligations. Additionally, single-stranded ligation can be used to perform proximity ligation on a single-stranded nucleic acid molecule. Sticky-end proximity ligations involve the hybridization of complementary single-stranded sequences between the two nucleic acid molecules to be joined, prior to the ligation event itself. Blunt-end proximity ligations generally do not include hybridization of complementary regions from each nucleic acid molecule because both nucleic acid molecules lack a single-stranded overhang at the site of ligation.
- c. Primer Extension
- In some embodiments, a primer extension product of an analyte, a labelling agent, a probe or probe set bound to the analyte (e.g., bound to genomic DNA, mRNA, or cDNA), or a probe or probe set bound to the labelling agent (e.g., bound to one or more reporter oligonucleotides from the same or different labelling agents). Any of such products of extension may comprise a target sequence that can be hybridized by the plurality of probes or probe sets described herein.
- In some embodiments, the plurality of probes or probe sets comprises a primer. A primer is generally a single-stranded nucleic acid sequence having a 3′ end that can be used as a substrate for a nucleic acid polymerase in a nucleic acid extension reaction. RNA primers are formed of RNA nucleotides, and are used in RNA synthesis, while DNA primers are formed of DNA nucleotides and used in DNA synthesis. Primers can also include both RNA nucleotides and DNA nucleotides (e.g., in a random or designed pattern). Primers can also include other natural or synthetic nucleotides described herein that can have additional functionality. In some examples, DNA primers can be used to prime RNA synthesis and vice versa (e.g., RNA primers can be used to prime DNA synthesis). Primers can vary in length. For example, primers can be about 6 bases to about 120 bases. For example, primers can include up to about 25 bases. A primer, may in some cases, refer to a primer binding sequence. A primer extension reaction generally refers to any method where two nucleic acid sequences become linked (e.g., hybridized) by an overlap of their respective terminal complementary nucleic acid sequences (e.g., for example, 3′ termini). Such linking can be followed by nucleic acid extension (e.g., an enzymatic extension) of one, or both termini using the other nucleic acid sequence as a template for extension. Enzymatic extension can be performed by an enzyme including, but not limited to, a polymerase and/or a reverse transcriptase.
- In some embodiments, a product of an endogenous analyte and/or a labelling agent is an amplification product of one or more polynucleotides, for instance, a circular probe or circularizable probe or probe set. In some embodiments, the amplifying is achieved by performing rolling circle amplification (RCA). In other embodiments, a primer that hybridizes to the circular probe or circularized probe is added and used as such for amplification. In some embodiments, the RCA comprises a linear RCA, a branched RCA, a dendritic RCA, or any combination thereof.
- In some embodiments, the amplification is performed at a temperature between or between about 20° C. and about 60° C. In some embodiments, the amplification is performed at a temperature between or between about 30° C. and about 40° C. In some aspects, the amplification step, such as the rolling circle amplification (RCA) is performed at a temperature between at or about 25° C. and at or about 50° C., such as at or about 25° C., 27° C., 29° C., 31° C., 33° C., 35° C., 37° C., 39° C., 41° C., 43° C., 45° C., 47° C., or 49° C.
- In some embodiments, upon addition of a DNA polymerase in the presence of appropriate dNTP precursors and other cofactors, a primer is elongated to produce multiple copies of the circular template. This amplification step can utilize isothermal amplification or non-isothermal amplification. In some embodiments, after the formation of the hybridization complex and association of the amplification probe, the hybridization complex is rolling-circle amplified to generate a cDNA nanoball (e.g., amplicon) containing multiple copies of the cDNA. Techniques for rolling circle amplification (RCA) include linear RCA, a branched RCA, a dendritic RCA, or any combination thereof. See, e.g., Baner et a1, Nucleic Acids Research, 26:5073-5078, 1998; Lizardi et a1, Nature Genetics 19:226, 1998; Mohsen et al., Acc Chem Res. 2016 Nov. 15; 49(11): 2540-2550; Schweitzer et a1. Proc. Natl Acad. Sci. USA 97(18):10113-9, 2000; Faruqi et a1, BMC Genomics 2:4, 2000; Nallur et a1, Nucl. Acids Res. 29:e118, 2001; Dean et a1. Genome Res. 11:1095-1099, 2001; Schweitzer et a1, Nature Biotech. 20:359-365, 2002; U.S. Pat. Nos. 6,054,274, 6,291,187, 6,323,009, 6,344,329 and 6,368,801, all of which are incorporated by reference. Exemplary polymerases for use in RCA comprise DNA polymerase such phi29 (φ29) polymerase, Klenow fragment, Bacillus stearothermophilus DNA polymerase (BST), T4 DNA polymerase, T7 DNA polymerase, or DNA polymerase I. In some aspects, DNA polymerases that have been engineered or mutated to have desirable characteristics can be employed. In some embodiments, the polymerase is phi29 DNA polymerase.
- In some aspects, during the amplification step, modified nucleotides can be added to the reaction to incorporate the modified nucleotides in the amplification product (e.g., nanoball). Exemplary of the modified nucleotides comprise amine-modified nucleotides. In some aspects of the methods, for example, for anchoring or cross-linking of the generated amplification product (e.g., nanoball) to a scaffold, to cellular structures and/or to other amplification products (e.g., other nanoballs). In some aspects, the amplification products comprises a modified nucleotide, such as an amine-modified nucleotide. In some embodiments, the amine-modified nucleotide comprises an acrylic acid N-hydroxysuccinimide moiety modification. Examples of other amine-modified nucleotides comprise, but are not limited to, a 5-Aminoallyl-dUTP moiety modification, a 5-Propargylamino-dCTP moiety modification, a N6-6-Aminohexyl-dATP moiety modification, or a 7-Deaza-7-Propargylamino-dATP moiety modification.
- In some aspects, the polynucleotides and/or amplification product (e.g., amplicon) can be anchored to a polymer matrix. For example, the polymer matrix can be a hydrogel. In some embodiments, one or more of the polynucleotide probe(s) can be modified to contain functional groups that can be used as an anchoring site to attach the polynucleotide probes and/or amplification product to a polymer matrix. Exemplary modification and polymer matrix that can be employed in accordance with the provided embodiments comprise those described in, for example, US 2016/0024555, US 2018/0251833, US 2017/0219465, U.S. Pat. Nos. 10,138,509, 10,494,662, 11,078,520, 11,299,767, 10,266,888, 11,118,220, US 2021/0363579, US 2021/0324450, and US 2021/0215581, all of which are herein incorporated by reference in their entireties. In some examples, the scaffold also contains modifications or functional groups that can react with or incorporate the modifications or functional groups of the probe set or amplification product. In some examples, the scaffold can comprise oligonucleotides, polymers or chemical groups, to provide a matrix and/or support structures.
- The amplification products may be immobilized within the matrix generally at the location of the nucleic acid being amplified, thereby creating a localized colony of amplicons. The amplification products may be immobilized within the matrix by steric factors. The amplification products may also be immobilized within the matrix by covalent or noncovalent bonding. In this manner, the amplification products may be considered to be attached to the matrix. By being immobilized to the matrix, such as by covalent bonding or cross-linking, the size and spatial relationship of the original amplicons is maintained. By being immobilized to the matrix, such as by covalent bonding or cross-linking, the amplification products are resistant to movement or unraveling under mechanical stress.
- In some aspects, the amplification products are copolymerized and/or covalently attached to the surrounding matrix thereby preserving their spatial relationship and any information inherent thereto. For example, if the amplification products are those generated from DNA or RNA within a cell embedded in the matrix, the amplification products can also be functionalized to form covalent attachment to the matrix preserving their spatial information within the cell thereby providing a subcellular localization distribution pattern. In some embodiments, the provided methods involve embedding the one or more polynucleotide probe sets and/or the amplification products in the presence of hydrogel subunits to form one or more hydrogel-embedded amplification products. In some embodiments, the hydrogel-tissue chemistry described comprises covalently attaching nucleic acids to in situ synthesized hydrogel for tissue clearing, enzyme diffusion, and multiple-cycle sequencing while an existing hydrogel-tissue chemistry method cannot. In some embodiments, to enable amplification product embedding in the tissue-hydrogel setting, amine-modified nucleotides are comprised in the amplification step (e.g., RCA), functionalized with an acrylamide moiety using acrylic acid N-hydroxysuccinimide esters, and copolymerized with acrylamide monomers to form a hydrogel.
- In some embodiments, the RCA template may comprise the target analyte, or a part thereof, where the target analyte is a nucleic acid, or it may be provided or generated as a proxy, or a marker, for the analyte. As noted above, the detection of numerous different analytes may use a RCA-based detection system, e.g., where the signal is provided by generating a target sequence from a circular RCA template which is provided or generated in the assay, and the target sequence is detected to detect the corresponding analyte. The target sequence may thus be regarded as a reporter which is detected to detect the target analyte. However, the RCA template may also be regarded as a reporter for the target analyte; the target sequence is generated based on the RCA template, and comprises complementary copies of the RCA template. The RCA template determines the signal which is detected, and is thus indicative of the target analyte. As will be described in more detail below, the RCA template may be a probe, or a part or component of a probe, or may be generated from a probe, or it may be a component of a detection assay (e.g. a reagent in a detection assay), which is used as a reporter for the assay, or a part of a reporter, or signal-generation system. The RCA template used to generate the target sequence may thus be a circular (e.g. circularized) reporter nucleic acid molecule, namely from any RCA-based detection assay which uses or generates a circular nucleic acid molecule as a reporter for the assay. Since the RCA template generates the target sequence reporter, it may be viewed as part of the reporter system for the assay.
- In some embodiments, a product herein comprises a molecule or a complex generated in a series of reactions, e.g., hybridization, ligation, extension, replication, transcription/reverse transcription, and/or amplification (e.g., rolling circle amplification), in any suitable combination. For example, a product comprising a target sequence for a target-binding region in a probe may be a hybridization complex formed of a cellular nucleic acid in a sample and an exogenously added nucleic acid probe or a product generated therefrom. The exogenously added nucleic acid probe (e.g., plurality of probes or probe sets) may comprise an overhang that does not hybridize to the cellular nucleic acid but hybridizes to another probe (e.g., an intermediate probe).
- In some embodiments, the labelling agents may bind or hybridize to a target. In some instances, a target comprises a target sequence for a probe or probe set. In some instances, the plurality of probes or probe sets may be used to generate a product comprising signal amplification components. In some instances, the amplification comprises one or more probe hybridizations and generation of amplified signals associated with the labelling agents (e.g., probes). Exemplary signal amplification methods include targeted assembly of branched structures (e.g., bDNA). In some instances, detection of nucleic acids sequences in situ includes combination of the sequential decoding methods described herein with an assembly for branched signal amplification using the nucleic acid probes provided herein. In some instances, the assembly complex comprises an amplifier hybridized directly or indirectly (via one or more oligonucleotides) to a sequence of a cellular nucleic acid.
- After contacting the biological sample with a plurality of labelling agents (e.g., probes or probe sets), the probes may be directly detected by determining detectable labels (if present), and/or detected by using one or more other probes that bind directly or indirectly to the plurality of probes or probe sets or products thereof. The one or more other probes may comprise a detectable label. For instance, a primary nucleic acid probe can bind to a target nucleic acid in the sample, and a secondary nucleic acid probe can be introduced to bind to the primary nucleic acid probe, where the secondary nucleic acid probe or a product thereof can then be detected using detectable probes (e.g., detectably labeled probes). Higher order probes that directly or indirectly bind to the secondary nucleic acid probe or product thereof may also be used, and the higher order probes or products thereof can then be detected using detectably labeled probes.
- In some instances, a secondary nucleic acid probe binds to a primary nucleic acid probe directly hybridized to the target nucleic acid. A secondary nucleic acid probe (e.g., a first detectable probe or a second detectable probe disclosed herein) may contain a recognition sequence able to bind to or hybridize with a primary nucleic acid probe (e.g., probes or probe sets disclosed herein) or a product thereof (e.g., an RCA product), e.g., at a barcode sequence or portion(s) thereof of the probes or probe sets or products thereof. In some embodiments, a secondary nucleic acid probe may bind to a combination of barcode sequences (which may be continuous or spaced from one another) in the probes or probe sets, a product thereof. In some embodiments, the binding is specific, or the binding may be such that a recognition sequence preferentially binds to or hybridizes with only one of the barcode sequences or complements thereof that are present. The secondary nucleic acid probe may also contain one or more detectable labels. If more than one secondary nucleic acid probe is used, the detectable labels may be the same or different.
- The recognition sequences may be of any length, and multiple recognition sequences in the same or different secondary nucleic acid probes may be of the same or different lengths. If more than one recognition sequence is used, the recognition sequences may independently have the same or different lengths. For instance, the recognition sequence may be at least 4, at least 5, least 6, least 7, least 8, least 9, at least 10, least 11, least 12, least 13, least 14, at least 15, least 16, least 17, least 18, least 19, at least 20, at least 25, at least 30, at least 35, at least 40, or at least 50 nucleotides in length. In some embodiments, the recognition sequence may be no more than 48, no more than 40, no more than 32, no more than 24, no more than 16, no more than 12, no more than 10, no more than 8, or no more than 6 nucleotides in length. Combinations of any of these are also possible, e.g., the recognition sequence may have a length of between 5 and 8, between 6 and 12, or between 7 and 15 nucleotides, etc. In some embodiments, the recognition sequence is of the same length as a barcode sequence or complement thereof of a primary nucleic acid probe or a product thereof. In some embodiments, the recognition sequence may be at least 50%, at least 60%, at least 70%, at least 75%, at least 80%, at least 85%, at least 90%, at least 92%, at least 94%, at least 95%, at least 96%, at least 97%, at least 98%, at least 99%, or at least 100% complementary to the barcode sequence or complement thereof.
- In some embodiments, the probes or probe sets, or an intermediate probe, may also comprise 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15 or more, 20 or more, 32 or more, 40 or more, or 50 or more barcode sequences. As an illustrative example, a first probe may contain a first target-binding sequence, a first barcode sequence, and a second barcode sequence, while a second, different probe may contain a second target-binding sequence (that is different from the first target-binding sequence in the first probe), the same first barcode sequence as in the first probe, but a third barcode sequence instead of the second barcode sequence. Such probes may thereby be distinguished by determining the various barcode sequence combinations present or associated with a given probe at a given location in a sample.
- In some embodiments, the nucleic acid probes disclosed herein may be made using only 2 or only 3 of the 4 bases, such as leaving out all the “G” s and/or leaving out all of the “C” s within the probe. Sequences lacking either “G” s or “C” s may form very little secondary structure, and can contribute to more uniform, faster hybridization in certain embodiments.
- In some embodiments, a nucleic acid probe disclosed herein may contain a detectable label such as a fluorophore. In some embodiments, one or more probes of a plurality of nucleic acid probes used in an assay may lack a detectable label, while one or more other probes in the plurality each comprises a detectable label selected from a limited pool of distinct detectable labels (e.g., red, green, yellow, and blue fluorophores), and the absence of detectable label may be used as a separate “color.” As such, detectable labels are not required in all cases. In some embodiments, a primary nucleic acid probe disclosed herein lacks a detectable label. While a detectable label may be incorporated into an amplification product of a probe, such as via incorporation of a modified nucleotide into an RCA product of a circularized probe, the amplification product itself in some embodiments is not detectably labeled. In some embodiments, a probe that binds to the primary nucleic acid probe or a product thereof (e.g., a secondary nucleic acid probe that binds to a barcode sequence or complement thereof in the primary nucleic acid probe or product thereof) comprises a detectable label and may be used to detect the primary nucleic acid probe or product thereof. In some embodiments, a secondary nucleic acid probe disclosed herein lacks a detectable label, and a detectably labeled probe that binds to the secondary nucleic acid probe or a product thereof (e.g., at a barcode sequence or complement thereof in the secondary nucleic acid probe or product thereof) can be used to detect the second nucleic acid probe or product thereof. In some embodiments, signals associated with the detectably labeled probes (e.g., the first detectable probe which is detectably labelled, the second detectable probe which is detectably labelled, a detectably labeled probe that binds to the first detectable probe which itself is not detectably labelled, or a detectably labeled probe that binds to the second detectable probe which itself is not detectably labelled) can be used to detect one or more barcode sequences in the secondary probe and/or one or more barcode sequences in the primary probe, e.g., by using sequential hybridization of detectably labeled probes, sequencing-by-ligation, and/or sequencing-by-hybridization. In some embodiments, the barcode sequences (e.g., in the secondary probe and/or in the primary probe) are used to combinatorially encode a plurality of analytes of interest. As such, signals associated with the detectably labeled probes at particular locations in a biological sample can be used to generate distinct signal signatures that each corresponds to an analyte in the sample, thereby identifying the analytes at the particular locations, e.g., for in situ spatial analysis of the sample.
- In some embodiments, probes or probe sets described herein comprises one or more other components, such as one or more primer binding sequences (e.g., to allow for enzymatic amplification of probes), enzyme recognition sequences (e.g., for endonuclease cleavage), or the like. The components of the nucleic acid probe may be arranged in any suitable order.
- In some aspects, targets (e.g., analytes) are targeted by labelling agents (e.g., probes or probe sets) described herein, which are barcoded through the incorporation of one or more barcode sequences (e.g., sequences that can be detected or otherwise “read”) and binds the targeted analyte. In some aspects, the probes or probe sets described herein are in turn targeted by secondary probes e.g., intermediate probes, which are also barcoded through the incorporation of one or more barcode sequences that are separate from a recognition sequence in a secondary probe that directly or indirectly binds the probes or probe sets described herein or a product thereof. In some embodiments, a secondary probe may bind to a barcode sequence in the primary probe. In some aspects, tertiary probes and optionally even higher order probes may be used to target the secondary probes, e.g., at a barcode sequence or complement thereof in a secondary probe or product thereof. In some embodiments, the tertiary probes and/or even higher order probes may comprise one or more barcode sequences and/or one or more detectable labels. In some embodiments, a tertiary probe is a detectably labeled probe that hybridizes to a barcode sequence (or complement thereof) of a secondary probe (or product thereof). In some embodiments, through the detection of signals associated with detectably labeled probes in a sample, the location of one or more analytes in the sample and the identity of the analyte(s) can be determined. In some embodiments, the presence/absence, absolute or relative abundance, an amount, a level, a concentration, an activity, and/or a relation with another analyte of a particular analyte can be analyzed in situ in the sample.
- In some embodiments, provided herein are labelling agents (e.g., probes or probe sets), and assay methods to couple target nucleic acid detection, signal amplification (e.g., through nucleic acid amplification such as RCA, and/or hybridization of a plurality of detectably labeled probes, such as in hybridization chain reactions and the like, e.g., described in Section III-C), and decoding of the barcodes.
- In some aspects, probes or probe sets described herein, or intermediate probes (e.g., a secondary probe, and/or a higher order probe) can be selected from the group consisting of a circular probe, a circularizable probe, and a linear probe. In some embodiments, a circular probe can be one that is pre-circularized prior to hybridization to a target nucleic acid and/or one or more other probes. In some embodiments, a circularizable probe can be one that can be circularized upon hybridization to a target nucleic acid and/or one or more other probes such as a splint. In some embodiments, a linear probe can be one that comprises a target recognition sequence and a sequence that does not hybridize to a target nucleic acid, such as a 5′ overhang, a 3′ overhang, and/or a linker or spacer (which may comprise a nucleic acid sequence or a non-nucleic acid moiety). In some embodiments, the sequence (e.g., the 5′ overhang, 3′ overhang, and/or linker or spacer) is non-hybridizing to the target nucleic acid but may hybridize to one another and/or one or more other probes, such as detectably labeled probes.
- Specific probe designs can vary depending on the application. For instance, probes or probe sets described herein (e.g., a primary probe,) or a secondary probe, and/or a higher order probe disclosed herein can comprise a circularizable probe that does not require gap filling to circularize upon hybridization to a template (e.g., a target nucleic acid and/or a probe such as a splint), a gapped circularizable probe (e.g., one that requires gap filling to circularize upon hybridization to a template), an L-shaped probe (e.g., one that comprises a target recognition sequence and a 5′ or 3′ overhang upon hybridization to a target nucleic acid or a probe), a U-shaped probe (e.g., one that comprises a target recognition sequence, a 5′ overhang, and a 3′ overhang upon hybridization to a target nucleic acid or a probe), a V-shaped probe (e.g., one that comprises at least two target recognition sequences and a linker or spacer between the target recognition sequences upon hybridization to a target nucleic acid or a probe), a probe or probe set for proximity ligation (such as those described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 7,914,987 and 8,580,504 incorporated herein by reference in their entireties, and probes for Proximity Ligation Assay (PLA) for the simultaneous detection and quantification of nucleic acid molecules and protein-protein interactions), or any suitable combination thereof. In some embodiments, a primary probe, a secondary probe, and/or a higher order probe disclosed herein can comprise a probe that is ligated to itself or another probe using DNA-templated and/or RNA-templated ligation. In some embodiments, a primary probe, a secondary probe, and/or a higher order probe disclosed herein can be a DNA molecule and can comprise one or more other types of nucleotides, modified nucleotides, and/or nucleotide analogues, such as one or more ribonucleotides. In some embodiments, the ligation can be a DNA ligation on a DNA template. In some embodiments, the ligation can be a DNA ligation on an RNA template, and the probes can comprise RNA-templated ligation probes. In some embodiments, a primary probe, a secondary probe, and/or a higher order probe disclosed herein can comprise a padlock-like probe or probe set, such as one described in US 2019/0055594, US 2021/0164039, US 2016/0108458, or US 2020/0224243, each of which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety. Any suitable combination of the probe designs described herein can be used.
- In some embodiments, probes or probe sets described herein (e.g., a primary probe,) or a secondary probe, and/or a higher order probe disclosed herein can comprise two or more parts. In some cases, a probe can comprise one or more features of and/or be modified based on: a split FISH probe or probe set described in WO 2021/167526A1 or Goh et al., “Highly specific multiplexed RNA imaging in tissues with split-FISH,” Nat Methods 17(7):689-693 (2020), which are incorporated herein by reference in their entireties; a Z-probe or probe set, such as one described in U.S. Pat. No. 7,709,198 B2, U.S. Pat. No. 8,604,182 B2, U.S. Pat. No. 8,951,726 B2, U.S. Pat. No. 8,658,361 B2, or Tripathi et al., “Z Probe, An Efficient Tool for Characterizing Long Non-Coding RNA in FFPE Tissues,” Noncoding RNA 4(3):20 (2018), which are incorporated herein by reference in their entireties; an HCR initiator or amplifier, such as one described in U.S. Pat. No. 7,632,641 B2, US 2017/0009278 A1, U.S. Pat. No. 10,450,599 B2, Dirks and Pierce, “Triggered amplification by hybridization chain reaction,” PNAS 101(43):15275-15278 (2004), Chemeris et al., “Real-time hybridization chain reaction,” Dokl. Biochem 419:53-55 (2008), Niu et al., “Fluorescence detection for DNA using hybridization chain reaction with enzyme-amplification,” Chem Commun (Camb) 46(18):3089-91 (2010), Choi et al., “Programmable in situ amplification for multiplexed imaging of mRNA expression,” Nat Biotechnol 28(11):1208-12 (2010), Song et al., “Hybridization chain reaction-based aptameric system for the highly selective and sensitive detection of protein,” Analyst 137(6):1396-401 (2012), Choi et al., “Third-generation in situ hybridization chain reaction: multiplexed, quantitative, sensitive, versatile, robust,” Development 145(12): dev165753 (2018), or Tsuneoka and Funato, “Modified in situ Hybridization Chain Reaction Using Short Hairpin DNAs,” Front Mol Neurosci 13:75 (2020), which are incorporated herein by reference in their entireties; a PLAYR probe or probe set, such as one described in US 2016/0108458 A1 or Frei et al., “Highly multiplexed simultaneous detection of RNAs and proteins in single cells,” Nat Methods 13(3):269-75 (2016), which are incorporated herein by reference in their entireties; a PLISH probe or probe set, such as one described in US 2020/0224243 A1 or Nagendran et al., “Automated cell-type classification in intact tissues by single-cell molecular profiling,” eLife 7:e30510 (2018), which are incorporated herein by reference in their entireties; a RollFISH probe or probe set such as one described in Wu et al., “RollFISH achieves robust quantification of single-molecule RNA biomarkers in paraffin-embedded tumor tissue samples,” Commun Biol 1, 209 (2018), which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety; a MERFISH probe or probe set, such as one described in US 2022/0064697 A1 or Chen et al., “Spatially resolved, highly multiplexed RNA profiling in single cells,” Science 348(6233):aaa6090 (2015), which are incorporated herein by reference in their entireties; or a primer exchange reaction (PER) probe or probe set, such as one described in US 2019/0106733 A1, which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety.
- In some embodiments, probes or probe sets described herein comprise one or more features and/or is modified to allow for generation and detection of a first signal that does not comprise a nucleic acid amplification step (e.g., the first signal can be an smFISH signal). In some instances, the probes or probe sets described herein for each target comprises probes directly hybridize to multiple regions (e.g., sequences) of the same transcript. In some embodiments, the probes or probe sets described herein comprise a circular probe or circularizable probe or probe set comprises one or more features and/or is modified to allow for generation and detection of a second signal that comprises an amplification step (e.g., extension and/or amplification catalyzed by a polymerase).
- Any suitable circularizable probe or probe set may be used to generate the RCA template which is used to generate the RCA product. By “circularizable” is meant that the probe or reporter (the RCA template) is in the form of a linear molecule having ligatable ends which may circularized by ligating the ends together directly or indirectly, e.g. to each other, or to the respective ends of an intervening (“gap”) oligonucleotide or to an extended 3′ end of the circularizable RCA template. A circularizable template may also be provided in two or more parts, namely two or more molecules (e.g. oligonucleotides) which may be ligated together to form a circle. When said RCA template is circularizable it is circularized by ligation prior to RCA. Ligation may be templated using a ligation template. The circularizable RCA template (or template part or portion) may comprise at its respective 3′ and 5′ ends regions of complementarity to corresponding cognate complementary regions (or binding sites) in the ligation template, which may be adjacent where the ends are directly ligated to each other, or non-adjacent, with an intervening “gap” sequence, where indirect ligation is to take place.
- In some embodiments, probes or probe sets disclosed herein can be pre-assembled from multiple components, e.g., prior to contacting the probe with a target nucleic acid or a sample. In some embodiments, a nucleic acid probe disclosed herein can be assembled during and/or after contacting a target nucleic acid or a sample with multiple components. In some embodiments, a nucleic acid probe disclosed herein is assembled in situ in a sample. In some embodiments, the multiple components can be contacted with a target nucleic acid or a sample in any suitable order and any suitable combination. For instance, a first component and a second component can be contacted with a target nucleic acid, to allow binding between the components and/or binding between the first and/or second components with the target nucleic acid. Optionally a reaction involving either or both components and/or the target nucleic acid, between the components, and/or between either one or both components and the target nucleic acid can be performed, such as hybridization, ligation, primer extension and/or amplification, chemical or enzymatic cleavage, click chemistry, or any combination thereof. In some embodiments, a third component can be added prior to, during, or after the reaction. In some embodiments, a third component can be added prior to, during, or after contacting the sample with the first and/or second components. In some embodiments, the first, second, and third components can be contacted with the sample in any suitable combination, sequentially or simultaneously. In some embodiments, the nucleic acid probe can be assembled in situ in a stepwise manner, each step with the addition of one or more components, or in a dynamic process where all components are assembled together. One or more removing steps, e.g., by washing the sample such as under stringent conditions, may be performed at any point during the assembling process to remove or destabilize undesired intermediates and/or components at that point and increase the chance of accurate probe assembly and specific target binding of the assembled probe.
- In some aspects, the methods provided herein comprise performing rolling circle amplification of a circular probe or a circularized probe generated from a circularizable probe or probe set.
- In some embodiments, a probe disclosed herein can comprise a 5′ flap which may be recognized by a structure-specific cleavage enzyme, e.g. an enzyme capable of recognizing the junction between a single-stranded 5′ overhang and a DNA duplex, and cleaving the single-stranded overhang. It will be understood that the branched three-strand structure which is the substrate for the structure-specific cleavage enzyme may be formed by 5′ end of one probe part and the 3′ end of another probe part when both have hybridized to a target, as well as by the 5′ and 3′ ends of a one-part probe. Enzymes suitable for such cleavage include Flap endonucleases (FENS), which are a class of enzymes having endonucleolytic activity and being capable of catalyzing the hydrolytic cleavage of the phosphodiester bond at the junction of single- and double-stranded DNA. Thus, in some embodiment, cleavage of the additional sequence 5′ to the first target-specific binding site is performed by a structure-specific cleavage enzyme, e.g. a Flap endonuclease. Suitable Flap endonucleases are described in Ma et al. 2000. JBC 275, 24693-24700 and in US 2020/0224244 and may include P. furiosus (Pfu), A. fulgidus (Afu), M. jannaschii (Mja) or M. thermoautotrophicum (Mth). In other embodiments an enzyme capable of recognizing and degrading a single-stranded oligonucleotide having a free 5′ end may be used to cleave an additional sequence (5′ flap) from a structure as described above. Thus, an enzyme having 5′ nuclease activity may be used to cleave a 5′ additional sequence. Such 5′ nuclease activity may be 5′ exonuclease and/or 5′ endonuclease activity. A 5′ nuclease enzyme is capable of recognizing a free 5′ end of a single-stranded oligonucleotide and degrading said single-stranded oligonucleotide. A 5′ exonuclease degrades a single-stranded oligonucleotide having a free 5′ end by degrading the oligonucleotide into constituent mononucleotides from its 5′ end. A 5′ endonuclease activity may cleave the 5′ flap sequence internally at one or more nucleotides. Further, a 5′ nuclease activity may take place by the enzyme traversing the single-stranded oligonucleotide to a region of duplex once it has recognized the free 5′ end, and cleaving the single-stranded region into larger constituent nucleotides (e.g. dinucleotides or trinucleotides), or cleaving the entire 5′ single-stranded region, e.g. as described in Lyamichev et al. 1999. PNAS 96, 6143-6148 for Taq DNA polymerase and the 5′ nuclease thereof. Preferred enzymes having 5′ nuclease activity include Exonuclease VIII, or a native or recombinant DNA polymerase enzyme from Thermus aquaticus (Taq), Thermus thermophilus or Thermus flavus, or the nuclease domain therefrom.
- A target sequence for a probe disclosed herein may be comprised in any analyte (e.g., target) disclose herein, including an endogenous analyte (e.g., a viral or cellular nucleic acid), a labelling agent, or a product of an endogenous analyte and/or a labelling agent. In some embodiments, a target sequence for a probe disclosed herein comprises one or more ribonucleotides.
- In some aspects, one or more of the target sequences includes one or more barcode(s), e.g., at least two, three, four, five, six, seven, eight, nine, ten, or more barcodes. Barcodes can spatially-resolve molecular components found in biological samples, for example, within a cell or a tissue sample. A barcode can be attached to an analyte or to another moiety or structure in a reversible or irreversible manner. A barcode can be added to, for example, a fragment of a deoxyribonucleic acid (DNA) or ribonucleic acid (RNA) sample before or during sequencing of the sample. Barcodes can allow for identification and/or quantification of individual sequencing-reads (e.g., a barcode can be or can include a unique molecular identifier or “UMI”). In some aspects, a barcode comprises about 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, or more than 30 nucleotides.
- In some instances, a barcode may be a barcode region. In some embodiments, a barcode comprises two or more sub-barcodes that together function as a single barcode. For example, a polynucleotide barcode can include two or more polynucleotide sequences (e.g., sub-barcodes) that are separated by one or more non-barcode sequences. In some embodiments, the one or more barcode(s) can also provide a platform for targeting functionalities, such as oligonucleotides, oligonucleotide-antibody conjugates, oligonucleotide-streptavidin conjugates, modified oligonucleotides, affinity purification, detectable moieties, enzymes, enzymes for detection assays or other functionalities, and/or for detection and identification of the polynucleotide.
- In some embodiments, barcodes or complements thereof (e.g., barcode sequences or complements thereof comprised by the labelling agents (e.g., probes) disclosed herein or products thereof) can be analyzed (e.g., detected or sequenced) using any suitable method or technique, including those described herein, such as sequencing by synthesis (SBS), sequencing by ligation (SBL), or sequencing by hybridization (SBH). In some instances, barcoding schemes and/or barcode detection schemes as described in RNA sequential probing of targets (RNA SPOTs), single-molecule fluorescent in situ hybridization (smFISH), multiplexed error-robust fluorescence in situ hybridization (MERFISH) or sequential fluorescence in situ hybridization (seqFISH+) can be used. In any of the preceding implementations, the methods provided herein can include analyzing the barcodes by sequential hybridization and detection with a plurality of labelled probes (e.g., detection probes (e.g., detection oligos) or barcode probes). In some instances, the barcode detection steps can be performed as described in hybridization-based in situ sequencing (HybISS). In some instances, probes can be detected and analyzed (e.g., detected or sequenced) as performed in fluorescent in situ sequencing (FISSEQ), or as performed in the detection steps of the spatially-resolved transcript amplicon readout mapping (STARmap) method. In some instances, signals associated with an analyte can be detected as performed in sequential fluorescent in situ hybridization (seqFISH).
- In some embodiments, in a barcode sequencing method, barcode sequences are detected for identification of other molecules including nucleic acid molecules (DNA or RNA) longer than the barcode sequences themselves, as opposed to direct sequencing of the longer nucleic acid molecules. In some embodiments, a N-mer barcode sequence comprises 4N complexity given a sequencing read of N bases, and a much shorter sequencing read may be required for molecular identification compared to non-barcode sequencing methods such as direct sequencing. For example, 1024 molecular species may be identified using a 5-nucleotide barcode sequence (45=1024), whereas 8 nucleotide barcodes can be used to identify up to 65,536 molecular species, a number greater than the total number of distinct genes in the human genome. In some embodiments, the barcode sequences contained in the probes or RCA products are detected, rather than endogenous sequences, which can be an efficient read-out in terms of information per cycle of sequencing. Because the barcode sequences are pre-determined, they can also be designed to feature error detection and correction mechanisms, see, e.g., U.S. Pat. Pub. 20190055594 and U.S. Pat. Pub. 20210164039, which are hereby incorporated by reference in their entirety.
- d. Detection
- Provided herein are a plurality of detectable probes contacted with the biological sample for detecting a plurality of signals associated with a plurality of targets in the biological sample. In some embodiments, the detectable probes are detectably labeled or comprise a detectable label. The terms “label” and “detectable label” comprise a directly or indirectly detectable moiety that is associated with (e.g., conjugated to) a molecule to be detected, e.g., a nucleic acid molecule that comprises a detectable label. The detectable label can be directly detectable by itself (e.g., radioisotope labels or fluorescent labels) or, in the case of an enzymatic label, can be indirectly detectable, e.g., by catalyzing chemical alterations of a substrate compound or composition, which substrate compound or composition is directly detectable. Detectable labels can be suitable for small scale detection and/or suitable for high-throughput screening. As such, suitable detectable labels include, but are not limited to, radioisotopes (radioactive isotopes), fluorophores, fluorescers, chemiluminescent compounds, bioluminescent compounds, dyes, enzymes, enzyme substrates, enzyme cofactors, enzyme inhibitors, chromophores, dyes, metal ions, metal sols, ligands (e.g., biotin or haptens) and the like.
- In some aspects, the detectable label comprises a luminophore. In some embodiments, the luminophore is a fluorophore. The term “fluorophore” comprises a substance or a portion thereof that is capable of exhibiting fluorescence in the detectable range. Particular examples of labels that may be used in accordance with the provided embodiments comprise, but are not limited to phycoerythrin, Alexa dyes (AlexaFluors), fluorescein, YPet, CyPet, Cascade blue, allophycocyanin, Cy3, Cy5, Cy7, rhodamine, dansyl, umbelliferone, Texas red, luminol, acradimum esters, biotin, green fluorescent protein (GFP), enhanced green fluorescent protein (EGFP), yellow fluorescent protein (YFP), enhanced yellow fluorescent protein (EYFP), blue fluorescent protein (BFP), red fluorescent protein (RFP), firefly luciferase, Renilla luciferase, NADPH, beta-galactosidase, horseradish peroxidase, glucose oxidase, alkaline phosphatase, chloramphenical acetyl transferase, and urease.
- In some embodiments, the detectable label is a fluorophore. For example, the fluorophore can be from a group that includes: 7-AAD (7-Aminoactinomycin D), Acridine Orange (+DNA), Acridine Orange (+RNA), Alexa Fluor® 350, Alexa Fluor® 430, Alexa Fluor® 488, Alexa Fluor® 532, Alexa Fluor® 546, Alexa Fluor® 555, Alexa Fluor® 568, Alexa Fluor® 594, Alexa Fluor® 633, Alexa Fluor® 647, Alexa Fluor® 660, Alexa Fluor® 680, Alexa Fluor® 700, Alexa Fluor® 750, Allophycocyanin (APC), AMCA/AMCA-X, 7-Aminoactinomycin D (7-AAD), 7-Amino-4-methylcoumarin, 6-Aminoquinoline, Aniline Blue, ANS, APC-Cy7, ATTO-TAG™ CBQCA, ATTO-TAG™ FQ, Auramine O-Feulgen, BCECF (high pH), BFP (Blue Fluorescent Protein), BFP/GFP FRET, BOBO™-1/BO-PRO™-1, BOBO™-3/BO-PRO™-3, BODIPY® FL, BODIPY® TMR, BODIPY® TR-X, BODIPY® 530/550, BODIPY® 558/568, BODIPY® 564/570, BODIPY® 581/591, BODIPY® 630/650-X, BODIPY® 650-665-X, BTC, Calcein, Calcein Blue, Calcium Crimson™, Calcium Green-1™, Calcium Orange™, Calcofluor® White, 5-Carboxyfluoroscein (5-FAM), 5-Carboxynaphthofluoroscein, 6-Carboxyrhodamine 6G, 5-Carboxytetramethylrhodamine (5-TAMRA), Carboxy-X-rhodamine (5-ROX), Cascade Blue®, Cascade Yellow™, CCF2 (GeneBLAzer™), CFP (Cyan Fluorescent Protein), CFP/YFP FRET, Chromomycin A3, Cl-NERF (low pH), CPM, 6-CR 6G, CTC Formazan, Cy2®, Cy3®, Cy3.5®, Cy5®, Cy5.5®, Cy7®, Cychrome (PE-Cy5), Dansylamine, Dansyl cadaverine, Dansylchloride, DAPI, Dapoxyl, DCFH, DHR, DiA (4-Di-16-ASP), DiD (DilC18(5)), DIDS, Dil (DilC18(3)), DiO (DiOC18(3)), DiR (DilC18(7)), Di-4 ANEPPS, Di-8 ANEPPS, DM-NERF (4.5-6.5 pH), DsRed (Red Fluorescent Protein), EBFP, ECFP, EGFP, ELF®-97 alcohol, Eosin, Erythrosin, Ethidium bromide, Ethidium homodimer-1 (EthD-1), Europium (III) Chloride, 5-FAM (5-Carboxyfluorescein), Fast Blue, Fluorescein-dT phosphoramidite, FITC, Fluo-3, Fluo-4, FluorX®, Fluoro-Gold™ (high pH), Fluoro-Gold™ (low pH), Fluoro-Jade, FM® 1-43, Fura-2 (high calcium), Fura-2/BCECF, Fura Red™ (high calcium), Fura Red™/Fluo-3, GeneBLAzer™ (CCF2), GFP Red Shifted (rsGFP), GFP Wild Type, GFP/BFP FRET, GFP/DsRed FRET, Hoechst 33342 & 33258, 7-Hydroxy-4-methylcoumarin (pH 9), 1,5 IAEDANS, Indo-1 (high calcium), Indo-1 (low calcium), Indodicarbocyanine, Indotricarbocyanine, JC-1,6-JOE, JOJO™-1/JO-PRO™-1, LDS 751 (+DNA), LDS 751 (+RNA), LOLO™-1/LO-PRO™-1, Lucifer Yellow, LysoSensor™ Blue (pH 5), LysoSensor™ Green (pH 5), LysoSensor™ Yellow/Blue (pH 4.2), LysoTracker® Green, LysoTracker® Red, LysoTracker® Yellow, Mag-Fura-2, Mag-Indo-1, Magnesium Green™, Marina Blue®, 4-Methylumbelliferone, Mithramycin, MitoTracker® Green, MitoTracker® Orange, MitoTracker® Red, NBD (amine), Nile Red, Oregon Green® 488, Oregon Green® 500, Oregon Green® 514, Pacific Blue, PBF1, PE (R-phycoerythrin), PE-Cy5, PE-Cy7, PE-Texas Red, PerCP (Peridinin chlorphyll protein), PerCP-Cy5.5 (TruRed), PharRed (APC-Cy7), C-phycocyanin, R-phycocyanin, R-phycoerythrin (PE), PI (Propidium Iodide), PKH26, PKH67, POPO™-1/PO-PRO™-1, POPO™-3/PO-PRO™-3, Propidium Iodide (PI), PyMPO, Pyrene, Pyronin Y, Quantam Red (PE-Cy5), Quinacrine Mustard, R670 (PE-Cy5), Red 613 (PE-Texas Red), Red Fluorescent Protein (DsRed), Resorufin, RH 414, Rhod-2, Rhodamine B, Rhodamine Green™, Rhodamine Red™, Rhodamine Phalloidin, Rhodamine 110, Rhodamine 123, 5-ROX (carboxy-X-rhodamine), S65A, S65C, S65L, S65T, SBFI, SITS, SNAFL®-1 (high pH), SNAFL®-2, SNARF®-1 (high pH), SNARF®-1 (low pH), Sodium Green™, SpectrumAqua®, SpectrumGreen® #1, SpectrumGreen® #2, SpectrumOrange®, SpectrumRed®, SYTO® 11, SYTO® 13, SYTO® 17, SYTO® 45, SYTOX® Blue, SYTOX® Green, SYTOX® Orange, 5-TAMRA (5-Carboxytetramethylrhodamine), Tetramethylrhodamine (TRITC), Texas Red®/Texas Red®-X, Texas Red®-X (NHS Ester), Thiadicarbocyanine, Thiazole Orange, TOTO®-1/TO-PRO®-1, TOTO®-3/TO-PRO®-3, TO-PRO®-5, Tri-color (PE-Cy5), TRITC (Tetramethylrhodamine), TruRed (PerCP-Cy5.5), WW 781, X-Rhodamine (XRITC), Y66F, Y66H, Y66W, YFP (Yellow Fluorescent Protein), YOYO®-1/YO-PRO®-1, YOYO®-3/YO-PRO®-3,6-FAM (Fluorescein), 6-FAM (NHS Ester), 6-FAM (Azide), HEX, TAMRA (NHS Ester), Yakima Yellow, MAX, TET, TEX615, ATTO 488, ATTO 532, ATTO 550, ATTO 565, ATTO Rhol01, ATTO 590, ATTO 633, ATTO 647N, TYE 563, TYE 665, TYE 705, 5′ IRDye® 700, 5′ IRDye® 800, 5′ IRDye® 800CW (NHS Ester), WellRED D4 Dye, WellRED D3 Dye, WellRED D2 Dye, Lightcycler® 640 (NHS Ester), and Dy 750 (NHS Ester).
- In some embodiments, the detectable label comprises an infrared fluorophore. An “infrared fluorophore” emits infrared light. In some embodiments, the infrared fluorophore has a longer excitation wavelength than a traditional fluorophore.
- Examples of detectable labels comprise, but are not limited to, various radioactive moieties, enzymes, prosthetic groups, fluorescent markers, luminescent markers, bioluminescent markers, metal particles, protein-protein binding pairs and protein-antibody binding pairs. Examples of fluorescent proteins comprise, but are not limited to, yellow fluorescent protein (YFP), green fluorescence protein (GFP), cyan fluorescence protein (CFP), umbelliferone, fluorescein, fluorescein isothiocyanate, rhodamine, dichlorotriazinylamine fluorescein, dansyl chloride and phycoerythrin.
- Examples of bioluminescent markers comprise, but are not limited to, luciferase (e.g., bacterial, firefly and click beetle), luciferin, aequorin and the like. Examples of enzyme systems having visually detectable signals comprise, but are not limited to, galactosidases, glucorimidases, phosphatases, peroxidases and cholinesterases. Identifiable markers also comprise radioactive compounds such as 125I, 35S, 14C, or 3H. Identifiable markers are commercially available from a variety of sources.
- Examples of fluorescent labels and nucleotides and/or polynucleotides conjugated to such fluorescent labels comprise those described in, for example, Hoagland, Handbook of Fluorescent Probes and Research Chemicals, Ninth Edition (Molecular Probes, Inc., Eugene, 2002); Keller and Manak, DNA Probes, 2nd Edition (Stockton Press, New York, 1993); Eckstein, editor, Oligonucleotides and Analogues: A Practical Approach (IRL Press, Oxford, 1991); and Wetmur, Critical Reviews in Biochemistry and Molecular Biology, 26:227-259 (1991). In some embodiments, exemplary techniques and methods methodologies applicable to the provided embodiments comprise those described in, for example, U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,757,141, 5,151,507 and 5,091,519. In some embodiments, one or more fluorescent dyes are used as labels for labeled target sequences, for example, as described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,188,934 (4,7-dichlorofluorescein dyes); U.S. Pat. No. 5,366,860 (spectrally resolvable rhodamine dyes); U.S. Pat. No. 5,847,162 (4,7-dichlororhodamine dyes); U.S. Pat. No. 4,318,846 (ether-substituted fluorescein dyes); U.S. Pat. No. 5,800,996 (energy transfer dyes); U.S. Pat. No. 5,066,580 (xanthine dyes); and U.S. Pat. No. 5,688,648 (energy transfer dyes). Labelling can also be carried out with quantum dots, as described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 6,322,901, 6,576,291, 6,423,551, 6,251,303, 6,319,426, 6,426,513, 6,444,143, 5,990,479, 6,207,392, US 2002/0045045 and US 2003/0017264. As used herein, the term “fluorescent label” comprises a signaling moiety that conveys information through the fluorescent absorption and/or emission properties of one or more molecules. Exemplary fluorescent properties comprise fluorescence intensity, fluorescence lifetime, emission spectrum characteristics and energy transfer.
- In some embodiments, one or more detectable labels can be attached to a labelling agent or nucleic acid probe disclosed herein. The one or more detectable labels can be incorporated during nucleic acid polymerization or amplification (e.g., Cy5®-labeled nucleotides, such as Cy5®-dCTP). Examples of commercially available fluorescent nucleotide analogues readily incorporated into nucleotide and/or polynucleotide sequences comprise, but are not limited to, Cy3-dCTP, Cy3-dUTP, Cy5-dCTP, Cy5-dUTP (Amersham Biosciences, Piscataway, N.J.), fluorescein-12-dUTP, tetramethylrhodamine-6-dUTP, TEXAS RED™-5-dUTP, CASCADE BLUE™-7-dUTP, BODIPY TMFL-14-dUTP, BODIPY TMR-14-dUTP, BODIPY TMTR-14-dUTP, RHOD AMINE GREEN™-5-dUTP, OREGON GREENR™ 488-5-dUTP, TEXAS RED™-12-dUTP, BODIPY™ 630/650-14-dUTP, BODIPY™ 650/665-14-dUTP, ALEXA FLUOR™ 488-5-dUTP, ALEXA FLUOR™ 532-5-dUTP, ALEXA FLUOR™ 568-5-dUTP, ALEXA FLUOR™ 594-5-dUTP, ALEXA FLUOR™ 546-14-dUTP, fluorescein-12-UTP, tetramethylrhodamine-6-UTP, TEXAS RED™-5-UTP, mCherry, CASCADE BLUE™-7-UTP, BODIPY™ FL-14-UTP, BODIPY TMR-14-UTP, BODIPY™ TR-14-UTP, RHOD AMINE GREEN™-5-UTP, ALEXA FLUOR™ 488-5-UTP, and ALEXA FLUOR™ 546-14-UTP (Molecular Probes, Inc. Eugene, Oreg.). Methods for custom synthesis of nucleotides having other fluorophores can include those described in Henegariu et a1. (2000) Nature Biotechnol. 18:345, incorporated herein by reference.
- In some embodiments, one or more detectable labels can be attached via post-synthetic attachment. Fluorophores available for post-synthetic attachment comprise, but are not limited to, ALEXA FLUOR™ 350, ALEXA FLUOR™ 532, ALEXA FLUOR™ 546, ALEXA FLUOR™ 568, ALEXA FLUOR™ 594, ALEXA FLUOR™ 647, BODIPY 493/503, BODIPY FL, BODIPY R6G, BODIPY 530/550, BODIPY TMR, BODIPY 558/568, BODIPY 558/568, BODIPY 564/570, BODIPY 576/589, BODIPY 581/591, BODIPY 630/650, BODIPY 650/665, Cascade Blue, Cascade Yellow, Dansyl, lissamine rhodamine B, Marina Blue,
Oregon Green 488, Oregon Green 514, Pacific Blue, rhodamine 6G, rhodamine green, rhodamine red, tetramethyl rhodamine, Texas Red (available from Molecular Probes, Inc., Eugene, Oreg.), Cy2, Cy3.5, Cy5.5, and Cy7 (Amersham Biosciences, Piscataway, N.J.). FRET tandem fluorophores may also be used, comprising, but not limited to, PerCP-Cy5.5, PE-Cy5, PE-Cy5.5, PE-Cy7, PE-Texas Red, APC-Cy7, PE-Alexa dyes (610, 647, 680), and APC-Alexa dyes. - In some cases, metallic silver or gold particles may be used to enhance signal from fluorescently labeled nucleotide and/or polynucleotide sequences (Lakowicz et a1. (2003) Bio Techniques 34:62)
- Biotin, or a derivative thereof, may also be used as a label on a nucleic acid molecule, and subsequently bound by a detectably labeled avidin/streptavidin derivative (e.g., phycoerythrin-conjugated streptavidin), or a detectably labeled anti-biotin antibody. Digoxigenin may be incorporated as a label and subsequently bound by a detectably labeled anti-digoxigenin antibody (e.g., fluoresceinated anti-digoxigenin). An aminoallyl-dUTP residue may be incorporated into a polynucleotide sequence and subsequently coupled to an N-hydroxy succinimide (NHS) derivatized fluorescent dye. In general, any member of a conjugate pair may be incorporated into a detection polynucleotide provided that a detectably labeled conjugate partner can be bound to permit detection. As used herein, the term antibody refers to an antibody molecule of any class, or any sub-fragment thereof, such as an Fab.
- Other suitable labels for use in the methods provided herein may comprise fluorescein (FAM), digoxigenin, dinitrophenol (DNP), dansyl, biotin, bromodeoxyuridine (BrdU), hexahistidine (6xHis), and phosphor-amino acids (e.g., P-tyr, P-ser, P-thr). In some embodiments the following hapten/antibody pairs are used for detection, in which each of the antibodies is derivatized with a detectable label: biotin/a-biotin, digoxigenin/a-digoxigenin, dinitrophenol (DNP)/a-DNP, 5-Carboxyfluorescein (FAM)/a-FAM.
- In some embodiments, a nucleic acid molecule (e.g., detectable probe) can be indirectly labeled, especially with a hapten that is then bound by a capture agent, e.g., as disclosed in U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,344,757, 5,702,888, 5,354,657, 5,198,537 and 4,849,336, and 5,073,562, each of which is herein incorporated by reference in its entirety. Many different hapten-capture agent pairs are available for use. Exemplary haptens comprise, but are not limited to, biotin, des-biotin and other derivatives, dinitrophenol, dansyl, fluorescein, Cy5, and digoxigenin. For biotin, a capture agent may be avidin, streptavidin, or antibodies. Antibodies may be used as capture agents for the other haptens (many dye-antibody pairs being commercially available, e.g., Molecular Probes, Eugene, Oreg.).
- In some embodiments, a detectable label is or includes a luminescent or chemiluminescent moiety. Common luminescent/chemiluminescent moieties include, but are not limited to, peroxidases such as horseradish peroxidase (HRP), soybean peroxidase (SP), alkaline phosphatase, and luciferase. These protein moieties can catalyze chemiluminescent reactions given the appropriate substrates (e.g., an oxidizing reagent plus a chemiluminescent compound. Non-limiting examples of chemiluminescent compound families include 2,3-dihydro-1,4-phthalazinedione luminol, 5-amino-6,7,8-trimethoxy- and the dimethylamino[ca]benz analog. These compounds can luminesce in the presence of alkaline hydrogen peroxide or calcium hypochlorite and base. Other examples of chemiluminescent compound families include, e.g., 2,4,5-triphenylimidazoles, para-dimethylamino and -methoxy substituents, oxalates such as oxalyl active esters, p-nitrophenyl, N-alkyl acridinum esters, luciferins, lucigenins, or acridinium esters. In some embodiments, a detectable label is or includes a metal-based or mass-based label. For example, small cluster metal ions, metals, or semiconductors may act as a mass code. In some examples, the metals can be selected from Groups 3-15 of the periodic table, e.g., Y, La, Ag, Au, Pt, Ni, Pd, Rh, Ir, Co, Cu, Bi, or a combination thereof.
- In some embodiments, the detectable label is detected in situ. The detectable label can be qualitatively detected (e.g., optically or spectrally), or it can be quantified. Qualitative detection generally includes a detection method in which the existence or presence of the detectable label is confirmed, whereas quantifiable detection generally includes a detection method having a quantifiable (e.g., numerically reportable) value such as an intensity, duration, polarization, and/or other properties. For example, detectably labeled features can include a fluorescent, a colorimetric, or a chemiluminescent label attached to a bead (see, for example, Rajeswari et al., J. Microbiol Methods 139:22-28, 2017, and Forcucci et al., J. Biomed Opt. 10:105010, 2015, the entire contents of each of which are incorporated herein by reference).
- In some aspects, the method includes detection of the probe or probe set hybridized to the target (e.g., target sequence) or any products generated therefrom or a derivative thereof. In any of the embodiments herein, the method can further comprise imaging the biological sample to detect a ligation product or a circularized probe or product thereof. In any of the embodiments herein, a sequence of the ligation product, rolling circle amplification product, or other generated product can be analyzed in situ in the biological sample. In any of the embodiments herein, the imaging can comprise detecting a signal associated with a fluorescently labeled probe that directly or indirectly binds to a rolling circle amplification product of the circularized probe. In any of the embodiments herein, the sequence of the sequence of the ligation product, rolling circle amplification product, or other generated product can be analyzed by sequential hybridization, sequencing by hybridization, sequencing by ligation, sequencing by synthesis, sequencing by binding, or a combination thereof.
- In any of the embodiments herein, a sequence associated with the target nucleic acid or the probes or probe sets described herein can comprise one or more barcode sequences or complements thereof. In any of the embodiments herein, the sequence of the rolling circle amplification product can comprise one or more barcode sequences or complements thereof. In any of the embodiments herein, a probe can comprise one or more barcode sequences or complements thereof. In any of the embodiments herein, the one or more barcode sequences can comprise a barcode sequence corresponding to the target nucleic acid. In any of the embodiments herein, the one or more barcode sequences can comprise a barcode sequence corresponding to the sequence of interest, such as variant(s) of a single nucleotide of interest.
- In any of the embodiments herein, the detecting step can comprise contacting the biological sample with one or more detectable probes that directly or indirectly hybridize to the rolling circle amplification product, and dehybridizing the one or more detectable probes from the rolling circle amplification product. In any of the embodiments herein, the contacting and dehybridizing steps can be repeated with the one or more detectable probes and/or one or more other detectable probes that directly or indirectly hybridize to the rolling circle amplification product.
- In any of the embodiments herein, the detecting step can comprise contacting the biological sample with one or more first detectable probes that directly hybridize to the plurality of probes or probe sets. In some instances, the detecting step can comprise contacting the biological sample with one or more first detectable probes that indirectly hybridize to the plurality of probes or probe sets. In any of the embodiments herein, the detecting step can comprise contacting the biological sample with one or more first detectable probes that directly or indirectly hybridize to the plurality of probes or probe sets.
- In any of the embodiments herein, the detecting step can comprise contacting the biological sample with one or more intermediate probes that directly or indirectly hybridize to the plurality of probes or probe sets, rolling circle amplification product generated using the plurality of probes or probe sets, wherein the one or more intermediate probes are detectable using one or more detectable probes. In any of the embodiments herein, the detecting step can further comprise dehybridizing the one or more intermediate probes and/or the one or more detectable probes from the rolling circle amplification product or the plurality of probes or probe sets. In any of the embodiments herein, the contacting and dehybridizing steps can be repeated with the one or more intermediate probes, the one or more detectable probes, one or more other intermediate probes, and/or one or more other detectable probes.
- In some embodiments, the detection may be spatial, e.g., in two or three dimensions. In some embodiments, the detection may be quantitative, e.g., the amount or concentration of a primary nucleic acid probe (and of a target nucleic acid) may be determined. In some embodiments, the plurality of probes or probe sets (e.g., primary probes), secondary probes, higher order probes, and/or detectable probes may comprise any of a variety of entities able to hybridize a nucleic acid, e.g., DNA, RNA, LNA, and/or PNA, etc., depending on the application.
- In some embodiments, a method disclosed herein may also comprise one or more signal amplification components. In some embodiments, the present disclosure relates to the detection of nucleic acids sequences in situ using probe hybridization and generation of amplified signals associated with the probes, wherein background signal is reduced and sensitivity is increased. In some embodiments, the RCA product generated using a method disclosed herein can be detected in with a method that comprises signal amplification. In some embodiments, signal amplification may comprise use of the plurality of probes or probe sets.
- Exemplary signal amplification methods include targeted deposition of detectable reactive molecules around the site of probe hybridization, targeted assembly of branched structures (e.g., bDNA or branched assay using locked nucleic acid (LNA)), programmed in situ growth of concatemers by enzymatic rolling circle amplification (RCA) (e.g., as described in US 2019/0055594 incorporated herein by reference), hybridization chain reaction, assembly of topologically catenated DNA structures using serial rounds of chemical ligation (clampFISH), signal amplification via hairpin-mediated concatemerization (e.g., as described in US 2020/0362398 incorporated herein by reference), e.g., primer exchange reactions such as signal amplification by exchange reaction (SABER) or SABER with DNA-Exchange (Exchange-SABER). In some embodiments, a non-enzymatic signal amplification method may be used.
- The detectable reactive molecules may comprise tyramide, such as used in tyramide signal amplification (TSA) or multiplexed catalyzed reporter deposition (CARD)-FISH. In some embodiments, the detectable reactive molecule may be releasable and/or cleavable from a detectable label such as a fluorophore. In some embodiments, a method disclosed herein comprises multiplexed analysis of a biological sample comprising consecutive cycles of probe hybridization, fluorescence imaging, and signal removal, where the signal removal comprises removing the fluorophore from a fluorophore-labeled reactive molecule (e.g., tyramide). Exemplary detectable reactive reagents and methods are described in U.S. Pat. No. 6,828,109, US 2019/0376956, US 2019/0376956, US 2022/0026433, US 2022/0128565, and US 2021/0222234, all of which are incorporated herein by reference in their entireties.
- In some embodiments, hybridization chain reaction (HCR) can be used for signal amplification. HCR is an enzyme-free nucleic acid amplification based on a triggered chain of hybridization of nucleic acid molecules starting from HCR monomers, which hybridize to one another to form a nicked nucleic acid polymer. This polymer is the product of the HCR reaction which is ultimately detected in order to indicate the presence of the target analyte. HCR is described in detail in Dirks and Pierce, 2004, PNAS, 101(43), 15275-15278 and in U.S. Pat. Nos. 7,632,641 and 7,721,721 (see also US 2006/00234261; Chemeris et a1, 2008 Doklady Biochemistry and Biophysics, 419, 53-55; Niu et a1, 2010, 46, 3089-3091; Choi et a1, 2010, Nat. Biotechnol. 28(11), 1208-1212; and Song et a1, 2012, Analyst, 137, 1396-1401). HCR monomers typically comprise a hairpin, or other metastable nucleic acid structure. In the simplest form of HCR, two different types of stable hairpin monomer, referred to here as first and second HCR monomers, undergo a chain reaction of hybridization events to form a long nicked double-stranded DNA molecule when an “initiator” nucleic acid molecule is introduced. The HCR monomers have a hairpin structure comprising a double stranded stem region, a loop region connecting the two strands of the stem region, and a single stranded region at one end of the double stranded stem region. The single stranded region which is exposed (and which is thus available for hybridization to another molecule, e.g. initiator or other HCR monomer) when the monomers are in the hairpin structure may be known as the “toehold region” (or “input domain”). The first HCR monomers each further comprise a sequence which is complementary to a sequence in the exposed toehold region of the second HCR monomers. This sequence of complementarity in the first HCR monomers may be known as the “interacting region” (or “output domain”). Similarly, the second HCR monomers each comprise an interacting region (output domain), e.g. a sequence which is complementary to the exposed toehold region (input domain) of the first HCR monomers. In the absence of the HCR initiator, these interacting regions are protected by the secondary structure (e.g. they are not exposed), and thus the hairpin monomers are stable or kinetically trapped (also referred to as “metastable”), and remain as monomers (e.g. preventing the system from rapidly equilibrating), because the first and second sets of HCR monomers cannot hybridize to each other. However, once the initiator is introduced, it is able to hybridize to the exposed toehold region of a first HCR monomer, and invade it, causing it to open up. This exposes the interacting region of the first HCR monomer (e.g. the sequence of complementarity to the toehold region of the second HCR monomers), allowing it to hybridize to and invade a second HCR monomer at the toehold region. This hybridization and invasion in turn opens up the second HCR monomer, exposing its interacting region (which is complementary to the toehold region of the first HCR monomers), and allowing it to hybridize to and invade another first HCR monomer. The reaction continues in this manner until all of the HCR monomers are exhausted (e.g. all of the HCR monomers are incorporated into a polymeric chain). Ultimately, this chain reaction leads to the formation of a nicked chain of alternating units of the first and second monomer species. The presence of the HCR initiator is thus required in order to trigger the HCR reaction by hybridization to and invasion of a first HCR monomer. The first and second HCR monomers are designed to hybridize to one another are thus may be defined as cognate to one another. They are also cognate to a given HCR initiator sequence. HCR monomers which interact with one another (hybridize) may be described as a set of HCR monomers or an HCR monomer, or hairpin, system.
- An HCR reaction could be carried out with more than two species or types of HCR monomers. For example, a system involving three HCR monomers could be used. In such a system, each first HCR monomer may comprise an interacting region which binds to the toehold region of a second HCR monomer; each second HCR may comprise an interacting region which binds to the toehold region of a third HCR monomer; and each third HCR monomer may comprise an interacting region which binds to the toehold region of a first HCR monomer. The HCR polymerization reaction would then proceed as described above, except that the resulting product would be a polymer having a repeating unit of first, second and third monomers consecutively. Corresponding systems with larger numbers of sets of HCR monomers could readily be conceived.
- In some embodiments, similar to HCR reactions that use hairpin monomers, linear oligo hybridization chain reaction (LO-HCR) can also be used for signal amplification. In some embodiments, provided herein is a method of detecting an analyte in a sample comprising: (i) performing a linear oligo hybridization chain reaction (LO-HCR), wherein an initiator is contacted with a plurality of LO-HCR monomers of at least a first and a second species to generate a polymeric LO-HCR product hybridized to a target nucleic acid molecule, wherein the first species comprises a first hybridization region complementary to the initiator and a second hybridization region complementary to the second species, wherein the first species and the second species are linear, single-stranded nucleic acid molecules; wherein the initiator is provided in one or more parts, and hybridizes directly or indirectly to or is comprised in the target nucleic acid molecule; and (ii) detecting the polymeric product, thereby detecting the analyte. In some embodiments, the first species and/or the second species may not comprise a hairpin structure. In some embodiments, the plurality of LO-HCR monomers may not comprise a metastable secondary structure. In some embodiments, the LO-HCR polymer may not comprise a branched structure. In some embodiments, performing the linear oligo hybridization chain reaction comprises contacting the target nucleic acid molecule with the initiator to provide the initiator hybridized to the target nucleic acid molecule. In any of the embodiments herein, the target nucleic acid molecule and/or the analyte can be an RCA product. Exemplary methods and compositions for LO-HCR are described in US 2021/0198723, incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.
- In some embodiments, detection of nucleic acids sequences in situ may comprise an assembly for branched signal amplification. In some embodiments, the assembly complex comprises an amplifier hybridized directly or indirectly (via one or more oligonucleotides) to a probe or probe set. In some embodiments, the assembly includes one or more amplifiers each including an amplifier repeating sequence. In some aspects, the one or more amplifiers is labeled. Described herein is a method of using the aforementioned assembly, including for example, using the assembly in multiplexed error-robust fluorescent in situ hybridization (MERFISH) applications, with branched DNA amplification for signal readout. In some embodiments, the amplifier repeating sequence is about 5-30 nucleotides, and is repeated N times in the amplifier. In some embodiments, the amplifier repeating sequence is about 20 nucleotides, and is repeated at least two times in the amplifier. In some aspects, the one or more amplifier repeating sequence is labeled. For exemplary branched signal amplification, see e.g., U.S. Pat. Pub. No. US20200399689A1 and Xia et al., Multiplexed Detection of RNA using MERFISH and branched DNA amplification. Scientific Reports (2019), each of which is fully incorporated by reference herein.
- In some embodiments, the plurality of probes or probe sets can be detected in with a method that comprises signal amplification by performing a primer exchange reaction (PER). In various embodiments, a primer with domain on its 3′ end binds to a catalytic hairpin, and is extended with a new domain by a strand displacing polymerase. For example, a primer with
domain 1 on its 3′ ends binds to a catalytic hairpin, and is extended with anew domain 1 by a strand displacing polymerase, with repeated cycles generating a concatemer of repeateddomain 1 sequences. In various embodiments, the strand displacing polymerase is Bst. In various embodiments, the catalytic hairpin includes a stopper which releases the strand displacing polymerase. In various embodiments, branch migration displaces the extended primer, which can then dissociate. In various embodiments, the primer undergoes repeated cycles to form a concatemer primer. In various embodiments, a plurality of concatemer primers is contacted with a sample comprising the plurality of probes or probe sets described herein. In various embodiments, the plurality of probes or probe sets may be contacted with a plurality of concatemer primers and a plurality of labeled probes. see e.g., U.S. Pat. Pub. No. US20190106733, which is incorporated herein by reference, for exemplary molecules and PER reaction components. - In some embodiments, the methods comprise sequencing all or a portion of the amplification product, such as one or more barcode sequences present in the amplification product, e.g., via DNA sequencing.
- In some embodiments, the analysis and/or sequence determination comprises sequencing all or a portion of the amplification product or the probe(s) and/or in situ hybridization to the amplification product or the probe(s). In some embodiments, the sequencing step involves sequencing by hybridization, sequencing by ligation, and/or fluorescent in situ sequencing, hybridization-based in situ sequencing and/or wherein the in situ hybridization comprises sequential fluorescent in situ hybridization. In some embodiments, the analysis and/or sequence determination comprises detecting a polymer generated by a hybridization chain reaction (HCR) reaction, see e.g., US 2017/0009278, which is incorporated herein by reference, for exemplary probes and HCR reaction components. In some embodiments, the detection or determination comprises hybridizing to the amplification product a detection oligonucleotide labeled with a fluorophore, an isotope, a mass tag, or a combination thereof. In some embodiments, the detection or determination comprises imaging the amplification product. In some embodiments, the target nucleic acid is an mRNA in a tissue sample, and the detection or determination is performed when the target nucleic acid and/or the amplification product is in situ in the tissue sample.
- In some aspects, the provided methods comprise imaging the amplification product (e.g., amplicon) and/or one or more portions of the plurality of probes or probe sets, for example, via binding of the detection probe and detecting the detectable label. In some embodiments, the detection probe comprises a detectable label that can be measured and quantitated. The terms “label” and “detectable label” comprise a directly or indirectly detectable moiety that is associated with (e.g., conjugated to) a molecule to be detected, e.g., a detectable probe, comprising, but not limited to, fluorophores, radioactive isotopes, fluorescers, chemiluminescers, enzymes, enzyme substrates, enzyme cofactors, enzyme inhibitors, chromophores, dyes, metal ions, metal sols, ligands (e.g., biotin or haptens) and the like.
- The term “fluorophore” comprises a substance or a portion thereof that is capable of exhibiting fluorescence in the detectable range. Particular examples of labels that may be used in accordance with the provided embodiments comprise, but are not limited to phycoerythrin, Alexa dyes, fluorescein, YPet, CyPet, Cascade blue, allophycocyanin, Cy3, Cy5, Cy7, rhodamine, dansyl, umbelliferone, Texas red, luminol, acradimum esters, biotin, green fluorescent protein (GFP), enhanced green fluorescent protein (EGFP), yellow fluorescent protein (YFP), enhanced yellow fluorescent protein (EYFP), blue fluorescent protein (BFP), red fluorescent protein (RFP), firefly luciferase, Renilla luciferase, NADPH, beta-galactosidase, horseradish peroxidase, glucose oxidase, alkaline phosphatase, chloramphenical acetyl transferase, and urease.
- Fluorescence detection in tissue samples can often be hindered by the presence of strong background fluorescence. “Autofluorescence” is the general term used to distinguish background fluorescence (that can arise from a variety of sources, including aldehyde fixation, extracellular matrix components, red blood cells, lipofuscin, and the like) from the desired immunofluorescence from the fluorescently labeled antibodies or probes. Tissue autofluorescence can lead to difficulties in distinguishing the signals due to fluorescent antibodies or probes from the general background. In some embodiments, a method disclosed herein utilizes one or more agents to reduce tissue autofluorescence, for example, Autofluorescence Eliminator (Sigma/EMD Millipore), TrueBlack Lipofuscin Autofluorescence Quencher (Biotium), MaxBlock Autofluorescence Reducing Reagent Kit (MaxVision Biosciences), and/or a very intense black dye (e.g., Sudan Black, or comparable dark chromophore).
- In some embodiments, a detectable probe containing a detectable label can be used to detect the plurality of probes or probe sets and/or amplification products (e.g., amplicon) described herein. In some embodiments, the methods involve incubating the detectable probe containing the detectable label with the sample, washing unbound detectable probe, and detecting the label, e.g., by imaging.
- In some aspects, the detecting comprises performing microscopy, scanning mass spectrometry or other imaging techniques described herein. In such aspects, the detecting comprises determining a signal, e.g., a fluorescent signal. In some aspects, the detection (comprising imaging) is carried out using any of a number of different types of microscopy, e.g., confocal microscopy, two-photon microscopy, light-field microscopy, intact tissue expansion microscopy, and/or CLARITY™-optimized light sheet microscopy (COLM).
- In some embodiments, fluorescence microscopy is used for detection and imaging of the detection probe. In some aspects, a fluorescence microscope is an optical microscope that uses fluorescence and phosphorescence instead of, or in addition to, reflection and absorption to study properties of organic or inorganic substances. In fluorescence microscopy, a sample is illuminated with light of a wavelength which excites fluorescence in the sample. The fluoresced light, which is usually at a longer wavelength than the illumination, is then imaged through a microscope objective. Two filters may be used in this technique; an illumination (or excitation) filter which ensures the illumination is near monochromatic and at the correct wavelength, and a second emission (or barrier) filter which ensures none of the excitation light source reaches the detector. Alternatively, these functions may both be accomplished by a single dichroic filter. The “fluorescence microscope” comprises any microscope that uses fluorescence to generate an image, whether it is a more simple set up like an epifluorescence microscope, or a more complicated design such as a confocal microscope, which uses optical sectioning to get better resolution of the fluorescent image.
- In some embodiments, confocal microscopy is used for detection and imaging of the detection probe. Confocal microscopy uses point illumination and a pinhole in an optically conjugate plane in front of the detector to eliminate out-of-focus signal. As only light produced by fluorescence very close to the focal plane can be detected, the image's optical resolution, particularly in the sample depth direction, is much better than that of wide-field microscopes. However, as much of the light from sample fluorescence is blocked at the pinhole, this increased resolution is at the cost of decreased signal intensity—so long exposures are often required. As only one point in the sample is illuminated at a time, 2D or 3D imaging requires scanning over a regular raster (e.g., a rectangular pattern of parallel scanning lines) in the specimen. The achievable thickness of the focal plane is defined mostly by the wavelength of the used light divided by the numerical aperture of the objective lens, but also by the optical properties of the specimen. The thin optical sectioning possible makes these types of microscopes particularly good at 3D imaging and surface profiling of samples. CLARITY™-optimized light sheet microscopy (COLM) provides an alternative microscopy for fast 3D imaging of large clarified samples. COLM interrogates large immunostained tissues, permits increased speed of acquisition and results in a higher quality of generated data.
- Other types of microscopy that can be employed comprise bright field microscopy, oblique illumination microscopy, dark field microscopy, phase contrast, differential interference contrast (DIC) microscopy, interference reflection microscopy (also known as reflected interference contrast, or RIC), single plane illumination microscopy (SPIM), super-resolution microscopy, laser microscopy, electron microscopy (EM), Transmission electron microscopy (TEM), Scanning electron microscopy (SEM), reflection electron microscopy (REM), Scanning transmission electron microscopy (STEM) and low-voltage electron microscopy (LVEM), scanning probe microscopy (SPM), atomic force microscopy (ATM), ballistic electron emission microscopy (BEEM), chemical force microscopy (CFM), conductive atomic force microscopy (C-AFM), electrochemical scanning tunneling microscope (ECS™), electrostatic force microscopy (EFM), fluidic force microscope (FluidFM), force modulation microscopy (FMM), feature-oriented scanning probe microscopy (FOSPM), kelvin probe force microscopy (KPFM), magnetic force microscopy (MFM), magnetic resonance force microscopy (MRFM), near-field scanning optical microscopy (NSOM) (or SNOM, scanning near-field optical microscopy, SNOM, Piezoresponse Force Microscopy (PFM), PS™, photon scanning tunneling microscopy (PS™), PTMS, photothermal microspectroscopy/microscopy (PTMS), SCM, scanning capacitance microscopy (SCM), SECM, scanning electrochemical microscopy (SECM), SGM, scanning gate microscopy (SGM), SHPM, scanning Hall probe microscopy (SHPM), SICM, scanning ion-conductance microscopy (SICM), SPSM spin polarized scanning tunneling microscopy (SPSM), SSRM, scanning spreading resistance microscopy (SSRM), SThM, scanning thermal microscopy (SThM), STM, scanning tunneling microscopy (STM), STP, scanning tunneling potentiometry (STP), SVM, scanning voltage microscopy (SVM), and synchrotron x-ray scanning tunneling microscopy (SXS™), and intact tissue expansion microscopy (exM).
- In some embodiments, sequencing can be performed in situ. In situ sequencing typically involves incorporation of a labeled nucleotide (e.g., fluorescently labeled mononucleotides or dinucleotides) in a sequential, template-dependent manner or hybridization of a labeled primer (e.g., a labeled random hexamer) to a nucleic acid template such that the identities (e.g., nucleotide sequence) of the incorporated nucleotides or labeled primer extension products can be determined, and consequently, the nucleotide sequence of the corresponding template nucleic acid. Aspects of in situ sequencing are described, for example, in Mitra et al., (2003) Anal. Biochem. 320, 55-65, and Lee et al., (2014) Science, 343(6177), 1360-1363. In addition, examples of methods and systems for performing in situ sequencing are described in US 2016/0024555, US 2019/0194709, and in U.S. Pat. Nos. 10,138,509, 10,494,662 and 10,179,932. Exemplary techniques for in situ sequencing comprise, but are not limited to, STARmap (described for example in Wang et al., (2018) Science, 361(6499) 5691), MERFISH (described for example in Moffitt, (2016) Methods in Enzymology, 572, 1-49), hybridization-based in situ sequencing (HybISS) (described for example in Gyllborg et al., Nucleic Acids Res (2020) 48(19):e112, and FISSEQ (described for example in US 2019/0032121). In some cases, sequencing can be performed after the analytes are released from the biological sample.
- In some embodiments, sequencing can be performed by sequencing-by-synthesis (SBS). In some embodiments, a sequencing primer is complementary to sequences at or near the one or more barcode(s). In such embodiments, sequencing-by-synthesis can comprise reverse transcription and/or amplification in order to generate a template sequence from which a primer sequence can bind. Exemplary SBS methods comprise those described for example, but not limited to, US 2007/0166705, US 2006/0188901, U.S. Pat. No. 7,057,026, US 2006/0240439, US 2006/0281109, US 2011/005986, US 2005/0100900, U.S. Pat. No. 9,217,178, US 2009/0118128, US 2012/0270305, US 2013/0260372, and US 2013/0079232.
- In some embodiments, sequence analysis of nucleic acids (e.g., nucleic acids such as RCA products comprising barcode sequences) can be performed by sequential hybridization (e.g., sequencing by hybridization and/or sequential in situ fluorescence hybridization). Sequential fluorescence hybridization can involve sequential hybridization of detection probes comprising an oligonucleotide and a detectable label. In some embodiments, a method disclosed herein comprises sequential hybridization of the detectable probes disclosed herein, including detectably labeled probes (e.g., fluorophore conjugated oligonucleotides) and/or probes that are not detectably labeled per se but are capable of binding (e.g., via nucleic acid hybridization) and being detected by detectably labeled probes. Exemplary methods comprising sequential fluorescence hybridization of detectable probes are described in US 2019/0161796, US 2020/0224244, US 2022/0010358, US 2021/0340618, and WO 2021/138676, all of which are incorporated herein by reference.
- In some embodiments, sequencing can be performed using single molecule sequencing by ligation. Such techniques utilize DNA ligase to incorporate oligonucleotides and identify the incorporation of such oligonucleotides. The oligonucleotides typically have different labels that are correlated with the identity of a particular nucleotide in a sequence to which the oligonucleotides hybridize. Aspects and features involved in sequencing by ligation are described, for example, in Shendure et a1. Science (2005), 309: 1728-1732, and in U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,599,675; 5,750,341; 6,969,488; 6,172,218; and 6,306,597.
- In some embodiments, the barcodes of the probes (e.g., plurality of probes or probe sets) or complements or products thereof are targeted by detectably labeled detection oligonucleotides, such as fluorescently labeled oligonucleotides. In some embodiments, one or more decoding schemes are used to decode the signals, such as fluorescence, for sequence determination. In any of the embodiments herein, barcodes (e.g., primary and/or secondary barcode sequences) can be analyzed (e.g., detected or sequenced) using any suitable methods or techniques, comprising those described herein, such as RNA sequential probing of targets (RNA SPOTs), sequential fluorescent in situ hybridization (seqFISH), single-molecule fluorescent in situ hybridization (smFISH), multiplexed error-robust fluorescence in situ hybridization (MERFISH), hybridization-based in situ sequencing (HybISS), in situ sequencing, targeted in situ sequencing, fluorescent in situ sequencing (FISSEQ), or spatially-resolved transcript amplicon readout mapping (STARmap). In some embodiments, the methods provided herein comprise analyzing the barcodes by sequential hybridization and detection with a plurality of labelled probes (e.g., detection oligonucleotides or detectable probes). Exemplary decoding schemes are described in Eng et al., “Transcriptome-scale Super-Resolved Imaging in Tissues by RNA SeqFISH+,” Nature 568(7751):235-239 (2019); Chen et al., Science; 348(6233):aaa6090 (2015); Gyllborg et al., Nucleic Acids Res (2020) 48(19):el 12; U.S. Pat. No. 10,457,980 B2; US 2016/0369329 A1; WO 2018/026873 A1; and US 2017/0220733 A1, all of which are incorporated by reference in their entirety. In some embodiments, these assays enable signal amplification, combinatorial decoding, and error correction schemes at the same time.
- In some embodiments, nucleic acid hybridization can be used for sequencing. These methods utilize labeled nucleic acid decoder probes that are complementary to at least a portion of a barcode sequence. Multiplex decoding can be performed with pools of many different probes with distinguishable labels. Non-limiting examples of nucleic acid hybridization sequencing are described for example in U.S. Pat. No. 8,460,865, and in Gunderson et al., Genome Research 14:870-877 (2004).
- In some embodiments, real-time monitoring of DNA polymerase activity can be used during sequencing. For example, nucleotide incorporations can be detected through fluorescence resonance energy transfer (FRET), as described for example in Levene et al., Science (2003), 299, 682-686, Lundquist et al., Opt. Lett. (2008), 33, 1026-1028, and Korlach et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA (2008), 105, 1176-1181.
- In some aspects, the analysis and/or sequence determination can be carried out at room temperature for best preservation of tissue morphology with low background noise and error reduction. In some embodiments, the analysis and/or sequence determination comprises eliminating error accumulation as sequencing proceeds.
- In some embodiments, the analysis and/or sequence determination involves washing to remove unbound polynucleotides, thereafter revealing a fluorescent product for imaging.
- In some aspects, the provided embodiments can be applied to an in situ method of analyzing target nucleic acid sequences (e.g., RNAs) and/or other targets (e.g., proteins) in intact tissues or samples in which the spatial information has been preserved. In some aspects, the embodiments can be applied in an imaging or detection method for multiplexed analysis of nucleic acids and/or other targets (e.g., proteins). In some aspects, the provided embodiments can be used to identify or detect regions and/or sequences of interest in target nucleic acids.
- In some cases, analysis is performed on one or more images captured, and may comprise processing the image(s) and/or quantifying signals observed. In some embodiments, a method disclosed herein comprises multiplexed analysis of a biological sample comprising consecutive cycles of probe hybridization, fluorescence imaging, and probe removal. In some embodiments, images of signals from different fluorescent and/or non-fluorescent channels and/or detectable probe hybridization cycles can be compared and analyzed. In some embodiments, images of signals (or absence thereof) at a particular location in a sample from different fluorescent channels and/or sequential detectable probe hybridization cycles can be aligned to analyze an analyte at the location. For instance, a particular location in a sample can be tracked and signal spots from sequential hybridization cycles can be analyzed to detect a target polynucleotide sequence (e.g., an associated barcode sequence or subsequence thereof) at the location. The analysis may comprise processing information of one or more cell types, one or more types of analytes, a number or level of analyte, and/or a number or level of cells detected in a particular region of the sample. In some embodiments, the analysis comprises detecting a sequence e.g., a barcode sequence present in an amplification product at a location in the sample. In some embodiments, the analysis includes quantification of puncta (e.g., if amplification products are detected). In some cases, the analysis includes determining whether particular cells and/or signals are present that correlate with one or more analytes from a particular panel. In some instances, the analysis includes using single cell segmentation and resolution to determine cell type frequencies in a region of interest of a sample. In some embodiments, the obtained information may be compared to a positive and negative control, to another selected region of interest, or to a threshold of a feature to determine if the region of interest exhibits a certain feature or phenotype. In some cases, the information may comprise signals from a cell, a region, and/or comprise readouts from multiple detectable labels. In some case, the analysis further includes displaying the information from the analysis or detection step. In some embodiments, software may be used to automate the processing, analysis, and/or display of data.
- A sample disclosed herein can be or derived from any biological sample. Methods, probes, and kits disclosed herein may be used for analyzing a biological sample, which may be obtained from a subject using any of a variety of techniques including, but not limited to, biopsy, surgery, and laser capture microscopy (LCM), and generally comprises cells and/or other biological material from the subject. In addition to the subjects described above, a biological sample can be obtained from a prokaryote such as a bacterium, an archaea, a virus, or a viroid. A biological sample can also be obtained from non-mammalian organisms (e.g., a plant, an insect, an arachnid, a nematode, a fungus, or an amphibian). A biological sample can also be obtained from a eukaryote, such as a tissue sample, a patient derived organoid (PDO) or patient derived xenograft (PDX). A biological sample from an organism may comprise one or more other organisms or components therefrom. For example, a mammalian tissue section may comprise a prion, a viroid, a virus, a bacterium, a fungus, or components from other organisms, in addition to mammalian cells and non-cellular tissue components. Subjects from which biological samples can be obtained can be healthy or asymptomatic individuals, individuals that have or are suspected of having a disease (e.g., a patient with a disease such as cancer) or a pre-disposition to a disease, and/or individuals in need of therapy or suspected of needing therapy.
- The biological sample can include any number of macromolecules, for example, cellular macromolecules and organelles (e.g., mitochondria and nuclei). The biological sample can be obtained as a tissue sample, such as a tissue section, biopsy, a core biopsy, needle aspirate, or fine needle aspirate. The sample can be a fluid sample, such as a blood sample, urine sample, or saliva sample. The sample can be a skin sample, a colon sample, a cheek swab, a histology sample, a histopathology sample, a plasma or serum sample, a tumor sample, living cells, cultured cells, a clinical sample such as, for example, whole blood or blood-derived products, blood cells, or cultured tissues or cells, including cell suspensions. In some embodiments, the biological sample may comprise cells which are deposited on a surface.
- Biological samples can be derived from a homogeneous culture or population of the subjects or organisms mentioned herein or alternatively from a collection of several different organisms, for example, in a community or ecosystem.
- Biological samples can include one or more diseased cells. A diseased cell can have altered metabolic properties, gene expression, protein expression, and/or morphologic features. Examples of diseases include inflammatory disorders, metabolic disorders, nervous system disorders, and cancer. Cancer cells can be derived from solid tumors, hematological malignancies, cell lines, or obtained as circulating tumor cells. Biological samples can also include fetal cells and immune cells.
- In some embodiments, the sample is a cell pellet or cell block. In some embodiments, the biological sample comprises a tissue sample. In some instances, the tissue sample is a tissue biopsy. In some instances, the biological sample is a tumor biopsy. In some instances, the biological sample is a surgical resection. In some instances, the biological sample comprises a tumor or a portion of a tumor.
- Biological samples can include analytes (e.g., protein, RNA, and/or DNA) embedded in a 3D matrix. In some embodiments, amplicons (e.g., rolling circle amplification products) derived from or associated with analytes (e.g., protein, RNA, and/or DNA) can be embedded in a 3D matrix. In some embodiments, a 3D matrix may comprise a network of natural molecules and/or synthetic molecules that are chemically and/or enzymatically linked, e.g., by crosslinking. In some embodiments, a 3D matrix may comprise a synthetic polymer. In some embodiments, a 3D matrix comprises a hydrogel.
- In some embodiments, a substrate herein can be any support that is insoluble in aqueous liquid and which allows for positioning of biological samples, analytes, features, and/or reagents on the support. In some embodiments, a biological sample can be attached to a substrate. Attachment of the biological sample can be irreversible or reversible, depending upon the nature of the sample and subsequent steps in the analytical method. In certain embodiments, the sample can be attached to the substrate reversibly by applying a suitable polymer coating to the substrate, and contacting the sample to the polymer coating. The sample can then be detached from the substrate, e.g., using an organic solvent that at least partially dissolves the polymer coating. Hydrogels are examples of polymers that are suitable for this purpose.
- In some embodiments, the substrate can be coated or functionalized with one or more substances to facilitate attachment of the sample to the substrate. Suitable substances that can be used to coat or functionalize the substrate include, but are not limited to, lectins, poly-lysine, antibodies, and polysaccharides.
- A variety of steps can be performed to prepare or process a biological sample for and/or during an assay. Except where indicated otherwise, the preparative or processing steps described below can generally be combined in any manner and in any order to appropriately prepare or process a particular sample for and/or analysis.
- A biological sample can be harvested from a subject (e.g., via surgical biopsy, whole subject sectioning) or grown in vitro on a growth substrate or culture dish as a population of cells, and prepared for analysis as a tissue slice or tissue section. Grown samples may be sufficiently thin for analysis without further processing steps. Alternatively, grown samples, and samples obtained via biopsy or sectioning, can be prepared as thin tissue sections using a mechanical cutting apparatus such as a vibrating blade microtome. As another alternative, in some embodiments, a thin tissue section can be prepared by applying a touch imprint of a biological sample to a suitable substrate material.
- The thickness of the tissue section can be a fraction of (e.g., less than 0.9, 0.8, 0.7, 0.6, 0.5, 0.4, 0.3, 0.2, or 0.1) the maximum cross-sectional dimension of a cell. However, tissue sections having a thickness that is larger than the maximum cross-section cell dimension can also be used. For example, cryostat sections can be used, which can be, e.g., 10-20 μm thick.
- More generally, the thickness of a tissue section typically depends on the method used to prepare the section and the physical characteristics of the tissue, and therefore sections having a wide variety of different thicknesses can be prepared and used. For example, the thickness of the tissue section can be at least 0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4, 0.5, 0.7, 1.0, 1.5, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 12, 13, 14, 15, 20, 30, 40, or 50 μm. Thicker sections can also be used if desired or convenient, e.g., at least 70, 80, 90, or 100 μm or more. Typically, the thickness of a tissue section is between 1-100 μm, 1-50 μm, 1-30 μm, 1-25 μm, 1-20 μm, 1-15 μm, 1-10 μm, 2-8 μm, 3-7 μm, or 4-6 μm, but as mentioned above, sections with thicknesses larger or smaller than these ranges can also be analysed.
- Multiple sections can also be obtained from a single biological sample. For example, multiple tissue sections can be obtained from a surgical biopsy sample by performing serial sectioning of the biopsy sample using a sectioning blade. Spatial information among the serial sections can be preserved in this manner, and the sections can be analysed successively to obtain three-dimensional information about the biological sample.
- In some embodiments, the biological sample (e.g., a tissue section as described above) can be prepared by deep freezing at a temperature suitable to maintain or preserve the integrity (e.g., the physical characteristics) of the tissue structure. The frozen tissue sample can be sectioned, e.g., thinly sliced, onto a substrate surface using any number of suitable methods. For example, a tissue sample can be prepared using a chilled microtome (e.g., a cryostat) set at a temperature suitable to maintain both the structural integrity of the tissue sample and the chemical properties of the nucleic acids in the sample. Such a temperature can be, e.g., less than −15° C., less than −20° C., or less than −25° C.
- (iii) Fixation and Postfixation
- In some embodiments, the biological sample can be prepared using formalin-fixation and paraffin-embedding (FFPE), which are established methods. In some embodiments, cell suspensions and other non-tissue samples can be prepared using formalin-fixation and paraffin-embedding. Following fixation of the sample and embedding in a paraffin or resin block, the sample can be sectioned as described above. Prior to analysis, the paraffin-embedding material can be removed from the tissue section (e.g., deparaffinization) by incubating the tissue section in an appropriate solvent (e.g., xylene) followed by a rinse (e.g., 99.5% ethanol for 2 minutes, 96% ethanol for 2 minutes, and 70% ethanol for 2 minutes).
- As an alternative to formalin fixation described above, a biological sample can be fixed in any of a variety of other fixatives to preserve the biological structure of the sample prior to analysis. For example, a sample can be fixed via immersion in ethanol, methanol, acetone, paraformaldehyde (PFA)-Triton, and combinations thereof.
- In some embodiments, acetone fixation is used with fresh frozen samples, which can include, but are not limited to, cortex tissue, mouse olfactory bulb, human brain tumor, human post-mortem brain, and breast cancer samples. When acetone fixation is performed, pre-permeabilization steps (described below) may not be performed. Alternatively, acetone fixation can be performed in conjunction with permeabilization steps.
- In some embodiments, the methods provided herein comprises one or more post-fixing (also referred to as postfixation) steps. In some embodiments, one or more post-fixing step is performed after contacting a sample with a polynucleotide disclosed herein, e.g., one or more probes such as a circular or circularizable probe (e.g., a padlock probe). In some embodiments, one or more post-fixing step is performed after a hybridization complex comprising a probe and a target is formed in a sample. In some embodiments, one or more post-fixing step is performed prior to a ligation reaction disclosed herein, such as the ligation to circularize a circularizable probe or probe set.
- In some embodiments, one or more post-fixing step is performed after contacting a sample with a binding or labelling agent (e.g., an antibody or antigen binding fragment thereof) for a non-nucleic acid analyte such as a protein analyte. The labelling agent can comprise a nucleic acid molecule (e.g., reporter oligonucleotide) comprising a sequence corresponding to the labelling agent and therefore corresponds to (e.g., uniquely identifies) the analyte. In some embodiments, the labelling agent can comprise a reporter oligonucleotide comprising one or more barcode sequences.
- A post-fixing step may be performed using any suitable fixation reagent disclosed herein, for example, 3% (w/v) paraformaldehyde in DEPC-PBS.
- As an alternative to paraffin embedding described above, a biological sample can be embedded in any of a variety of other embedding materials to provide structural substrate to the sample prior to sectioning and other handling steps. In some cases, the embedding material can be removed e.g., prior to analysis of tissue sections obtained from the sample. Suitable embedding materials include, but are not limited to, waxes, resins (e.g., methacrylate resins), epoxies, and agar.
- In some embodiments, the biological sample can be embedded in a matrix (e.g., a hydrogel matrix). Embedding the sample in this manner typically involves contacting the biological sample with a hydrogel such that the biological sample becomes surrounded by the hydrogel. For example, the sample can be embedded by contacting the sample with a suitable polymer material, and activating the polymer material to form a hydrogel. In some embodiments, the hydrogel is formed such that the hydrogel is internalized within the biological sample.
- In some embodiments, the biological sample is immobilized in the hydrogel via cross-linking of the polymer material that forms the hydrogel. Cross-linking can be performed chemically and/or photochemically, or alternatively by any other hydrogel-formation method.
- The composition and application of the hydrogel-matrix to a biological sample typically depends on the nature and preparation of the biological sample (e.g., sectioned, non-sectioned, type of fixation). As one example, where the biological sample is a tissue section, the hydrogel-matrix can include a monomer solution and an ammonium persulfate (APS) initiator/tetramethylethylenediamine (TEMED) accelerator solution. As another example, where the biological sample consists of cells (e.g., cultured cells or cells disassociated from a tissue sample), the cells can be incubated with the monomer solution and APS/TEMED solutions. For cells, hydrogel-matrix gels are formed in compartments, including but not limited to devices used to culture, maintain, or transport the cells. For example, hydrogel-matrices can be formed with monomer solution plus APS/TEMED added to the compartment to a depth ranging from about 0.1 m to about 2 mm.
- Additional methods and aspects of hydrogel embedding of biological samples are described for example in Chen et al., Science 347(6221):543-548, 2015, the entire contents of which are incorporated herein by reference.
- To facilitate visualization, biological samples can be stained using a wide variety of stains and staining techniques. In some embodiments, for example, a sample can be stained using any number of stains and/or immunohistochemical reagents. One or more staining steps may be performed to prepare or process a biological sample for an assay described herein or may be performed during and/or after an assay. In some embodiments, the sample can be contacted with one or more nucleic acid stains, membrane stains (e.g., cellular or nuclear membrane), cytological stains, or combinations thereof. In some examples, the stain may be specific to proteins, phospholipids, DNA (e.g., dsDNA, ssDNA), RNA, an organelle or compartment of the cell. The sample may be contacted with one or more labeled antibodies (e.g., a primary antibody specific for the analyte of interest and a labeled secondary antibody specific for the primary antibody). In some embodiments, cells in the sample can be segmented using one or more images taken of the stained sample.
- In some embodiments, the stain is performed using a lipophilic dye. In some examples, the staining is performed with a lipophilic carbocyanine or aminostyryl dye, or analogs thereof (e.g., DiI, DiO, DiR, DiD). Other cell membrane stains may include FM and RH dyes or immunohistochemical reagents specific for cell membrane proteins. In some examples, the stain may include but is not limited to, acridine orange, acid fuchsin, Bismarck brown, carmine, coomassie blue, cresyl violet, DAPI, eosin, ethidium bromide, acid fuchsine, haematoxylin, Hoechst stains, iodine, methyl green, methylene blue, neutral red, Nile blue, Nile red, osmium tetroxide, ruthenium red, propidium iodide, rhodamine (e.g., rhodamine B), or safranine, or derivatives thereof. In some embodiments, the sample may be stained with haematoxylin and eosin (H&E).
- The sample can be stained using hematoxylin and eosin (H&E) staining techniques, using Papanicolaou staining techniques, Masson's trichrome staining techniques, silver staining techniques, Sudan staining techniques, and/or using Periodic Acid Schiff (PAS) staining techniques. PAS staining is typically performed after formalin or acetone fixation. In some embodiments, the sample can be stained using Romanowsky stain, including Wright's stain, Jenner's stain, Can-Grunwald stain, Leishman stain, and Giemsa stain.
- In some embodiments, biological samples can be destained. Methods of destaining or discoloring a biological sample generally depend on the nature of the stain(s) applied to the sample. For example, in some embodiments, one or more immunofluorescent stains are applied to the sample via antibody coupling. Such stains can be removed using techniques such as cleavage of disulfide linkages via treatment with a reducing agent and detergent washing, chaotropic salt treatment, treatment with antigen retrieval solution, and treatment with an acidic glycine buffer. Methods for multiplexed staining and destaining are described, for example, in Bolognesi et al., J. Histochem. Cytochem. 2017; 65(8): 431-444, Lin et al., Nat Commun. 2015; 6:8390, Pirici et al., J. Histochem. Cytochem. 2009; 57:567-75, and Glass et al., J. Histochem. Cytochem. 2009; 57:899-905, the entire contents of each of which are incorporated herein by reference.
- In some embodiments, a biological sample embedded in a matrix (e.g., a hydrogel) can be isometrically expanded. Isometric expansion methods that can be used include hydration, a preparative step in expansion microscopy, as described in Chen et al., Science 347(6221):543-548, 2015.
- Isometric expansion can be performed by anchoring one or more components of a biological sample to a gel, followed by gel formation, proteolysis, and swelling. In some embodiments, analytes in the sample, products of the analytes, and/or probes associated with analytes in the sample can be anchored to the matrix (e.g., hydrogel). Isometric expansion of the biological sample can occur prior to immobilization of the biological sample on a substrate, or after the biological sample is immobilized to a substrate. In some embodiments, the isometrically expanded biological sample can be removed from the substrate prior to contacting the substrate with probes disclosed herein.
- In general, the steps used to perform isometric expansion of the biological sample can depend on the characteristics of the sample (e.g., thickness of tissue section, fixation, cross-linking), and/or the analyte of interest (e.g., different conditions to anchor RNA, DNA, and protein to a gel).
- In some embodiments, proteins in the biological sample are anchored to a swellable gel such as a polyelectrolyte gel. An antibody can be directed to the protein before, after, or in conjunction with being anchored to the swellable gel. DNA and/or RNA in a biological sample can also be anchored to the swellable gel via a suitable linker. Examples of such linkers include, but are not limited to, 6-((Acryloyl)amino) hexanoic acid (Acryloyl-X SE) (available from ThermoFisher, Waltham, MA), Label-IT Amine (available from MirusBio, Madison, WI) and Label X (described for example in Chen et al., Nat. Methods 13:679-684, 2016, the entire contents of which are incorporated herein by reference).
- Isometric expansion of the sample can increase the spatial resolution of the subsequent analysis of the sample. The increased resolution in spatial profiling can be determined by comparison of an isometrically expanded sample with a sample that has not been isometrically expanded.
- In some embodiments, a biological sample is isometrically expanded to a size at least 2×, 2.1×, 2.2×, 2.3×, 2.4×, 2.5×, 2.6×, 2.7×, 2.8×, 2.9×, 3×, 3.1×, 3.2×, 3.3×, 3.4×, 3.5×, 3.6×, 3.7×, 3.8×, 3.9×, 4×, 4.1×, 4.2×, 4.3×, 4.4×, 4.5×, 4.6×, 4.7×, 4.8×, or 4.9× its non-expanded size. In some embodiments, the sample is isometrically expanded to at least 2× and less than 20× of its non-expanded size.
- (vii) Crosslinking and De-Crosslinking
- In some embodiments, the biological sample is reversibly cross-linked prior to or during an in situ assay. In some aspects, the analytes, polynucleotides and/or amplification product (e.g., amplicon) of an analyte or a probe bound thereto can be anchored to a polymer matrix. For example, the polymer matrix can be a hydrogel. In some embodiments, one or more of the polynucleotide probe(s) and/or amplification product (e.g., amplicon) thereof can be modified to contain functional groups that can be used as an anchoring site to attach the polynucleotide probes and/or amplification product to a polymer matrix. In some embodiments, a modified probe comprising oligo dT may be used to bind to mRNA molecules of interest, followed by reversible crosslinking of the mRNA molecules.
- In some embodiments, the biological sample is immobilized in a hydrogel via cross-linking of the polymer material that forms the hydrogel. Cross-linking can be performed chemically and/or photochemically, or alternatively by any other hydrogel-formation method. A hydrogel may include a macromolecular polymer gel including a network. Within the network, some polymer chains can optionally be cross-linked, although cross-linking does not always occur.
- In some embodiments, a hydrogel can include hydrogel subunits, such as, but not limited to, acrylamide, bis-acrylamide, polyacrylamide and derivatives thereof, poly(ethylene glycol) and derivatives thereof (e.g. PEG-acrylate (PEG-DA), PEG-RGD), gelatin-methacryloyl (GelMA), methacrylated hyaluronic acid (MeHA), polyaliphatic polyurethanes, polyether polyurethanes, polyester polyurethanes, polyethylene copolymers, polyamides, polyvinyl alcohols, polypropylene glycol, polytetramethylene oxide, polyvinyl pyrrolidone, polyacrylamide, poly(hydroxyethyl acrylate), and poly(hydroxyethyl methacrylate), collagen, hyaluronic acid, chitosan, dextran, agarose, gelatin, alginate, protein polymers, methylcellulose, and the like, and combinations thereof.
- In some embodiments, a hydrogel comprises a hybrid material, e.g., the hydrogel material comprises elements of both synthetic and natural polymers. Examples of suitable hydrogels are described, for example, in U.S. Pat. Nos. 6,391,937, 9,512,422, and 9,889,422, and in U.S. Patent Application Publication Nos. 2017/0253918, 2018/0052081 and 2010/0055733, the entire contents of each of which are incorporated herein by reference.
- In some embodiments, the hydrogel can form the substrate. In some embodiments, the substrate comprises a hydrogel and one or more second materials. In some embodiments, the hydrogel is placed on top of one or more second materials. For example, the hydrogel can be pre-formed and then placed on top of, underneath, or in any other configuration with one or more second materials. In some embodiments, hydrogel formation occurs after contacting one or more second materials during formation of the substrate. Hydrogel formation can also occur within a structure (e.g., wells, ridges, projections, and/or markings) located on a substrate.
- In some embodiments, hydrogel formation on a substrate occurs before, contemporaneously with, or after probes are provided to the sample. For example, hydrogel formation can be performed on the substrate already containing the probes.
- In some embodiments, hydrogel formation occurs within a biological sample. In some embodiments, a biological sample (e.g., tissue section) is embedded in a hydrogel. In some embodiments, hydrogel subunits are infused into the biological sample, and polymerization of the hydrogel is initiated by an external or internal stimulus.
- In embodiments in which a hydrogel is formed within a biological sample, functionalization chemistry can be used. In some embodiments, functionalization chemistry includes hydrogel-tissue chemistry (HTC). Any hydrogel-tissue backbone (e.g., synthetic or native) suitable for HTC can be used for anchoring biological macromolecules and modulating functionalization. Non-limiting examples of methods using HTC backbone variants include CLARITY, PACT, ExM, SWITCH and ePACT. In some embodiments, hydrogel formation within a biological sample is permanent. For example, biological macromolecules can permanently adhere to the hydrogel allowing multiple rounds of interrogation. In some embodiments, hydrogel formation within a biological sample is reversible.
- In some embodiments, additional reagents are added to the hydrogel subunits before, contemporaneously with, and/or after polymerization. For example, additional reagents can include but are not limited to oligonucleotides (e.g., probes), endonucleases to fragment DNA, fragmentation buffer for DNA, DNA polymerase enzymes, dNTPs used to amplify the nucleic acid and to attach the barcode to the amplified fragments. Other enzymes can be used, including without limitation, RNA polymerase, ligase, proteinase K, and DNAse. Additional reagents can also include reverse transcriptase enzymes, including enzymes with terminal transferase activity, primers, and switch oligonucleotides. In some embodiments, optical labels are added to the hydrogel subunits before, contemporaneously with, and/or after polymerization.
- In some embodiments, HTC reagents are added to the hydrogel before, contemporaneously with, and/or after polymerization. In some embodiments, a cell labelling agent is added to the hydrogel before, contemporaneously with, and/or after polymerization. In some embodiments, a cell-penetrating agent is added to the hydrogel before, contemporaneously with, and/or after polymerization.
- Hydrogels embedded within biological samples can be cleared using any suitable method. For example, electrophoretic tissue clearing methods can be used to remove biological macromolecules from the hydrogel-embedded sample. In some embodiments, a hydrogel-embedded sample is stored before or after clearing of hydrogel, in a medium (e.g., a mounting medium, methylcellulose, or other semi-solid mediums).
- In some embodiments, a method disclosed herein comprises de-crosslinking the reversibly cross-linked biological sample. The de-crosslinking does not need to be complete. In some embodiments, only a portion of molecular crosslinks in the reversibly cross-linked biological sample are de-crosslinked.
- (viii) Tissue Permeabilization and Treatment
- In some embodiments, a biological sample can be permeabilized to facilitate transfer of species (such as probes) into the sample. If a sample is not permeabilized sufficiently, probes that enter the sample and bind to analytes therein may be too low to enable adequate analysis. Conversely, if the tissue sample is too permeable, the relative spatial relationship of the analytes within the tissue sample can be lost. Hence, a balance between permeabilizing the tissue sample enough to obtain good signal intensity while still maintaining the spatial resolution of the analyte distribution in the sample is desirable.
- In general, a biological sample can be permeabilized by exposing the sample to one or more permeabilizing agents. Suitable agents for this purpose include, but are not limited to, organic solvents (e.g., acetone, ethanol, and methanol), cross-linking agents (e.g., paraformaldehyde), detergents (e.g., saponin, Triton X-100™ or Tween-20™), and enzymes (e.g., trypsin, proteases). In some embodiments, the biological sample can be incubated with a cellular permeabilizing agent to facilitate permeabilization of the sample. Additional methods for sample permeabilization are described, for example, in Jamur et al., Method Mol. Biol. 588:63-66, 2010, the entire contents of which are incorporated herein by reference. Any suitable method for sample permeabilization can generally be used in connection with the samples described herein.
- In some embodiments, the biological sample can be permeabilized by adding one or more lysis reagents to the sample. Examples of suitable lysis agents include, but are not limited to, bioactive reagents such as lysis enzymes that are used for lysis of different cell types, e.g., gram positive or negative bacteria, plants, yeast, mammalian, such as lysozymes, achromopeptidase, lysostaphin, labiase, kitalase, lyticase, and a variety of other commercially available lysis enzymes.
- Other lysis agents can additionally or alternatively be added to the biological sample to facilitate permeabilization. For example, surfactant-based lysis solutions can be used to lyse sample cells. Lysis solutions can include ionic surfactants such as, for example, sarcosyl and sodium dodecyl sulfate (SDS). More generally, chemical lysis agents can include, without limitation, organic solvents, chelating agents, detergents, surfactants, and chaotropic agents.
- In some embodiments, the biological sample can be permeabilized by non-chemical permeabilization methods. Non-chemical permeabilization methods that can be used herein include, but are not limited to, physical lysis techniques such as electroporation, mechanical permeabilization methods (e.g., bead beating using a homogenizer and grinding balls to mechanically disrupt sample tissue structures), acoustic permeabilization (e.g., sonication), and thermal lysis techniques such as heating to induce thermal permeabilization of the sample.
- Additional reagents can be added to a biological sample to perform various functions prior to analysis of the sample. In some embodiments, DNase and RNase inactivating agents or inhibitors such as proteinase K, and/or chelating agents such as EDTA, can be added to the sample. For example, a method disclosed herein may comprise a step for increasing accessibility of a nucleic acid for binding, e.g., a denaturation step to open up DNA in a cell for hybridization by a probe. For example, proteinase K treatment may be used to free up DNA with proteins bound thereto.
- In some embodiments, where RNA is the analyte, one or more RNA analyte species of interest can be selectively enriched. For example, one or more species of RNA of interest can be selected by addition of one or more oligonucleotides to the sample. In some embodiments, the additional oligonucleotide is a sequence used for priming a reaction by an enzyme (e.g., a polymerase). For example, one or more primer sequences with sequence complementarity to one or more RNAs of interest can be used to amplify the one or more RNAs of interest, thereby selectively enriching these RNAs.
- In some aspects, when two or more analytes are analyzed, a first and second probe that is specific for (e.g., specifically hybridizes to) each RNA or cDNA analyte are used. For example, in some embodiments of the methods provided herein, templated ligation is used to detect gene expression in a biological sample. An analyte of interest (such as a protein), bound by a labelling agent or binding agent (e.g., an antibody or epitope binding fragment thereof), wherein the binding agent is conjugated or otherwise associated with a reporter oligonucleotide comprising a reporter sequence that identifies the binding agent, can be targeted for analysis. Probes may be hybridized to the reporter oligonucleotide and ligated in a templated ligation reaction to generate a product for analysis. In some embodiments, gaps between the probe oligonucleotides may first be filled prior to ligation, using, for example, Mu polymerase, DNA polymerase, RNA polymerase, reverse transcriptase, VENT polymerase, Taq polymerase, and/or any combinations, derivatives, and variants (e.g., engineered mutants) thereof. In some embodiments, the assay can further include amplification of templated ligation products (e.g., by multiplex PCR).
- Alternatively, one or more species of RNA can be down-selected (e.g., removed) using any of a variety of methods. For example, probes can be administered to a sample that selectively hybridize to ribosomal RNA (rRNA), thereby reducing the pool and concentration of rRNA in the sample. Additionally and alternatively, duplex-specific nuclease (DSN) treatment can remove rRNA (see, e.g., Archer, et a1, Selective and flexible depletion of problematic sequences from RNA-seq libraries at the cDNA stage, BMC Genomics, 15 401, (2014), the entire contents of which are incorporated herein by reference). Furthermore, hydroxyapatite chromatography can remove abundant species (e.g., rRNA) (see, e.g., Vandernoot, V.A., cDNA normalization by hydroxyapatite chromatography to enrich transcriptome diversity in RNA-seq applications, Biotechniques, 53(6) 373-80, (2012), the entire contents of which are incorporated herein by reference).
- In some embodiments, provided herein are kits, for example comprising a compound disclosed herein (e.g., in Section II-C) for catalytic de-crosslinking of a fixed biological sample. In some embodiments, the compound is provided in a composition (e.g., a composition comprising DMSO) and the kit can further comprise one or more other compositions, e.g., a buffer for the compound. In some examples, a solution or a suspension comprising the catalyst and a buffer is provided. In some instances, the buffer comprises citrate, tris(hydroxymethyl)aminomethane (Tris) phosphate-buffered saline (PBS), 2-[4-(2-hydroxyethyl)piperazin-1-yl]ethanesulfonic acid (HEPES), 2-(N-morpholino)ethanesulfonic acid (MES), or a combination thereof. In some instances, the solution or suspension comprises sodium dodecyl sulfate (SDS), urea, and/or a proteinase (e.g., proteinase K). The kits can comprise one or more reagents required for one or more steps comprising hybridization, ligation, extension, detection, and/or sample preparation as described herein. In some embodiments, the kit comprises one or more labelling agents, e.g., disclosed in Section III-B and Section III-C. In some embodiments, the kit comprises one or more oligonucleotides, e.g., nucleic acid probes disclosed in Section III-B and Section III-C, for detecting one or more nucleic acid analytes and/or one or more non-nucleic acid analytes. In some embodiments, the kit comprises one or more antibodies (e.g., for detecting protein analytes) which can be optionally labelled with a detectable label such as a fluorophore and/or a reporter oligonucleotide.
- The various components of the kit may be present in separate containers or certain compatible components may be pre-combined into a single container. In some embodiments, the kits further contain instructions for using the components of the kit to practice the provided methods.
- In some embodiments, the kits can contain reagents and/or consumables required for performing one or more steps of the provided methods. In some embodiments, the kits contain reagents for fixing (e.g., crosslinking), embedding, and/or permeabilizing the biological sample. In some embodiments, the kits contain reagents, such as enzymes and buffers. In some aspects, the kit can also comprise any of the reagents described herein, e.g., wash buffer. In some embodiments, the kits contain reagents for detection and/or sequencing, such as barcode detection probes or detectable labels. In some embodiments, the kits optionally contain other components, for example nucleic acid primers, enzymes and reagents, buffers, nucleotides, and reagents for additional assays.
- In some aspects, the provided embodiments can be applied in an in situ method of analyzing nucleic acid sequences, such as fluorescent in situ hybridization (FISH)-based methods, in situ transcriptomic analysis or in situ sequencing, for example from intact tissues or samples in which the spatial information has been preserved. In some aspects, the embodiments can be applied in an imaging or detection method for multiplexed nucleic acid analysis. In some aspects, the provided embodiments can be used to detect a signal associated with a detectable label of a nucleic acid probe that is hybridized to a target sequence of a target nucleic acid in a biological sample.
- In some embodiments, the target nucleic acid comprises a single-nucleotide polymorphism (SNP). In some embodiments, the target nucleic acid comprises is a single-nucleotide variant (SNV). In some embodiments, the target nucleic acid comprises a single-nucleotide substitution. In some embodiments, the target nucleic acid comprises a point mutation. In some embodiments, the target nucleic acid comprises a single-nucleotide insertion.
- In some aspects, the embodiments can be applied in investigative and/or diagnostic applications, for example, for characterization or assessment of particular cell or a tissue from a subject. Applications of the provided method can comprise biomedical research and clinical diagnostics. For example, in biomedical research, applications comprise, but are not limited to, spatially resolved gene expression analysis for biological investigation or drug screening. In clinical diagnostics, applications comprise, but are not limited to, detecting gene markers such as disease, immune responses, bacterial or viral DNA/RNA for patient samples.
- In some aspects, the embodiments can be applied to visualize the distribution of genetically encoded markers in whole tissue at subcellular resolution, for example, chromosomal abnormalities (inversions, duplications, translocations, etc.), loss of genetic heterozygosity, the presence of gene alleles indicative of a predisposition towards disease or good health, likelihood of responsiveness to therapy, or in personalized medicine or ancestry.
- Unless defined otherwise, all terms of art, notations and other technical and scientific terms or terminology used herein are intended to have the same meaning as is commonly understood by one of ordinary skill in the art to which the claimed subject matter pertains. In some cases, terms with commonly understood meanings are defined herein for clarity and/or for ready reference, and the inclusion of such definitions herein should not necessarily be construed to represent a substantial difference over what is generally understood in the art.
- The terms “polynucleotide,” “polynucleotide,” and “nucleic acid molecule”, used interchangeably herein, refer to polymeric forms of nucleotides of any length, either ribonucleotides or deoxyribonucleotides. Thus, this term comprises, but is not limited to, single-, double-, or multi-stranded DNA or RNA, genomic DNA, cDNA, DNA-RNA hybrids, or a polymer comprising purine and pyrimidine bases or other natural, chemically or biochemically modified, non-natural, or derivatized nucleotide bases. The backbone of the polynucleotide can comprise sugars and phosphate groups (as may typically be found in RNA or DNA), or modified or substituted sugar or phosphate groups.
- “Hybridization” as used herein may refer to the process in which two single-stranded polynucleotides bind non-covalently to form a stable double-stranded polynucleotide. In one aspect, the resulting double-stranded polynucleotide can be a “hybrid” or “duplex.” “Hybridization conditions” typically include salt concentrations of approximately less than 1 M, often less than about 500 mM and may be less than about 200 mM. A “hybridization buffer” includes a buffered salt solution such as 5% SSPE, or other such buffers known in the art. Hybridization temperatures can be as low as 5° C., but are typically greater than 22° C., and more typically greater than about 30° C., and typically in excess of 37° C. Hybridizations are often performed under stringent conditions, e.g., conditions under which a sequence will hybridize to its target sequence but will not hybridize to other, non-complementary sequences. Stringent conditions are sequence-dependent and are different in different circumstances. For example, longer fragments may require higher hybridization temperatures for specific hybridization than short fragments. As other factors may affect the stringency of hybridization, including base composition and length of the complementary strands, presence of organic solvents, and the extent of base mismatching, the combination of parameters is more important than the absolute measure of any one parameter alone. Generally stringent conditions are selected to be about 5° C. lower than the Tm for the specific sequence at a defined ionic strength and pH. The melting temperature Tm can be the temperature at which a population of double-stranded nucleic acid molecules becomes half dissociated into single strands. Several equations for calculating the Tm of nucleic acids are well known in the art. As indicated by standard references, a simple estimate of the Tm value may be calculated by the equation, Tm=81.5+0.41 (% G+C), when a nucleic acid is in aqueous solution at 1 M NaCl (see e.g., Anderson and Young, Quantitative Filter Hybridization, in Nucleic Acid Hybridization (1985)). Other references (e.g., Allawi and SantaLucia, Jr., Biochemistry, 36:10581-94 (1997)) include alternative methods of computation which take structural and environmental, as well as sequence characteristics into account for the calculation of Tm.
- In general, the stability of a hybrid is a function of the ion concentration and temperature. Typically, a hybridization reaction is performed under conditions of lower stringency, followed by washes of varying, but higher, stringency. Exemplary stringent conditions include a salt concentration of at least 0.01 M to no more than 1 M sodium ion concentration (or other salt) at a pH of about 7.0 to about 8.3 and a temperature of at least 25° C. For example, conditions of 5×SSPE (750 mM NaCl, 50 mM sodium phosphate, 5 mM EDTA at pH 7.4) and a temperature of approximately 30° C. are suitable for allele-specific hybridizations, though a suitable temperature depends on the length and/or GC content of the region hybridized. In one aspect, “stringency of hybridization” in determining percentage mismatch can be as follows: 1) high stringency: 0.1×SSPE, 0.1% SDS, 65° C.; 2) medium stringency: 0.2×SSPE, 0.1% SDS, 50° C. (also referred to as moderate stringency); and 3) low stringency: 1.0×SSPE, 0.1% SDS, 50° C. It is understood that equivalent stringencies may be achieved using alternative buffers, salts and temperatures. For example, moderately stringent hybridization can refer to conditions that permit a nucleic acid molecule such as a probe to bind a complementary nucleic acid molecule. The hybridized nucleic acid molecules generally have at least 60% identity, including for example at least any of 70%, 75%, 80%, 85%, 90%, or 95% identity. Moderately stringent conditions can be conditions equivalent to hybridization in 50% formamide, 5×Denhardt's solution, 5×SSPE, 0.2% SDS at 42° C., followed by washing in 0.2×SSPE, 0.2% SDS, at 42° C. High stringency conditions can be provided, for example, by hybridization in 50% formamide, 5×Denhardt's solution, 5×SSPE, 0.2% SDS at 42° C., followed by washing in 0.1×SSPE, and 0.1% SDS at 65° C. Low stringency hybridization can refer to conditions equivalent to hybridization in 10% formamide, 5×Denhardt's solution, 6×SSPE, 0.2% SDS at 22° C., followed by washing in 1×SSPE, 0.2% SDS, at 37° C. Denhardt's solution contains 1% Ficoll, 1% polyvinylpyrolidone, and 1% bovine serum albumin (BSA). 20×SSPE (sodium chloride, sodium phosphate, ethylene diamide tetraacetic acid (EDTA)) contains 3M sodium chloride, 0.2M sodium phosphate, and 0.025 M EDTA. Other suitable moderate stringency and high stringency hybridization buffers and conditions are well known to those of skill in the art and are described, for example, in Sambrook et al., Molecular Cloning: A Laboratory Manual, 2nd ed., Cold Spring Harbor Press, Plainview, N.Y. (1989); and Ausubel et al., Short Protocols in Molecular Biology, 4th ed., John Wiley & Sons (1999).
- Alternatively, substantial complementarity exists when an RNA or DNA strand will hybridize under selective hybridization conditions to its complement. Typically, selective hybridization will occur when there is at least about 65% complementary over a stretch of at least 14 to 25 nucleotides, preferably at least about 75%, more preferably at least about 90% complementary. See M. Kanehisa, Nucleic Acids Res. 12:203 (1984).
- A “primer” used herein can be an oligonucleotide, either natural or synthetic, that is capable, upon forming a duplex with a polynucleotide template, of acting as a point of initiation of nucleic acid synthesis and being extended from its 3′ end along the template so that an extended duplex is formed. The sequence of nucleotides added during the extension process is determined by the sequence of the template polynucleotide. Primers usually are extended by a DNA polymerase.
- “Ligation” may refer to the formation of a covalent bond or linkage between the termini of two or more nucleic acids, e.g., oligonucleotides and/or polynucleotides, in a template-driven reaction. The nature of the bond or linkage may vary widely and the ligation may be carried out enzymatically or chemically. As used herein, ligations are usually carried out enzymatically to form a phosphodiester linkage between a 5′ carbon terminal nucleotide of one oligonucleotide with a 3′ carbon of another nucleotide.
- “Sequencing,” “sequence determination” and the like means determination of information relating to the nucleotide base sequence of a nucleic acid. Such information may include the identification or determination of partial as well as full sequence information of the nucleic acid. Sequence information may be determined with varying degrees of statistical reliability or confidence. In one aspect, the term includes the determination of the identity and ordering of a plurality of contiguous nucleotides in a nucleic acid. “High throughput digital sequencing” or “next generation sequencing” means sequence determination using methods that determine many (typically thousands to billions) of nucleic acid sequences in an intrinsically parallel manner, e.g. where DNA templates are prepared for sequencing not one at a time, but in a bulk process, and where many sequences are read out preferably in parallel, or alternatively using an ultra-high throughput serial process that itself may be parallelized. Such methods include but are not limited to pyrosequencing (for example, as commercialized by 454 Life Sciences, Inc., Branford, Conn.); sequencing by ligation (for example, as commercialized in the SOLiD™ technology, Life Technologies, Inc., Carlsbad, Calif.); sequencing by synthesis using modified nucleotides (such as commercialized in TruSeq™ and HiSeq™ technology by Illumina, Inc., San Diego, Calif; HeliScope™ by Helicos Biosciences Corporation, Cambridge, Ma.; and PacBio RS by Pacific Biosciences of California, Inc., Menlo Park, Calif), sequencing by ion detection technologies (such as Ion Torrent™ technology, Life Technologies, Carlsbad, Calif); sequencing of DNA nanoballs (Complete Genomics, Inc., Mountain View, Calif.); nanopore-based sequencing technologies (for example, as developed by Oxford Nanopore Technologies, LTD, Oxford, UK), and like highly parallelized sequencing methods.
- “Multiplexing” or “multiplex assay” herein may refer to an assay or other analytical method in which the presence and/or amount of multiple targets, e.g., multiple nucleic acid target sequences, can be assayed simultaneously by using more than one probe, each of which has at least one different detection characteristic, e.g., fluorescence characteristic (for example excitation wavelength, emission wavelength, emission intensity, FWHM (full width at half maximum peak height), or fluorescence lifetime) or a unique nucleic acid or protein sequence characteristic.
- The term “about” as used herein refers to the usual error range for the respective value readily known to the skilled person in this technical field. Reference to “about” a value or parameter herein comprises (and describes) embodiments that are directed to that value or parameter per se.
- As used herein, the singular forms “a,” “an,” and “the” comprise plural referents unless the context clearly dictates otherwise. For example, “a” or “an” means “at least one” or “one or more.”
- Throughout this disclosure, various aspects of the claimed subject matter are presented in a range format. It should be understood that the description in range format is merely for convenience and brevity and should not be construed as an inflexible limitation on the scope of the claimed subject matter. Accordingly, the description of a range should be considered to have specifically disclosed all the possible sub-ranges as well as individual numerical values within that range. For example, where a range of values is provided, it is understood that each intervening value, between the upper and lower limit of that range and any other stated or intervening value in that stated range is encompassed within the claimed subject matter. The upper and lower limits of these smaller ranges may independently be comprised in the smaller ranges, and are also encompassed within the claimed subject matter, subject to any specifically excluded limit in the stated range. Where the stated range comprises one or both of the limits, ranges excluding either or both of those comprised limits are also comprised in the claimed subject matter. This applies regardless of the breadth of the range.
- Use of ordinal terms such as “first”, “second”, “third”, etc., in the claims to modify a claim element does not by itself connote any priority, precedence, or order of one claim element over another or the temporal order in which acts of a method are performed, but are used merely as labels to distinguish one claim element having a certain name from another element having a same name (but for use of the ordinal term) to distinguish the claim elements. Similarly, use of a), b), etc., or i), ii), etc. does not by itself connote any priority, precedence, or order of steps in the claims. Similarly, the use of these terms in the specification does not by itself connote any required priority, precedence, or order.
- The following examples are included for illustrative purposes only and are not intended to limit the scope of the present disclosure.
- A formalin-fixed, paraffin-embedded (FFPE) tissue sample was cut into thin tissue sections using a pre-warmed microtome. The sections were placed on slides and dried at a temperature higher than room temperature, followed by overnight drying at room temperature in a desiccator. Images of the sections were taken for record, e.g., in order to monitor tissue morphology and/or detachment during sample processing. In some instances, images of the sections taken after de-crosslinking were compared to those before de-crosslinking.
- The slides were baked uncovered in an oven, and then calibrated to room temperature. The sections were de-paraffinized and dehydrated using xylene and absolute ethanol. The sections were then re-hydrated using an ethanol series (e.g., 96% ethanol followed by 70% ethanol), and then re-hydrated in nuclease free water (e.g., DEPC water). The slides were gently dried to allow application of a cassette to seal around the tissue sections, without letting the tissue section to dry completely.
- The sections were then de-crosslinked using a catalyst disclosed herein in a buffer solution. In some instances, the a de-crosslinking buffer can function as an antigen retriever buffer. Then the sections were washed three times with RNase-free phosphate-buffered saline (PBS) or PBST (phosphate-buffered saline solution with a low-concentration detergent solution, e.g., 0.05% to 0.1% Tween™ 20) prior to application of labelling agents (e.g., detectable nucleic acid probes for nucleic acids and/or labelled antibodies for proteins) to the tissue samples.
- FFPE human breast cancer tissues were sectioned to 5 m thickness, transferred to Superfrost© Plus slides, and processed essentially as described in Example 1. Specifically, 2-amino-5-methylbenzoic acid (Compound 1) was used as the de-crosslinking agent and applied to de-paraffinized and re-hydrated samples in a buffer solution, such as a solution of citrate buffer at
pH 6 or a solution of Tris-EDTA (TE) buffer atpH 9. The samples were incubated under various de-crosslinking temperatures (e.g., 80° C. or 95° C.) for various time periods (e.g., 15 minutes or 30 minutes). Different concentrations of the de-crosslinking agent in the buffer solutions were tested, including 0 mM, 50 mM, 100 mM, 200 mM, and 400 mM ofCompound 1. - The de-crosslinked and washed tissue samples can be immediately used for analyte detection. In some instances, circularizable probes (e.g., padlock probes) targeting MALAT-1/ACTB (nuclear/cytoplasmic) or GAPDH/RPLPO (cytoplasmic) RNA transcripts were added in hybridization buffers (e.g., including SSC and formamide) and incubated with the samples to allow hybridization of the circularizable probes to their target nucleic acids. In addition to a target hybridization region, each circularizable probe also contained a common anchor region and a barcode region. Then, the probe hybridization mixture was removed and the samples were washed. For ligation of the circularizable probes hybridized to their target nucleic acids, a ligation reaction mix (e.g., containing a SplintR® ligase buffer, RNase inhibitor and SplintR® ligase) and a rolling circle amplification (RCA) primer were added to the samples and incubated for probe circularization and RCA primer hybridization to the probes. The samples were washed and an RCA reaction mixture (containing Phi29 reaction buffer, dNTPs, Phi29 polymerase) was added and incubated for RCA of the circularized probes.
- The samples were washed (e.g., in PBST) and detectable probes in a hybridization buffer (e.g., containing SSC and formamide) were hybridized to RCA products (RCPs) in the sample. The detectable probes included probes that hybridize to sequences (e.g., barcode sequences or anchor sequences) in the RCPs and comprise overhangs for hybridization of fluorescently labelled detection oligonucleotides. The samples were imaged in fluorescent microscope with 40× objective and the signals associated with the RCPs were quantified using a software. In some instances, the samples were also stained with DAPI and/or labelled antibodies, e.g., fluorescently labelled anti-Vimentin antibody or anti-panCK antibody. In some instances, once the samples were imaged to detect signals associated with the detectable probes or labelled antibodies, the samples were stripped (e.g., using a denaturing agent) and contacted with additional detectable probes or labelled antibodies for the next imaging round.
-
FIG. 4 shows the detected object count per nucleic area (RCP count/μm2 nuclei area) in cells of the human breast cancer samples treated withCompound 1 for de-crosslinking under various combinations of the de-crosslinking temperature (80° C. or 95° C.), time (15 minutes or 30 minutes), buffer (Citrate or TE), and catalyst concentration (0 mM, 50 mM, 100 mM, 200 mM, or 400 mM). The RCPs were detected using detectable probes targeting the common anchor region in the RCPs. For instance, de-crosslinking for 30 minutes under 80° C., at 100mM Compound 1 in either the citrate buffer (pH 6) or the TE buffer (pH 9) appeared to significantly improve the detection of RCPs, as reflected by the increased detected object counts per nucleic area as compared to control (de-crosslinked in a steamer for 30 minutes using citrate buffer (pH 6)). In some instances, catalytic de-crosslinking appeared to boost sensitivity and RCP brightness using citrate buffer and between about 100 and about 200 mM ofCompound 1. RCP detection using detectable probes targeting MALAT-1/ACTB and RCP detection using detectable probes targeting GAPDH/RPLPO showed similar results (data not shown). -
FIGS. 5A-5B show representative images of anti-panCK antibody staining in a control sample (de-crosslinked in a steamer) and in samples de-crosslinked using the indicated de-crosslinking temperature, time, and catalyst concentration in either the citrate buffer (FIG. 5A ) or the TE buffer (FIG. 5B ). These results indicate that antibody staining (e.g., antibody positive signal intensity) may be improved by catalytic de-crosslinking with various concentrations ofCompound 1 in citrate or TE buffer. -
FIG. 6 shows representative DPAI images of the tissue samples de-crosslinked in a thermal cycler (using citrate buffer, pH 6) at various combinations of temperature and time, either in the absence of the catalyst (0 mM) or using 200 mM of the catalyst. These results demonstrate that at certain concentrations the de-crosslinking agent can improve tissue integrity and/or adhesion (e.g., reduce waviness and/or tissue detachment from the substrate). - Together these results demonstrate that catalytic de-crosslinking (e.g., at relatively lower temperatures such as 80° C.) can improve signal detection of nucleic acids and proteins in FFPE human breast cancer tissues in situ without compromising tissue integrity and/or adhesion.
- FFPE human breast cancer, melanoma, lymph node, lung cancer, and normal lung tissues were processed essentially as described in Example 1. Specifically, 2-amino-5-methylbenzoic acid (Compound 1) or (4-aminopyridin-3-yl)phosphonic acid (Compound 8) was used as the de-crosslinking agent and applied to de-paraffinized and re-hydrated samples in a buffer solution, such as a solution of citrate buffer at
pH 6 or a solution of TE buffer atpH 9. The samples were incubated under various de-crosslinking temperatures (e.g., 80° C. or 95° C.) for 30 minutes, using 0 mM or 200 mM ofCompound 1 orCompound 8. Analytes in the de-crosslinked tissue samples were detected essentially as described in Example 2. -
FIG. 7A shows representative images of the tissue samples analyzed using detectable probes targeting the common anchor region to detect the RCPs, demonstrating that catalytic de-crosslinking using eitherCompound 1 orCompound 8 enhanced visualization of transcripts GAPDH/RPLPO or MALAT-I/ACTB (data not shown) across the tissue types, as compared to de-crosslinking in a steamer. -
FIG. 7B shows representative images of the tissue samples stained with an anti-Vimentin antibody. Catalytic de-crosslinking using eitherCompound 1 orCompound 8 enhanced anti-Vimentin antibody staining across the tissue types, as compared to de-crosslinking in a steamer and de-crosslinking with heating at 95° C. in TE buffer. -
FIG. 7C shows overlaid images of RNA detection and protein detection, demonstrating that catalytic de-crosslinking using eitherCompound 1 orCompound 8 enhanced RNA/protein visualization across the tissue types. -
FIG. 8 shows the detected object count per nucleic area (RCP count/μm2 nuclei area) in normal lung tissue samples. The RCPs were detected using detectable probes targeting barcode sequences for MALAT-I/ACTB or GAPDH/RPLPO or targeting the common anchor region in the RCPs (representative images inFIG. 8 , left panel). Higher RCP densities (detected object count per nucleic area (RCP count/μm2 nuclei area)) were observed in samples catalytically de-crosslinked using eitherCompound 1 orCompound 8, as compared to control samples de-crosslinked in a steamer (data not shown). Catalytic de-crosslinking also improved detected objected signal intensity above local background, as measured by detected object signal intensity above local background (mean) inFIG. 8 , right panel. - Together these results demonstrate that catalytic de-crosslinking can improve signal detection (e.g., signal counts as well as signal-to-noise ratios) of nucleic acids and proteins in situ across different tissue types including FFPE human breast cancer, melanoma, lymph node, lung cancer, and normal lung tissues.
- FFPE mouse brain tissues were processed essentially as described in Example 1, and gene expression analysis for RNA transcripts and protein analysis (e.g., anti-GFAP antibody staining) in the dentate gyrus (DG) region were performed essentially as described in Examples 2 and 3. Four de-crosslinking agent and buffer combinations were tested:
Compound 1 in citrate buffer (pH 6.8),Compound 15 in citrate buffer (pH 6.8), Compound 18 (trans-4-hydroxy-L-proline) in citrate buffer (pH 6.8), andCompound 1 in PBS (pH 7.4). -
FIG. 9 shows the detected object signal intensity above local background (mean) in the mouse brain tissues, detected using detectable probes targeting the common anchor region in the RCPs. De-crosslinking withCompound 15 in citrate buffer (pH 6.8),Compound 18 in citrate buffer (pH 6.8), andCompound 1 in PBS (pH 7.4) all showed improved signal density compared to de-crosslinking withCompound 1 in citrate buffer (pH 6.8). Antibody staining was comparable among the de-crosslinking agent and buffer combinations (data not shown). - FFPE human breast cancer samples sectioned to 5 m thickness were processed essentially as described in Example 2. Specifically, 2-amino-5-methylbenzoic acid (Compound 1) was used as the de-crosslinking agent and applied to de-paraffinized and re-hydrated samples in a buffer solution with various additives, such as 0.05% SDS, 0.2% SDS, 0.5% SDS, 0.05 M urea, 0.5 M urea, 0.2 μg/ml proteinase K, 0.5 μg/ml proteinase K, 1 μg/ml proteinase K, and combinations thereof. The samples were incubated at 80° C. for 30 minutes, using 150 mM of
Compound 1. Analytes in the de-crosslinked tissue samples were detected essentially as described in Example 2 using circularizable probes (e.g., padlock probes) targeting ACTB, GAPDH, MALAT-1, RPLPO, Eef2, Ppib, POLR2A RNA transcripts. Detectable probes were hybridized to sequences (e.g., barcode sequences or anchor sequences) in the RCPs and comprised overhangs for hybridization of fluorescently labelled detection oligonucleotides. The samples were imaged in fluorescent microscope with 40× objective and the signals associated with the RCPs were quantified using a software. -
FIG. 10A-10C show the detected object count per nucleic area (RCP count/μm2 nuclei area) in cells of the human breast cancer samples treated withCompound 1 for de-crosslinking in the presence or absence of additives SDS, urea, and/or proteinase K as indicated. De-crosslinking withCompound 1 in the presence of SDS and proteinase K, orCompound 1 in the presence of urea and proteinase K appeared to improve the detection of RCPs (e.g., decreased autofluorescence, increased puncta brightness and/or increased puncta numbers), as reflected by the increased detected object counts per nucleic area as compared to control samples treated withCompound 1 with no additional additives or with single additives. In some instances,de-crosslinking using Compound 1 in the presence of both 0.5 M urea and 1 μg/ml proteinase K orCompound 1 in the presence of both 0.5 M urea with 0.5 μg/ml Proteinase K showed increases in puncta brightness and/or numbers detected. In addition, it was observed antibody staining (e.g., antibody positive signal intensity for Pan cytokeratin, Vimentin, and Ki67) was compatible with the catalytic de-crosslinking conditions withCompound 1 in the presence of urea and proteinase K. Tissue morphology was also observed to be preserved post workflow and detection as confirmed by H&E staining that was performed. - The present disclosure is not intended to be limited in scope to the particular disclosed embodiments, which are provided, for example, to illustrate various aspects of the present disclosure. Various modifications to the compositions and methods described will become apparent from the description and teachings herein. Such variations may be practiced without departing from the true scope and spirit of the disclosure and are intended to fall within the scope of the present disclosure.
Claims (27)
1. A method for sample analysis, comprising:
a) providing a biological sample immobilized on a substrate, wherein the biological sample is fixed;
b) contacting the biological sample with a catalyst that catalyzes de-crosslinking of molecular crosslinks in the biological sample, wherein the catalyst is a compound of formula(I),
or a salt zwitterion, or solvate thereof, wherein:
A is selected from the group consisting of —COOH, —P(═O)(OH)2, and S(═O)2OH;
X1, X2, X3, and X4 are each independently selected from the group consisting of: CH, CRa, and N;
each occurrence of Ra is independently selected from the group consisting of C1-6 alkyl, C1-6 haloalkyl, C1-6 alkoxy, —NO2, —NR′R″, and —C(═O)NR′R″; and
each occurrence of R′ and R″ is independently selected from the group consisting of H and C1-6 alkyl which is optionally substituted with
wherein n1 is an integer from 12 to 16;
c) contacting the biological sample with a labelling agent that directly or indirectly binds to a protein analyte at a location in the biological sample, wherein the labelling agent is conjugated to a reporter oligonucleotide comprising a reporter sequence that identifies the labelling agent; and
d) detecting an optical signal associated with the labelling agent or a product thereof, thereby detecting the protein analyte at the location in the biological sample.
2. The method of claim 1 , wherein the molecular crosslinks are products of one or more crosslinking agents.
3. The method of claim 2 , wherein the one or more crosslinking agents comprise an aldehyde, optionally wherein the crosslinking agent comprises formaldehyde.
4-11. (canceled)
17-23. (canceled)
24. The method of claim 1 , wherein the biological sample is a tissue section.
25-58. (canceled)
59. The method of claim 1 , wherein a solution or a suspension comprising the catalyst and a buffer is contacted with the biological sample and the solution or suspension comprises sodium dodecyl sulfate (SDS), urea, and/or a proteinase.
60-70. (canceled)
71. The method of claim 1 , wherein the labelling agent comprises a binding moiety, wherein the binding moiety comprises an antibody or epitope binding fragment thereof.
72. The method of claim 1 , wherein the labelling agent comprises a detectable label.
73. The method of claim 1 , wherein the reporter oligonucleotide comprises a barcode sequence.
74-87. (canceled)
88. The method of claim 4, wherein the protein analyte is an intracellular protein, a membrane-bound protein, or an extracellular protein.
89-90. (canceled)
91. The method of claim 1 , wherein the optical signal is detected in situ in the biological sample.
92. The method of claim 1 , wherein the optical signal is detected by imaging the biological sample.
93. The method of claim 92 , wherein the imaging comprises fluorescent microscopy.
94-119. (canceled)
120. The method of claim 1 , wherein the biological sample is contacted with a probe that hybridizes to the reporter oligonucleotide of the labelling agent to identify the protein analyte associated with the labelling agent.
121. The method of claim 1 , wherein the labelling agent binds indirectly to an intermediate probe comprising one or more barcode sequences.
122. The method of claim 121 , wherein the biological sample is contacted with a detectably labeled tertiary probe that hybridizes to the one or more barcode sequences of the intermediate probe.
Priority Applications (1)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
US18/336,866 US20240035071A1 (en) | 2022-06-17 | 2023-06-16 | Catalytic de-crosslinking of samples for in situ analysis |
Applications Claiming Priority (2)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
US202263353506P | 2022-06-17 | 2022-06-17 | |
US18/336,866 US20240035071A1 (en) | 2022-06-17 | 2023-06-16 | Catalytic de-crosslinking of samples for in situ analysis |
Publications (1)
Publication Number | Publication Date |
---|---|
US20240035071A1 true US20240035071A1 (en) | 2024-02-01 |
Family
ID=87378126
Family Applications (2)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US18/336,866 Pending US20240035071A1 (en) | 2022-06-17 | 2023-06-16 | Catalytic de-crosslinking of samples for in situ analysis |
US18/499,129 Pending US20240117410A1 (en) | 2022-06-17 | 2023-10-31 | Catalytic de-crosslinking of samples for in situ analysis |
Family Applications After (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US18/499,129 Pending US20240117410A1 (en) | 2022-06-17 | 2023-10-31 | Catalytic de-crosslinking of samples for in situ analysis |
Country Status (2)
Country | Link |
---|---|
US (2) | US20240035071A1 (en) |
WO (1) | WO2023245190A1 (en) |
Family Cites Families (104)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US4318846A (en) | 1979-09-07 | 1982-03-09 | Syva Company | Novel ether substituted fluorescein polyamino acid compounds as fluorescers and quenchers |
US4605735A (en) | 1983-02-14 | 1986-08-12 | Wakunaga Seiyaku Kabushiki Kaisha | Oligonucleotide derivatives |
US4757141A (en) | 1985-08-26 | 1988-07-12 | Applied Biosystems, Incorporated | Amino-derivatized phosphite and phosphate linking agents, phosphoramidite precursors, and useful conjugates thereof |
US5091519A (en) | 1986-05-01 | 1992-02-25 | Amoco Corporation | Nucleotide compositions with linking groups |
US5151507A (en) | 1986-07-02 | 1992-09-29 | E. I. Du Pont De Nemours And Company | Alkynylamino-nucleotides |
US5354657A (en) | 1988-01-12 | 1994-10-11 | Boehringer Mannheim Gmbh | Process for the highly specific detection of nucleic acids in solid |
DE3813278A1 (en) | 1988-01-12 | 1989-07-20 | Boehringer Mannheim Gmbh | METHOD FOR DETECTING NUCLEIC ACIDS |
US5066580A (en) | 1988-08-31 | 1991-11-19 | Becton Dickinson And Company | Xanthene dyes that emit to the red of fluorescein |
DE3836656A1 (en) | 1988-10-27 | 1990-05-03 | Boehringer Mannheim Gmbh | NEW DIGOXIGENINE DERIVATIVES AND THEIR USE |
US5366860A (en) | 1989-09-29 | 1994-11-22 | Applied Biosystems, Inc. | Spectrally resolvable rhodamine dyes for nucleic acid sequence determination |
US5188934A (en) | 1989-11-14 | 1993-02-23 | Applied Biosystems, Inc. | 4,7-dichlorofluorescein dyes as molecular probes |
US5073562A (en) | 1990-05-10 | 1991-12-17 | G. D. Searle & Co. | Alkoxy-substituted dihydrobenzopyran-2-carboxylic acids and derivatives thereof |
EP0711303B2 (en) | 1993-07-30 | 2009-06-10 | Affymax, Inc. | Biotinylation of proteins |
US5654419A (en) | 1994-02-01 | 1997-08-05 | The Regents Of The University Of California | Fluorescent labels and their use in separations |
US5552278A (en) | 1994-04-04 | 1996-09-03 | Spectragen, Inc. | DNA sequencing by stepwise ligation and cleavage |
US5846719A (en) | 1994-10-13 | 1998-12-08 | Lynx Therapeutics, Inc. | Oligonucleotide tags for sorting and identification |
US5750341A (en) | 1995-04-17 | 1998-05-12 | Lynx Therapeutics, Inc. | DNA sequencing by parallel oligonucleotide extensions |
US5854033A (en) | 1995-11-21 | 1998-12-29 | Yale University | Rolling circle replication reporter systems |
US5847162A (en) | 1996-06-27 | 1998-12-08 | The Perkin Elmer Corporation | 4, 7-Dichlororhodamine dyes |
US5800996A (en) | 1996-05-03 | 1998-09-01 | The Perkin Elmer Corporation | Energy transfer dyes with enchanced fluorescence |
JP2002503954A (en) | 1997-04-01 | 2002-02-05 | グラクソ、グループ、リミテッド | Nucleic acid amplification method |
US6969488B2 (en) | 1998-05-22 | 2005-11-29 | Solexa, Inc. | System and apparatus for sequential processing of analytes |
US6054274A (en) | 1997-11-12 | 2000-04-25 | Hewlett-Packard Company | Method of amplifying the signal of target nucleic acid sequence analyte |
US6322901B1 (en) | 1997-11-13 | 2001-11-27 | Massachusetts Institute Of Technology | Highly luminescent color-selective nano-crystalline materials |
US6207392B1 (en) | 1997-11-25 | 2001-03-27 | The Regents Of The University Of California | Semiconductor nanocrystal probes for biological applications and process for making and using such probes |
US5990479A (en) | 1997-11-25 | 1999-11-23 | Regents Of The University Of California | Organo Luminescent semiconductor nanocrystal probes for biological applications and process for making and using such probes |
EP2360271A1 (en) | 1998-06-24 | 2011-08-24 | Illumina, Inc. | Decoding of array sensors with microspheres |
US6251303B1 (en) | 1998-09-18 | 2001-06-26 | Massachusetts Institute Of Technology | Water-soluble fluorescent nanocrystals |
US6426513B1 (en) | 1998-09-18 | 2002-07-30 | Massachusetts Institute Of Technology | Water-soluble thiol-capped nanocrystals |
US6391937B1 (en) | 1998-11-25 | 2002-05-21 | Motorola, Inc. | Polyacrylamide hydrogels and hydrogel arrays made from polyacrylamide reactive prepolymers |
US7244559B2 (en) | 1999-09-16 | 2007-07-17 | 454 Life Sciences Corporation | Method of sequencing a nucleic acid |
US6248535B1 (en) | 1999-12-20 | 2001-06-19 | University Of Southern California | Method for isolation of RNA from formalin-fixed paraffin-embedded tissue specimens |
US6368801B1 (en) | 2000-04-12 | 2002-04-09 | Molecular Staging, Inc. | Detection and amplification of RNA using target-mediated ligation of DNA by RNA ligase |
US6291187B1 (en) | 2000-05-12 | 2001-09-18 | Molecular Staging, Inc. | Poly-primed amplification of nucleic acid sequences |
US6511809B2 (en) | 2000-06-13 | 2003-01-28 | E. I. Du Pont De Nemours And Company | Method for the detection of an analyte by means of a nucleic acid reporter |
US6323009B1 (en) | 2000-06-28 | 2001-11-27 | Molecular Staging, Inc. | Multiply-primed amplification of nucleic acid sequences |
US6649138B2 (en) | 2000-10-13 | 2003-11-18 | Quantum Dot Corporation | Surface-modified semiconductive and metallic nanoparticles having enhanced dispersibility in aqueous media |
US6576291B2 (en) | 2000-12-08 | 2003-06-10 | Massachusetts Institute Of Technology | Preparation of nanocrystallites |
US6828109B2 (en) | 2000-12-15 | 2004-12-07 | James R. Bell, Jr. | Methods for detecting an analyte of interest using catalyzed reporter deposition of tyramide |
EP2218762A3 (en) | 2001-07-20 | 2010-09-29 | Life Technologies Corporation | Luminescent nanoparticles and methods for their preparation |
US7057026B2 (en) | 2001-12-04 | 2006-06-06 | Solexa Limited | Labelled nucleotides |
ES2550513T3 (en) | 2002-08-23 | 2015-11-10 | Illumina Cambridge Limited | Modified nucleotides for polynucleotide sequencing |
EP1601450B1 (en) | 2003-03-10 | 2013-06-05 | Expression Pathology, Inc. | Liquid tissue preparation from histopatologically processed biological samples, tissues and cells |
GB0321306D0 (en) | 2003-09-11 | 2003-10-15 | Solexa Ltd | Modified polymerases for improved incorporation of nucleotide analogues |
US8029454B2 (en) | 2003-11-05 | 2011-10-04 | Baxter International Inc. | High convection home hemodialysis/hemofiltration and sorbent system |
EP2789383B1 (en) | 2004-01-07 | 2023-05-03 | Illumina Cambridge Limited | Molecular arrays |
ATE480550T1 (en) | 2004-03-25 | 2010-09-15 | California Inst Of Techn | HYBRIDIZATION CHAIN REACTION |
EP1774035A4 (en) | 2004-06-14 | 2009-02-18 | Univ Leland Stanford Junior | Methods and compositions for use in analyte detection using proximity probes |
GB0427236D0 (en) | 2004-12-13 | 2005-01-12 | Solexa Ltd | Improved method of nucleotide detection |
US20060234261A1 (en) | 2005-03-08 | 2006-10-19 | Pierce Niles A | Colorimetric readout of hybridization chain reaction |
US8623628B2 (en) | 2005-05-10 | 2014-01-07 | Illumina, Inc. | Polymerases |
DK2500439T4 (en) | 2005-06-20 | 2017-11-13 | Advanced Cell Diagnostics Inc | Kits and Products for Detecting Nucleic Acids in Individual Cells and for Identifying Rare Cells from Large Heterogeneous Cell Populations |
GB0514936D0 (en) | 2005-07-20 | 2005-08-24 | Solexa Ltd | Preparation of templates for nucleic acid sequencing |
DE102005060738A1 (en) | 2005-12-16 | 2007-06-21 | Qiagen Gmbh | Method for extraction of biomolecules from fixed tissues |
US7721721B1 (en) | 2006-09-28 | 2010-05-25 | Precision Shooting Equipment, Inc. | Reversible and adjustable module system for archery bow |
US20100055733A1 (en) | 2008-09-04 | 2010-03-04 | Lutolf Matthias P | Manufacture and uses of reactive microcontact printing of biomolecules on soft hydrogels |
US20130023433A1 (en) | 2009-09-28 | 2013-01-24 | Yuling Luo | Methods of detecting nucleic acid sequences with high specificity |
EP2630260B1 (en) | 2010-10-21 | 2015-11-18 | Advanced Cell Diagnostics, Inc. | An ultra sensitive method for in situ detection of nucleic acids |
US8951781B2 (en) | 2011-01-10 | 2015-02-10 | Illumina, Inc. | Systems, methods, and apparatuses to image a sample for biological or chemical analysis |
US8551708B2 (en) | 2011-02-15 | 2013-10-08 | Leica Biosystems Newcastle Ltd. | Methods for localized in situ detection of mRNA |
GB201108678D0 (en) | 2011-05-24 | 2011-07-06 | Olink Ab | Multiplexed proximity ligation assay |
EP3623481B1 (en) | 2011-09-23 | 2021-08-25 | Illumina, Inc. | Compositions for nucleic acid sequencing |
ES2949570T3 (en) | 2012-04-03 | 2023-09-29 | Illumina Inc | Integrated optoelectronic readout head and fluid cartridge useful for nucleic acid sequencing |
AU2013300171B2 (en) | 2012-08-09 | 2017-09-14 | The Board Of Trustees Of The Leland Stanford Junior University | Methods and compositions for preparing biological specimens for microscopic analysis |
US9512422B2 (en) | 2013-02-26 | 2016-12-06 | Illumina, Inc. | Gel patterned surfaces |
EP2971184B1 (en) | 2013-03-12 | 2019-04-17 | President and Fellows of Harvard College | Method of generating a three-dimensional nucleic acid containing matrix |
CN110669826A (en) | 2013-04-30 | 2020-01-10 | 加州理工学院 | Barcoded molecular multiplex tags by sequential hybridization |
US20160369329A1 (en) | 2013-04-30 | 2016-12-22 | California Institute Of Technology | Multiplex labeling of molecules by sequential hybridization barcoding using probes with cleavable linkers |
GB201401885D0 (en) | 2014-02-04 | 2014-03-19 | Olink Ab | Proximity assay with detection based on hybridisation chain reaction (HCR) |
WO2016007839A1 (en) | 2014-07-11 | 2016-01-14 | President And Fellows Of Harvard College | Methods for high-throughput labelling and detection of biological features in situ using microscopy |
WO2016018960A1 (en) | 2014-07-30 | 2016-02-04 | President And Fellows Of Harvard College | Systems and methods for determining nucleic acids |
WO2016044313A1 (en) | 2014-09-16 | 2016-03-24 | The Board Of Trustees Of The Leland Stanford Junior University | Methods and compositions for the removal of aldehyde adducts and crosslinks from biomolecules |
US20160108458A1 (en) | 2014-10-06 | 2016-04-21 | The Board Of Trustees Of The Leland Stanford Junior University | Multiplexed detection and quantification of nucleic acids in single-cells |
CN108474022A (en) | 2015-11-03 | 2018-08-31 | 哈佛学院董事及会员团体 | To contain the device and method of the matrix volume imaging of three-dimensional nucleic acid |
JP7085999B2 (en) | 2016-02-17 | 2022-06-17 | プレジデント アンド フェローズ オブ ハーバード カレッジ | Molecular programming tool |
US11008608B2 (en) | 2016-02-26 | 2021-05-18 | The Board Of Trustees Of The Leland Stanford Junior University | Multiplexed single molecule RNA visualization with a two-probe proximity ligation system |
US20170253918A1 (en) | 2016-03-01 | 2017-09-07 | Expansion Technologies | Combining protein barcoding with expansion microscopy for in-situ, spatially-resolved proteomics |
US10844426B2 (en) | 2016-03-17 | 2020-11-24 | President And Fellows Of Harvard College | Methods for detecting and identifying genomic nucleic acids |
WO2017184984A1 (en) | 2016-04-21 | 2017-10-26 | Cell Data Sciences, Inc. | Biomolecule processing from fixed biological samples |
US20180052081A1 (en) | 2016-05-11 | 2018-02-22 | Expansion Technologies | Combining modified antibodies with expansion microscopy for in-situ, spatially-resolved proteomics |
US11352667B2 (en) | 2016-06-21 | 2022-06-07 | 10X Genomics, Inc. | Nucleic acid sequencing |
WO2018009463A2 (en) | 2016-07-05 | 2018-01-11 | California Institute Of Technology | Fractional initiator hybridization chain reaction |
WO2018026873A1 (en) | 2016-08-01 | 2018-02-08 | California Institute Of Technology | Sequential probing of molecular targets based on pseudo-color barcodes with embedded error correction mechanism |
GB2569252A (en) | 2016-08-31 | 2019-06-12 | Harvard College | Methods of combining the detection of biomolecules into a single assay using fluorescent in situ sequencing |
US20190177800A1 (en) | 2017-12-08 | 2019-06-13 | 10X Genomics, Inc. | Methods and compositions for labeling cells |
US10550429B2 (en) | 2016-12-22 | 2020-02-04 | 10X Genomics, Inc. | Methods and systems for processing polynucleotides |
WO2018132392A2 (en) | 2017-01-10 | 2018-07-19 | President And Fellows Of Harvard College | Multiplexed signal amplification |
US20200224243A1 (en) | 2017-03-22 | 2020-07-16 | The Board Of Trustees Of The Leland Stanford Junior University | Proximity Ligation in Situ Hybridization (PLISH) |
CA3078158A1 (en) | 2017-10-06 | 2019-04-11 | Cartana Ab | Rna templated ligation |
CN112005115A (en) | 2018-02-12 | 2020-11-27 | 10X基因组学有限公司 | Methods of characterizing multiple analytes from a single cell or cell population |
US20210164039A1 (en) | 2018-04-09 | 2021-06-03 | The Board Of Trustees Of The Leland Stanford Junior University | Method of in situ gene sequencing |
JP2021525877A (en) | 2018-06-08 | 2021-09-27 | アルティヴュー, インク. | Multiplexed catalyst reporter deposition |
WO2020102094A1 (en) | 2018-11-15 | 2020-05-22 | Arizona Board Of Regents On Behalf Ofarizona State University | Cleavable fluorescent tyramide for sensitive and multiplexed analysis of biological samples |
GB201818742D0 (en) | 2018-11-16 | 2019-01-02 | Cartana Ab | Method for detection of RNA |
SG11202106263XA (en) | 2018-12-13 | 2021-07-29 | Harvard College | Amplification methods and systems for merfish and other applications |
WO2020163397A2 (en) | 2019-02-04 | 2020-08-13 | Akoya Biosciences, Inc. | Analyte detection by selective labeling of biological samples |
CN114174531A (en) * | 2019-02-28 | 2022-03-11 | 10X基因组学有限公司 | Profiling of biological analytes with spatially barcoded oligonucleotide arrays |
AU2020282024A1 (en) | 2019-05-31 | 2021-11-11 | 10X Genomics, Inc. | Method of detecting target nucleic acid molecules |
WO2021067475A1 (en) | 2019-09-30 | 2021-04-08 | Akoya Biosciences, Inc. | Multiplexed imaging with enzyme mediated amplification |
GB201919032D0 (en) | 2019-12-20 | 2020-02-05 | Cartana Ab | Method of detecting an analyte |
CA3163623A1 (en) | 2020-01-03 | 2021-07-08 | Harry LARMAN | In situ rna analysis using probe pair ligation |
WO2021142233A1 (en) * | 2020-01-10 | 2021-07-15 | 10X Genomics, Inc. | Methods for determining a location of a target nucleic acid in a biological sample |
EP4107288A4 (en) | 2020-02-18 | 2024-04-03 | Agency Science Tech & Res | Nucleic acid probes |
EP4189110A1 (en) * | 2020-07-31 | 2023-06-07 | 10X Genomics, Inc. | De-crosslinking compounds and methods of use for spatial analysis |
-
2023
- 2023-06-16 WO PCT/US2023/068627 patent/WO2023245190A1/en unknown
- 2023-06-16 US US18/336,866 patent/US20240035071A1/en active Pending
- 2023-10-31 US US18/499,129 patent/US20240117410A1/en active Pending
Also Published As
Publication number | Publication date |
---|---|
WO2023245190A1 (en) | 2023-12-21 |
US20240117410A1 (en) | 2024-04-11 |
Similar Documents
Publication | Publication Date | Title |
---|---|---|
US20220380838A1 (en) | Methods and compositions for analyte detection and probe resolution | |
US20230026886A1 (en) | Methods for preparing polymerized matrix with controllable thickness | |
US20230084407A1 (en) | Sample analysis using asymmetric circularizable probes | |
US20230031305A1 (en) | Compositions and methods for analysis using nucleic acid probes and blocking sequences | |
US20230013775A1 (en) | Methods for sample transfer for in situ analysis | |
US20220235403A1 (en) | Nucleic acid analog probes for in situ analysis | |
US20210388423A1 (en) | Nucleic acid assays using click chemistry bioconjugation | |
US20240035071A1 (en) | Catalytic de-crosslinking of samples for in situ analysis | |
US20230416821A1 (en) | Methods and compositions for probe detection and readout signal generation | |
US20230287478A1 (en) | Concatemeric detectable probes and related methods | |
US20230323437A1 (en) | Methods and compositions for stabilizing and/or compacting nucleic acid | |
US20230374573A1 (en) | Rnase h assisted in situ rolling circle amplification | |
US20230115903A1 (en) | Stabilization and/or compaction of nucleic acid molecules | |
US20230044650A1 (en) | Compositions and methods for rolling circle amplification | |
US20230061542A1 (en) | Probes comprising a split barcode region and methods of use | |
US20230057571A1 (en) | Nucleic acid concatemers and methods for stabilizing and/or compacting the same | |
US20220403458A1 (en) | Methods to generate circularizable probes in situ | |
US20220282316A1 (en) | Methods and compositions for modifying primary probes in situ | |
US20230159997A1 (en) | Circular probes and methods for sample analysis | |
US20230279475A1 (en) | Multiple readout signals for analyzing a sample | |
US20230039148A1 (en) | Stabilization and/or compaction of nucleic acid structures | |
US20230031996A1 (en) | Circularizable probes for in situ analysis | |
US20230035685A1 (en) | One step in situ rolling circle amplification assay | |
US20240060119A1 (en) | Methods and compositions for synchronizing polymerase activity in situ | |
US20230041485A1 (en) | Methods and compositions for synchronizing reactions in situ |
Legal Events
Date | Code | Title | Description |
---|---|---|---|
AS | Assignment |
Owner name: 10X GENOMICS, INC., CALIFORNIA Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNORS:DELANEY, JOSHUA;GOHIL, SHALINI;GONZALEZ MUNOZ, VERONICA EMELINA;AND OTHERS;SIGNING DATES FROM 20230629 TO 20230705;REEL/FRAME:064451/0254 |
|
STPP | Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general |
Free format text: DOCKETED NEW CASE - READY FOR EXAMINATION |